4341_Vol18_MI_Console_Functions_Aug1982 4341 Vol18 MI Console Functions Aug1982
User Manual: Pdf 4341_Vol18_MI_Console_Functions_Aug1982
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 204
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
INDIVIDUAL TABLE IF CONTENTS
'WI R[:QU( 5TF f) BY OSG/?
-
vouJ'r~E
lOGIC TYPE -0P h.G E
'~40()5
~
~
.~~
W
~.
,~...
4/+01 T
44015F
44025
'+4035
44045
44051
4405,
44011
4401c)
't4085
4'diS
44125
'+4135
44155
44165
4'+175F
4'tl~5F
4ltl87
''W' 44lfHF
441CJ5F
'.,.4215f
'""" 44? 3 5 F
44~451=
44255
""'i2!!!!" 4 't 2 (-; '5
44215f
44285
~ 44295F
44305F
~
44315f
4'.325
~
443?9F
4 /t335
44345
W
44355
44365
4tt375
44395F
44397F
44'.01
44405
4't401
__ 4440Q
44413
.~
~
4 /t415
44417
44419
,."" 444?.7
44429
44435
.'W' It4'+43
44445
4441t<}F
.~
44453F
44457F
44463F
,~ 44495
't450 1 r
44515F
. , 44517
44519
44')21F
'W' 44525F
4 /t535
44545f
' '<1fII!I1 44555F
445611F
44575f
"-' 4'.. 5 $3 5
44595
4460">
..., 44607F
44635F
4465,F
,.., 44675F
4't691 F
44691)1=
. . , 'd,OOT
46005
4BOOT
W
018
4R005
48015
49(21)0
.., 't3035D
NtJ~
SH
~ACHINE
4341- -0015871
sysrE~S
DiAGRA~S
TITLE
GENERAL INFORMATION
TAR
CDNSOt fUtT
INTRODUCTION
OilER CONT PANEL
flISP CONSOLE
3279 C8LOR CONSOLE
~ISPLAY KEYBOARD
FEATURES
PRINTER
~nDES OF nPER
ERROR COND
\ODITIONAL FEAT
DISPLAY MESSAGES
ERROR MESSAGES
M~NUAL FUNCTIONS
So STORAGE QX
5Yc:;TEM (ONF IG
CON SOL COL CONVERG
\WD TRANSFER
PRO';RAM LOA.D
COMPARE TRACE QA
CHECK CONTROL
OPER RATE CONTROL
DISPLAY/ALTER SCRN
DISPLAY/ALTER GEN RG
~ISP/ ALTER CUR PSW
DISPLAY/ALTER VIR ST
nISPI ALTER fR AREA
DISP/ ALTER BL SAVE
DISP/ ALTER uew DEV
fHSDLAY/ALT LOC STCR
D1SP/ ALTER EX REG
DISPLAY/ALT SP STR
INSERT/EXTRACT SeR
INSERT/EXT LOC STOR
INSERT/EXT CH 0 RUFF
INSERT/EXT SWAP BUfF
INS EX TRAP RAL Sf
INS EX CSAR BKUP
EXTRACT PU (')LAT
INSERT/EXT IPU OLAf
CHANNEL DLAT GRP 2
INSERT/EXTRACT DLAT
EXTRACT KEY GRP 2
PJSfRT /EXT KEY
I I DIRECTORY
INSERT/EXT DIRECTORY
f ~~<; EX L I CACHE
CACHE RETRY OATA
l"ISERT /EXT CACHE
IN~ERT/EXT STA SC RG
INSERT CHECKS SYSTEM
INSERT/EXT CK SYS
I\J5 EX PU HDWRf
I~S EX CON STG HOW
l~S EX MAIN STG HOW
INS EX CHAN HDWKE
INSERT/EXT CH INTRFC
INS EX EXT REG
INS EX SCAN RINGS
CLOCK SCAN RINGS
C L nc K SC A N RING S
INS EX W Co~ GRP 2
I NS EX TRANS ADD
JNSERT/~xr SET CSAR
ERROR LOGOUT SCREENS
SP LOGOUTS
TE"'P LOGOUTS
S'\ PIN I H ATOR
PWR/TEM(M-SCREEN)
~NALOG SENSE DISPLAY
p
WR 0 t AG
f)
I SKf: TTE
I Pl
BLOCK FAC
PATCH FAC
f~ f:'10TE SUP FAC
REMOTE OP CONS FAC
O}SKETTE RLD
TAB
I ~JOEX
T'\f:3
~AINT
~AINT
INFO MANUAL
INFO MANUAL
P ?J)CE S SOR .
Cf)\J"lECTORS
MODEL r-102
82/08/20
SYSTEM 0018167
SCHEO SHIP 82/09/11
MODE
DDC COUNT £1. 04
PART NUM
Fe NUM
FEATURE B/M OR SIMS
000566645]
0005666268
0002676421
0005666351
0005666352
0005666353
0002676422
000 566635"t
000267642.3
0005666Vj5
000566635&
0005666358
0005066359
0005666360
0005666361
0005666.362
0002676049
0002676455
0002676425
0002676456
0002676451
0002676356
0002676459
0002676358
0005666369
0005666370
0002676357
0005666372
0002676409
0002616355
0002676430
0005666376
0002676431
0005666317
0005666378
0005666379
0005666380
0005666381
0002676433
0002616354
0002676434
0005666383
0002676435
00026764·36
0002676437
0005666384
0002676438
0002676439
0002676410
00026164'+0
00026764 1tl
0005666386
000267/)442
0005666387
0002676443
0005666205
0007.676446
0005666206
0005666388
000267644Q
0002676427
0002676451
0002676452
0002676453
0002676412
0005666391
0002616413
0002616414
0002676415
0002616458
0005666396
0005666397
0005666398
0002676428
0002616424
00a2676426
0002676"t29
0002676463
000?616416
0005666269
0005666420
0005666270
316695
865416
'379821
'379824
379824
319824
379824
37960'7
379824
379824
319814
379824
319586
319601
379815
319801
379827
.. W.
000566,~435
0005666436
0002676496
0002676497
31(H~27
319814
379808
3791325
319825
3"9821
37'1825
319598
379598
379821
379598
319825
319825
379821
379807
379825
379598
319607
379807
'3 ·19807
379807
379825
319825
319822
379807
319822
37Qa07
379822
3 '79807
379822
379807
379808
'37Q822
379807
379801
379822
379807
319825
379825
379825
379825
379801
379825
:H9825
319822
379807
379808
379808
379801
379ir08
379808
319008
379808
379598
319604
319598
379825
319808
379908
37982'5
379327
379821
323985
379815
365416
31'9607
179914
379814
379606
0004432864
00026760a2
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004432864
.. w. 0004432864
.. W.
000'.432864
.w. 0004432864
.W. 0004432864
.. W. 0004432864
.W. 0004432864
.W.
0004432864
.• \of.
0004432864
.. w. 0004432864
.. W.
0004432864
.W. 0004432864
• \of.
000't''t32864
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004230664
.. }1.
0004432864
.. W.
0004230664
.. w. 0004230664
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004432864
lOW. 0004432864
.w. 0004230664
.w. 0004432864
.w. 0004230664
.. H. 0004230664
.. W.. 0004230664
.w. 0004432864
.w. 0004230664
.. W,.
0004432864
.101.
00044.32864
.. Ill.
0004432864
.w.. 0004432864
.w. 0004432864
.. W. 0004230664
.w. 0004230664
• W.
0004230664
.W. 0004432864
.W..0004230664
.w. 0004432864
.w. 0004230664
.. W..
0004432864
.w.. 0004230664
.W. 0004432864
lOW.
.. \01,..
0004230664
• W"
• W.
0004230664
0004432864
0004432864
0004230664
0004432864
000423Q664
00042.3 0664
0004230664
0004230664
000'+432864
0004230664
0004230664
00042.3 0664
0004432864
0004230664
0004230664
0004432864
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
00044.32864
0004432864
00044.32864
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
0004230664
0002676002
0004432B64
0002676002
0004432864
000'+432864
• \1.
0004154512
.w.
.• w.
• \oj.
.w..
• ~.j.
.. w.
.w.
.Wi.
.w.
lOW.
.w.
'" W•
'Ow.
'Ow.
. . w.
.w.
.w..
.w..
'Ow.
'Ow.
.. W.
.W.
.W.
.W;e
.W.
.. W.
.W".
.w.
.W.
.W.
'OW.
'Ow.
.w.
'Ow,.
000411)4512
PAGE
.W4
0004432864
.W.
0004432864
.W.
0004432864
1
.., f1.f,)UFSTEf) BY OSGl?
VI)LU"~F
0 1g
INDIVIDUAL TASLE OF CONTENTS
MODEL ''402
MACHINE 4341- -0015871
L1SJC TYPE -0- SYSTEMS DIAGRAMS
PAGE NlP4
4f1()47D
SH
TITLE
PART NUM
EC NUM
FEATURE BIM OR 8/MS
SABLES
379606
379814
319814
.w.
000't154512
0004432864
W.
0004432864
000't /.. 32864
0004432864
4g061
INSTALL MANUAL
IN<;TAll MANUAL
..., 48065
4900')
I \JST ALL MANUAL
Fe DOC RDR COM
0005666425
ASSEM13l£: FRAMES
4'H155
TorAl
..
~
PA~T
MODE
DOC COU"4TER 04
0002676498
0002676490
0005666440
0002676046
0005666441
W 48051
SYSTEM ()018161
NUMBERS THiS VOLUME
92
31<)814
319836
:17<}600
.w...
.w..
AI
.w.
.w.
0004432864
seMED SHIP 82/09/11
,f.
---" ::--==.---- -- -- -==
=--==
--_.
--::===-----
Maintenance Information
VOLUME 18
GENERAL
INFORMATION
CONSOLE
FUNCTIONS
INDEX
INSTALLATION
.<' . :
--==
=
=- .==---
=-.=:..=..==
== - =
==
§
General Information
EC 376695 16Aug79
@ IBM Corp. 1979
PN 5666453
1 of 1
44005
;c
~/
'\
",-j
"-
",-j
)
"
,
"
'\
/'"
\
\
"
/
"-
/
;c
',,-
",
/
r,,\
,,-)I
/-'
\,
'"
/
/"'\
'~
,r"~~\
,,-y
Q 0 0 0
;"-
"'\
~y
/". '\
\
/
'c
"
"'-/
. '>"
U
-
. :~
~j
/
"-
I
jI
/
',,/
"--~
"'-
",I
'",/
"-
/
,
~
\
,f
;I
..
r··~.,
c
(
c c (
(~
CONSOLE FUNCTIONS
I Q GENERAL SELECTION 44
Y TIME OF DAY-E NABLE
44 165
----INTERVAL TIME R-SWITCH 44 165
----J
----- PROGR SYSTEM RESET- PROGRAM 44 170
SCREEN ABBREVIATED CONTENTS
---------
-------------
QF CONFl.GURATION 44 180
S SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE
P CONSOLE TEST PATTERN
U MODULE TRANSFER
D DATA BANK INITIALIZATION
B REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY
T TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD
QL PROGRAM LOAD 44 195
I
LI MODE ASSIST 44 195
QD DISPLAY/ALTER 44 255
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
185
187
188
191
680
691
695
1651
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
- S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
---- = HEX CALCULATOR
CLEAR SYSTEM RESET- CLEAR
CM MACHINE RESET
RES RESTART
SAVE MACHINE SAVE
Z RETURN TO PRO G SYS
X SP STORAGE DI SPLAY
F CONFIGURATION
L PROGRAM LOAD
B BLOCK/PATCH
A COMPARE/TRACE
K CHECK CONTROL
0 OPERAT ION RAT E
D DISPLAY/ALTER
V INSERT /EXTRACT
E ERROR LOGOUTS
M POWER/TEMPER ATURE
I DISKETTE IPL
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
QV INSERT/EXTRACT 44 345
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
265
265
270
275
280
285
290
295
305
310
315
325
329
335
340
260
*
----------
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM GRP 2
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM GRP 1
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTERFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING GRP 2
Y CLOCK SCAN RING GRP 1
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
170
170
170
170
170
175
180
195
635
215
235
245
255
345
545
585
607
QM POWER/TEMPERATURE 44 545
QE ERROR LOGOUTS 44 545
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
350
435
443
445
449
453
457
463
495
501
515
517
519
521
525
535
L PU LS
44
P PU RETRY LS
44
D CHNL DATA BUFFER
44
N CHNL CONTROL
44
S SWAP BUFFER
44
C CONTROL STORAGE
44
T TRAP/SAL STACK
44
B CSAR BACKUP
44
U PU DLAT GRP 2
44
U PU DLAT GRP 1
44
H CHNL DLAT GRP 2
44
H.CHNL OLAT GRP 1
44
Y KEY GRP 2
44
Y KEY GRP 1
44
F L1 DI R GRP 2
44
F L1 DIR GRr 1
44
G Ll CACHE DATA
44
R CACHE RETRY DATA GRP 2 44
R CACHE RETRY DATA GRP 1 44
355
360
365
370
375
380
395
397
403
405
407
409
413
415
417
419
425
427
429
C PU LOGOUTS
S SP LOGOUTS
L POWER LOGOUTS
B TEMPERATURE LOGOUTS
T RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS
R REFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS
I CAP INIT IATOR
W SAVED SCREENS
D DISKETTE READABILITY
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
545
555
560
565
566
570
575
576
580
W PARTIAL POWER UP/DOWN
U FULL POWER UP
A ANALOG SENSOR DISPLAY
D DIGITAL SENSOR DISPLAY
T TEMPERATURE SENSOR DISPLAY
V VOLTAGE TRACKING
---- P POWER DIAGNOSTICS
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
QDU UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY 44 315
E=
§
u DEVICE DIRECTORY
44 315
C COMPRESSED DIRECTORY 44 320
E EXPANDED DIRECTORY
44 320
QVA ARRAYS 44 350
QDT TRACE AREA 44 295
I I COUNTER
44 295
C PSW AND I/O TRACE CONTROLS 44 296
P PSW AND I/O TRACE
44 296
F SAVED I FCC
44 297
M I/O DEVICE STATUS
44 297
*
*
Notes:
• Selections with broken lines indicate
a non-displayable function.
• Selections with asterisks (*) not available
at all microcode levels.
© IBM Corp. 1981
*
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676421
1 of 5
44015f
585
585
595
595
600
600
605
CONTENTS
Introduction . ................................. 44 025
Operator Control Panel (OCP) .................. 44035
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Definitions (Display Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions and Deviations (Display Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console and Printer Sensing Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
OCP Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
System Status. . . . . . . . . . . ..................... 44 135
Operator Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Control Panel (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Console/Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3287 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
025
025
025
025
025
025
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
3278 Model 2A Display Console ................ 44 045
Console Characteristics .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3278 Model 2A Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3278 Model 2A Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
095
095
095
095
095
096
096
096
115
135
140
140
140
145
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare/Trace (OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Action Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AD DR Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OP Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V / R Field (370 Mode only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Control (QK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Control - Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Rate Control (QO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Rate - Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Rate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
210
210
205
205
215
215
225
230
230
230
230
235
235
240
240
245
245
245
44' 045
44 045
44 050
44 050
44 050
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 44 155
3279 Model 2C Display Console . ............... 44 051
Manual Functions . ............................ 44 165
Display / Alter Screens ......................... 44 255
Console Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 Model 2C Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 Model 2C Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Selection (Q-Screen)
.................
Selecting the General Selection Screen (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Manual Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time-of-Day Enable(Y). . . . . . . . .
. .............
Interval Timer Switch (J) . . .
. .................
System Resets . ..
. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Reset (Re-I M L). . . . . . . . .
..............
Machine Reset (CM) (Normal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Reset (CMrr) (One Ring) . . .
. ..........
Machine Reset (CMLxxxx) (With Log)
...........
Restart (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store Status (SAVE) (370 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Save (SAVE) (VSE Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Storage (OX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration (QF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration (QFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Record Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Color Convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convergence Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Test Pattern (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Transfer (QFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Area Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Load (QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode/ Assist (QU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Assists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform 1M L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Load-Parameter Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patches at IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter (D-Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter D-Screen (QD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter Hex Calculator (QD=) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Hex Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Selection Hexadecimal Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter General Registers (QDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save General Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' .......
Display / Alter Control Register (QDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Control Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
Save Control Registers.. ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display/Alter Floating-Point Registers (QDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Floating-Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Floating- Point Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter Current PSW (QDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSW Screen Label (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSW Screen Label (BC) ... '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display / Alter Storage Key (QDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....
Alter Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Storage Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Storage Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 265
44270
44 270
44 270
44 270
44 270
44 275
44 275
44 275
44 275
44 275
44 275
44 275
44 280
44 280
44 280
44 280
44 280
44
44
44
44
44
051
051
052
052
052
Display /Keyboard . ............................ 44 055
Keyboard Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typematic Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphameric and Special Character Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Symbqls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols and Punctuation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Cursor to Beginning of Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving Cursor One Character Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Facility Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
055
055
055
055
055
060
060
060
065
065
070
070
070
Features . .................................... 44 071
Security Keylock (Optional Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071
Audible Alarm Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071
3287 Printer . ................................. 44 075
Printer Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
Audible Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
Modes of Operation . .......................... 44 085
Printer/Keyboard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' .....
Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer/Keyboard Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Definitions (Printer/Keyboard
Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrictions and Deviations (Ptr/Kbd Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . .
/
'"
"
"\
/
"
'-..j
./~
44
44
44
44
44
44
085
085
085
085
090
090
44 090
44 090
/,'
"'.
,
,/
\,.. ,;/
'-.../
()
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
165
165
165
165
170
170
165
170
170
44 170
44 170
44 170
44 170
44170
44 170
44 175
44 180
44 185
44 185
44 185
44 185
44 187
44 187
44 188
44 188
44 191
44 191
44 195
44 195
44 195
44 195
44 195
44 200
44 200
44 200
44 200
44 200
44 205
44 205
44 210
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676421
2 of 5
255
255
260
260
260
260
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
265
44016f
r
(,
(
(
/
(
(
(
c
(
(,
Display / Alter Virtual Storage 370!VSE (ODV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
Display Virtual Storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
Fast-Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
Save Virtual Storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
Display / Aiter Real Storage 370 (ODM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
Display Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
Alter Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
Fast-Alter Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
Save Real Storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
Display / Alter Trace Area (ODT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
Display Trace Area (T) . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
Display Instruction Counter Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
Clear Instruction Counter Trace. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 44 295
Display PSW and I/O Trace Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
Display PSW and I/O Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
Clear PSW and I/O Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
Display Saved I FCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
Save IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
Clear Saved IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
Display I/O Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 44 297
Reset Sample Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 44 297
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 301
Display I Alter Block Save Area (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
Display Block Save Area . . . . . . . . .
. .... 44 305
Alter Block Save Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
Fast-Alter Block Save Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
Save Screen Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
Save Area Type Field Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
Display/Alter Auxiliary Storage (ODA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44310
Display Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
Alter Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
Fast-Alter Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
Save Auxiliary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
Display / Alter UCW /Device Directory (ODU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
Display UCW / Device Directory Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
Alter UCW / Device Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
Display UCW/Device Directory Update (ODUU) . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
Alter UCW /Device Directory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
UCW Compressed Directories (ODUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
Display UCW /Device Directory-Compressed Directories
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
Alter UCW /Device Directory-Compressed Directories
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
UCW Expanded Directories (ODUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
Display UCW /Device Directory-Expanded Directories
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
Alter UCW / Device Directory-Expanded Directories
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
Display / Alter Local Storage (ODL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
Display Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
Alter Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
Fast-Alter Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
Save Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
Display / Alter External Registers (ODX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
Display External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 44 329
Fast-Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
Save External Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....... 44 329
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
Display / Alter SP Storage (ODW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. 44 335
Display SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
Alter SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
Fast-Alter SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
Save SP Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
(
(,
(
r""-(
Display / Alter Console Disk File (ODD)
Display Console Disk File. . . . . . .
Alter Console Disk File . . . . . . . .
Fi'st-Alter Console Disk File. .
Save Console Disk File . . .
('
. . . .
. .......
. . . . . . .
. ....
.
. .............
. .................
. . . . . . .
-44
44
44
44
44
340
340
340
340
340
Insert/Extract Screens
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 44 345
Insert/Extract .....
. . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345
Insert / Extract (OV). . . .
· . . . . . . . 44345
Insert/Extract Arrays (OVA)
· 44 350
Display Array Facilities ..
· . 44 350
Insert/ Extract Local Store (OVAL)
· .44355
Display Local Store ..... .
· 44 355
Alter Local Store.
. . . . . . . . . 44355
Save Local Store.
· ....... 44355
Fast-Alter Local Store ...
· . 44355
Insert/Extract PU Retry Local Store (OVAP)
... 44360
Display PU Retry Local Store .
. ..... .
· 44360
Alter PU Retry Local Store.
. . , .. , .. .
... 44 360
Save PU Retry Local Store.
. , .. , .. .
· 44 360
Fast-Alter PU Retry Local Store,
.44360
Label Identification .... , ... , , ...
· ....... 44 360
Insert/Extract Channel Data Buffer (OVAD).
· . 44365
Display Channel Data Buffer ..
, .. 44365
Alter Channel Data Buffer
· . 44 365
Save Channel Data Buffer
. . . . . . . .
. 44 365
Fast-Alter Channel Data Buffer. .
. 44 365
Label Identification . .
. .. , . , ... ,
.. 44 365
Insert/Extract Channel Control (OVAN).
. ... , .. 44370
Display Channel Control.
. .. 44 370
Alter Channel Control
. 44 370
.. , .... 44 370
Save Channel Control
Fast-Alter Channel Control.
. 44370
Insert/ Extract Swap Buffer (OVAS) .
. ... 44 375
. 44 375
Display Swap Buffer,
Alter Swap Buffer.
, . , , . . . . . . . . . . . 44 375
Save Swap Buffer.
. 44 375
Fast-Alter Swap Buffer. .
. ...... ,
.. 44 375
Insert/ Extract Control Store (OVAC) .
. 44 380
Display Control Store. .
. . 44 380
Alter Control Store
. 44 380
Save Control Store . . . .
. ...... 44 380
Fast-Alter Control Store
. . . . . . . . 44 380
Label Identification . . . . . . . .
. ....... 44 380
Control Store (OVAC) Warning. . . . . . .
. ...... 44 385
Label Identification . . . . . . . . .
. ... 44 385
Insert/Extract/Trap/BAL Stack (OVAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44395
Display Trap/BAL Stack
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395
Alter Trap/BAL Stack. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395
Save Trap/SAL Stack. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395
Fast-Alter Trap/SAL Stack. . . . . . . . . ..
. . . . . . . . . . 44 395
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
, . . . . . . . . . 44 395
Insert/Extract CSAR Backup (OVAB) . . . .
. ..... 44 397
Display CSAR Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. 44 397
Alter CSAR Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 397
Save CSAR Backup. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 397
Fast-Alter CSAR Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 397
Insert/Extract PU DLAT (OVAU) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44403
Display PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 403
Alter PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 403
Save PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44403
Fast-Alter PU DLAT (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 44403
Label Identification (GRP 2) .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 44403
(
(
(
('
(
(
{
(,'
(
Insert/Extract PU DLAT (OVAU) {GRP 1i
...
Display PU DLAT (GRP 1)
...
Alter PU DLAT (GRP 1). .. . . . . . . . . .
. ..........
Save PU DLAT (GRP 1) .
. ........
Fast-Alter PU DLAT (GRP 1)
........
Label Identification (GRP 1)
......
Insert/Extract Channel DLAT (OVAH) (GRP 2).
. ....
Display Channel DLAT (GRP 2). . . . . . . . . . .
. .....
Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 2). . . . . . . .
. ..
Save Channel DLAT (GRP 2)
..........
Fast-Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 2).
. ........
Label Identification (GRP 2)
. . . . . . . , , , , , ...
Insert/Extract Channel DLAT (OVAH) (GRP 1),
... , .....
Display Channel DLAT (GRP 1). .
. ...............
Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 1). . . . . . . .
. .......
Save Channel DLAT (GRP 1) . . . . . ..
. ............
Fast-Alter Channel DLAT (GRP 1). . . .
. .........
Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Key (OVAY) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Key (GRP 2) . . .
. .....................
Alter Key (GRP 2) . . .
. ....................
Save Key (GRP 2)..
' .........................
Fast-Alter Key (GRP 2) . . . .
. .................
Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Key (OVAY) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . .
Display Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Key (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/ Extract L 1 Directory (OVAF) (GRP 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter L 1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save L1 Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Ll Directory (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract L1 Directory (OVAF) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Ll Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . .
. .......
Alter Ll Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Ll Directory (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter L1 Directory (GRP 1) . . . .
. ...........
Label Identification (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/ Extract L 1 Cache Data (OVAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display L 1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter L1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Save L 1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter L 1 Cache Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ....
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Cache Retry Data (OVAR) (GRP 2). .
. ...
Display Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast-Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Cache Retry Data (OVAR) (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Cache Retry Data (GRP 1) . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast - Alter Cache Retr{ Data (G RP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
Label Identification (G RP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 405
44 405
44 405
44 405
44405
44 405
44 407
44 407
44 407
44 407
44 407
44 407
44 409
44 409
44 409
44409
44 409
44 409
44413
44 413
44 413
44 413
44 413
44413
44 415
44 415
44 415
44415
44 415
44 415
44 417
44 417
44 417
44 417
44417
44 417
44 419
44419
44 419
44419
44 419
44419
44 425
44 425
44 425
44 425
44 425
44 425
44427
44 427
44 427
44 427
44 427
44 427
44429
44 429
44 429
44 429
44 429
44 429
Model Group 2
IEC 379825 05Jun81
IEC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676421
3 of 5
44017f
('
(
Insert/Extract Status Scan Ring (OVS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
Display Sta~us Scan Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
Alter Status Scan Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
Save Status Scan Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
Insert/Extract Checks in System (OVK) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Display Checks in System (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Alter Checks in System (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Save Checks in System (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Check Reset (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Fast-Alter Checks in System (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Label Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 443
Insert/Extract Checks in System (OVK) (GRP 1) ........... 44 445
Display Checks in System (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
Alter Checks in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
Save Checks in System (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
Check Reset (GRP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
Fast-Alter Checks in System (GRP 1) ................ 44 445
Label Identification. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
Insert/Extract PU Hardware (OVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
Display PU Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
Alter PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
Save PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
Fast-Alter PU Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 450
Insert/Extract Control Storage Hardware (OVB) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 4.53
Display Control Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
Alter Control Storage. Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
Save Control Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
Fast-Alter Control Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 454
Insert/Extract Main Storage Hardware (OVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
Display Main Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
Alter Main Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
Save Main Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
Fast-Alter Main Storage Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 458
Insert/Extract Channel Hardware (OVH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
Display Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
Alter Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
Save Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
Fast-Alter Channel Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 464
Insert/Extract Channel Interface (OVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Display Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Alter Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Save Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Fast-Alter Channel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
Insert/Extract External Registers (OVX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
Display External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
Save External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
Fast-Alter External Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 502
Insert/Extract Scan Rings (OVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . , ......... 44 515
Display Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
Alter Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
Save Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
Fast-Alter Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
Loop Scan Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
Insert/Extract Clock Scan Rings (OVY) (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 517
Display Clock Scan Rings (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44517
Lab~1 Identification (GRP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 517
o
Insert/Extract Clock Scan Rings (OVY) (GRP 1) ............
Display Clock Scan Rings (GRP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label Identification (GRP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract W Command (OVW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W Command Invoke Procedure . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Maintenance Chip Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU Maintenance Chip Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Storage Maintenance Chip Command List ........
Cache/Storage Maintenance Chip CMD List. . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Translate Address (OVT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translate Address Any V Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alter Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert/Extract Set CSAR Address (OVG) ....... , .........
Set CSAR Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
519
519
519
521
521
521
521
521
521
525
525
525
525
535
535
Block Facility (OB) ............................ 44 635
Rules For Specifying Blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
Block Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
Displaying the Block List (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
Editing Blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
Erasing Blocks (R blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Activating Blocks (A blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Halting Blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Transferring Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Initializing The Index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Automatically Running a Block at IML (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
Block Execution Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
Fast-Selecting a Screen .10 screenid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645
TOO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645
HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
MSG ....... · . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645·
GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44645
Setting Variable Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
Comparing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
Simulating the Start or Stop Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
Transferring Control from One Block to
Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
XFER.blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Waiting for an Address Match to Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Executing a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Using the Address Compare (OA) and Match
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Aborting a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
IML Effect on a Running Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
Error Logout Screens .......................... 44 545
Error Logouts (OE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Error Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU Directory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU Purge Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU Logout Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Logout Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Purge All Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSF Line Error Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Code Logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....
Reference Code Logout File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purge All Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAP Initiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saved Screens (OEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Saved Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diskette Readability Screen (QED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diskette Readability Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
545
545
545
550
550
550
555
555
555
560
560
565
566
570
570
570
575
576
576
576
577
580
580
580
580
580
Patch Facility (OBTP) .......................... 44 655
Rules For Specifying Patchname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Patch List (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Patches (F Patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EraSing Patches (R Patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating Patches (A Patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating Patches (0 Patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Patches (K Patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Execution Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ODD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power /Temperature Screens ................... 44 585
Power /Temperature (OM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Power/Temperature Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partial Power Up and Down Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Power- Up Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Momentary Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Sense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Sensor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Sense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Tracking Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diskette IPL (01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Diskette IPL ........ : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to General Selection (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to Prog Sys (a) . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 585
44 585
44 585
44 585
44 590
44 590
44 595
44 595
44 600
44 600
44 605
44 605
44 605
44 607
44 607
44 607
44 607 .
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379827 020ct81
-
SP Stand-Alone Dump Support ................. 44 608
o
(').
\'<...
() ()
0 0 () 0
44 655
44 655
44 655
44 655
44 660
44 660
44 660
44 660
44 660
44 660
44 660
44· 660
44 660
44 660
44 660
o
C)
o
PN 2676421
4 of 5
('
U
".
44018f
(:
c
(/
Remote Support Facility ....................... 44 675
Remote Support Facility Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Bank Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Bank Invoke Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Bank Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Bank Disconnect Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Bank Mode Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Console Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
675
675
675
685
680
680
680
Remote Operator Console Facility (QFB) ......... 44 691
Diskette Build Function (QFT) .................. 44 695
Diskette Build Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diskette Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diskette Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
695
695
700
700
Model Group 2
EC 379825 OSJun81
EC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676421
5 of 5
44019f
o
o
() 0 0 0
o
C)
------
(,
(~
(
C (/ (
.
/
(/
(
(/ (
(.~
(,
(
(.
(/
(-
C
(-
(~
(
(
(~
(/
(
(
(-
(~/
(-
(-~,
(:
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides information required by the operator for:
•
Normal system operations.
Procedures that can be carried out by service
representatives.
The 4341 system consists of one 3278 Display Console
Model 2A (standard) or the 3279 Color Display Console
Model 2C (optional). Optional features allow three additional
devices (3278-2A, 3279-2C Display Consoles or 3287 Model
1, 2, 1C, and 2C Printers) in any arrangement. Optional
display consoles can be assigned used as alternate operator
display consoles.
OPERATOR CONSOLE
The operator console for the 4341 consists of:
•
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Hardware Configuration
Modes of Operation
The operator control panel has switches for basic tasks (such
as making the system operational) and lights to alert the
operator of system status.
The 4341 Processor consists of one 3278-2A (standard) or
3279-2C (optional) Display Console. Optional features allow
three additional 3278-2A. 3279-2C or 3287 devices to be
attached to the support processor and configured as needed.
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C operator console keyboard has 75
keys including 12 Program Function keys. All alphameric,
graphic. and cursor control keys are typamatic. When held
pressed, typamatic keys automatically repeat at approximately
ten operations a second.
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C Display Consoles have three
modes of operation that affect screen format: Display mode,
Printer/Keyboard mode, and Manual mode. The Display and
Printer /Keyboard modes are used under the control of the
operating system. Manual mode, which can be entered at
any time. provides control of basic system functions.
The following figure indicates the 4341 hardware
configuration.
In display mode, the 3278-2A or 3279-2C Display Console
and the optional 3287 Printer are separately addressable
devices operating as a 3270-type of operator console. Data
may be entered or displayed on the display console and
separately printed on the hard-copy printer.
Display Console/Keyboard
The Display Console is the principal device for the operator to
communicate with the system. The keyboard and the display
can control system operations as well as display the status of
the system. The display keyboard has alphameric, control,
and function keys. All keys. except the Copy key and those
keys designated for CE use only, operate when the console is
in display mode.
P U
3287 Printer
A display screen
•
A display keyboard.
Messages and status information appear on the display
screen in clear text. Most of the operator functions are
performed at the keyboard.
Printer/Keyboard Mode
BYTE CHANNEL 0
A control panel
•
Display Mode
The 3287 Printer provides a printed copy of information that
is displayed at a display console, or of information written
from the program. Printed data appears in the same
alphameric characters and symbols that appear on a display
image. Printouts can be formatted in the same manner as a
display image. The cursor indication is not shown on the
printer output.
I
I
Manual operations (such as displaying and altering data,
loading programs, and running the systam in instruction-step
or address-compare mo'de) are performed by keying
characters from the keyboard into displays on the video
screen. The screen is used to display all actions. No
indicator lights are to be decoded. All information is
displayed on the screen, either in clear text, hexadecimal
notation, or binary zeros and ones.
I
0
PROCESSOR
C A
3278 2A
3279 2C
==1
I I
3287
3287
When the system is in manual mode, the display console is
under control of support processor microcode. The system
uses the display console to display or alter data, control a
function, or display the results of a function. The support
processor manual functions are: to alter/display storage,
registers, PSW, UCWs, etc.• or to compare stop on addresses
or data. All manual function facilities are displayed on the
General Selection screen (Q).
I
Manual Mode
I
f
A permanent display of the 4341 status is at the lower part
of the screen.
I
I
LeA
SUPPORT
In printer/keyboard mode. the 3278-2A or 3279-2C Display
Console and the optional 3287 Printer share a single address.
This mode is used to emulate a 1052 for those operating
systems and programs designed for that type of operator
console. Operating messages to and from the system ara
displayed on the display console and also printed on the
coupled printer.
3278 2A
==1
1
3279 2C
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 5666351
10f1
44025
(-
o
r)"
\~
00 C)C)OOOOO ()
~:)
0 00
o
(
(J
c c
(~
(
c
(
('
j
(-
(
(
(- (
L
(~
(
(,
(~
(~~
(/
(/ (~/
(~
(~
(~
(: (-- (' (~ (
".:.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (OCP)
The operator control panel (OCP) is on both the 3278-2A and
3279-2C keyboards. The OCP provides the facilities to
control the system power and the associated initial microcode
load and to monitor the system operating states.
Chan-Chan
Disabled
0
OCP SWITCHES
Power On/IML Switch
Basic
Check
0
System
0
Wait
0
Power In
Process
Power
Complete
0
0
Channel
To
Channel
Power
On
IML
This switch has a dual function. Powering on the system by
pressing this switch:
•
Test
Applies power to the processor.
IMLs the support processor. (A subsequent, nonrelated
IML of the processing unit occurs at the conclusion of the
power-on cycle).
Powers on all I/O devices that are switched to power
on/off with the processor.
IMLs the instruction processor if IML at power-on is
specified on the Program Load screen.
If system problems later occur during operational
processing, pressing Power On re-IMLs the support
processor without powering down the system. Note, that a
re-IML does not reset any PU errors.
Notes:
The 4341 requires 15 seconds of warmup time after the
main power is applied before the operator control panel
can power up the system.
The Power On/IML switch must not be pressed within
approximately 30 seconds following a power-off or a
BASIC CHECK results. The cooling fans must have time
to stop.
•
[@] ~
After initiating power-on or re-IML, do not perform any
other functions or press any key, until the power-on or
re-IML is complete. These functions cannot be aborted
as microcode is involved in a very complex sequence.
Even if you make an error, you must wait for the
sequence to be completed.
Logic Reset Key
OCP INDICATORS
This indicator turns on when a hardware malfunction exists in
the basic power (hardwire sequence), the display console, or
when the CE switch is in the CE Mode.
Note: This key is inside the machine near the diskette
drive.
This key invokes a process which attempts to restore proper
operation to the SP without reloading any code. However, to
do this, a small module is read from the diskette. Therefore,
the diskette must be operational. Ail adapters and certain
control blocks are reset; then the General Selection screen
appears.
Power Off Switch
This switch removes power from the system under contro! of
the power sequencing program resident in the support
processor.
Note: Observe the notes for Power On/IML switch above;
they apply to this switch also.
Channel-to-Channel Switch
Basic Check
Power In Process
This indicator turns on as soon as the Power On switch is
pressed. It remains on through the power-on sequence of
hardware initialization of the support processor, IML,
processor power sequence, and control unit power. At this
point it goes out, and the Power Complete light turns on.
Power Complete
This indicator turns on at the end of the power-on sequence.
If the Operator Console has a control panel. a power-off, a
Test Mode condition, an open coax cable or a console and/or
DCA hardware failure, the Basic Check indicator turns on.
When power is restored and the console is returned from
Test mode, the Basic Check indicator is reset.
System
This indicator is on when PU operations are active; for
example, during instruction processing.
Chan-Chan Disabled
Wait Indicator
This indicator is associated with the Channel-to-Channel
switch and comes on when the processor logical interface is
not connected. When lit, the operator can power down the
system and not lose data or hang up the other processor.
This indicator is on when the processor is idle (processing
clock is running, but no instruction processing is taking place).
The channel-to-channel switch is required for systems having
a channel-to-channel adapter feature. This switch is
activated to make a logical interface connection of one
processor to another processor for data sharing purposes.
Normally, it is activated only two times during the workday:
1. After power-up completion. Activation places the
interface in the enabled mode and causes the Disable
indicator to go out.
2. Prior to powering off. Power Off should not be pressed
until the Chan-Chan Disabled indicator comes on.
Lamp Test Switch
This switch is used by the operator to check whether or not
aI/ indicators are working.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 5666352
1 of 1
44035
.;'~
'. ",..)Ii
00
("'-'"
V
r'l>\
\~y
(
(
(-
(
(
(/
(
(/
3278 DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2A
CONSOLE CHARACTERISTICS
3278 MODEL 2A OPERATOR CONTROLS
The 3278 Display Console Model 2A has a screen size of
1920 characters, 24 lines at 80 characters per line. The
bottom four (21-24) lines are reserved for system status
information. Both uppercase and lowercase characters can
be displayed.
Brightness Control
Audible Alarm Volume Control
You can adjust the brightness of the characters displayed on
the screen by turning the brightness control knob to the left
or to the right. Turning it to the right makes the display
image brighter; to the left, dimmer. Find the setting most
convenient and comfortable for your viewing. If held all the
way to the right, a raster pattern is displayed for test
purposes. This raster pattern can vary between consoles.
If the display console has the Audible Alarm feature, the
volume control for the audible alarm is at the outside of the
screen contrast control. Turning this control clockwise
increases the sound level; turning the control
counterclockwise decreases the sound level. To test or adjust
the audible alarm, refer to "Audible Alarm Feature."
Display Image
Normal/Test Switch
The display image format is divided into three functional
areas.
When you are operating the display station, have this switch
in the Normal position.
Use the Test position of this switch when you have a
problem with the display console and you perform the
Problem Determination Procedures. When you place the
switch in. the Test position, the operator can perform tests
that help diagnose the cause of the problem.
PROGRAM AREA
Display upper
and lowercase
characters.
Indicator 2
Indicator 1 ----44-&.n
20
Display uppercase
characters.
21
Power On Indicator --i-Hf-+..
SYSTEM STATUS AREA
On/Off Switch
Operating Mode
On _--t-t-t""f"1
Test Mode - displays
test pattern.
Off
24
25
Audible Alarm Volume Control
Screen Brightness
Control - Test, if held all
the way to the right.
Lines 1-20 display the operator input and host program
output messages.
System Status Area
Lines 21-24 display system status. for the layout for these
four lines, see "System Status."
Operator Information Area
Line 25 for displays console and keyboard status.
Dual Case/Mono Case Switch (Aa/ A)
When this switch is set to dual case (Aa), both uppercase and
lowercase alphabetic characters are displayed on the screen.
When the switch is set to monocase (AI. both lowercase
and uppercase alphabetic characters are displayed in
uppercase.
Screen Contrast Control.
OPERATOR INFORMATION AREA
Program Area
The Normal/Test switch is used together with the Power
On/Off switch to create ready and not ready conditions. See
"Power On / Off Switch" above.
Regardless of how the switch is set, lowercase characters
are transmitted if you do not switch to uppercase and they
may be received as data on a Write command.
Power On/Off Switch
Push in on the top portion of the Power On/Off switch to
apply power to your display. The red indicator is visible at
the lower part of the switch when it is in the On ( I) position.
This is a reminder to turn power off (0) before leaving your
display. The On indicator and Indicator 1 turn on when you
turn on the Power switch. A delay of a few seconds allows
the machine to warm up. After this delay, Indicator 2 turns
on, and the cursor appears in the first character position on
line one.
Contrast Control
The contrast control can aid in adjusting the display for
comfortable viewing. Two intensity levels are used to display
characters, the contrast control varies the difference between
these two levels. Experiment to find the contrast level that is
prefered.
To turn off the display console, push in on the bottom
portion of the Power On/Off switch.
The Power On / Off switch is used together with the
Normal/Test switch to make the device ready or not-ready.
On and Normal create a ready condition; Off or Test create a
not-ready condition. In the not-~eady case, intervention
required sense is set, and Start I/O instructions to the device
are rejected. When a not-ready-to-ready transition occurs,
device-end status is presented. Whenever the device is
made ready in this manner, a blank program area screen
appears.
EC 379587 31Jan80
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 5666353
1 of 2
44045
3278 MODEL 2A INDICATORS
The 3278 Console Display Model 2A has both off-screen and
on-screen indicators. The off-screen indicators are on the
left front of the display. The on-screen indicators are
displayed on the bottom line of the display.
Off-Screen Indicators
Power On Indicator
The Power On indicator. when lit. indicates that power is on
in the display console. It turns on when you turn the Power
On/Off switch to the On position.
Indicator 1
Indicator 1. when lit. indicates that the internal console
circuits for the display image are ready. It turns on when you
turn the Power On/Off switch to the On position.
Indicator 2
Indicator 2. when lit. indicates that the high-voltage circuits in
the display console are on. It turns on a few seconds after
you place the Power On/Off switch in the On position.
On-Screen Indicators
The On-Screen indicators are messages that appear on line
25 in the Operator Display Area. For mes~ages. refer to
"Messages. "
EC 379587 31Jan80
EC 379824 16Jan81
j'
00 C)
o
()
PN 5666353
o
20t 2
44050
('
£;
c' c c c'
C
(/
(
f-
('
C C; C
(
(/
C C C
(-/
(~
(~.'
j
(j
C'
("
/
(/
C C
(
C
3279 COLOR DISPLAY CONSOLE MODEL 2C
CONSOLE CHARACTERISTICS
Base Color Switch
3279 MODEL 2C OPERATOR CONTROLS
The 3279 Color Display Console Model 2C is a tabletop
display using a high-resolution color cathhode ray tube
(CRT) display. The 3279-2C Base Color Mode provides four
different colors, which can be produced by existing 3270
application programs with little or no reprogramming. Fields
can be displayed in red, blue, green, or white. Field colors
are determined by the four combinations of the field
protection and intensity attributes.
The 3279-2C Display Console has a screen size of 1920
characters, 24 lines at 80 characters per line. The bottom
four (21-24) lines are reserved for system status information.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be displayed.
In the base color position (0000), the base colors red, blue,
green and white are displayed. In the monochrome position
(00), the base colors blue and red are replaced by green and
white. Green and white fields are not affected.
Indicator 1
(
(Poweron)~
Indicator 2
(Display ReadY;
I 'fo
~I---;--
Indicator 3
(Test)
Normal Test
Switch
Audible Alarm Volume Control
Base Color Switch
Turning this control clockwise increases the sound level;
turning the control counterclockwise decreases the sound
level. To test or adjust the audible alarm, refer to "Audible
Alarm Feature,"
Mono Case/Dual Case
Switch
FIELD ATTRIBUTES
Normal/Test Switch
When you are operating the display station, have this switch
in the Normal position.
COLOR DISPLAY
Use the Test position of this switch when you have a
problem with the display console and you perform the
Problem Determination Procedures. When you place the
switch in the Test position, the operator can perform tests
that help diagnose the cause of the problem.
3279 MODEL 2C
Operator
PROTECTED
I NTENS lTV
COLOR
MONO MODE
NO
NORMAL
GREEN
GREEN
NO
HIGH
RED
WHITE
YES
N'ORMAL
BLUE
GREEN
YES
HIGH
WHITE
WHITE
The Normal/Test switch is used together with the Power
On/Off switch to create ready and not-ready conditions. See
"Power On/Off Switch" above.
Power On/Off
Switch
Dual Case/Mono Case Switch (Aa/A)
,..,.--- Security Keylock
Display Image
When the switch is set to monocase (A). both lowercase
and uppercase alphabetic characters are displayed in
uppercase.
Fuse
The display image format is divided into three functional
areas.
Program Area
Lines 1-20 display the operator input and host program
output messages.
System Status Area
Lines 21-24 display system status. For the layout for these
four lines, see "System Status."
Console Indicator Area
Line 25 for displays console and keyboard status. Line 25 is
displayed in the color blue.
Power On/Off Switch
Brightness Control
Push in on the top portion of the Power On / Off switch to
apply power to your display. The On indicator and Indicator
1 turn on when you turn on the Power switch. A delay of a
few seconds allows the machine to warm up. After this
delay, Indicator 2 turns on, and the cursor appears in the first
character position on line one.
You can adjust the brightness of tha, characters displayed on
the screen by turning the brightnesf., control knob to the left
or to the right. Turning it to the ri~ht makes the display
image brighter; to the left, dimmer. Find the setting most
convenient and comfortable for viewing. If held all the way
to the right, a raster pattern is displayed for test purposes.
To turn off the display station, push in on the bottom
portion of the Power On/Off switch.
The Power On / Off switch is used together with the
Normal/Test switch to make the device ready or not-ready.
On and Normal create a ready condition; Off or Test create a
not-ready condition. In the not-ready case, intervention
required sense is set, and Start I/O instructions to the device
are rejected. When a not-ready-to-ready transition occurs,
device-end status is presented. Whenever the device is
made ready in this manner, a blank program area screen
appears.
When this switch is set to dual case (Aa), both uppercase and
lowercase alphabetic characters are displayed on the screen.
Regardless of how the switch is set, lowercase characters
are transmitted if you do not shift to uppercase and they may
be received as data on a Write command.
Intensity Override Switch
Operates when the brightness control is turned fully
counterclockwise. This position sets the brightness circuits to
maximum and the screen shows full rasters of red, blue and
green. These are converged if the Test/ Normal switch is set
to NORMAL on the 3279 and unconverged when set to the
TEST position.
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 2676422
1 of 2
44051
(-
3279 MODEL 2C INDICATORS
The 3279 Console Display Model 2C has two types of
indicators: off-screen indicators and on-screen indicators.
The off-screen indicators are on the left front of the display.
The on-screen !ndicators are displayed on the bottom line of
the display screen.
Off-Screen Indicators
Power On Indicator
The Power On indicator, when lit, indicates that power is on
in the display console. It turns on when you turn the Power
On/Off switch to the On position.
Indicator 1
Indicator 1, when lit, indicates line supply and +5 volts are
available. This does not confirm the availability of other
voltages throughout the machine, but it does turn on when
the Power On/Off switch is in the On postion.
Indicator 2
Indicator 2, when lit, indicates that the high-voltage circuits in
the display console are operating. It turns on about 40
seconds after you place the Power On/Off switch in the On
position. This allows for warmup.
Indicator 3
Indicator 3, when lit, indicates Normal/Test switch is in the
Test position.
On-Screen Indicators
The On-Screen Indicators are messages that appear on line
25 in the operator display area. For messages, refer to
"Messages. "
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 2676422
2of2
o o
o
c
o
o
o
C)
44052
/'
C
C~:
~,'
(~
c c
(
{/
(/ (~
('
(/ (.
('
(/
(.
(.
(/ ('/ (~' (~ (/
C'
()
(~
(,~
(~
..-\
(-
"
DISPLAY /KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD CHARACTERISTICS
Key Symbols
Symbols and Punctuation Marks
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboards enable the operator to
communicate with the system. Most functions are available
in the stopped and running states of the system.
Instead of language, the following symbols appear on the
display keyboard:
These characters are in two groups because of their physical
locations. The first group contains the symbols that are on
the upper part of the key top that have numerals 1 through 0
on the lower half. The second group is on keys that have
two special symbols on them. The display symbols that
appear on the upper half of a key require pressing of the shift
key. All the symbol and punctuation mark keys are typamatic
when held down.
The characters that can be displayed consist of 26
uppercase and 26 lowercase alphabetic characters, 10
numeric characters, and 32 symbols and punctuation marks.
The keyboard also contains input control keys, cursor control
keys, program function keys, and system function keys.
Keys that have two characters on the key tops can display
either of them depending upon the position of the shift key.
The lower character displays when the keyboard is in the
unshifted mode (the shift key not pressed). To display the
upper character, hold the shift key down or press the shift
lock key before pressing the character key.
Those keys that appear on the front face of indicated keys
on the keyboard are program function keys and system
function keys. To select one of these functions, hold the ALT
key down while pressing the key that indicates the specific
function you want.
Key Function
Backspace
~
Tab
~
Backtab
r+-
Home
A majority of the keys have the typamatic feature. For
example, if you hold the key down, the character or function
automatically repeats at a rate of approximately ten
operations per second until you release the key. The keys
that have this capability are:
Character keys (alphabetic, numeric, and special
characters).
C-,)
Cursor Down
,
Cursor Left
~
Cursor Up
Cursor Right
New Line
Shift
Shift Lock
Insert
Typamatic Keys
Symbol
Delete
Numeric Key
~
~
1
I
2
@
3
#
(number sign)
$
%
(dollar sign)
~
/
(percent sign)
(logical NOT sign)
6
V
\V
(logical OR. vertical bar)
(at sign)
4
5
~
Upper Half of Numeric Key
7
&
(ampersand)
8
*
(asterisk)
9
(left parenthesis)
0
(right parenthesis)
~
Page Up
Page
Page Down
Page.
Lower Symbol
(grave accent)
(equivalent, similar)
(minus sign)
(underscore)
(equal sign)
¢
\\
Cursor moving keys
Program Function (PF) and Enter keys
Upper Symbol
+
(exclamation point)
(cent sign)
(back slash)
(broken vertical line)
(semicolon)
(apostrophe)
(colon)
(quotation mark)
(closing brace)
(opening brace)
<
(less than sign)
(greater than sign)
>
(comma)
(comma)
Alphameric and Special Character Keys
(plus sign)
(period)
(period)
These keys can only be used when an unprotected field is
present. At that time, pressing the key causes the character
indicated to appear and the cursor to advance. At other
times, or if the cursor is not in an unprotected field, pressing
these keys causes the INHIBITED message to appear on line
25 of the display. The INHIBITED condition is cleared with
the RESET key.
/
(slash)
?
(question mark)
Data displayed is not effective until ENTER is pressed. This
greatly reduces the possibility of entering erroneous or
incorrectly formatted data.
When operated with the ALT key held down, the numeric
keys become PFl through PF10.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC379605 06Mar81
EC 379607 05Jun81
© IBM Corp. 1981
PN 5666354
1 of 4
44055
(:
('
Shift and Shift Lock
The SHIFT and SHIFT LOCK keys are the same as on a
standard typewriter keyboard. When either the left or the
right SHIFT key is pressed, the upper symbols shown on the
key tops are displayed when their respective keys are
pressed. If the character key has no upper symbol (such as
the alphabetic keys), the uppercase characters appear on the
screen. The SHIFT keys are nonlocking and must be held
down.
Pressing the SHIFT LOCK key locks the keyboard in the
shifted (uppercase) mode. When the SHIFT LOCK key is
used, you need not hold thl;! SHIFT key down. This frees
both hands for typing. Pressing either SHIFT key resets the
SHIFT LOCK to return the keyboard to the unshifted
(lowercase) mode.
ALT
The ALT key selects the function that appears on the face of
specific keys. To invoke the alternate function, hold the ALT
key down and then press the desired function key.
Moving Cursor to Beginning of Field
Moving Cursor One Character Space
New Line Key
Horizontal Positioning
The New Line key moves the cursor to the first unprotected
character location of the next line. If all character positions of
the next line or lines are protected, the cursor continues as
many lines as necessary to the first unprotected field. If all
character positions on the display screen are protected, the
cursor is repositioned to the first character location on the
first line. The New Line key is typamatic and moves the
cursor quickly from line to line.
Pressing either of the two horizontal keys (right or left) moves
the cursor in the direction of the arrow, one character position
at a time, including unprotected and protected alphameric
character and attribute character locations. These keys can
cause the cursor to wrap and reposition the cursor to the next
or preceding line of characters. These keys are typamatic. If
the cursor is positioned in a protected field or attribute
position, no data can be entered at that location.
Tab Key
Vertical Positioning Keys
Pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the right to the first
character location of the next unprotected data field.
Operating either of two vertical cursor positioning keys (cursor
up, cursor down) moves the cursor in the direction of the
arrow, one line at a time. These keys can cause the cursor to
wrap vertically. The cursor stays in the same character
column. These keys are typamatic.
Pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the first character
location on line 1 if the screen is not formatted or if there are
no unprotected data fields. Tab key is typamatic and moves
the cursor quickly from field to field.
Backspace Key
Space Bar
A space is considered an actual character that occupies a
position on the screen. When the space bar is pressed, a
space is entered on the screen and replaces whatever
character is presently in that position. For this reason, the
space bar should not be used to position the cursor. The
space bar is typamatic.
Back Tab Key
The Back Tab key moves the cursor back to the first
character position in an input field.
Pressing the Backspace key moves the cursor one character
space to the left for each pressing of the key. This key
operates exactly like the horizontal (left) positioning key and is
also typamatic.
If the cursor is already in the first character position of an
input field, pressing the Back Tab key moves the cursor back
to the first character position of the preceding input field.
Pressing the Back Tab key moves the cursor to the first
character position on line 1 if the screen is not formatted or if
there are no unprotected data fields.
Cursor Control Keys
The cursor keys control the vertical and horizontal movement
of the cursor. These keys position the cursor without
affecting the information on the screen.
The two types of cursor control keys are:
1. Those that move the cursor to the first character location
in an unprotected field.
Home Key
Pressing the Home key repositions the cursor to the first
unprotected character position on the screen. If there are no
unprotected character positions on the screen, the cursor is
placed at the first character position on line 1.
2. Those that move the cursor one character position at a
time.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379607 05Jun81
"
"---../
/-
",
'-,"-
./
~
,,_../
I~)
0)
\~./
0
(,\,
"--/
,0
"'j
0
0
\..y
f~~
'\J
0 0 0 0 0 0
.-
0~)
0 0
PN 5666354
44060
20f4
(~,
"'..;
r",
\-.)
"
,---j
;'
-,,\
'-_/
,~
\-.j
(
Input Control Keys
Insert
Pressing the Insert key allows the insertion of a character. or
a string of characters. into the middle of a field without
disturbing the information already displayed there. Pressing
the Insert key places the keyboard in the insert mode of
operation. The word Insert is displayed on line 25 to remind
you that your keyboard is in the insert mode.
c
Reset
Cnel (Display Mode)
Pressing the RESET key restores the keyboard to its normal
mode of operation. The keyboard is inhibited whenever an
attempt is made to enter a character into a protected location.
This can occur when the cursor is moved (via the cursor keys)
to a protected field. When the keyboard is inhibited. the
alphameric and symbol keys can be pressed. but no action
results. The message INHIBITED appears on line 25 on the
display. To remove the inhibit, press the RESET key.
Pressing the CNCL (cancel) key generates an attention
interrupt to the operating system in display mode.
To find the next unprotected field (and avoid inhibiting the
keyboard again). press the Tab or Back Tab key.
All the keyboard control keys perform normally when in
insert mode.
Cncl (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
During a read operation, the CNCL key initiates a cancel
response to the channel. The cancel response is a channel
end with exception. The input area is cleared and protected
and an asterisk (*) is written in the display area. No data is
transferred across the channel. If no Read is in progress, the
ALARM indicator is cleared and the keyboard is unlocked.
Pressing the Delete key when the cursor is located in an
unprotected field deletes the character at the cursor position.
All characters in the field to the right of that position and on
the same line are then shifted left one position and a null
character is added to the end.
The Delete key is active for the display, printer/keyboard, or
manual mode.
Erase Input
Pressing the ERASE INPUT key erases all input fields on the
screen. On a permanently displayed document with blanks to
fill in, only those areas in which you can enter data are
erased. The cursor moves to the first character position in
the first field in which you can begin keying input data.
Pressing the ERASE INPUT key for a screen with no input
fields erases nothing. The cursor moves to the first character
position on line 1.
Pressing the ERASE INPUT key for an unformatted screen
erases all character positions. The cursor moves to the first
character position on line 1.
enel (Manual Mode)
In display mode, the ENTER key causes an attention status
and sets an attention identifier (AID). The software performs
a subsequent Read command to obtain the AID and any
entered data.
The message FUNCTION KEY IGNORED is displayed if the
CNCL key is pressed while in manual mode.
Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed. the keyed in data is
displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected.
Req (Display Mode)
Pressing the REQ key generates an attention interrupt to the
operating system in display mode.
Enter (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
During a read operation, pressing the ENTER key signals that
data entry is complete and transfers the input data to the
channel. The data is read, and the input area is cleared and
protected. If no Read is in progress, the ALARM indicator is
cleared and the keyboard unlocked.
Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed. the keyed in data is
displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected.
(
/
Program Function Keys
PFl -
Enter (Display Mode)
Delete
C:-
c
PF12 (Display Mode)
In addition to the functions permanently assigned to system
function keys. application programs can define the action that
occurs with anyone of the PF (program function) keys.
Program function keys allow the operator to tailor the
keyboard to fit some specific need.
To activate a programmable function. hold the AL T key
pressed, and then press the appropriate PF key.
The PF keys generate attention interrupt with the
appropriate AID value when in display mode.
PFl -
PF12 (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
These keys clear the ALARM indicator and unlock the
keyboard when in printer/keyboard mode.
PFl -
PF12 (Manual Mode)
These keys are reserved for power screen function.
Req (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
The REQUEST key initiates communication with the operating
system by sending an attention status IX'SO'). If the request
status cannot be sent immediately because of a busy
condition. the REQUEST indicator appears, and the attention
is stacked. When the device becomes not busy. the attention
is sent and the REQUEST indicator is cleared.
Req (Manual Mode)
Enter (Manual Mode)
When the screen is being used as the machine panel for
manual operations. pressing the ENTER key causes the
specified operation to be performed.
The message FUNCTION KEY IGNORED is displayed if the
REQUEST key is pressed while in manual mode.
Note: Do not confuse the REO and INTR keys. The red
INTR key is used to cause an EXTERNAL INTERRUPT.
Note: Before the ENTER key is pressed. the keyed in data is
displayed on the screen and can be changed or corrected.
Erase EOF
. Pressing the ERASE EOF (Erase to End of Field) key erases
(blanks) character positions in that input field from the cursor
location to the end of the field. The cursor. however. does
not move. If the screen is unformatted. all character
positions from the cursor to the last character position of the
bottom line are erased.
For example, if incorrect information has been keyed in a
field. press the Back Tab key to return the cursor to the
beginning of the field. press the ERASE EOF key to erase the
incorrect information, and then key in the correct information.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379607 05Jun81
PN 5666354
30f4
44065
System Function Keys
Chg Dply
Pressing the CHG DPLY key causes the display screen
program area to switch from the operating system buffer to
the manual operations buffer (manual mode). and vice versa.
Remote Facility Keys
SPM/O
Stop
Note: This function is to be used only under the
guidance of the field support center.
Pressing STOP places the system in manual mode after the
current instruction has been processed, and any pending
interruptions have been serviced. This key is active on any
display console when in normal mode.
The SPM /0 (support processor manual operations) key is
reserved for CE use only, and can be invoked only after
the CE key is activated. Pressing this key while the ALT
key is held down. invokes the SPIL manual operations.
You must be in manual functions mode to use this key.
Operating Restrictions:
• - If the STOP key is pressed while the console printer is
printing, the printer completes the operation even after
MAN appears in line 21.
The keyboard becomes inhibited when another console has
been placed in manual functions mode through a MODE SEL
or a CHG DPLY.
Note: To exit from this function:
CHG DPLY Restrictions:
1. Enter 7 fol/owing the MANUAL OPS FOR LEVEL
MESSAGE, and press ENTER.
The STOP key is inactive if a maintenance or log display
program is running.
2. In field 3, enter G fol/owing the F, and press ENTER.
When PSW looping occurs, the STOP key has no effect.
and only a system reset or an IPL can cause a normal
stop.
Pressing the CHG DPLY key while displaying one of the
fol/owing screens causes the INHIBIT indicator to be set:
QMW QMP
QEB
QMA
QMV
QEE
QMD
QEL
Press RESET to clear.
This clears the message and returns you to normal
operation.
The STOP key is active only on that console which is in
manual mode. The STOP key on any other console is
inoperative.
Intr
When the momentary or error status screens are
displayed, pressing the CHG DPLY key causes the system
to exit to the Partly Power Up and Down screen (QMW).
Pressing the INTR key requests an external interruption. This
key is active from any display console when you are in normal
operation.
If you are in manual mode. this key is only operative on the
display console that is in manual mode.
Mode Sel
Pressing MODE SEL invokes the manual function and brings
the General Selection screen to the display. The state of
the machine is not changed when the MODE SEL key is
pressed. The only difference is that the screen cannot be
used by the operating system.
The last screen of the operating system (that was on the
screen before the MODE SEL key was pressed) is stored
by the machine for later use. If the MODE SEL ~;ey was
pressed accidentally. key Z and press ENTER. This
releases the screen to the operating system and restores
the previous screen.
Line Disc
The Line Disconnect (LINE DISC) key disconnects the data
link and can also be used to abort the RSF. Use this key if
an RSF fails to initialize and the SP appears to be hung up.
Note: These keys are for service personnel only.
Copy
The COpy key is used to make a copy of the information
displayed on the screen.
The COpy key can be assigned to make a copy in three
different ways:
To the diskette
Pressing the START key on any console when all consoles
are in normal operation causes the system to execute
instructions at the current operation rate.
Operating Restrictions:
When the operation rate control is other than NORMAL,
only one instruction is processed each time the START
key is pressed.
When the START key is pressed after a normal stop, the
system carries on instruction processing as if no stop has
occurred, provided the operation rate function is at
NORMAL.
The START key has no effect when instruction processing
is in progress, with the system in wait state, or with the
system in the check-stop state.
Diag
The START key is inactive if a maintenance or log display
program is running.
This key is a CE diagnostic function.
The key can be used when in manual console functions
mode, or while running Testcase Monitor to start it.
The Communications Request (COMM REQ) key initiates
voice or terminal communication between an on-site service
representative and a remote specialist. The initiation of
COMM REQ can be done by either the on-site service
representative or the remote specialist.
By a console attached printer
The keyboard becomes inhibited when you press MODE
SEL and another console has already been selected.
Whenever the Diagnostic key is pressed, a copy of the
Testcase Monitor is read into the support processor
storage, and execution of the Testcase Monitor begins.
Normally, when STOP is pressed. within a few seconds
the words INSTR STOP appear on line 21.
Start
•
The MODE SEL key performs the same function in
display. printer/keyboard. or manual mode.
Normally when STOP is pressed. the ADDR and DATA
fields on line 21 are updated. However. sometimes they
may not be updated if the message CHANNEL 0
UNAVAILABLE appears on line 23 position 1.
Comm Req
•
The START key is active only on that console which is in
manual mode. The START key on any other console is
inoperative.
Page
By a channel-attached printer.
The page function (manual mode only) allows you to increase
or decrease storage addresses. This allows you to display
new blocks of storage. The amount the address increases or
decreases depends upon the manual function being executed.
The COpy Key is operative when in manual operations and
with proper assignment. For more information about Copy
Key, see "Program Load Copy Key (Kx)."
You must be in manual mode to use this key.
To increase the address. hold the ALT key pressed and
press the PAGE UP key.
To decrease the address, hold the ALT key pressed and
press the PAGE DOWN key.
A message PAGING KEY IGNORED appears on line 20
when the paging keys have no significance to the function
being performed. or if the address that would be generated
by paging is either too high or too low for the function, or the
previous command had a nonpaging error.
Note: Pressing the paging key, while using the
Copy-to-Diskette (KD) or the Copy-to-Channel Printer (KC)
options, may require you to press the key twice after using
the copy key function.
Note: If the DIAG key and the ALT key are accidently
pressed: To exit the diagnostic function, either press the
MODE SEL key or, Enter E next to SELECTION and press
ENTER.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379607 05Jun81
PN 5666354
44070
40f4
'\
('
\
-"
'-~
(~
\.~
r'\
\...,Y
C)
0·
",-)
0
r""
0
0 0 0
("'I
\.J
0
0
\uP
0
0 0 0 0 0 C) 0
1/"'""'\
"'-pi
()
"-...1
t"
\...)
f' "'.
\,j
"-
"
"
/'
("·-~I
~
(~.
(/
( _.. (
_/
(
(/
{
(/
(/
C L
(
c
(
FEATURES
SECURITY KEYLOCK (Optional Feature)
AUDIBLE ALARM FEATURE
The Security Keylock feature is an optional feature and may
not be installed on all systems. On the 4341, it has the
following characteristics:
A high-pitched tone sounds for about one second when the
audible alarm is activated on the display console.
•
A hardware feature on the display console.
Security keylock microcode is installed on all systems, but
is only activated when the Security Keylock feature is
installed.
•
All functions are normal when:
-
Security Keylock feature is not installed
Security Keylock feature is ON.
When Security Keylock is OFF:
-
-
Keyboard is locked
Console is blank
INHIBITED indicator on line 25 is on
Intervention required is the response to application
programs
No power-on/IML can be done.
Note: If the main display console is off and the
Power-On/IML key is pressed, a message appears on the
screen of all unlocked and operational display consoles on
the system. This indicates that the CHG DPLY key should
be pressed on the console from which the power-on/IML is
to continue. The key is ignored if it is pressed on a console
with the security lock in the OFF position, However, if the
lock is turned to the ON position and the CHG DPLY key is
pressed, the power-on/IML continues from that console.
The audible alarm always sounds when you enter a
character into the next to last character pOSition on your
screen. The cursor wraps from the last character position on
the screen after a character is keyed into that last position.
This is normal operation. The alarm warns that to key
another character after the cursor has wrapped, enters it into
the first character position on line 1 of your screen and
destroys the data already displayed there.
The computer program can also activate the alarm. To do
so, the program sends a signal to your display. The User's
Guide for that program indicates if the audible alarm will
sound and, if so, the different reasons for sounding it.
The volume of the audible alarm is adjustable. The
adjustment control is located at the outside of the screen.
Generally, it has been set for a normal operating environment.
To test the volume level. the next-to-Iast character position
must be in an unprotected input field. If your display station
does not have have an unprotected input field in this area of
the screen, check the application program User's Guide or
ask your supervisor for instructions to obtain one. When you
have an unprotected input field in this area of this area of the
screen, move the cursor and key in a character in the
next-to-Iast position on the screen. Then, listen to the level
of the alarm. To check the sound level again, press the
backspace key and then a character key. If the sound is not
at the desired volume, adjust the alarm control and test the
sound level again. When the volume is adjusted for your
environment, press the ERASE INPUT key.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 2676423
44 071
1 of 1
~/
o
o o
0
o
0···00··0
(""\
\J
o o o
I~
'~
..
.,".-...
..
('\
(~, .....
(-,
C
(~
~
(,
(/ (
(
(,
.(.
{' (-
'
/
(-
(
3287 PRINTER
PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS
The 3287 Printer Model 1 or 2 is a compact, desk-top, matrix
printer with a nominal print rate of 80 characters per second
(cps) for Model 1 and 120 characters per second for Model 2.
The 3287 Printer Models 1C and 2C print in four colors:
red, blue, green, and black. The basic printer prints fields in
one of four colors as determined by the existing field
protection and intensity attributes.
The 3287 Model 1C rate is 80 cps and the 2C is 120 cps at
maximum print rate for each color on a line. Print positions
1-120 can be printed in any of the four colors. Print positions
121-132 can only be printed in black.
A maximum of three hard-copy printers (3287s) can be on
each system, but none is standard. If a hard-copy printer is
installed, it must be configured on the System Configuration
screen (QFS). When a 3287 is optionally coupled as a
hard-copy device in printer/keyboard mode, it prints ail data
transferred across the channel interface. The data is arranged
in lines of 126 or less characters as they would appear on a
printer/keyboard printer. Each line is printed as soon as it is
completed. A line is complete when one of the following
conditions occurs:
126 bytes of data are received.
•
A new-line character (X'15') is found in a Write or
Write-ACR command data stream.
•
All data is received on a Write-ACR command.
o
After a Read command is executed.
•
A system or selective reset occurs.
Note that. after a Write command (X'01') is executed, if a
complete line has not been accumulated, the last partial line
is not printed. The data is accumulated in the 3287 buffer
and is printed when the line is compJeted by succeeding
commands. The printer appears busy to a COpy key request .
at this time.
A system or selective reset causes a line feed if no data is
present in the buffer.
The 3287 Printer provides an automatic printout when
attached to the system in printer/keyboard mode, or it can be
separately addressed by the system and it responds with the
equivalent 3270 status and sense information, when the
hard-copy printer is in display mode.
Copy Mode
The 3287 can be used to obtain local copies from the
Display Console that is in manual mode, when the following
conditions are met:
•
A copy key device has been configured. The 3287 to be
used for local copy must be specified on the Program
load screen (Ql) or by using the K-selection. This makes
the 3287 available for shared use with the operating
system.
•
The 3287 is not busy. The 3287 can be busy because of
the following conditions:
In display mode, the 3287 is executing a 3270 CCW
command, or the last write command does not specify
Start Print in the WCC. In this condition, the printer is
considered to have accepted data in preparation for a
later print operation.
In printer/keyboard mode, an incomplete line is being
saved in the 3287 buffer for later printing.
-
•
A previous COpy key request is not complete.
The 3287 is operational.
The copy operation overwrites the 3287 buffer with the
console display buffer. After printing is completed, the 3287
buffer is cleared. The printer output is formatted in 80 lines
with NL, EM, and CR characters printed as spaces. Null lines
are suppressed.
If a CCW command is received while a local copy is in
progress, the command is queued until copy is complete.
The command is then executed normally.
Audible Alann
An audible alarm sounds a continuous, one-second beep
when the 3287 printer enters the end-of-form condition or
when a host-initiated request is received. The audible alarm
is also operational in offline mode. The audible alarm knob,
located under the left platen access cover, controls the alarm
voillme.
To reset the alarm, press HOLD PRINT, and then press
ENABLE PRINT.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379824 16Jan81
.~
PN 5666355
1 of 1
44075
'\
)
(-''''\
\",~
0 0 0 0 0 ()
"
o
r"",
"u
~'""
,~.
\~J'J
Irr).
I
.
~.
o
c
c
(
(~
(
(/
(
c
c c
(
(~
MODES OF OPERATION
PRINTER/KEYBOARD MODE
80
column:
line:
lr-----L----------//'--------------------------------------------~
The printer ikeyboard emulation mode allows the system to
run operating systems and programs designed for that type of
operator console.
DIS P LAY ARE A
In printer/keyboard mode, the display console shares the
same address with a 3287 Printer. The 3287 Printer prints all
data read from or written to the main console display. The
main console displays 18 lines instead of the normal 20 lines.
A maximum of 126 characters can be entered at one time
from the console display keyboard. Line 19 and columns
1-46 of line lOare reserved for data input. Columns 48- 79
of line 20 are for indicators when in printer/keyboard mode.
During printer /keyboard mode, hard-copy cannot be
obtained, if a printer is not coupled or the system does not
heve a printer attached. The addresStes are assigned and the
coupling assigned from the Program Load screen. For more
detail about assignments, see "Program load Screen." The
main display console and printer responds to
printer /keyboard commands and send status and sense
information back to the system. The following sections
provide detailed information on using the display console and
3287 Printer in printer/keyboard mode.
The printer/keyboard mode is called emulation mode in
some of the 4341 documents. In this manual,
printer / keyboard operations are referred to as
printer/kfIYboard mode or Ptr/Kybd mode. The Display
Consoles and 3287 Printers are attached to the 4341
Processor via the support processor and are addressed via
I/O instructions to channel 0 addresses. The device
addresses used on channel 0 and the coupling assignment are
selected by the operator and can be modified at any time. A
maximum of two printer/keyboard devices can be configured
at one time. The standard configuration of the 4341 system
has one 3278- 2A Display Console or 3279-2C which is the
optional Display Console. Optional features allow three
additional 3278-2A/3279-2C/3287 devices to be attached.
These are configured from the Program Load screen. The
3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard has 75 keys including 12
program function keys. All alphameric, graphic, and cursor
control keys are typamatic.
19
20
21
..---------/ / - - INPUT AREA
iNDICATOR AREA
~-------------------/I-------------
SYSTEM STATUS AREA
24
25
Input Area
The input area is defined by an attribute at line 18 column 80
and contains 126 characters on lines 19 and 20. This area is
unprotected only when a Read command is in progress
(PROCEED displayed). At other times, it is protected from
operator alteration. The operator may enter and modify data
for the Read, up to 126 characters, in this ares. When the
ENTER or CNCl key is pressed, the data in the input area is
transferred across the channel. Data accepted by the channel
for a Read command is moved to the display area and
printed. If the channel stopped data transfer before all data
entered by the operator is sent, only that data accepted
appears in the display area.
The field initially contains all nulls. These are compressed
out of the Read data and not transferred to the channel. The
SPACE BAR must be used to enter spaces. Cursor
movement keys leave nulls in the input area which are
compressed from the data.
~------------/I'----------------------------------------------~
OPERATOR INFORMATION AREA
~--------------//----------------------------------------~
Display Console
Display Area
In printer/keyboard mode, the entire 20-lin8 system mode
screen is controlled by the emulation module. After the
screen is in printer/k::yboard mode and made ready, the
operator is only able to enter data on the screen when a Read
command is issued. At other times. the entire display is
protected from operator alteration.
The display area starts in line 1 column 1 and ends on line 18
column 79. lines 1 -18 display the last 18 lines written or
read to the device i3278-2A/3279·-2CI. Lines 19 and 20 are
a 126-cilarscter input area with line 20 columns 48-79 used
for emulate indicators. The data is organized into lines
corresponding to lines of printer/keyboard printer output.
Each new line begins in column 1 of a display area line. A
line !onger than 80 characters (the display area line length),
wraps to the next line in the display area, to a maximum of
126 characters (the printer line length). When the 18-line
display area is filled. the next new line causes the display
area to be scrolled by 6 lines. lines 7-18 move to the top of
of the screen, and lines 13-18 are cleared and ready for
additional input.
In order to allow the maximum amount of data to be
displayed at all times in the display area, multiple New line
characters (NL=X'15') in a write data stream result in only one
blank line on the display. Multiple blank lines caused by Nl
characters are displayed as only one blank line. This prevents
data from being scrolled off the screen in cases where New
line characters are added to space the printer output.
Note: Line 25 of the display console is used exclusively for
indication of console and keyboard status.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379814 020ct81
C IBM Corp. 1981
PN 5666356
1 of 4
44085
c
(
Indicator Area
The indicator area is a brightened field on line 20 columns
48-79 and is 32 characters in length. Columns 47 and 80 are
attribute characters. This area is used to contain visual
indicators signaling the state of the printer/keyboard device
•being emulated.
.
The indicators displayed on line 20 are PROCEED.
REQUEST. ALARM. and INlV-REQO. They are used in
printer/keyboard mode. This brightened field highlights the
indicators above that of data.
Proceed
This indicator appears whenever there is a Read command in
progress. Only at this time may the operator enter data in
the input area. PROCEED is cleared when the READ
command is ended. by one of the following conditions:
•
Normal ending caused by ENTER or CNCL key.
o
A system or selective reset.
•
A Halt Device or Halt I/O instruction issued to the device.
Sense
Printer/Keyboard Mode Commands
The printer/keyboard mode accepts and executes all
commands valid for a printer / keyboard type device. The
valid commands and the normal status response received are:
Command
Write
Write-ACR
Read-Inquiry
Sense
Sense I/O
NOP
Alarm
Hex
Value
Initial
Status
Ending
Status
Async.
Status
01
09
OA
00
00
00
00
00
CE+DE
CE+DE
CE
CE
CE
CE+DE
CE+DE
DE
DE
DE
04
E4
03
OB
A brief description of each command is summarized in the
following section. In the descriptions. a 3287 Printer is
assumed to be coupled as a hard-copy device. If no printer
is coupled. ending status for a command is presented to the
channel after the data has been placed in the
3278-2A/3279-2C display area.
Command Definitions (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
. Request
This indicates that a REQ (Request) key attention status has
been stacked because the device is busy executing a
command. When the current operation is completed. the
attention status is presented to the channel and the
REQUEST indicator is cleared. A system or selective reset
also clears the REQUEST indicator.
Alarm
This indicator appears and the audible alarm sounds
whenever an Alarm command is reCeived. The indicator is
cleared by one of the following:
•
Pressing a Program Function (PF) key at any time.
•
Pressing the ENTER .or CNCL key when PROCEED is not
displayed.
•
System or selective reset condition.
The Intervention-Required indicator appears if the 3287
Printer coupled as a hard-copy device becomes not ready.
This condition can occur when end-of-form. power off. or
other check conditions are present. At this time. a Start I/O
is not accepted. When the check condition is cleared. the
indicator is cleared. and device-end status is presented to the
channel.
Bit No.
Code
Explanation
CR
IR
BOC
EC
Command Reject
Intervention Required
Bus-Out Check
Equipment Check
Unused; always 0
Unused; always 0
Unused; always 0
Unused; always 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
This control command causes the audible alarm on the
display console to be sounded and the ALARM indicator to
be displayed. if the display is NOT READY, the command
functions as a NOP. Immediate channel end and device end
are presented as initial status for this command. The
command is accepted even if an intervention-required
condition exists.
NOP
This control command results in an immediate channel end
and device end. No action is performed in the device.' This
command may be used to cause a command chain to end
with a combined channel end and device end.
When the Read-Inquiry command is received. the input area
is unprotected and the PROCEED indicator is displayed. The
command then waits until the operator signals that data entry
is completed by pressing the ENTER or CNCL key. If the
ENTER key is pressed. the data is read from the input area
and transferred to the channel. A channel end is presented
after data transfer; then any data the channel accepted is
written to the display area and printed on the printer. If the
CNCL key is pressed. a channel end with unit exception
status is presented to the channel. and an asterisk (*1 is
written to the display area and printed. After printing is
completed. in either of the above cases. device end is sent to
terminate the command.
Timing (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
In printer/keyboard mode. the time taken to execute a
command differs from all other printer/keyboard devices.
Typically. the time from SIO to channel end is much shorter.
and the time from channel end to device end is longer. This
is because buffering takes place. and printing is not started
until a complete line is received. When running in uncoupled
mode (3278-2A or 3279-2C without 3287 Printer). a timing
delay of 0.5 seconds per line is added to keep the displiiyarea from changing faster than it can be read.
Keyboard Deviations (Printer/Keyboard Mode)
Sense I/O
The Sense I/O command facilitates device type identification.
If the device. is not busy the data transferred (in
printer / keyboard mode) is a constant seven bytes:
X' FF4341 001 05200'. This command is executed even when
the device is not ready.
Alarm
Read-Inquiry
Intv-Reqd
One byte of sense information is transferred in response to a
Sense command. After the sense byte is accepted.
channel-end and device-end status are presented as ending
status. The sense byte is reset at the initiation of any
command except a NOP. The sense byte is reset after the
Sense command is executed. The sense byte is defined
below:
Restrictions and Deviations (Printer/Keyboard
Mode)
.
Write
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard differs in both the
number of keys and the keyboard layout. All of the keys on
the 3278-2A and 3279-2C can be used even if the printer
has no corresponding key. It is. therefore, possible to read
and write characters which are not implemented on a
printer /keyboard device. The CARRIAGE RETURN key on a
printer /keyboard is not implemented either physically on the
3278-2A/3279-2C or logically in the printer/keyboard
emulation module. Programs which require the use of the
RETURN key do not operate in 4341 printer/keyboard mode.
Upon receipt of the Write command. the data is transferred
from the channel to an internal buffer and then processed, a
line at a time. to the display area on the display console and
printed on the 3287 Printer. When all of the data has been
received. channel-end status is returned. and the last line is
processed. If the last line is not complete (ended with
new-line character or 126 bytes). device-end status is sent
after the data has been placed in the display area and saved
in the printer buffer without printing. If the command ends
with a complete line. device-end status is sent when printing
is finished.
The Write command continues requesting data from the
channel until the channel' stops data transfer. This occurs
when the CCW count reaches zero. Therefore. incorrect
length channel status is always indicated with a zero residual
count unless the Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator (SILl)
flag is on in the CCW.
Write-ACR (Automatic Carriage Return)
This command is executed identically to the Write command
except at the end of data processing. The printer performs
the automatic carriage return. and perform the automatic
carriage return.
Model Groups 1 and 2
......,,,,,
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379814 020ct81
PN 5666356
,'.,
--
44090
20f4
o
o
()
o o o
r)
~',
!e)
,
.
o
r:\
(", (--
C,
(~,I
(-~~I
(/
(/
C
DISPLAY MODE
(
(/
(/
(:
(-/
(/
0
(
(
...
column:
80
line: lr-----------------------------------------------------------------------,
The display mode of operation enables the 4341 to run
operating systems and programs designed for cathode-ray
tube (CRT) type console with IBM 3270 support. For detailed
information on IBM 3270 support, refer to IBM 3270
Information Display System Component Description,
GA27-2749.
DIS P lAY ARE A
The console devices appear to the software as local channel
attached devices that support the 3272 command set. Each
console device appears as a separate address to the
operating system. A maximum of four console devices is
supported: the standard 3278-2A or the optional 3279-2C
and up to three optional 3278-2A/3279-2C/3287 devices in
any combination.
The display console provides a 20-line (1600-byte) user
accessible buffer. The last four lines on the display are
reserved for displaying 4341 Processor status and- are not
available to the user for either reading or writing. The 3287
Printers has a 24-line (1920-byte) user accessible buffer.
The device addresses to be used in display mode are
selectable by the operator by using the Console Functions
Program Load screen (QlI.
Display Console
When the display console is in display mode, the entire
20-line user buffer is controlled by software. The usar buffer
may be accessed by 3270 Read, Write. and Control
commands. lines 21 through 24 are reserved to display 4341
Processor status. Any attempt to access lines 21 through 24
by the user is rejected as invalid buffer addresses and causes
an operation check sense byte to be set. A 25th line,
separated from the other lines by a solid line, displays
console status indicators. line 25 is also unavailable to the
user. The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard is for
communicating with system. In display mode, the display
contains an operating system or user-defined screen that may
be either formatted or unformatted. Formatted screens
contain fields that can be protected or unprotected from
keyboard alteration, brightened for highlighting purposes, or
nondisplayable for security reasons.
c
(/ (~
(~
Read Buffer
This command causes all data in the device buffer to be
transferred to main storage. The data stream consists of a
read heading followed by the device buffer data. The read
heading is three bytes: a 1-byte AID character followed by a
2-byte cursor address. The buffer data has a Start Field (SF)
character inserted before each attribute byte to identify the
beginning of each field.
Read Modified
20
21~----------------------------------------------------------_1
PROCESSOR STATUS AREA
24~------------------------------------------------------~
25
OPERATOR INFORMATION AREA
Display Area
Command Definitions (Display Mode)
Lines 1 through 20 on the display are system input and
output areas. This area is organized and used as defined by
the operation of the system.
EAU (Erase All Unprotected)
Display Mode Commands
In display mode, the display console and 3287 Printer accept
and execute all commands valid for a 3272 Control Unit. The
valid commands and the normal status responses received
are:
Command
Hex
Value
Write
Erase/Write
Read Buffer
Read Modified
Sense
Sense I/O
NOP
Select
EAU
01
05
02
06
04
E4
03
DB
OF
Initial
Status
00
00
00
00
00
00
CE+DE
CE
CE
Ending
Status
Async.
Status
CE
CE
CE+DE
CE+DE
CE+DE
CE+DE
DE
DE
DE
DE
A brief description of each command is summarized in the
following section. In the descriptions, the 3278-2A/3279-2C
or 3287 is assumed to be ready and no programming or
device errors occur. References to a device refer to either a
3278-2A or 3279-2C Display Console or a 3287 Printer.
This command causes all unprotected fields in the device
buffer to be cleared to nulls. The Modified Data Tags (MDT)
are reset to zero for each unprotected field, and the cursor is
positioned to the first unprotected character location on the
screen. Channel-end status is presented as initial status to
the SIO, and device-end status is sent when the erase is
completed.
Erase/Write
This command performs two functions: a buffer erase
operation, then a write operation. The erase operation clears
the device buffer to nulls and sets the cursor and current
buffer address to location O. The write operation is
performed exactly as the Write command.
NOP
This control command results in an immediate channel end
and device end. No action is performed in the device. This
command can be used to cause a command chain to end
with a combined channel end and device end or to modify the
initial buffer address position for a subsequent command in a
chain.
The Read Modified command performs one of two functions
based on the value of the current AID character. A Short
Read is performed if the AID character is from a REQ (PA1)
or CNCL (PA2) key. The Short Read only transfers the AID
byte to identify which key was pressed (no data is included).
The read modified data function is performed for all other
AID characters. The data stream consists of a read heading
and the data from modified fields. The read heading consists
of the AID character and the two-byte cursor address. The
data for each modified field is preceded by a Set Buffer
Address order code with a two-byte buffer address of the
first character position in the field (the attribute address + 1).
An unformatted screen results in a read modified data stream
consisting. of the read heading and all data in the buffer
because modification of data cannot be determined. All null
characters are suppressed from the data transferred.
Select
This control command is implemented for 3270 compatibility,
and no function is performed internally. Channel-end status
is presented as initial status to the SIO, and device-end
status is generated immediately after.
Sense
One byte of sense information is transferred in response to a
Sense command. After the sense byte is accepted,
channel-end and device-end status are presented as ending
status. The sense byte is reset at the initiation of any
command except a NOP. The sense byte is reset after the
Sense command is executed. The sense byte is defined
below:
Bit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Code
Explanation
CR
IR
BOC
EC
DC
US
CC
OC
Command Reject
Intervention Required
Bus-Out Check
Equipment Check
Data Check
Unit Specify
Control Check
Operation Check
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379814 020ct81
PN 5666356
30f4
44095
Sense I/O
Restrictions and Deviations (Display Mode)
The Sense I/O command facilitates device-type identification.
If the device is not busy, the data transferred (in display
mode) is a constant seven bytes: X'FF43410032782A' for
3278-2A Display Console. 3279-2C FF43410032792C and
X'FF434100328700' for a 3287 or 3268 Printer. This command is
executed even when the device is not ready.
Timing
The time taken to execute a command may differ from other
3270 control units/devices. Programs depending on the time
to execute a command cannot be assumed to operate
correctly in display mode.
Write
Upon receipt of the Write command, the data is transferred
from the channel to an internal buffer and then processed to
the device. When all of the data has been received,
channel-end status is returned, and the last buffer is
processed. Device-end status is sent after the last buffer has
been processed.
The Write command continues requesting data from the
channel until the channel stops data transfer when the CCW
count reaches zero. Therefore, incorrect length channel status
is always indicated by a zero residual count unless the
Suppress Incorrect Length indicator (Sill) flag is on in the
CCW.
MANUAL MODE
3278-2A and 3279-2C Buffer
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C buffer is not completely available
for use by the Operating System or user program. Lines 21
through 24 are reserved for 4341 Processor use and are
unavailable for programmed use. Therefore, programs written
for a 24 line 3270 terminal do not execute correctly without
some alterations. Generally, an attempt to use such a
program results in an error when access lines 21 through 24
is attempted. The error causes unit-check status to be
presented and operation-check sense to be set.
•
CNCL (PA21 key -
Moved to a different position
REO (PAl) key -
Moved to a different position
•
CLEAR key -
•
TEST REO key DUP key -
•
Not implemented
Processor IML, IPL, and resetting of the system
Display / alter functions
•
CE functions
•
TOO and timer control
•
START, STOP, and INTR keys.
All of the manual function facilities are displayed on the
General Selection screen (0). For detailed information, refer
to "Manual Functions."
Keyboard Deviations
The 3278-2A and 3279-2C keyboard differs from a standard·
3277 or 3278 keyboard layout. Several keys are either not in
the standard position or not implemented. Programs requiring
the keys that have not been implemented may not be able to
use the 3278-2A and 3279-2C for a input device. For the
following keys a difference exists between the 3278-2A
/3279-2C and other 3270 display units.
In manual mode, the following functions are provided:
Operation Check Error Handling
Write command data is internally buffered before it is
processed and written to the device. Therefore, an operation
check as the result of an invalid buffer address is not
detected when the invalid data byte is received from the
channel but at some later time. It is likely that more data has
been received from the channel and possibly that channel end
may have been sent before the operation check occurred.
The residual count field is unpredictable in this case and
cannot be used to determine precisely the location of the
error in the write data stream.
Display Console
In manual mode, the screen configuration depends upon the
function that is being used. For detailed information, refer to
Manual Functions.
Not implemented
Not implemented
FIELD MARK key -
Not implemented
Several 3278/3279-only functions involving 3274/3276
Control Units also differ on the 3278-2A and 3279-2C from
a standard 3278-2.
•
Cursor blinking and reverse functions not available.
Keyboard clicker selection function not alterable. The
clicker is set to click when keyboard unlocks and cannot
be changed.
Local print function keys and matrix not available.
Insert mode reset 3277 -compatible, instead of 3278,
3279-compatible.
•
Line 25 indicators patterned after 3277 indicators, not
3278 symbols.
Keys used for SNA/SDLC functions (SYS REO and ATTN)
not implemented.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379605 06Mar81
EC 379814 020ct81
PN 5666356
44096
40f4
/,,--
.--~
"-..j
,c\
"-..
0
"c'\
,/\
"-...j
'-/
r"\
~i
,c-"
.
"---~
I
(\
"'-~
f\
"_.J
,~
"'J
r"\
('~
,c\
\....j
\~
~
.
I
0
f"\
'''-...)
0
(~
,
"'_../
\.
(~I
.J
(j
f''''
/\
!
J
/--"
f)
"
~
(/
Console/Printer Sensing Conditions
Hold-Print Timeout (3287 Only)
The following sensing conditions can occur while operating
the system.
When the hold-print condition has lasted more than ten
minutes. an intervention-required condition exists and is
reported to a Sense command.
Not Ready
When the device is not ready. all commands except Sense
are rejected.
Power Off
When the device is not powered on. an intervention-required
condition exists and is reported to a Sense command.
Test Mode
When the device is in test mode (TEST/NORMAL switch in
TEST position). an intervention-required condition exists and
is reported to a Sense command.
Device Not Functional
If the device hardware is failing. or the device is not
connected or configured correctly. an intervention-required or
equipment-check condition exists and is reported to a Sense
command.
End-of-Forms (3287 Only)
(
(
Operation Check (Display Mode)
An operation-check occurs when invalid data is received in
the data for a Write or Erase/Write command. This error is a
programming error which cannot be recovered from by
software retry. A programmer must inspect the data to locate
the invalid condition. The following conditions may cause an
operation check:
Invalid buffer address specified in a SBA. RA. or EUA
order. A buffer address is invalid when it references a
location past the end of the user buffer area (20 lines on a
3278-2A/3279-2C or 24 lines on a 3287).
Incomplete order sequence for SBA. RA. EUA. or SF
order. An order requiring multiple data bytes was not
complete at the end of the data stream.
The start print bit was set in the WCC for a Write or
Erase/Write command and chaining is indicated. Printing
is suppressed and command chaining is canceled.
An operation check sets unit-check and device-end status
to be sent. combined with channel end. if it has not already
been sent. The residual count in the channel status word is
unpredictable and cannot be used to determine the location of
the invalid order. The device buffer is modified with all data
processed before the invalid order.
When the end-of-forms· switch indicates no paper is in the
printer. and a one-minute timeout condition occurs. an
intervention-required condition exists and is reported to a
Sense command. This delay is incorporated in the 3287 to
allow the operator to correct the end-of-forms condition and
have the 3287 automatically continue printing with no errors
reported or software retry required. The end-of-forms
condition causes the audible alarm to sound until the HOLD
PRINT switch is pressed. The end-of-forms should be
cleared by pressing the HOLD PRINT switch. replacing the
forms. then pressing the ENABLE PRINT switch to allow
printing to continue.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379824 16Jan81
PN 5666358
1 of 1
44115
~ooooooooooooooooooooooooooou
( '" C ('-- C
-
. .iIi
:/
-
',;/
'"
~\
/'
/
-
"~
C
(~' ",
-\
'
"
"
~
,
(~
CC
c
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECURITY KEYlOCK (Optional Feature)
AUDIBLE ALARM FEATURE
The Security Keylock Feature is an optional feature and may
not be installed on all systems. On the 4341, it has the
following characteristics:
The 3278 display can be equipped with an audible alarm.
This is a feature of your display that can't be seen but that
you should be aware of.
•
A hardware feature on the 3278 Display Console 2A.
•
Security Keylock microcode is installed on all systems; but
it is only activated when the Security Keylock Feature is
installed.
A high-pitched tone sounds for about one second everytime
the audible alarm is activated.
•
All functions are normal when:
- Security Keylock Feature is not installed
- Security Keylock Feature is ON.
•
When Security Keylock is OFF:
Keyboard is locked
Console is blank
- INHIBITED indicator on line 25
INTERVENTION REQUIRED response to application
programs
All functions NORMAL when switched from OFF to
ON
No Power-On/IML.
Note: If the main console is in the OFF state, and the
Power-On/IML key is pressed, a message appears on the
screen of all unlocked and operational 3278-2A consoles on
the system indicating that the CHG DPLY key should be
pressed on the console from which the Power-On/IML is to
continue. The key is ignored if it is pressed on a console
with the security lock in the OFF position. However, if the
lock is turned to the ON position Bnd the CHG DPLY key is
pressed, the Power-On/IML will continue from that console.
,"
The computer program that you are working with also can
activate the. alarm. To do so, it sends a signal to your
display. The user's guide for that program will tell you if the
audible alarm will sound and, if so, the different reasons for
sounding it.
The volume of the audible alarm is adjustable. The
adjustment control is located at the outside of the screen
contrast control. Generally, it has been set for your operating
environment. To test the volume level, the next-to-Iast
character position must be in an unprotected input field. If
your display station does not have have an unprotected input
field in this area of the screen, check the application program
User's Guide or ask your supervisor for instructions to obtain
one. When you have an unprotected input field in this area
of this area of the screen, move the cursor and key in a
character in the next-to-Iast position on the screen: then,
listen to the level of the alarm. To check the sound level
again, press the backspace key and, then, a character key. If
the sound is not at the desired volume, adjust the alarm
control and test the sound level again. When the volume
setting is correct, press the ERASE INPUT key.
EC 376695 16Aug79
EC 379586 19Nov79
,
@ 'IBM
The audible alarm always sounds when you enter a
character into the next to last character position on your
screen. The cursor wraps from the last character position on
the screen after a character is keyed into that last position.
This is normal operation. If you key another character after
the cursor has wrapped, it will be entered into the first
character position on line 1 of your screen. In this situation,
you wouldn't want to key on line 1 because doing so would
destroy the data already displayed there. In this case, the
alarm is warning you.
Corp. 1,979
PN 5666359
1 of 1
44125
/
.~
c c c c
(-
(
(
(
(/
.... ~
./
(~
SYSTEM STATUS
The system status information is applicable to each mode of
screen operation. Lines 21-24 of the display contain
information concerning the state of the system.
Field 7
370
1 -
Displayed when the processor is in 370 mode.
2
3
4
VSE
Displayed when the processor is in virtual storage extended
mode.
Line 21
--Message Area (20 lines)
Field 8
Field 1
19
Unused.
20-
Field 2
21
MAN
Displayed when the processor is in stop state.
-1- -2- --3- --4- --5- -6-
-7-
----8---- ---9/10---
MAN WAIT TEST LOAD
SAVE
370
VSE
TIMER:ON OPERATING
OFF INSTR STOP
MATCH STOP
CLOCK STOP
CHECK STOP
MACH CHECK
Field 3
WAIT
Displayed when the processor is in wait state.
22
----11---- 12--13- --14-DATA: XXXX
ADDR: XXXXXX
V-ADDR:
R-ADDR:
CSAR:
-----15----- ------16----- ---17---- -----------------18-----------------------RATE: I-STEP CHK: NORM-C
TOO: ENBL ADDR-COMP: STOP TYPE: ANYREF V-ADDR: XXXXXX
NRTY-C
TRWR
IO-REF R-ADDR:
HOST -C
TRST
D-STOR V-DATA: XXXXEQ./NE
DSBL-C
I-CNTR R-DATA:
AE/AN
Field 4
TEST
Displayed when :
M-STEP
P-STEP
C-STEP
F-REPM
1. A control (Compare/Trace (OA). Check (OK). Operation
Rate (00). or Display/Alter PSW and I/O (ODTC)) is not
in its normal state.
NORM
NRTY
H-ST
DSBL
CH
CH
CH
CH
I-C 1- H
I-C 1- H
I-C 1- H
1 C 1- H
2. The CE switch is on for maintenance or service.
Field 5
23
LOAD
Displayed during program load. This field becomes blank
when the new PSW is successfully loaded.
SAVE
Displayed after a completion of a successful machine
save/store status. It becomes blank on the next system
reset (including an IPL).
24
25
Field 6
Unused.
SYNC
H-ST
MWTR
MBTR
MICWRD
LS-SRC
LS-DES
CH-SEQ
CH-DAT
CSW
pppPSW
iii lOP
-----------19-----------
--------20------------ -21a- -21b- -------21c--------- SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING BLOCK 4341 RC=XXXXXXXX Ext Code
C< Message Area
>
LOG FAILURE IGNORED
RETRY PENDING
block message area
-22- 23-24- -------------------------25---------------'------- -------26--------XXX X
XXXX
.
(CE Use Only)
(CE Use Only)
idid F:a A:xxxx D:hhhh hhhh hhhh hhhh I:iiii=hhhh E:dd ----SP trace---Display Console Status Inf.ormation
INSERT MODE
INHIBITED
DISPLAY MODE
USAGE CO NFL I CT
PTR/KYBD MODE
MANUAL CONTROL
PTR-BUSY
DISCONNECTED
PTR-I NTV REQD
PTR-CHECK
TIMER: ON/OFF
ON is displayed when the timer is on; OFF is displayed when
the timer is off.
Field 9/10
OPERATING
Displayed when processor is in operating state.
STOP
Indicators INSTR, MATCH, CLOCK, and CHECK display
condition when the machine stops. INSTR STOP can be
caused by pressing the STOP key.
MACH CHECK
Displayed when the processor fails to operate or when error
retry is in progress.
Field 11
DATA:
Displays contents at the related address (field 14) when 'the
processor is in instruction-stop or match-stop state. The
field is blank if processor is operating.
Fields 12-14
ADDR:
Indicates that the processor is in VSE mode. The address
displayed on a stop is the location of the next instruction.
V-ADDR:
Indicates that the processor is in 370 mode and that it is
operating with virtual addresses.
R-ADDR:
Indicates that the processor is in 370 mode and is operating
with real addresses.
CSAR:
Indicates that the processor is totally stopped (clock stopped).
This occurs only in CE mode or momentarily during some
manual functions. The value displayed is the address of the
current control storage address placed in the CSARBU
register.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379824 16Jan81
EC 379607 OSJun81
(I)
IBM Corp. 1981
PN 5666360
10f3
44135
..,...
Line 22
Field 15
RATE:
Displays setting of the RATE control.
I-STEP
P-STEP
M-STEP
C-STEP
Instruction Step
Pulse step (CE display)
Microword step (CE display)
Clock step (CE display) .
When the repeat microword function (CE only) is on. RATE:
f-REPM appears on line 22: where "f" represents the rate
function (I. P. W. or C). A blank indicates a normal setting.
Field 16
CHK:
Displays the setting of the check control.
NORM-XX
NRTY-XX
HOST-XX
DSBL-XX
where:
XX· C Stop after Log is set.
XX = H if Channel Check is set.
XX = CH if both Stop after Log and Channel Check are set.
XX • Blank. if neither Stop after Log nor Channel Check is
set.
Field 17
TOD:ENBL
Indicates that the Set Clock instruction is enabled. A blank
indicates a normal setting where a Set Clock is inhibited (TOO
is secured).
Field 18
Line 23
ADDR-COMP:
Displays the setting of the compare/trace control action
selection.
Field 19
STOP
TRWR
TRST
SYNC
H-ST
MWTR
MBTR
= Softstop
Trace wrap
= Trace stop
= Sync (CE use only)
= Hardstop (CE use only)
= Trace microword (CE use only)
= Trace microbranch (CE use only)
TYPE:
Displays the type of compare made.
ANYREF
10-REF
D-STOR
I-CNTR
MICWRD
LS-SRC
LS-DES
CH-SEQ
CH-DAT
CSW
pppPSW
ooolOP
= Any reference
= I/O reference
Data store
Instruction counter
= Microword (CE use only)
= Local store source (CE use only)
Local store destination (CE use only)
CHANNEL-SEQ CNT
= CHANNEL-DATA
= CSWs
PSW SWAPS (ppp = MCK. PCK. etc.)
I/O operations (000 = 510. TIO. etc.)
V-ADDR:
R-ADDR:
V-DATA:
R-DATA:
EQ
NE
AE
AN
Line 24
Field 22
SUPPORT PROCESSOR
For detailed information. see "Messages. Support Processor"
in the "Messages" section.
This field is also used for block messages or errors.
YYYY
Identifies the last program loaded in the support processor
(module 10).
Field 20
Field 23
SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING
Displayed when the screen is in manual mode and a I/O
operation is performed to that address by the program in the
processor. To leave manual mode. use the Z selection or the
CHG DPLY key to allow the screen/keyboard to be used by
the program.
Unused.
Field 24
idid
Same as YYYY if program is loaded.
Note: In printer/keyboard mode. if SYSTEM MESSAGE
WAITING appears immediately after changing the device
address or console mode and if the I/O operation is an
immediate command (for example. alarm). instruction
processing may stop until the operator returns to the
Program screen.
If data module is read, idid identifies the data module read.
If an error occurs on read, idid identifies the module that
was about to be read.
Field 25
Field 218
Field 25 is blank with CE switch inactivated.
BLOCK
Displayed when a block or patch is invoked and stays
displayed until it ends or is halted.
F
Interprets manual ops function selected.
= Real address
Field 21b
o
= Virtual data
This field is for system 10; for example: 4341.
ADDRESS/DATA
Displays the address for the compare or the data contents of
that address if the compare is on data.
= Virtual address
Real data
= Equal
= Not equal
= And equal
.. And not equal
A
Displays address (SP storage).
Displays data at the related address.
I: iiii = hhhh
Interprets instruction counter address and the data at the
related address.
Field 21c
If a data compare is chosen. the selected data and the
characters EQ or NE are shown for the chosen address. If
the address compare screen is reselected. the address
reappears next to the SELECTION label.
--r;' ..
RC (Reference Code)
The eight-digit reference code is an error message from the
operational code. diagnostics. or logout analysis routines.
The reference code is used as an entry to the maintenance
documentation and as a search argument for a symptom/fix
file (RETAIN). The reference code appears brighter than the
normal intenSity.
E:dd
Interprets error code:
AM
AC
DE
FK
OC
PC
BC
Once the ENTER Key is used, the reference code returns to
normal intensity. When a new reference code (error
message) occurs, it appears intensified. The code is cleared
on a system reset.
In addition to the reference code, an extension (also eight
digits) can be provided as required by the' application using
the reference code. The reference code extension has no
fixed format.
Address match
Boundary
Data error
Function key
Operation code
Program check
Bus operation error
Field 26
SP TRACE
Displays SP trace information. It is blank unless activated
from the CE panel by pressing keys A, B. and C.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379824 16Jan81
EC 379607 05Jun81
C) 0
o
o o
r)
\....
..
o
PN 5666360
44140
20f3
o
,
/
~
__ .
c
(
{
(
(
(
(
(-
(-
(
Line 25
Contains the display console status information. For
messages. refer to "Messages."
Column 2
DISPLAY MODE
PTR/KYBD MODE
MANUAL CONTROL
DISCONNECTED
Column 20
INSERT MODE
Column 35
INHIBITED
USAGE CONFLICT
PTR-BUSY
PTR-INTV REQD
PTR-CHK
CONV-CHECK
Notes:
•
The indicator pointer is displayed on line 25. position I,
as soon as power-on response is accepted by the system.
This indicator is not displayed if the display device Test
switch is on.
•
For more detailed information about these indicators, see
"On-Screen Indicators."
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379824 16Jan81
EC 379607 05Jun81
PN 5666360
30f3
44145
r~
,Y
000
c\
c
o o
(,
'c c
(
c
(
MESSAGES
This section defines the following messages:
•
•
•
System Messages
Support Processor Messages
UCW Messages
Program Load Messages
Diskette Build Messages
On-Screen Indicator Messages
Printer / Keyboard Indicator Messages
These messages are displayed on lines 20 through 25 of the
display console. To determine the line numbers refer to
"Display Console." These messages indicate:
•
•
•
Hardware Failures
Operator Errors
System Errors
System States
I/O Errors
ALARM: Alarm was received and the audible alarm
COMPARE/TRACE NOT RESET: The processor unit has
sounded. I ndicator is cleared by any of the following:
stopped and the Compare/Trace function is still in effect.
display is out of tolerance.
Recovery:
Recovery: Start instruction processing (press START key) to
continue with compare/trace function active; or reset
Compare/Trace function if desired (see II Compare /Trace. ")
Recovery: Press the RESET key. If the keyboard can be
reset, the battery has failed, or the color convergence
hardware has failed. (Refer to "3279 Display Terminal
Maintenance Analysis Procedures [MAPs]. ")
Pressing a Program Function (PF) key at any time.
Pressing the ENTER or CNCL key when PROCEED is not
displayed.
•
System or selective reset condition.
ALTER IGNORED: An alter attempt was made, but the
machine is in a state (not a softstop, and so forth) that does
not permit the alter to occur, or you have changed the
SELECTION line on a full-screen alter.
Recovery: Press the STOP key to softstop the machine and
repeat the desired alter function.
CONFG DATA ERR: CONSOLES: The configuration of
the console defined on the diskette is not the same as in SP
storage.
Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and then
perform a SP-IML.
CONFG DATA ERR: UCWS: The number of UCWs
defined on the diskette is not the same as in SP storage.
Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and then
perform a SP-IML.
ALTER WILL BE IGNORED: An attempt to alter data on
ACB VALUE CHANGED BY XXK: Assigned UCWs take
a reserved storage area of 128 UCWs. After this boundary is
passed, each block of 32 UCWs takes an extra 2K of user
storage. This change is reflected in the Address Check
Boundary generated at the next IML.
ADDR COMP REMAINS: An address-compare match is
still waiting to occur even though you issued the OBH
command.
Recovery: To set the address compare to normal, enter QAN.
ADDR CUU ALREADY ASSIGNED: The address
assigned in the Tn or Hn command was assigned to a
non-native device via the UCW assignment screen.
Recovery: Assign the device (Tn or Hn) to an unused address.
ADDRESS ALREADY USED: The address you are trying
to assign was previously assigned.
Recovery: Ensure that proper diskette is installed and the
perform a SP-IML.
ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE: Address of the function
selected for the screen (byte offsets, and so forth) is too high
or too low; or the address is larger than the physical storage
size.
the current screen was ignored. because the current screen
remains displayed after a successful fast-selection operation
on another screen.
Recovery: Pressing the ENTER key restores normal operation
back to the displayed screen.
BLOCK IS AT MATCH-WAIT: A block is running and is
at a Match command waiting for an address compare.
Another block or patch must not be activated at this time.
Recovery: To halt the block enter OBH.
CE LOG MUST HAVE A TITLE: A title must be entered
to have the log displayed in the index.
Recovery: Enter a title name in Log Title (Log 1/).
CHANGES REQUIRE IML: A change to console mode or
console address was made, but could not be communicated
to the processor.
This message also appears on the Mode Assist screen (OLI)
if any changes to the fields are made.
Recovery: To put the changes into effect, re-IML.
CHANNEL 0 UNAVAILABLE: A function requires the
local channel path (channel 0) between the SP and the PU,
and that path is busy with a PU operation.
Recovery: Enter the correct address parameter.
ADDRESS TOO LARGE: Address specified is beyond
what is allowed.
Recovery: Correct the ADDR parameter and re-enter the
function.
Recovery: Retry the function. If the message continues to
display, press the STOP key. A SP re-IML may be needed to
clear a channel program loop to the operator's console, or a
program reset may be required to clear a channel program
loop to channel O. A program reset under these
circumstances takes longer to complete than normal.
CONS PTR NOT CONFIGURED The console printer is
not configured at the Program Load (OL) screen.
Recovery: Configure the Copy key to a console printer on the
Program Load screen. Typically the console printer is set to
KO. A K 1, K2, or K3 must be entered depending on which
native device is the printer. The command must then be
repeated.
CONV-CHECK: The color convergence of the console
DATA BANK MODE ACTIVE: Remote Data Bank mode
initiated. All PU operations are terminated and the SP acts
like a 3275. When Data Bank mode is terminated, power off
and then on.
DATA LINK DISCONNECTED: The DISC key was
pressed, and all remote service was terminated.
DATA NOT ACCESSIBLE: The virtual storage address is
not available to the display / alter function or the UCW data
could not be accessed at this time because the processor is
busy.
Recovery: This virtual address cannot be used in the
display / alter function at this time. Change the address, retry
later, or discontinue the attempt to display / alter. If UCW
data cannot be accessed now, retry later.
DATA NOT ON TAPE: The diskette image is not found on
the tape.
CONSOLE DISK FAILURE: Ten errors occurred on the
same record on the disk during IML. This error may be
accompanied by a reference code.
Recovery: If failure persists or is accompanied by a reference
code, go to Start MAPs.
CONSOLE DISK I/O ERROR: An error occurred during
an attempt to read a program from the disk. This error may
be accompanied by a reference code.
Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs.
CONTROL STORAGE FAILURE:
•
The control storage failed during IML.
•
An error in control storage was detected while running the
Verification test (V1) of the Program Load screen. This
error may be accompanied with a reference code.
Recovery: Retry IML. If it fails again, IML the backup
diskette. If the failure persists, or a reference code is
displayed go to the Start MAPs.
Recovery: Verify that the correct tape is being used and the
correct drive number and part number have been entered.
DEVICE BUSY: A function cannot be performed.
Recovery: Try the function again.
DEVICE CUU IS BUSY: PROCEED (keyboard is unlocked
and waiting for a reply from the device that has the same
address) status is present on a device pair in printer/keyboard
mode when one of the addresses is changed.
Recovery: Press the ENTER key on the display while in
operating system mode, with the PROCEED indicator-on, and
then rekey the changes.
DEVICE Nx CONFIG ERROR: A device is not installed or
not configured correctly (for example: a console installed as a
hard-copy device) on the System Configuration (OFS) screen.
Recovery: Ensure that the device is installed or configured
properly.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379815 12Nov81
EC 379837 28Jun82
PN 5666361
1 of 5
44155
(,
DISCONNECTED: The display console is not logically
connected to the 4341 Processor. The console is not
available to the operating system nor for manual functions.
This condition exists on the display console when no unit
address is assigned (via the Program Load screen) to the
display console.
Recovery: Ensure that the device is configured at the Program
Load screen.
DISKETTE CHECK: A diskette or diskette drive failure
occurred. This error may be accompanied by a reference
code.
Recovery: Check that the diskette drive is operational, and
that the diskette is not damaged. If the error persists, or a
reference code is displayed, go to the Start MAPs.
DISKETTE NOT READY: The diskette drive latch is not
closed. The diskette drive is not ready. The diskette is not
inserted properly. This error may be accompanied with a
reference code.
Recovery: Ensure that the diskette drive door is closed and
that the diskette is inserted properly. If the error persists, or
a reference code is displayed, go to the Start MAPs.
DISPLAY CONSOLE FAILURE: A display to the screen
failed during IML. An error was detected from the console
display. This error may be accompanied with a reference
code.
Recovery: Retry the 1M L; if error persists or a reference code
is displayed, go to the Start MAPs.
DISPLAY MODE: The display console is in the display
mode as indicated on the Program Load screen.
DONE· PUT IN ORIGINAL DISK: The data has been
ENGINEERING DATA ERROR: The engineering level of
the hardware is not compatible with the microcode. This
error may be accompanied by a reference code.
Recovery: Ensure that you have the proper EC level cards to
match the diskettes.
Recovery: Check. the unit status and the channel status to
determine if the problem is with the tape drive, tape control
unit, or the channel.
ENGINEERING DATA FAILURE: An error occurred while
ERROR BUILDING DISKETTE: An error occurred while
resetting the PU hardware with defined values.
trying to write onto the diskette.
Recovery: Retry, or switch to the backup diskette.
Recovery: Ensure that the diskette drive is operational and
verify that the diskette is good by running the Diskette
Readability Test (OED).
ERASE?title: A saved screen is about to be overlayed when
attempting to copy a screen on to the diskette. A second
attempt to copy the screen on to the diskette overlays the
oldest saved screen on the diskette.
Recovery: If oldest copy is to be saved, exit from this
procedure by entering a different command or press the
MODE SELECT key.
ERR· PUT IN ORIGINAL DISK: An error occurred during
the transfer of data. Insert the original diskette (the diskette
that was present when you first entered the transfer function).
Recovery: To get more information about the error, press the
ENTER key.
00
IML of tlie processor.
INCOMPATIBLE SELECTIONS: The combination of
ERROR DURING DATA XFER: An error occurred while
transferring data from the PU to the SP. Verify that the PU is
operational.
Recovery: Go to Start MAPs.
the SP is waiting for a complete signal.
transferred cannot be activated because a block is running
and a match command is waiting for an address compare.
Recovery: To halt the block, enter OBH.
ERR· DISK ERROR: A diskette error occurred.
ERR· NO SPACE IN LIST: The patch or block list space
on the TO diskette is full.
ERR· NOT FOUND IN LIST: A block or patch to be
ERR· PATCH EC NAME WRONG: The patch name
ERROR WHEN STARTING PU: An error occurred when
ERROR WHEN STOPPING PU: An error occurred when
trying to softstop the PU.
Recovery: Run the SBA diagnostics to locate the problem.
EXECUTION TIME XX MINUTES: This is an informative
message about the approximate run time for the selected
diagnostics.
FUNCTION KEY IGNORED: A function key other than
PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN was pressed.
Recovery: Ensure that the TO diskette is the correct one.
(I).
ERR· PATCH IS ACTIVE: The patch being transferred is
Recovery: Select the correct function desired and rekey the
correct command.
IML
INCOMPLETE COMMAND: The required fields for a
function have not been fully specified. The cursor is placed
ready for the missing input.
have not been fully specified. The cursor is placed ready for
the missing input.
Recovery: Enter the missing fields.
Recovery: Go to Start MAPs.
I INVALID WITH M OR P: An attempt occurred to IML
(M) or IPL (P) and at the same time to go to the Assist screen
Recovery: Ensure that you want to transfer this. patch and, if
you do, deactivate the patch on the TO diskette and repeat
the operation.
Recovery: Erase the entry and rekey the correct commands
following the I on the SELECTION line.
INCOMPLETE INPUT: The required fields for a function
does not follow the naming convention.
already active on the TO diskette.
Mode and Assists selected is not permitted. Assists must be
reset before setting VSE mode. Only one Assist can be
specified at a time with 370 mode. A specific Assist cannot
be individually reset. All must be reset; then the new Assist
combination must be entered.
Recovery: Enter the missing fields.
Recovery: Press the MODE SEL key to clear this condition;
then retry the function and check the printer's operation.
starting the processing unit.
ERR· BLOCK AT MATCH·WAIT: The patch being
Recovery: Press the ENTER key to continue.
Recovery: Rekey the correct parameter after the last
command entered on the SELECTION line. When there are
several. duplicate commands, only the last is recognized.
IML.
IML REQUIRED: A function was requested that requires an
ERROR OR SLOW PRINTER: A printer error occurred, or
transferred is not on the FROM diskette.
exists and coupling is improper. The only duplicate address
permitted is a console and printer in printer/keyboard mode.
The cursor moves to the eRd of the SELECTION line.
IMLIN PROG: Displayed during the execution phase of
Recovery: Perform an IML and retry function.
transferred. Insert the original diskette (the diskette that was
present when you first entered the transfer function).
DUPLICATE DEVICE ADDRESS: A duplicate address
ERR :CSW=XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX: An error occwred
while the PU was transferring data from the tape unit.
INHIBITED: All keys except the RESET, START, STOP, and
INTR keys are inhibited.
No mechanical keyboard lock prevents the use of the
keyboard. That is, when input is inhibited, the keys are not
physically locked. You can still press them normally, but
there is no click when a key is pressed. The INHIBITED
indicator appears if you:
•
Attempt to change protected data.
•
Attempt to press two keys at the same time.
•
Cause an overrun condition by pressing keys faster than
they can be processed.
Insert a character into an input field that is full (no null
characters).
Press one of the function keys (PF keys, ENTER; CNCL or
PA2, REO or PA1, MODE SEl. CHG DPLY or the DIAG
key).
COMPlETE~ ~ML execution is complete.
Recovery:
IMl ERROR: An·error was detected while periorming an
Press the RESET key.
IML.
EDIT COMMAND ERROR: An invalid entry was placed in
•
Recovery: Re-IML.
the editing input area.
The application program issues a Write command that
specifies keyboard restore. (This also resets the
PTR-BUSY, PTR-INTV REOD-, or PTR-CHK indicator.)
Recovery: Select the correct function (or blank) and retry.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379815 12Nov81
EC 379837 28Jun82
/"
)
(
--
"'\
'",_./
\~ )
r",\
~.J
0
~_.J
0
\_-YI
0
,0
~
r)
\....,
0 0 0 0 0
0j 0 0 0 0 0
r-\
~)
(-""]
~y
0
~
10
,r"i
0
PN 5666361
2 of 5
~
U
44156
;CO"
~../
-',
'-....../
,
/
, )
'-
('
,/
c
(~
C' (/ C (
' ..'
(,
C (
INSERT MODE: The INSERT key was pressed to insert
characters between existing characters.
Recovery_' Press the RESET key.
(-
(
(
(
0
0
INVALID OPERATION: The operation specified is not
valid for the screen. The cursor is positioned under the
operation character.
Recovery: Enter a valid op code and retry the command.
INTERNAL CONFG DATA ERROR: The modules on the
diskette contain redundant configuration information that does
not agree. The fields in conflict are marked with asterisks.
Recovery: Key in a valid argument for the field.
INVALID PROCESSOR 10: The machine serial number on
the diskette does not match the serial number hardwired in
the machine. The requested function is disabled.
INTV-REQD: The 3287 Printer coupled as a hard-copy
Recovery: Load the correct diskette and re-IML. If the error
persists go to Start MAPs.
device has become not-ready (end-of-form, power-off, or
other check conditions are present).
IPL COMPLETE: The IPL execution is complete.
Recovery: Clear the check condition, and make printer ready.
INVALID ADDRESS: The address field contains an invalid
character, or the address specified is out of the valid range
for this screen. The cursor is positioned under the address.
Recovery: Enter a valid address and retry the command.
iNVALID BLOCK NAME: The block name must not begin
with a P or be longer than eight characters.
IPL DEVICE UNAVAIL-SELlN: For a valid UCW, the
device is not attached, or the METER switch is off.
It also appears when a QCM (machine reset) is selected, but
the system is not hardstopped.
Recovery: Check that the IPL UNIT AD DR is correct on the
Program Load screen. Check any switching devices to ensure
that the device is attached to the system. Check that the
device control unit power is on, and that the METER switch is
on.
Recovery: Respecify the block name.
IPL ERROR: An error occurred while performing an IPL.
INVALID CHAR.CODE: Invalid character or an invalid
combination of characters was used in the CHAR.CODE field.
Recovery: Enter correct characters.
INVALID INPUT: A function letter, an address, or data has
an invalid character entered next to the SELECTION label.
The cursor is under the first character in the error field. This
message also appears if you enter more than the allowed
number of characters on the SELECTION line.
Recovery: Enter the parameter for the function desired and
press ENTER.
INVALID INPUT. CE ONLY: Thl(! function letter requires
the CE MODE switch to be in the CE MODE position.
Recovery: Select the correct function letter, or set the CE
switch to CE MODE and reselect the letter.
INVALID NAME: The name is invalid; it has too many
characters or no name was specified.
Recovery: Specify a valid name.
Recovery: Re-IPL.
IPL I/O ERROR. US/CS=XXXX: An I/O error has
occurred. The unit status/channel status is shown.
Recovery: If US/CS=x2xx, xAxx, or xExx, check that the IPL
device is powered on, ready, and physically attached. Retry
the IPL. If the error persists, go to Start MAPs.
IPL I/O ERROR: No UCW exists for the devices or no valid
IPL record is on tape (for example, the drive is not at load
point).
Recovery 1: Check that the IPL UNIT ADDR is correct on the
Program Load screen. Check that the IPL device contains the
correct disk or tape. Then retry an IPL.
Recovery 2: Ensure that the tape is in a ready state and at
load point. Then retry an IPL.
(-/
Recovery: Check that the IPL UNIT ADDR is correct on the
Program Load screen. Check that the IPL device contains the
correct disk or tape.
C C
KC INVALID WITH M OR P: An IML (M) or IPL (P) was
attempted when the channel printer (KC) option was selected.
(j (/
c:
('
.
/1
(/
(~'
/
C' {'
"
MAIN STG ADDRESS ERROR:
•
Recovery: Change the Copy key configuration to a null value
by entering KO on the Program Load screen, or configure
channel printer from a hard-copy device to the system
diskette.
An addressing error or a data content (pattern) error was
detected during IML of the Main Storage test.
•
An error in main storage was detected while running the
Verification test (V3) of the Program Load screen. This
error may be accompanied by a reference code.
KEY IGNORED: The SP is busy processing the previous
Recovery: Press the PF9 key.
function.
Recovery: Try the function again.
LINES OR SIZE OVER MAX: The number of characters
exceeds the available space or more than the allowed number
of editing lines is requested.
Recovery: Delete excessive characters or lines.
LOG AREA FULL: Log area is full.
MANUAL CONTROL: The system is under control of the
support processor microcode.
In this mode, an SIO to the display console is accepted but
held pending until the display console is available to the
operating system. If an SIO is queued, the audible alarm is
sounded, and SYSTEM MESSAGE WAITING is displayed on
line 23.
Recovery: Press the CHG DPLY key to return to the operating
system.
Recovery: Erase the screen and retry the save function.
LONG IPL PROCEEDING: The IPL has taken about
twelve seconds to IPL and the IPL is still in process.
Recovery: If this condition is abnormal, press the MODE SEL
key to exit the IPL. The user cannot IPL with polling off.
Check the Check Control (QK) screen to determine if the 'P'
selection (polling) is set to NO. If so, it must be set to YES.
MACHINE NOT HARDSTOPPED: A function is selected
that requires the machine to be in CLOCK STOP state, and it
is not.
Recovery: Enter QOM or QOC to hardstop the machine. For
additional information, refer to QO screens.
MAIN CONSOLE NOT READY DURING POWER UP
SEQUENCE: The main (primary) console failed to operate
on power-on.
Recovery: Press the CHG DPLY key on the console displaying
this message.
MAIN STG DATA CMP ERROR:
•
An addressing error or a data content (pattern) error was
detected during IML of the Main Storage test.
•
An error in main storage was detected while running the
Verification test (V2) of the Program Load screen. This
error may be accompany by a reference code.
IPL IN PROG: The execution phase of IPL is in progress.
IPL PSW FORMAT ERROR: The PSW loaded during an
IPL is invalid; for example, the instruction address in the
current PSW is not an address in main storage.
(/
Recovery: Press the PF9 key.
MODULE NOT FOUND: The requested display of a
module does not exist on the diskette.
Recovery: Enter the correct ID, or mount the desired diskette.
MORE: More Saved Screens are on the next page.
Recovery: To display the next page of Saved Screen area,
press the Page Up key.
MORE. PRESS ENTER: The data does not fit on the
screen.
Recovery: Press ENTER to continue the display on the next
page.
NAME2 LONGER THAN NAME1: NAME2 is longer than
NAME1.
Recovery: Make NAME2 equal to or shorter than NAME1.
NATIVE DEVICE AD DR USED: The wrong screen was
used to assign or unassign a native device.
Recovery: Use the Program Load screen to change any native
device address.
-
NO BLOCK AT MATCH-WAIT: No block is active
(available to be halted).
Recovery: No action is required.
NO IML: No IML was performed.
Recovery: Press the POWER ON/IML key.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379815 12Nov81
EC 379837 28Jun82
PN 5666361
3 of 5
44157
(~~
(~
..... _
~~_
EiJI
POWER NOT UP: A function was selected, but no power
PTR-INTV REQD: In manual mode, operator intervention is
is empty.
is on the processor.
required to restore the printer to the ready condition.
Recovery: No action is required.
Recovery: Press the POWER ON key, wait for POWER
COMPLETE, and then retry the command.
NO SPACE IN LIST: The list area is full.
PRESS ENTER TO SAVE: Pressing ENTER saves the
Recovery: No action required.
screen.
requested from a noncolor display unit.
NOT AVAILABLE: The requested function is not available
for use, or no room is on the diskette currently mounted. The
function cannot be performed.
NOT FOUND IN LIST: The Block or Patch name was not
found in the Index.
must have certain parameters.) An IPL was attempted without
a prior IML The cursor is positioned at the end of the
SELECTION line.
PROCEED: A Read command is in progress. Only now can
the operator enter data in the input area. Proceed is cleared
when the Read command is ended by one of the following
conditions:
o
A system or selective reset.
o
A Halt Device or Halt I/O instruction issued to the device.
PRT /KYBD MODE: The display console was assigned a
common address with a hard-copy printer (via the Program
Load screen).
OPERATION RATE NOT NORMAL: The Operation Rate
PSW UNPREDICTABLE: A program reset made the PSW
switch is not set to NORMAL
unpredictable. The PSW is set to zeros.
Recovery: Set the Rate switch to- NORMAL (QON).
Recovery: Display the current PSW to determine whether
program execution should continue. If necessary, re-IPL
The address to be generated by paging is either too high
or too low for the function selected, or
o
The previous command had a non paging error.
o
PTR-BUSY: The printer is in manual mode and busy from a
previous Copy key request or a SIO from the operating
system. The Copy key request is ignored.
Recovery:
Press the RESET key and retry Copy key request.
PATCH IS ACTIVE: The patch is active and cannot be
edited.
Recovery: Press ENTER to return to the patch list screen.
PATCH ERROR: An error occurred while running a patch
that was invoked after an IML
Press the RESET key, and then press the STOP and
START key at the PU. Retry the Copy key request.
Power the printer off and on; then retry the Copy key
request.
PTR-CHK: The printer in manual mode has an unrecoverable
error.
POWER COMPLETE: A power-up of the processor or a
re-IML of the Support Processor was successful.
Recovery: Rekey.the correct command and parameter after
the last command entered along the SELECTION line. Only
the latter command is recognized.
PU ALREADY INTIALlZED: An attempt was made to use
the Copy function to a channel printer while the system was
in an active I PL This Copy function overlays the existing
program w,ithin the system.
Recovery: If a copy is desired, enter a QCLEAR on the
selection line and retry the Copy function.
o
o
A requested fun'ction requires that the machine not be
IPLed.
The channel printer (KC) or (QEWC) option was selected
when the machine was IPLed.
Recovery: To protect the operator from accidentally overlaying
storage, the Copy-to-line.-printer function requires a specific
clear reset. If a customer job is running, a clear reset aborts
the job. A re-IPL is required after a clear reset it more
programs are- to be run.
RE-IML REQUIRED: Changes were made to the System
Configuration (QFS) or Module Transfer (QFM) screen.
Recovery: To effect the changes, press POWER ON/IML key
and select option 'M' when the Program Load (QL) screen
appears.
READY THE PRINTER: A print operation was attempted,
but the printer (channel) was not ready.
Recovery: Ready the printer and retry the function.
REFCODE LOGGED: A reference code was displayed and
logged.
Warning: If 'the machine has been IPLed, a aCLEAR is
required. However, a loss of customer data can result
with this selection.
Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs.
PU HARDSTOPPED: A function was requested, but the
REJECTED-BLOCK INVOKED: An inactive block was
invoked, and an Address Compare command was issued.
machine was hardstopped.
PAGING KEY IGNORED:
A paging operation (not required for this screen) was
attempted, or
A Copy key request was performed, and no Copy key
device was configured. The Copy request is ignored.
PTR/KYBD CONS ADDR ERROR: The address
restrictions of printer/keyboard mode were not met. The
cursor is positioned at the end of the SELECTION line.
Recovery: IML the Support Processor, and rekey the correct
command and parameter.
o
o
PRINTER HALTED: An informative message that the
printer was stopped from copying.
Normal ending caused. by ENTER or CNCL key.
NOT IMLED: (This is a dependent error; other commands
Printer is in Test mode.
Recovery: Press the RESE-T key.
Recovery: No action required.
'QCLEAR' RESET REQUIRED:
Printer power is off.
Recovery: Informative message; no action required.
Recovery: No action required.
• N.
1
NO SAVED SCREENS: The CE log or Saved Screens area
NOT A COLOR CONSOLE: A color display function was
••
Recovery: Remove the machine from the hardstopped state
and retry the function.
PU IS NOT SOFTSTOPPED: A function requiring the
processor to be softstopped was invoked while the machine
was running, and the attempt to softstop the processor was
unsuccessful.
Recovery: Press the STOP key and perform the desired
function.
PU NOT INITIALIZED: The selected function was not
possible because no PU IML was performed.
Recovery: IML the PU and try the function again.
PUT IN FROM DISK, ENTER: Insert the diskette which
contains the data to be transferred and press the ENTER key.
Recovery: Press the RESET key.
PUT IN TO DISK, ENTER: Insert the diskette which is to
receive the data to be transferred and press the ENTER key.
POWER INCOMPLETE: A function was selected before
Recovery: Halt the block (QBH) before issuing an Address
Compare command.
REMOVE PART OF SHARED UCW: Entire address
range of shared devices was not removed.
Recovery: Remove entire address range.
REQUEST: A REQ (Request) key attention status was
stacked because the device was busy executing a command.
When the current operation is completed, the attention status
is presented to the channel. and the REQUEST indicator is
cleared. A system or selective reset also clears the REQUEST
indicator.
ROCF ACTIVE: The host system has an active session in
process with the 4341 via the RSF link.
ROCF MONITOR ACTIVE: The Remote Operator Console
Facility is enabled and waiting for incoming calls from the
host system.
SAVED-title: A screen was successfully saved on the
the power-on sequence of the processor was complete.
diskette.
Recovery: Press the POWER OFF key and then the POWER
ON key.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379815 12Nov81
EC 379837 28Jun82
" .\,
./
("\
1,,---.---/1
"
'--../
C)
o
00
o
,
...
·0'Ii' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C)
PN 5666361
4 of 5
0
r····"
~./
44158
'.
'-
--"'.,
"
,./
'- ./
(/'
(~
(/ {: (-- ("
(
(
(,
(
('
(
(
(
(-'\
(,
_./
(
(,
(/
SEE ERROR MESSAGE: See the error message on line
STARTL NOT AVAILABLE: The test before a STARTL
TAPE NOT OPERATIONAL: The specified tape drive is
20.
transfer begins showed that the support processor or
processing unit interfaces. were not ,operational.
not operational.
SELECTION COMPLETE: The UCW directory was
changed, and the device address was assigned.
SERIAL NOS. DO NOT MATCH: The diskette image
machine serial number does not 'match the processor serial
number.
SERIAL NUMB READY TO LOCK: The machine serial
Recovery: Re-IML the processor. and then restart the
STARTL command function.
during IML or a Support Bus error was detected.
Recovery: Re-IML. If the failure persists, go to the Start
MAPs.
Recovery: Use LOCKSERNUM to secure the serial number.
SYNTAX ERROR: An error occurred in the editing fields.
The cursor is positioned beneath the data in error.
SOFTSTOP REQUIRED: The processor is in a hardstop or
Recovery: Key in the correct data and press ENTER.
running state. and an attempt was made to change a device
address within the processor. The cursor is positioned at the
end of the SELECTION line.
SYSTEM ERROR: An internal error occurred in the
processor. A reference code indicates the source:
Recovery: Press the STOP key. With the correct command
still on the SELECTION line. press the ENTER key.
EC900060
=
TRANSFER HALTED: A support processor-common
adapter code interface failed during a transfer.
Recovery: Return to the Module Transfer screen, and rerun
the Module Transfer function.
UPDATE OVER 1024 UCWs: More than 1024 UCWs
were assigned.
SP/PU COMMUNICATION ERR: A communication error
F4900060 =
Diskette I/O error (Ext. Code)
occurred between the SP and PU. This error may be
accompanied by a reference code.
F8900060 =
Console Display error (Ext. Code)
FD900060
=
ED900060 =
Scan ring failed to cycle properly (Ext.
Code)
Path from the SP to the PU failed (Ext.
Code)
Recovery: Retry the command function. If the error persists,
go to the Start MAPs.
compare with the data sent back from the PU. This error
may be accompanied by a reference code.
Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs.
SP/PU TRANSFER ERROR:
•
•
An error occurred during transfer of data from the SP to
the PU while executing the Main Storage Address
Verification test.
An error occurred while transferring data from the SP to
the PU. This error may by accompanied by a reference
code.
Recovery: Retry the test. If the test fails again or a reference
code appears. go to the Start MAPs.
USAGE CONFLICT: A previous request was not
completed, or the START, STOP, INTR. MODE SEL. CHG
DPLY. SPM /0. or DIAG key was pressed while another
display console was already in manual control mode.
Recovery: Press the RESET key to clear messages. To
activate function keys for the display, locate the console that
is in manual control mode, and press the CHG DPLY key.
Now the function keys can be activated,
WNG: CHECK ERROR: A CRC (CHECKSUM) error
SYSTEM IS IMLED: The satelite system is IMLed a
SP/PU DATA MISCOMPARE: Data in the SP does not
('
Recovery: Perform a system reset. or place the system in
Instruction Step mode. Reenter the Normal Address
Compare function.
Start or stop attempt failed (Ext. Code)
Recovery: Retry an IML. If the failure persists. go to the
Start MAPs.
(~
command required a Trace or Data Compare to be reset. but
the PU was in hard stop. The command is accepted. but the
system continues to run the Trace or Data compare function.
EC90EC60 =
because data was not transferred between the SP and the
PU.
(/ {:
Recovery: Verify that the correct tape drive is being used. and
that the tape unit and tape control unit are operational.
Coding error (Ref. Code)
SP/PU COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE: An IML failed
(, ,(:/ ,(~
TRACE/DATA COMP NOT RESET: The entered
SUPPORT BUS FAILURE: The PU logic reset failed
number entered does not have a syntax error.
Recovery: Go to the Start MAPs.
(-,
re-IML changes the status. CURRENT PSW IS XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX. MACHINE IS CLOCKED STOP STATE, or
MACHINE IS ERROR STOPPED STATE is also displayed with
this message. Their status changes with a re-IML also.
SYSTEM IS IPLED: The satelite system is IPLed a re-IPL
changes the status. CURRENT PSW IS XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX. MACHINE IS CLOCKED STOP STATE, or
MACHINE IS ERROR STOPPED STATE is also displayed with
this message. Their status changes with a re-IPL also.
SYSTEM RESET REQD: An attempt was made to use the
occurred.
Recovery: Enter the correct CRC value.
WNG: CHECK ERROR (XXXX): A CRC (CHECKSUM)
error occurred.
Recovery: Enter the CRC value (XXXX) that is provided in the
message.
X OF PART OF SHARED RANGE:
Unassigning a shared
device did not unassign the entire range.
Recovery: Unassign the entire range.
MODE SEL or CHG DPLY key while the system was in a
hardstop state and the console was busy with an Operating
System operation.
Recovery: Perform a Program Reset (PROGR). Clear Reset
(CLEAR) or an IPL.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379815 12Nov81
EC 379837 28Jun82
PN 5666361
50f 5
44159
{
j
(
c/
(
'
./
o o
(/
(/
(
(~.
MANUAL FUNCTIONS
GENERAL SELECTION (Q)
The General Selection screen is the first screen to appear
when you initially enter manual functions. The General
Selection (Q) screen is the main screen in the manual
function. The Q-screen has two sections. The selections on
the left half of the screen are immediate operations and, with
the exception of the Problem Analysis and SP Storage
Displays, do not produce another manual control mode
screen. They execute their particular function and display the
Q-screen. The selections on the right half of the screen have
additional screens to complete their function.
Time of Day Enable (V)
*GENERAL SELECTION*
Y
J
PA
PROGR
CLEAR
CM
RES
SAVE
Selecting the General Selection Screen (Q)
The General Selection screen appears:
Z
X
When MODE SEL is pressed
When you enter Q in the SELECTION area (manual mode)
TIME OF DAY ENABLE switch has no additional menu.
F
L
B
CONFIGURATION
PROGRAM LOAD
BLOCK/PATCH
PROBLEM ANALYSIS
SYSTEM RESET-PROGRAM
SYSTEM RESET-CLEAR
MACHINE RESET
A
K
0
COMPARE/TRACE
CHECK CONTROL
OPERATION RATE
RESTART
D
V
D I SPLAY /ALTER
INSERT/EXTRACT
E
M
I
ERROR LOGOUTS
POWER/TEMPERAT
DISKETTE I PL
TIME OF DAY-ENABLE
INTERVAL TIMER-SWITCH
RETURN TO PROG SYS
SP STORAGE DISPLAY
==>
SELECTION:
4341
Fast Selection
2. Press ENTER.
For the description of the error messages that can occur
during the selection of a manual function, see Error
Messages.
Interval Timer Switch (J)
Interval Timer switch has no additional display.
2. Press ENTER.
The interval timer function is available when the system is
operating in 370 or VSE mode. The Interval Timer switch is
automatically set on when the system is IMLed. The timer
can be turned off by entering a J following the SELECTION
label and pressing ENTER on the keyboard. Whenever the
switch is on, TIMER: ON is indicated on line 21 of the display
console. Whenever the switch is off, TIMER: OFF is
indicated on line 21.
The cursor is next to SELECTION: and ready for input. To
select one of the functions:
Note: The appropriate action is carried out as soon as
ENTER is pressed for characters Y, J, PROGR, CLEAR, CM,
RES, SAVE and Z.
The clock can be altered by the Set Clock instruction. After
pressing the ENTER key, screen control is immediately
switched to the Operating System screen.
TOO: ENBL is indicated on line 22 of the display console
for approximately six seconds, and then the TOO is
automatically disabled.
1. Key in J next to the SELECTION label.
Selecting a Manual Function
Another display appears on the screen if you made a
selection that appears to the right of the screen. This new
display usually requires the same action as above, that is,
selection of a displayed character, arid then pressing ENTER.
2. Press ENTER.
STORE STATUS
When CHG DPLY is pressed (if last screen displayed in
manual mode).
1. Key in the selector character shown on the left of the
required operation.
1. Key in Y following the SELECTION label.
Once you are familiar with the manual selections, selector
characters, subsequent displays and their associated
parameters, you can execute a function in one step. This
feature can be implemented from most manual selection
screens. One fast-select method is the execution of a
manual function directly from the General Selection screen. A
second way is to switch between manual functions, and
directly execute the function just selected. To initiate fast
selection, the letter Q must always proceed the function being
implemented.
To perform fast selection:
1. Press MODE SEL (if system screen is present).
2. Press Q.
3. Key in character that represents manual function you want
to perform.
The interval timer is alternately turned on or off each time
that a J is entered.
When the timer is activated, real main storage location 80 is
decremented approximately every 30 ms. When the location
goes negative, an interrupt is generated. If the timer is off,
location 80 is available for use.
4. Key in parameters for the manual function you have just
selected.
5. Press ENTER.
Note: Do not insert commas between characters. If the
system finds a syntax error, the screen that represents the
last correct letter is displayed. The manual functions
compress the selection line input and ignore blanks entered
into the system.
Problem Analysis (PA)
For information about Problem Anaiysis see: Volume 13/16,
Section 14, "Problem Analysis (PAl."
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379807 22Sep80
EC 379837 28Jun82
PN 5666362
1 of 2
44 165
System Resets
Program Reset (PROGR)
Clear Reset (CLEAR)
Note: If a Clear Reset is performed while a trace or
stop-on-main-storage-data-compare (nonzero) funct/,m is in
effect, a false match stop occurs.
Check Reset (Re-IML)
Restart (RES)
Store Status (SAVE) (370 Mode Only)
The only reliable way of clearing an intermittent check is to
re-IML the processing unit. This command is QLM. If
another checkstop occurs, the error is probably not
intermittent. However, most checks can be cleared either by
the Program Reset (OPROGR) or Clear Reset (QCLEAR).
RESTART has no additional display.
This function stores in hex and is allowed when running with
Virtual Storage Control. STORE STATUS has no additional
display.
Machine Reset (CM) (Normal)
There is no display for Program Reset or Clear Reset.
1. Key in either PROGR (Reset-Program) or CLEAR
(Reset-Clear) following the SELECTION label.
The Machine Reset is a CE-only function to be used when
directed by your FSC or Product Engineer.
To invoke the Machine Reset function from the General
Selection screen:
2. Press ENTER.
Keying in either PROGR OR CLEAR and then pressing
ENTER:
•
Clears pending interrupts or machine check conditions.
•
Causes the following to stop:
Execution of the present PU instruction (if any)
All channels and their control units
All adapters
All I/O devices (channel and natively attached)
Resets manual functions
Time-of-Day Enable
Save Indicator
Operation Control Rate (except I-step)
•
•
•
•
1. Key in SAVE following the SELECTION label.
If the machine is in stopped state, it starts with the program
restart PSW. If the machine is in the operating state, the
PSW exchange occurs at the end of the current instruction
after all interrupts for which the PU is enabled are handled.
To return the console to the operating system:
Press CHG DPLY or,
Key Z next to SELECTION and press ENTER.
The following are stored in main (real) storage:
• Processor timer -
8 bytes at '08' (216 dec.)
• Clock Comparator -
8 bytes at 'EO' (224 dec.)
• The current PSW -
8 bytes at '100' (256 dec.)
32 bytes at '160' (352 dec.)
• General registers -
64 bytes at '180' (384 dec.)
2. Press ENTER.
• Control registers -
64 bytes at '1 CO' (448 dec.)
Note: The following happens:
•
Machine Save (SAVE) (VSE Mode only)
All scan rings are reset including those related to the
clocks.
In VSE mode, the Save function is called Machine Save. This
function saves the above data as well as page 0 (virtual
address 0 to 2048) in auxiliary storage for subsequent
retrieval by a Retrieve Status and Page software instruction
(08).
The refresh clock is turned on at the end of the routine.
CAUTION Because the Refresh Clock is stopped,
double-bit errors occur in main storage.
•
When Store Status or Machine Save is complete, SAVE is
indicated on line 21 of the display console, and the system
goes into a stopped state.
Use the PU microcode.
Clear or reset any arrays.
•
PU timer
Clock comparator
General registers
Floating-point registers
Control registers
Main storage
2. Press ENTER.
• Floating-point registers -
Note: It does not:
Save any Manual Control settings.
Return to Prog Sys
Two optional variations to the machine reset are QCMrr and
OCMLxxxx.
IZl
RETURN TO PROG SYS has no additional display.
1. Key in Z following the SELECTION label.
Machine Reset (CMrr) -
A Clear Reset initializes the control registers and clears to
zero the values of any storage or registers whose contents
can be modified by the system program. These include:
•
2. Press ENTER.
1. Key CM next to SELECTION.
A Program Reset does not affect the values of:
•
•
1. Key in RES following the SELECTION label.
One Ring
Machine Reset (CMLxxxx) -
Current PSW
Processor timer
Clock comparator
General registers
Floating-point registers
Main storage
Translate tables (VSE mode)
Page management pointer (VSE mode)
2. Press ENTER
OCMrr resets specified scan rings. rr is the specified ring to
be reset. In general, operational results are unpredictable.
The screen is under control of the operating system.
Note: The support processor transient area is released and
the contents of the system mode (usually operating system
messages) buffer is displayed.
With Log
QCMLxxxx resets machine latches from a specified machine
check logout. xxxx is the same four digits as those specified
to display the detailed error logout (OECDxxxx). The machine
is placed in CK-CTRL=HARDSTOP automatically. All
nonarray Insert/Extract screens may now be used.
Note: Pressing the POWER ON /IML switch (with power up)
does not reset the processor. Only the SP code is reloaded
and normal processor operation can be continued. This
switch clears up Channel 0 if it has failed due to an
intermittent problem. The Reset button (logic reset) on the
main frame near the diskette drive is similar to the SP
re-IML, but no SP code is reloaded.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379807 22Sep80
EC 379837 28Jun82
o
o o
00 C)
o o o o
PN 5666362
2 of 2
44 170
(
,
/
()
c
(
(
(
f.
(
(
c
(
(
(
(/
(
SP STORAGE (OX)
(/
SP STORAGE DISPLAY (OX)
Microcode Level 154322 (856091) and Above
To select the SP Storage function from the Q-screen:
1. Key X next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The next higher/lower 512 bytes of storage can be
displayed by using the paging keys.
•
The address can be defaulted.
•
The display can be fast-selected by keying
and the
desired address (does not have to be 4 digits) from any
screen.
•
To obtain a display of the dump of SP storage when
using the SP stand-alone dump support option (DID), key
DUMP next to SELECT/ON instead of a hex address.
•
To return to SP STORAGE when in SP DUMP mode:
ax
ADRS'
2000
2020
2040
2060
2080
20AO
20CO
20EO
+0
0814000F
243E04FO
800022CC
206604FO
706120C6
70CB0884
265604FO
21CE3600
+4
70613600
21CE1FC4
20742808
20740212
A080400F
706270C8
21FA0903
80007072
2100 0814000F 70613600
2120 243E04FO 21CE1FC4
2140 800022CC 20742808
2160 206604FO 20740212
2180 706120C6 A080400F
21AO 70CB0884 706270CB
21CO 265604FO 21FA0903
20EO 21CE3600 80007072
SELECTION: 2000
*SP STORAGE*
+08
+OC
+10
800070S120323600 40007061
707121B8 0804007B 70610008
20580201 0020FFEO 22F422CO
002022F4 000022F4 04F421BB
70610814 00807000 080400BF
083400E9 70711526 22C022CO
243E3600 800070CC 21CE3600
21CE3800 80007072 21CE0982
+14
20263600
22CC3600
3COOOOFF
0982243E
70CC0804
090822CO
40007070
243E04FO
+18
10007061
800070Cl
22F6FFFF
04F021CE
00BF7070
3A002680
20FA3600
21CE8000
+IC
2026090C
207C3800
22F422CO
36002000
08340080
228604FQ
400070CC
400070CC
80007061
70712188
20580201
002022F4
70610814
083400E9
243E3600
21CE3800
20263600
22CC3600
3COOOOFF
0982243£
70CC0804
090822CD
40007070
243E04FO
10007061
800070Cl
22F6FFFF
04F021CE
00BF7070
3A002680
20FA3600
21CE8000
2026090C
207C3800
22F422CD
36002000
08340080
228604FO
400070CC
400070CC
20323600
08040078
0020FFEO
000022F4
00807000
70711526
800070CC
80007072
40007061
70610008
22F422CO
04F421BB
080400BF
22C022CO
21CE3600
21CE0982
Microcode Level 154321 and Below
To invoke the SP Storage Display from the General Selection
screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key X next to SELECTION.
3. Key a four-digit hex address next to X.
Notes:
•
To obtBin B displBY of the dump of SP storBge when
using the SP stBnd-Blone dump support option, key
DUMP next to X insteBd of B four-digit hex Bddress.
•
This Bddress CBn be defBulted.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Press ALT and use the PAGE keys to find desired
address.
==>
4341
1. Key STOR next to SELECT/ON.
6. Press MODE SEL to exit the SP Storage Display screen.
2. Press ENTER
Return to General Selection (Q)
(
Notes:
MICROCODE 154322 (856091) AND ABOVE
•
EBch PBge contBins 512 bytes of storBge.
•
Any Bddress entered must contBin four hex digits.
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
.SP STORAGE DISPLAY.
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
BYTE
2000
2020
2040
2060
2080
20AO
20CO
20EO
+00
0814000F
243E04FO
800022CC
206604FO
706120C6
70C80884
265604FO
21 CE3600
+04
70613600
21CE1FC4
20742808
20740212
A080400F
706270C8
21FA0903
80007072
+08
80007061
707121B8
20580201
002022F4
70610814
083400E9
243E3600
21CE3800
+OC
20323600
0804007B
0020FFEO
000022F4
00807000
70711526
800070CC
80007072
+10
40007061
70610008
22F422CO
04F421BB
080400BF
22C022CO
21CE3600
21CE0982
+14
20263600
22CC3600
3COOOOFF
0982243E
70CC0804
090822CO
40007070
243E04FO
+18
10007061
800070Cl
22F6FFFF
04F021CE
008F7070
3A002680
20FA3600
21CE8000
+IC
2026090C .
207C3800
22F422CO
36002000
08340080
228604FO
400070CC
400070CC
2100
2120
2140
2160
2180
21AO
21CO
20EO
0814000F
243E04FO
800022CC
206604FO
706120C6
70C80884
265604FO
21CE3600
70613600 80007061
21CE1FC4 70712188
20742808 20580201
20740212 002022F4
A080400F ·70610814
706270C8 083400E9
21FA09D3 243E3600
80007072 21CE3800
20323600
08040078
0020FFEO
000022F4
00807000
70711526
800070CC
80007072
40007061
70610008
22F422CO
04F421B8
0804008F
22C022CO
21CE3600
21CE0982
20263600
22CC3600
3COOOOFF
0982243E
70CC0804
090822CO
40007070
243E04FO
10007061
800070Cl
22F6FFFF
04F021CE
008F7070
3A002680
20FA3600
21CE8000
2026090C
201C3800
22F422CO
36002000
08340080
228604FO
400070CC
400070CC
ADDRESS:
2000
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
MICROCODE 154321 AND BELOW
© IBM Corp. 1979, 1981
PN 2676049
1 of 2
44175f
CONFIGURATION (QF)
*CONF IGURAT ION*
The F-selection from the General Selection screen displays
the Configuration screen menu. The menu shows the
facilities available as subscreens from the Configuration
screen. A subscreen is selected from the Configuration
screen by first keying OF, or just F if you cLirrently have the
General Selection screen.
S SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE
P CONSOLE TEST PATTERN
M MODULE TRANSFER
Nine selection characters are on the Configuration screen,
but only seven are major facilities: the System Configuration
screen, Console Color Convergence screen, Console Test
Pattern screen, Module Transfer screen, Remote Support
Facility screen, Remote Operator Console Facility screen and
the Tape-to-Diskette Build screen. The Remote Support
Facility consists of selections: R. C, and D. For more
information, refer to "Remote Support Facility."
T TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD (IBM AFE ONLY)
To select the Configuration screen from the General
Selection screen:
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z- RETURN TO PROG SYS
R REMOTE CONSOLE INITIALIZATION
C REMOTE CONSOLE COMMUNICATIONS
o DATA BANK INITIALIZATION
B REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FAC ILlTY
SELECTION:
==>
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2.
Key
F next to SELECTION.
4341
3. Press ENTER. Configuration screen is displayed.
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
PN2676049
2 of 2
()
o o
o
()
o~o-c
00
()
'--
o
.0.·.
r"\
',,-j~j
44180f
\
./
(
(/
(-
(-/
(
(
..
o o
(
(-
(
(-
(
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (QFS)
*SYSTEM CONFIGURATION·
The System Configuration screen is a CE-only function. To
invoke this screen, the 4341 must be in CE mode. This
screen can be selected from the Configuration screen or
fast-selected from the General Selection screen.
MODEL 4341
SERIAL NO.: 000000
DISKETTE PART NO. 0000000
EC
000000
REA 0000000
Changes are made by entering the required data, or by
using the cursor. The use requirements are restrictive to
prevent errors. Be careful when updating the configuration
reGord. Fields displaying a colon (:) on the screen are
alterable.
POWER LOGIC:
04 MEG
64 KB
LOCKSERNUM - LOCK SERIAL NUMBER
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
To select the System Configuration screen from the
Configuration screen:
NUMBER OF CHANNELS: 06
CHANNEL 4 IN BYTE MODE:
CHANNEL TO CHANNEL:
I/O POWER-UP TIME-OUT: 02 MINS
POWER GROUP: 00
SELECTION: S
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
X
CONSOLE LANGUAGE CODE: 00
ROCF AUTO-ANSWER MODEM:
000000
MAIN STORE SIZE:
CONTROL STORE SIZE:
The configuration record is stored on the system diskette
and is updated each time a change is made. A support
processor re-IML must be performed any time a change is
made to the configuration record or if the diskette is changed.
INSTALLED:
OPERATIONAL
HARDCOPY: .
CONSOLE DEVICES
NO Nl N2 N3
X X X X
X X
X
(
(
(
(\
(
I/O Power-Up Time-Out: Move the cursor to the value on
the screen for I/O POWER-UP TIME-OUT, and key in the
number of minutes (in decimal) that the power code waits for
the channel I/O devices attached to the power sequencing
relays to power up. (If I/O stepping is not complete in the
specified time, the machine posts a reference code.)
Press ENTER.
Power Group:
Note: Using the Feature 8M machine history, determine
what Documentation 8M is associated with the 4341. The
charts on the following page indicate which Power Group
Code matches the machine configuration.
Move the cursor to the value displayed on the screen for
POWER GROUP code, and key in the correct code.
Press ENTER.
==>
2. Key S next to F on the SELECTION line.
(
4341
Return to General Selection (Q)
3. Press ENTER. System Configuration screen is displayed.
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
To update the configuration record:
2. Press ENTER.
Note: The following sections apply to the areas which can
be altered.
Console Devices Installed: Move the cursor to the
Serial No.: Move the cursor to the value displayed on the
screen for SERIAL NO. and key in the machine serial number.
When the entered serial number is verified, key in next to
SELECTION :SLOCKSERNUM
Press ENTER.
The serial number is now locked, and the lock serial number
message is no longer displayed on the screen.
Note: The serial number update is a one-time occurrence.
When entered, it becomes an unalterable field. It is
important that the entered serial number be verified.
Power Logic: Move the cursor to the value displayed on
the screen for POWER LOGIC, and key in the EC number of
the power EC just installed.
Press ENTER.
Main Store Size: Move the cursor to the value displayed
on the screen for MAIN STORE SIZE, and key in the
two-digit number representing the size of main storage.
Press ENTER.
Control Store Size: Move the cursor to the value displayed
on the screen for CONTROL STORE SIZE, and key in the
two-digit number representing the size of control storage.
Press ENTER.
© IBM Corp. 1981
location on the screen for CONSOLE DEVICES INSTALLED,
and key in an X if installed or an _ if not installed. No
device should be aSSigned unless it is installed.
Operational field is for information only; it is not alterable.
Hardcopy: Move the cursor to the location on the screen for
HARDCOPY, and key in an X if a printer is installed and is to
be flagged as a hard-copy device, or an _ if it is not
installed. A hard-copy device can be console device one
through three.
Press ENTER.
Console Language Code: Move the cursor to the value
displayed on the screen for CONSOLE LANGUAGE CODE,
and key in one of the following values:
00
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
10
11
U.S. English
Canadian / French (See Note)
Austria/German
Belgium
Brazil/Portuguese
Denmark
Finland
France/ Azerty
France/Qwerty
International
Italy
Japan/English
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Spanish Speaking
United Kingdom
Sweden
EBCDIC/World Trade
Press ENTER.
Note: The Canadian/French keyboard has the same
character set and keyboard layout as the U.S. English, but
with French nomenclature on the keys.
RoeF
Auto-Ans Modem: Move the cursor to the location
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
(;m the screen displaying ROCF AUTO-ANS MODEM: and key
in an X when an ROCF Auto-Ans modem is installed, or an
if it is not installed.
Press ENTER.
Number of Channels: Move the cursor to the location on
the screen displaying NUMBER OF CHANNELS: and key in
the two-digit number representing the number of channels.
~
Press ENTER.
Channel 4 in Byte Mode: Move the cursor to the location
on the screen displaying CHANNEL 4 IN BYTE MODE: and
key in an X if channel 4 is to be used as a byte-multiplexer
channel, or an _ if it is to be used as a block-multiplexer
channel. This selection is valid only when the processor has
been configured for six channels.
Press ENTER.
Note: Always check the Display / Alter UCW Directory
(QDU) to verify the assignment.
Channel to Channel: Move the cursor to the value
displayed on the screen for CHANNEL TO CHANNEL, and
key an X next to it for desired assignment, or an
if the
existing value is to be deleted.
Press ENTER.
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676455
1 of 2
44 185f
\
BM
4154511
and one of
the following:
5896667
or
4124111
or
4124101
4154512
and one of
the following:
5896667
or
4124111
or
4124101
4154511
and one of
the following:
4154406
or
4154407
or
4154408
or
4154409
4154512
and one of
the following:
4154406
or
4154407
or
4154408
or
4154409
Feature Title
Power Group
Code
First Source Storage with
Ferro Power Supp lies:
21
First Source 2 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 4 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 8 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source Storage with
Switching Regulators:
22
First Source 2 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 4 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 8 Meg ( .5 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source Storage with
Ferro Power Supplies:
23
First Source 4 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 8 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 12 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 16 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source Storage with
Switching Regulators:
24
First Source 4 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 8 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 12 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
First Source 16 Meg (1.0 Meg Card)
Storage Group
4341 Model Group 2
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
EC 379829 28Jun82
o
PN 2676455
2 of 2
44 186f
(
(
(
o
(-
. . ."
(
(
f
CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE (QFA)
Convergence Procedure
CONVERGENCE UTILITY
The Console Color Convergence screen is used to align the
color on a color display console. The initial display when
making this selection is a description of the operation of the
convergence procedure.
To return to the General Selection (0) screen, press the
MODE SEL key. However, because of interaction of some of
the convergence positions, check all positions after the
procedure is started. It is not necessary to adjust each
position; advancing through each pattern position with the
SPACE BAR performs the necessary action.
•
After all thirteen positions have been adjusted, the
pattern displays white in all positions (see test pattern
diagram). This is the final check for convergence.
Use the convergence procedure when setting up a color
console, when the console has been moved to another area,
or when color definition is in question.
ENTER INITIALIZES UTILITY (MUST BE PRESSED 1ST)
Convergence can be adjusted by using the keyboard to
manually align a pattern. By using two colors (red/green or
red/blue), a pattern (-1-1-) is displayed at a location on the
screen, any misconvergence can be easily seen. In a correctly
converged screen, the two colors combine to show one
pattern, in the color obtained by mixing the two primary
colors (red/green combine into yellow, and red/blue combine
into pink). A misconverged screen shQws traces of the
primary colors at the edge of the pattern or, if the
convergence is bad, two separate patterns. The pattern is
displayed at thirteen positions on the screen to allow all areas
to be converged. At each of the thirteen positions, the
pattern is first displayed in red/green, .and then in red/blue.
CURSOR UP, DOWN, LEFT, OR RIGHT MOVES THE PATTERN
SPACE BAR SELECTS NEXT POSITION OR COLOR
Notes:
If INHIBITED or any other symbol appears in the
operator information area, press RESET and retry the
action.
The convergence procedure is used to optimize the 3279-2C
color console primary color settings (red, green, and blue) to
produce a pure compound color (white). If convergence is
wrong, traces of each color are displayed at the edges of the
white character.
THIS UTILITY IS USED TO CONVERGE RED, GREEN, AND BLUE
DISPLAYS INTO CORRECT ALIGNMENT.
PATTERNS ARE SHOWN
TWICE AT 13 POSITIONS ON THE SCREEN, IN RED/GREEN AND
THEN RED/BLUE. THE 4 CURSOR KEYS ARE USED TO MOVE THE
2 COLOR PATTERNS TOGETHER INTO I COLOR, THE RED/GREEN
MERGES INTO YELLOW AND RED/BLUE MERGES INTO PINK.
Pressing the ENTER key advances the screen to the pattern
display to start the adjustment. The ENTER key may be
pressed at any time to restart the adjustment.
•
R KEY CHANGES PATTERN COLOR (RED/GREEN(-)REDBLUE)
MODE SEL KEY EXITS UTILITY
The cur!ilor positioning keys move the green (or blue) pattern
towards the red until they coincide and a yellow (or pink)
pattern is displayed. These keys are typematic and can be
held down until the pattern is in the correct position.
The convergence procedure cannot be directed to another
console. You must be physically at that console and in
manual mode to perform the procedure.
To select the Console Color Convergence screen from the
Configuration screen:
1. Key A next to F on the SELECTION line.
2. Press ENTER.
(
( 13)
( 10)
(2 )
-1-1-
-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- -1-1- -1-1- -1-1- -1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-'
(3 )
(8)
(9)
( 1)
(7)
(6)
The "R" key is used to reverse the color setting of the
displayed pattern (red/green to or from red/blue). This
allows the pattern to checked and adjusted at one position.
Use he SPACE BAR to advance to the next adjustment
position in the convergence procedure. The initial pattern at
each position is displayed with the red/green colors.
Pressing the SPACE BAR at this time changes the pattern to
red/blue (the same as the "R" key). Pressing the SPACE
BAR when the red/blue pattern is displayed advances the
procedure to the next adjustment position, and displays the
pattern in red/green. After the la.st position has been
adjusted, pressing the SPACE BAR displays the pattern in
white at all positions. If the SPACE BAR is pressed again,
the procedure restarts at position one.
(5 )
( 12)
(4)
( 11 )
Note: Numbers in parenthesis indicate order of adjustment.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379607 05Jan81
EC 379814 020ct81
@
IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676425
1 of 2
44187
)
Line Identification
CONSOLE TEST PATTERN (QFP)
The Console Test Pattern screen provides a visual check for
the display console colors, intensity, fields, and characters.
To select the Console Test Pattern screen from the
Configuration screen:
TEST: 4341;AA
PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED
NOT PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED
DISPLAY INSERT CK
PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED
NOT PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED
line 1
4341 ;aa identifies the controller to which a display console is
attached; aa a port number (00 through 03).
1. Key P next to F on the SELECTION line.
2. Press ENTER.
Line 2
3. Visually check all fields for correct characteristics.
Protected and not Intensified
No data can be entered; the field is not intensified (blue on
a 3279-2C, normal green on a 3278-2A).
4. Move cursor under the CK field.
5. Press INSERT key. INSERT MODE displays in operator
information area.
Protected and Intensified
No data can be entered; the field is intensified (white on a
3279-2C, high intensity on a 3278-2A).
6. Press keys A, B, and C. DISPLAY INSERT abck displays
on line 4. INHIBITED appears in operator information
area.
SELECTION:
7. Press RESET.
==>
line 3
Note: Any character key may be entered on lines 5
through 20 to check proper operation.
4341
8. Press MODE SEL to exit from the Console Test Pattern
screen.
I
Not Protected and not Intensified
Data can be entered; the field is not intensified (green on a
3279-2C, normal green on a 3278-2A).
Not Prot4tcted and Intensified
Data can be entered; the field is intensified. (red on a
3279-2C, high intensity on a 3278-2A).
Note: The console test pattern cannot be directed to. another
console. You must be physically at the console and In
manual mode to perform the test.
line 4
Display Insert CK
Display and Insert fields are protected fields. CK is an
unprotected field.
field 2
field 1
Note: If the blanking circuit fails, a nondisplayable field
(NON) appears preceding the DISPLAY field.
11 ne
TEST:
line 2
PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED
line 3
NOT PROTECTED AND NOT INTENSIFIED NOT PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED
lines 5 to 20
line 4
DISPLAY INSERT
Lines 5 to 20 are used to check all keyboard characters for
proper operation. These lines are unprotected and not
intensified.
4341
AA
PROTECTED AND INTENSIFIED
CK -
3279-2C 3279-2C
line field 3278-2A 4 Color Monochrome
I
I
1
2
2
9
b
9
1
9
b
9
2
2
bg
w
w
3
1
9
9
9
3
2
bg
r
w
4
1
9
b
b
4
2
9
9
9
9
bg
b
r
w
- green
- bright green
- blue
red
- whi te
-
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379607 05Jan81
EC 379814 020ct81
PN 2676425
20f 2
o o o o
~'"
'0"""
I
00000
00
o
0 0 0 GOO 0 0
44188
(/ {,
"
/
(
(
(
(
(
("
(
(
c
(
MODULE TRANSFER (QFM)
The Module Transfer screen moves the machine-dependent
data module from one support processor diskette to another.
When the EC is ready to be installed; take a stock EC disk to
be updated with the data from the disk already there. The
new disk then is unique for this particular system. Patches
and Assists can not be transferred by the Module Transfer
screen.
The Module Transfer screen has two different input areas:
the first is the area to the left of the module of MACHINE
SENSITIVE DATA, and the other is for entering instruction
type on the SELECTION line. The first area of input is on the
full-screen area. The only inputs that are valid are "X" or
"
"(or blanks). For any other input, an INVALID message
appears. The second area of input is through the normal
manual function input that is on the SELECTION line. These
commands are displayed on the screen.
The module IDs are shown for each line and are taken from
the disk that contains the Module Transfer CODE. If the two
disks do not have the same module IDs, the transfer does not
occur.
The first selection is special in that only part of the total
module shown is transferred. For the configuration data, the
information unique to a disk (such as part number and EC
number) is not transferred. For the reset data, only those bits
that are machine sensitive are transferred to the reset data
module.
The Status Area of the Module Transfer screen shows the
current status of the transfer taking place. The status area
has four positions. The first shows the state of the transfer:
S - selected for transfer; R - read from the disk and store
either in main storage or in the support processor buffer; W write on the disk from the storage area; T - the module has
been transferred completely. The second through fourth
positions show any error that has occurred during a read or
write portion of the transfer. The "0" is followed by an error
indication.
COMMANDS:
SELECTION: M
(/
The transfer is completed regardless of the command
used, size errors, or load address errors. However, the
module in error is flagged as an error module and is not
used again.
Once the transfer is started, the microcode asks for the
FROM disk. This allows you to use a different disk for
the FROM modules.
S=SELECT R=READ & SAVE W=RETRIEVE & WRITE T=TRANSFER COMPLETE
DSZ=SIZE DIFFERENT DLA=LOAD ADDRESS DIFFERENT D41=NOT FOUND
INVP=INVALID INPUT
MSTARTL
MSTARTD
(
STARTO only requires the support processor and uses a
buffer of about 4K. If no selection errors occur, the code
transfers modules from the disk to the buffer. You are
then asked to swap the disks. The modules are then
transferred from the buffer to the new disk. You are then
asked to swap back to the old disk. The transfer then
continues until all of the modules selected are transferred.
*MODULE TRANSFER SCREEN*
STATUS
MACHINE SENSITIVE DATA (MODULE)
X CLOCKS,IPU,STORE,CS .(8001-8004)
CONFIGURATION,UCWS .(0001,20AO)
X POWER/TEMP LOGS . . . ( 1024,1026)
X PU LOG CONTROL 1,2 . . (3050,3501)
X PU LOGS 1-9 . .
. (3061-3069)
X SP LOGS . . . . . . . (3800)
X REFERENCE CODES . . . (3900)
X PROBLEM ANALYSIS DATA(2806-2808)
X SAVED SCREENS/CE LOGS(9BXX)
ERR MODS:
STATUS INFO:
(
START DISK-PU-DISK TRANSFER
START DISK-SP-DISK TRANSFER
At the end of the transfer, you are asked to replace the
ORIGINAL disk because the transfer routine is reloaded to
set up for another pass (if one is required). This message
indicates the end of the transfer. However, you can
continue and use a different disk (either another FROM or
another TO).
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
==> ALL LINES SELECTED
4341
7. Press ENTER.
Note: Always check the System Configuration (aFS),
Program Load (au and the Display / Alter UCW (aDU)
assignment to verify the transfer.
To invoke the Module Transfer screen:
Warning: Do not press the Copy key during a' Module
Transfer; the transfer is not completed. If a transfer is
desired, rekey the previous command.
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON if you have not already
done so. If you have not, you must select the
Configuration screen first.
2. Key M on the SELECTION line.
3. Press ENTER.
4. After the Module Transfer screen is displayed, move the
cursor to the module(s) that you do not want to transfer
and place an
next to that module. Ensure that an X is
next to the module(s) that you do want transferred.
5. Press ENTER. The status area displays an S beside those
modules which you have selected.
Note: If an error occurs, INVP is displayed instead of S.
6. Key STARTL or ST ARTD next to the M on the
SELECTION line, depending upon the type of transfer you
wish to do.
STARTL requires the processing unit to have been
IMLed but not IPLed.
Warning: If the machine has been IPLed, a QCLEAR is
required. However, a loss of customer data can result
with this selection.
If no error occurs, the code transfers modules from the
disk to the processor main storage, and asks you to swap
disks. After the disk has been swapped, the modules
from the processor storage are transferred to the new
disk. One disk swap transfers all modules. The request
for the ORIGINAL disk indicates that the transfer is
complete. If a support processor-processing unit
interface error occurs, the process stops, and the transfer
must be restarted.
Status Area Codes
SZ
LA
01
02
OF
21
31
41
4F
81
82
83
8F
9F
From/to modules a different size
From/to modules have a different load address
Zero length
Error during transfer of engineering data
Diskette not ready
Past end-of-file
Address length, memory protect error
Module 10 not found
Write protect error
Read error
Adapter machine check
UC machine check
Cylinder index and master index different
No current seek issued
Notes:
The status shows the last error encountered.
When the ERR MODS area indicates 0001 (the status
area displays WDSZ, and line 21 displays the message
TRANSFER HAL TED), a machine serial number mismatch
exists between the FROM and the TO diskettes.
Model Group 2
© IBM Corp. 1981
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676456
1. of 1
44191f
(
(J 0 ,,) 0 0 0 0 () 0 () 0 0 () 0 0
- --
--
-
-
-
0
---
-----
---
0·0 0 ··0
~-~-'---------
\.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C) 0
C-",
,
(
/
(
(
(
(
(
o o
• •
•
•
(
PROGRAM lOAD (Ql)
The Program Load screen is the console function which
controls the processing unit (PU) initial microcode load (lML)
and the system initial program load (lPL). This screen can be
invoked automatically from initial power-up or selected from
the General Selection screen (0).
The System operates in two modes. One is the System/370
(S/370) emulate mode. The other is the Virtual Storage
Extended (VSE) mode and is the normal 4300 mode. The
parameters that have been set determine the mode that is
invoked automatically at power-up.
A function of the Program Load screen is to display the
optional parameters. This function is similar to a
configuration function because the parameters are changed
and the configuration record is updated. The selected
parameters are intensified on the screen.
From the Program Load screen you can go to the Mode
Assist (I) screen, the General Selection (0) screen, or Return
to Programming Systems (Z) screen.
*PROGRAM LOAD*
VI CS TEST
V2 MS DATA
V3 MS ADDR
V4 SCOPE LP
S SAVE STG
Y NO CS LD
PERFORM IML: M
MODE-ASSIST MENU:
*MODE*
S/370
*ASS I STS*
(NONE)
PERFORM IPL: P
IPL UNIT ADDR: U 191
RESET TYPE: Rl LOAD CLEAR
R2 LOAD NORMAL
CONSOLE MODE: Nl PTR/KYBD
N2 DISPLAY
CONSOLE ADDR: TO 01F
Tl all
IML AT POWER-ON: Xl YES
X2 NO
T2 012
H3 DSC
COpy KEY: K3 CONSOLE
KD DISKETTE
KC OOE CHNL PTR
STATUS NO I ML
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
(
(,
(
This screen is used to change the IML MODE and ASSISTS
fields on the Program Load screen. The Mode and Assists (if
any) that are selected (intensified) are loaded into the
processor from the Program Load screen when the PERFORM
IML: M function is invoked.
System Mode (Wn)
The SYSTEM MODE (S/370 or VSE) that is currently selected
is intensified on the screen. To change the SYSTEM MODE.
key in the corresponding code (W1 or W2) on the
SELECTION line after the I, and press ENTER. Certain assists
apply to only one system mode. Some assists are not
selectable with others. If you attempt to select such mutually
exclusive assists, the message INCOMPATIBLE SELECTION
appears on the screen.
==>
SELECTION:
4341
Assists (On)
Any assist currently selected is intensified on the screen. To
change the current assist selection, first reset all assists (see
"No Assists (R)" description). Then select an Assist by
keying the corresponding two digits and pressing ENTER.
The assist selected is intensified on the screen.
1. Key L next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Notes:
The mode and assist when none is currently specified can
be selected in one operation by keying W1 and the two-digit
assist code.
The Program Load screen displays the state of the last
successful/ML.
For more information about program load, see "Program
Load (OL)-Parameter Details."
(
MODEj ASSIST (QLI)
To display the Program Load screen from the General
Selection screen:
•
(
(
{
*PROGRAM LOAD*
Notes:
*MODE-ASSIST SELECTION*
SYSTEM MODE: WI S/370
W,2 VSE
ASS I STS: 01 VMA
02 VSl
03 MVS
NO ASSISTS: R
LOAD SCREEN: L
PERFORM IML: M
The Program Load screen displays the state of the last
successfullML.
•
You must perform an IML to carryover the new Mode
and Assist selected for IML.
•
Assists can not be transferred by the Module Transfer
(OF M) screen.
•
Assists are valid in S/370 mode only.
VMA (01) and MVS (03) Assists combination is valid
only when configured with 80K Control storage (Control
Store Increment option, Model Group 2 only).
Q GENERAL
SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT I ON:
I
No Assists (R)
==>
4341
This function resets the assists that are currently in effect
(intensified). Any assist must be reset before another assist
or mode can be selected.
To clear an assist. key in R after the I on the SELECTION
line and press ENTER.
Model Group 2
© IBM Corp. 1981
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676457
1 of 4
44 195f
(
t.oad Screen (l)
Program load (al)-Parameter Details
. Entering L on the SELECTION line returns the display to the
Program Load screen. If another screen is displayed from the
Model Assist Selection screen, any changes made to the
mode and assist fields are lost and the previous settings are
loaded when the processor is IMLed.
A function of the Program Load screen is displaying the
optional parameters. This function is similar to a
configuration function because the parameters are changed
and the configuration record is updated. The selected
parameters are intensified on the screen. Anyone or all of
the commands with parameters can occur in any order on the
SELECTION line.
Perform IMl (M)
Entering M on the SELECTION line returns the display to the
Program Load screen and initiates the microcode. load that
was last specified on the Model Assist Selection screen.
Perform IMl 1M)
General Selection (a)
Keying M next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER IMLs the
processor and loads the microcode for the mode selected on
the Model Assist screen.
Entering a Q on the SELECTION line changes the display to
the General Selection screen. If this screen is displayed from
the Model Assist Selection screen, any changes to the mode
and assist fields are lost. You must perform an IML to carry
over the new mode and assist selected for 1M L.
IMl at Power-On (Xn)
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
)
The following describes the Program Load screen
parameters:
Entering a Z on the SELECTION line returns the display to the
Operating System (Display or PtrlKybd mode) screen. If this
screen is displayed from the Model Assist Selection screen,
any changes to the mode and assist fields are lost. You must
perform an IML to carry over the new mode and assist
selected for 1M L.
Power-on IML can occur only when the support processor is
IMLed from a power-off condition, the CE/NORMAL switch
is in NORMAL, and X1 has been previously selected. If the
first screen is other than the Program Load screen, no
automatic IML is performed regardless of the parameter
setting. For an automatic power-on IML, key in X1 next to
SELECTION. For no automatic Power-On IML, key in X2.
Reset Type (Rn)
The following shows the effect for an IML function.
This parameter specifies the type of system reset taken. The
reset is the one currently intensified on the screen. The reset
type can be changed by entering the appropriate code (R1 or
R2) following the SELECTION label and pressing ENTER.
Once selected, the load clear (R 1) reset function remains
active (intensified) only until a successful IPL is accomplished.
A successful IPL or power-off changes the selection back
to load normal (R2) reset function.
At IPL time, a basic processor and an I/O system reset in
the configured channels is performed. As part of the I/O
system reset. pending interrupts are cleared, and a system
reset is signaled to the I/O control units and devices
configured to the channel.
The first IML from power-off resets the entire processor.
Subsequent IMLs reset everything except the TOO clock.
When in VSE mode, and a re-IPL is being done with the
RESET -NORMAL selected, there must be enough
addressable virtual storage to load and initialize the
program/system. If not, the program can be designed to
detect the program check and issue VSE instructions to
obtain more addressable virtual storage. This is required for a
stand-alone dump when RESET -NORMAL is selected.
If neither of these two options is available, the IPL must be
performed with RESET -CLEAR selected.
Notes:
•
If you select IML at power-on, do not perform any other
function or press any key until the power-on and IML
functions are complete. These functions cannot be
aborted because microcode is involved in a very complex
sequence.
PSW
PU Timer
Clock Comparator
Control Registers
General Registers
Floating-Point Regs
Storage Keys
Main Storage
TOO Clock (See Note)
Channel DLAT
Retry Local Store
Trap/BAL
Local Store
Channel Data Buffer
Channel Control
Trace
Control Store
Swap Buffer
Cache Retry
PU DLAT
Key Reset
Directories
Cache
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
I
I
C
C = cleared
I = set to initial values
Note: An IML, other than a power-on IML, resets everything
except the TOO clock.
The following shows the effect of reset for an I PL function.
Clear
(Note 1)
C
C
I
PSW
PU Timer
Clock Comparator
Control Registers
General Registers
Floating-Point Regs
Storage Keys
Main Storage
TOO Clock
The setting of this control is effective only when one of
the Power On keys has been used. It is not effective if a
power-up is selected from the QM screen.
Perform IPL (P)
Entering P after SELECTION and pressing ENTER perform the
initial program load.
C
C
C
C
U
Program
(Note 1)
C
U
U
U
U
U
U(Note 2)
U
U = unchanged
C = cleared
I = set to initial values
IPL Unit Address (Ucuu)
Notes:
The address must include a hex-digit channel number and a
two-digit hex-character device number from which the
program is loaded when the perform IPL (P) function is
initiated. An example of an entry on the SELECTION line for
the IPL device is: U191.
1. A PSW is loaded from the program, and the machine is
left in a running state.
2. The virtual addressing tables (VSE mode) are not
affected.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379829 28Jun82
C)
. ". j
o
C)
o
C)
o
PN 2676457
2 of 4
44 200f
(-
f
(/
o o
Console Mode (Nn)
Copy Key (Kx)
Note: You must softstop the machine (press the STOP key)
before changing this parameter.
The COPY KEY is displayed on the screen to indicate the
assignment of the COPY key. The three modes of
assignment are:
The N command allows the assignment of consoles to either
printer/keyboard or display mode. If an N1 command is
assigned, all consoles are assigned to the printer /keyboard
mode, which provides the channel interface for 1052/3210
type of devices. This mode permits the optional coupling of
a display console with a printer as a one-device address. To
couple, assign the devices (display and printer) the same
console address. Data that is on the display console is
automatically printed on the printer when these devices are
coupled together.
When in printer/keyboard mode (N1), a maximum of two
addresses can be assigned regardless of the number of
terminals attached. The maximum configuration in
printer/keyboard mode is two display consoles coupled with
two printers. Any over two display consoles attached to the
system must be disconnected (DSC). A printer cannot be
assigned a console address without being coupled to a
display console. An error message occurs if these restrictions
are not observed.
If an N2 command is assigned, all consoles are assigned to
the display mode, which enables the channel interface for
. 3270-type of devices. This mode requires each device to
have a unique device address - no sharing of addresses.
This address has either a T or H device assignment with its
accompanying unit number.
Note: When changing between Display and
Printer/Keyboard modes, key both console mode and
address changes as one entry (for example: NT TOO ToH3o TO).
Console Address (Tn/Hn)
Note: You must softstop the machine (press the STOP key)
before making a change to this parameter.
A terminal that is attached to the system causes a Tn or Hn
to be displayed on the Program Load screen. The "T"
designation indicates a display console; an "H" indicates a
printer. The number "n" following the T or the H indicates
the port to which the device is attached. Each attached
terminal may be aSSigned a unit address if it is to be
accessed by the programming system. The unit address must
indicate channel zero (first digit is A), and the unit portion
must be an unassigned address on this channel.
Channel Printer (KC cuu)
The Program Load screen highlights the current selection. It
displays only those devices physically attached and selected
as installed on the System Configuration screen (QFS) or, if a
channel-attached device, on the UCW Assignment (QDU)
screen.
•
Any terminal may be assigned an address of "DSC" (for
disconnected). A terminal that is disconnected has no
address and is not available to the programming system.
Assignment of terminal addresses depends upon the
console mode (display or printer/keyboard).
IML Invoke Procedure (M)
1. Key the parameters sequentially (any order) next to
SELECTION. Only those which require a change need to
be entered.
2. Key M next to SELECTION.
Note: This is necessary, to initiate the IML sequence,
even if the parameters have not been changed.
To invoke IML from a power-off condition:
The existing status of that screen can be later viewed by
using the Saved Screens (QEW) function.
Channel Printer (KC cuu): When the COpy KEY DEVICE
is configured for channel printer mode (KC cuu), the current
screen is printed by the assigned channel printer when the
COpy key is pressed.
Notes:
The Channel Printer (KC cuu) selection is operative when
the machine has been IMLed but not IPLed.
•
Pressing the Paging key while using the Diskette (KD) or
Channel Printer (KC cuu) options may require you to
press the key twice after using the Copy key function.
Fast-Select JML/IPL (MP)
1. Key MP next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Warning: For the Diskette (KD) and Channel Printer IKC
cuu) options:
Before pressing the COpy key, wait until the input data
is saved. Input data is saved by pressing the ENTER key
after you have altered a screen. If you press the COpy
key before the input data is saved, the input data can be
lost.
Diskette (KD): When the COPY KEY DEVICE is configured
for Diskette mode (KD), the current screen is copied onto the
diskette when the COpy key is pressed.
(
(
To invoke IML from the Program Load screen:
3. Press ENTER.
For the Channel Printer IKC cuu) option:
If the machine has been IPLed, a QCLEAR is required.
However, a loss of customer data can result with this
selection.
(
To invoke IML and IPL from the Program Load screen:
Console Printer (Kn): When the COpy KEY DEVICE is
configured for console printer mode (Kn), the screen indicates
which console unit (not console address) has been assigned
to print the hard copy when the COPY key is pressed. If you
choose to remove the hard-copy device, key KO on the
SELECTION line and, if no other changes, press ENTER. For
example, if you want to assign a hard-copy device, key in K3
on the SELECTION line and press ENTER.
Notes:
Console addresses cannot be assigned with the
UCU/Device Directory Update function (QDUU).
Invoking Procedures
Console Printer (Kn)
Diskette (KD)
(-
(
Note: If there are no errors, all command parameters are
examined and executed, followed by an IML of the mode
determined by the parameters.
IML Invoke Procedure (Automatic)
1. Place CE MODE switch in NORMAL.
Notes:
Either M or P may be entered first, but IML always
executes before IPL.
If P is keyed alone without a prior IML, an error occurs.
IML executes with the existing parameter setting.
Fast-Select IML/IPL (Alternate) (QLM)
To invoke IML or IPL from any screen:
1. Key QL next to SELECTION followed by any commands
and parameters that may be required.
2. Key M or MP next to QL on the SELECTION line.
3. Press ENTER.
Notes:
2. Press POWER ON/IML.
All syntax and dependent error conditions are verified
and then executed.
Notes:
When the commands are complete, the system returns to
the Program Load screen and awaits further commands.
The parameters must have been set during some
previous power-up.
•
Support processor powers up.
•
Support processor does an SP-IML.
•
Processing unit powers up.
•
Processing unit does an IML.
Message NO IML, IML IN PROGRESS, IML ERROR, or
IML COMPLETE is displayed.
Invoking Conditions
Commands are examined for syntax errors (correct
parameters) first. Dependent commands are examined
next. An error in either place returns control of the
Program Load screen to the user. Only after all errors
have been corrected are the commands executed.
An IML is performed any time M appears on the
SELECTION line and there are no errors.
IPL Invoke Procedure (P)
To invoke IPL from the Program Load screen:
1. Key the parameters sequentially (any order) next to
SELECTION.
Note: Only those parameters that require a change need
to be entered.
2. Key P next to SELECTION.
Note: Examine the IPL Unit and IPL Reset type and key
in any corrections that may be required.
3. Press ENTER.
Screen data can be changed only by way of the
SELECTION line.
Internal errors (logic or hardware) are indicated by
reference codes.
If IML or IPL detects an error, a message is displayed,
control returns to the program load screen, and more
commands can be entered.
A SIGP instruction is used to change the console mode or
device address in the processing unit, provided the
processor is in a softstop state, not running or
hardstopped.
Notes:
Processing unit executes IPL and displays the message
IPL COMPLETE.
If P is keyed alone without a prior IML, an error occurs.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676457
3 of 4
44 205f
(
Patches at IML
Verification Tests (Vn)
No Control Store Load (V)
.coreloads in the processing unit can be Patched after every
IML. The patch is accomplished by invoking a Block. This is
a feature of the Block screen (QB). For procedures, see
"Block Facility."
,
Verification Tests are used only when directed by your
Support Structure. At IML time, four tests can be run that
ensure the proper operation of the component selected.
This command causes the livlL routine to skip the actual
loading of control storage.
To set up a patch, enter a block into the system with the
Block editing commands. (The Block must not contain
'ODD .. : commands that permanently alter the machine.)
Next, place the name beside the coreload to be patched in
the IML Patches screen (QBM). From now until the name is
removed from the QBM screen for the coreload IMLed, the
user is prompted with the question RUN PATCHES (Y /N)?
after every successful 1M L. The status of the invoked block
is displayed in the message area on line 20. If an error
occurs, control is returned to the Program Load screen, and
the status display is changed to PATCH ERROR.
The following commands are available and displayed only
when the CE MODE switch is ON.
Valid Arguments/Commands
V 1 - Control store test
V 2 - Data test of main store
V 3 - Address test of main store
V 4 - Scope loop test
To exit from any of these commands, press Program
Function key 9.
Save Storage (S)
Note: Errors occurring during IML cannot be patched with
this method because a patch depends upon a successfullML.
This selection reduces the resets done during a re-IML if the
coreload has not changed. Some of the arrays are not reset
and main storage is not cleared.
Status Messages
The following shows the effect for the Save Storage function:
For information about program load status messages, see
"Messages. "
PSW
CPU Timer
Clock Comparator
Control Registers
General Registers
Floating-Point Regs
Storage Keys
Main Storage
TOD Clock
Channel DLAT
Retry Local Store
Trap/BAL
Local Store
Channel Data Buffer
Channel Control
Trace
Control Store
Swap Buffer
Cache Retry
PU DLAT
Key Reset
Directories
Cache
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
U
U
Return to General Selection Screen (Q)
The following shows the effect for the No Control Store load
function:
PSW
CPU Timer
Clock Comparator
Control Registers
General Registers
Floating-Point Regs
Storage Keys
Main Storage
TOD Clock
Channel DLAT
Retry Local Store
Trap/BAL
Local. Store
Channel Data Buffer
Channel Control
Trace
Control Store
Swap Buffer
Cache Retry
PU DLAT
Key Reset
Directories
Cache
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
C
U
C
To return to the General Selection screen from the Program
Load screen:
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
To return to Prog Sys from the Program Load screen:
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
C
C
I
C
C
C
U
C
C
C
I
I
C
U = unchanged
C = cleared
I = set to initial values
C
C
C
I
C
C
C
I
U
U
U
U
U
U
U = unchanged
C = cleared
I = set to initial values
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379829 28Jun82
C)
o o o
00
o
000
o o
,
...
o
..~
'·:
0 ·.,'
PN 2676457
4 Of 4
o 000 000 o
44 210f
o
(
(
(
('
(
..
o
(
(-
(
.'"
(
(
*TYPE*
*ACTION*
N NORMAL
S STOP
T TRACE-STOP
W TRACE-WRAP
Stop when certain specified parameters are met.
Trace selected addresses and I/O operations and place
them in an accessible area for later use.
H
Y
M
B
HARD STOP
SYNC PULSE
MI CWO-TRACE
MICBR-TRACE
+ ACCUMULATION SW
Obtain sync pulses when specified operating conditions
.are encountered.
The format of the Compare/Trace screen is different for the
370 and VSE modes in that the screen for 370 provides for
specification of virtual or real addresses.
SELECTION:
MAN
*Op*
*ADDR*
ANY REFERENCE
DATA STORE
I/O REFERENCE
I NSTR COUNTER
I/O INSTRUCTIONS
W CSW'S
P PSW SWAPS
M MICROWORD
L LOCAL STORE-DST
S LOCAL STORE-SRC
H CHANNEL-SEQ CNT
X CHANNEL-DATA
0-
%
o
*V/R*
V VIRTUAL
R REAL
{
NOTE:
This action parameter compares the address or data
compare conditions as specified by the remaining parameter
fields. Following a successful compare, the system executes
the current instruction, accepts all pending allowed interrupts,
and enters the soft-stop state.
When the machine is stopped because of the stop function,
MATCH STOP is displayed on line 21.
(DEFAULT)
STOP
QAS-
SOME TYPES ACCUMULATE.
QAN = RESET.
d Storage Address
~I
I NSTR STOP
TEST
r-A}
~D
==>
~C
x
The following address parameters are required after the
appropriate Action and Type parameters have been selected.
b
Microword/Microbranch Trace parameters.
+
Accumulation Switch -
n
Normal -
s
Storage Address (Data compare not allowed) Requires a zero to six-digit address within the range of
real or virtual storage.
d
Storage Address (Data compare - optional) Requires a zero to six-digit address within the range of
real or virtual storage.
t
No extra parameters required.
No Address - No address required. Allows a full
Instruction Counter trace and an address/data
compare. This provides the ability to stop a trace at a
certain point.
Local Storage Address (Data compare not allowed)Requires a three-digit address where:
Digit 1 = Local storage section number (0- 7)
Digit 2 = An eight-byte area within the section
(O-F)
Digit 3 = Always zero.
1. Key in the appropriate functions (for address compare,
data compare, or trace) following the SELECTION label.
2. Press ENTER.
Notes:
Six fields are associated with this display: Action, Type,
Addr, Op, Data, and V /R. The function selection under
the Action field determines what parameters within the
remaining five fields can be selected.
m
Control Storage Address (Data compare not allowed)
- Requires a zero to six-digit address within the
range of control storage on a fullword boundary.
o
To exit the A-screen, key Q next to SELECTION, and
press ENTER.
I/O Instruction Trace Address and Op Code section "0 I/O Instructions."
w
CSW Trace Address -
P
PSW Trace Type -
h
Channel·Sequence Count Address and Count "H Channel-Seq Cnt."
Corp. 1981
v VIRTUAL
R REAL
Address Parameters
To select a Compare/Trace function:
@ IBM
\
./
~M----m
Control Storage Address
~L}-l
Local Storage Address
L-.S
2. Press ENTER.
o
FFFF
&
*V/R*
4341
To select the Compare/Trace screen from the General
Selection screen:
1. Key A next to SELECTION.
0000-
/
FFFFFF
To fast-select compare/trace functions from other manual
mode screens, key QA followed by the desired
compare/trace parameters. If the selection is accepted, the
current screen remains displayed and the compare/trace
parameters are displayed on line 22. However, if the
selection is not accepted (such as entry error), the
Compare/Trace screen is displayed.
To avoid this situation, before using the compare/trace
function, press the STOP key. When the WAIT indicator is
displayed, wait approximatly 30 seconds, and then select
the desired compare/trace function.
• *DATA*
=
A
D
I
C
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
The Compare/Trace screen is used by specifying one
parameter from each field that can be required to perform the
function desired. To invoke the function, enter the
parameters on the SELECTION and press ENTER.
Warning: An error may occur if a compare/trace function is
selected and an I/O program with long CCW strings or large
data counts is in progress. If this I/O error condition
(overuns, interfa'ce control checks) occurs, status data in the
CSW arid so forth are unpredictable.
(
When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: STOP appears
on line 22.
*COMPARE/TRACE*
The Compare/Trace screen is obtained from any other
manual mode screen by entering QA following the
SELECTION label and pressing ENTER. The Compare/Trace
function provides the capability to:
o
(/ (
S STOP
COMPARE/TRACE (QA)
o
(~
See
Channel Data Address and Data Channel-Data. "
See "p PSW Swaps."
No extra
No extra parameters.
Action Parameters
Note: Each of the following action parameters show what
applicable selections can be made and what address
parameter is required to make the selection valid.
N NORMAL
When this function is selected, the Compare/Trace area is
cleared on line 22.
This action parameter is used alone to reset any 'previously
selected compare/trace functions. Keying N when on the
Compare/Trace screen or QAN from any other manual mode
screen terminates any compare/trace function, and normal
processing continues.
T TRACE-STOP
When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: TRST appears
on line 22.
On a Type C (lnstr Counter) operation, this action causes
the instruction counter addresses to be stored in a trace area
until the trace area becomes full (128 addresses). When the
machine is stopped because the trace area is full, MATCH
STOP (INSTRUCTION STOP if tracing a instruction) is
displayed on line 21. Pressing the START key repeats the
process.
On Type A, 0, and I operations, the instruction counter
address is stored only when the compare conditions specified
by the remaining parameter fields are met. Processing
continues following each compare until the trace area is full.
TRACE-STOP
QAT-
r-Aj~D
d Storage Address
~I
I-C--t No Address
I-LJ-I Local Storage Address
L-S
NORMAL
QAN--1
See lOW CSWs."
See "X
r---
NO Extra Parameters
Model Group 2
See
EC 379825 OSJun81
PN 2676356
1 of 4
44215f
W TRACE-WRAP
H HARD STOP
Y SYNC PULSE
B MICBR-TRACE
When this function is selected, ADDR-COMP: TRWR appears
on line 22.
The hard-stop function can only be selected when the CE
MODE is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP: H-ST is
displayed on line 22.
The sync pu1se function can only be selected when the CE
MODE switch is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP: SYNC is
displayed on line 22.
The microbranch trace function can only be selected when the
CE MODE switch is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP:
MBTR appears on line 22.
Following a successful compare, the current microword is
completed, and no additional microwords are executed.
(Refresh clocks continue to run.) MATCH-STOP appears on
line 21. Hard stop is implied when CSAR is displayed on line
21.
•
Following a successful compare, the system generates a
sync signal. This sync signal can be monitored at A2J4G03.
The system does not stop.
In this mode, the CSARBU trace array contains the address
of the last 32 targets of microwords that caused a modular
switch. The addresses can be monitored by displaying this
array by the Insert/Extract function aVAB.
On a Type C (lnstr Counted operation, this action causes
the instruction counter addresses to be stored into the trace
area. When the trace area becomes full, additional addresses
are stored, and the oldest are dropped so that the trace area
always contains the 128 most recent addresses.
On Type A. D, and I operations, the instruction counter
address is stored in the trace area only when the compare
conditions specified by the remaining parameter fields are
met. Processing continues following each compare.
The microword that caused the match is at the control
storage address last entered into the trace array (aVAS).
This address is the one logically preceding the address
displayed in line 21.
SYNC PULSE
QAY--
~
Storage Address
No Address
----0
+ ACCUMULATION SW
l-'
~X----x
This selection acts as a switch. YVhen selected and
ACCUMULATION is on, the message SOME TYPES
ACCUMULATE. QAN RESET ALL. appears on the screen.
The next time it is selected, the message is erased. Once on,
the mode is remembered even if the compare/trace screen is
not being used.
Channel Data Address
Storage Address
1-1
I/O Instruction Trace
r-C
CSW Trace
i-M--m
PSW Trace
Control Storage Address
I-L}-l Local Storage Address
I-S
Local Storage Address
I-H--h Channel Sequence Count
'--X--x
Channel Data Address
,
Warning: Some problems may occur when stopping on a
MICROWORD. They occur when the MATCH-STOP
interrupts communications between the SP and PU via the
LCA. This can be recognized by the error message SP/PU
COMMUNICATION FAILURE or CHANNEL 0 UNAVAILABLE.
No Extra Parameters
t No Address
r-H--h Channe 1 Sequence Count
QAH
~b
QAB--1
r-L}-l Local Storage Address
r- S
HARD STOP
QAW
r-A}-d Storage Address
r-C
For an I-counter type match, a hard stop occurs before the
instruction is executed.
TRACE-WRAP
MICBR-TRACE
M MICWD-TRACE
The microword-trace function can only be selected when the
CE MODE switch is on. When selected, ADDR-COMP:
MWTR appears on line 22.
The mode applies to two basic areas of the Compare/Trace
function: (1) type field selections for normal matches (storage,
local storage, control storage, channel), and (2) the
10/CSW/PSW traces. Selections within these areas are.
accumulative.
For each microword execution, the address, derived from
the CSAR and the CSARBU, is stored into the CSARBU trace
array after the array index has been incremented by 1. In this
mode, the array contains the addresses of the last 32
microwords executed.
The microword addresses can be monitored by displaying
this array by the Insert/Extract function aVAB.
ACCUMULATION SW
~+
QA+--1
The MICWD-trace function is the normal reset condition.
That is, when the N-Normal action is selected, the
MICWD-trace action is highlighted and is in effect although
not displayed on line 22.
No Extra Parameters
To recover:
.If the screen displays MATCH-5TOP:
MICWD-TRACE
1. Enter DAN to clear the address compare condition.
2. Press START to leave the CLOCK-5TOP state.
3. Press the SP reset button.
QA~ ~b
No Extra Parameters
• If the screen displays INSTR-5TOP:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Press
Press
QOM to stop the PU.
QAN to clear the address compare condition.
QON.
START to leave the CLOCK-5 TOP state.
the SP reset button.
Model Group 2
If control is regained you can continulI: however, avoid
selecting a stop address that is in the I/O Input Set-up Trap.
If the above procedures do not aI/ow you to regain control;
power down and then back up.
/~
,
/
.~
0
(
~\
\,--~
C)
0 0 () 0 () 0
C)
C)
r~
~
(')
~
EC 319825 05Jun81
PN 2616356
44220f
20f4
0
0'<..y
0 0
..
0
\..y
r""j
0
0 0
~
.
I
~
0
I~
"'-_f'
0 0
('~
~-)
0 0
(
f
(C
(
(:-
("
(
(
(7 (-- (----
(~
(
(-
(~
"
fi
i :;.·-(-...,
~,:".:"
.
C"
,'o..'t
1"'
/'
~/
(
(
(
Accumulate Mode
Nonaccumulate Mode
D DATA STORE
The following matrix shows which ACTION/TYPE
combinations are reset or kept when a new
ADDRESS/COMPARE selection is made. The letters
(lowercase) are the address letters described in the section
"Address Parameters".
The following matrix shows which ACTION/TYPE
combinations are reset or kept when a new
ADDRESS/COMPARE selection is made. The letters
(lowercase) are the address letters described in the section
"Address Parameters."
When this function is selected. TYPE: D-STORE appears on
line 22.
•
Storage addresses of the same type cause a reset. I/O
addresses of the same type do not cause a reset. Action and
Type fields mayor may not reset depending on the
restrictions listed below.
Note: Even in nonaccumulate mode, four areas of
compare/trace function may be accumulative; that is,
selectiol9s made in one area do not cause resets of the other
areas. They are:
Note: The fol/owing restrictions prevent the associated
selections from accumulating. You are limited to:
•
Instruction trace (wrap or stop)
•
I/O, CSW, or PSW trace
•
Normal matching or data comparing.
•
•
A control storage address and a local storage address
along with one real storage address or virtual storage
address.
I I/O REFERENCE
When this function is selected, TYPE: 10-REF appears on line
22.
One data compare value.
Note: For parameters A, 0, and I.
A Trace-Stop or Trace-Wrap value, not both.
The address specified in the command is always converted
to the next lowest doubleword (8 byte) boundary because
the machine accesses eight bytes of storage simultaneouly.
A compare occurs, if the address specified in a storage
operation is anywhere within this doubleword.
NONACCUMULATE MODE
:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:
I :m:o!w:p:h:x:b:+
F;¥,n:s:d:t:
:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:
OLD Sett ing
One I/O (or ALL) mnemonics for each I/O Instruction
Trace channel.
n
A Microword-Trace or Microbranch Trace, not both.
R! R : R : R : R
~ R : R : R : R : R : R : "
:. R
IsIR:R:R:K\R:R:K:K:K:R:R:K:K
A Channel Sequence Count or Channel Data selection, not
both.
IdIR:R:R:K:R:R:K:K:K:R:R:K:K
C INSTR COUNTER
When this function is selected. TYPE: I-CNTR appears on
line 22.
NltIR:K:K:R\K:K:K:K:K:K\K:K\K
E -------------------------------------------------------WllIR:R:R:K:R:R!K:K:K!R:R:K:K
ACCUMULATE MODE
SlmIR:R:R:K:R:R:K:K!K:R;R:K!K
OLD Setting
e -------------------------------------------------------.
tloIR:K:K!K!K:K!R!R!R!K:K:KiK
t
-------------------------------------------------------ilwIR:K:K:K:K:K:R:R:R:K:K:K:K
n --------------------------------------------------------
glpIRlK!K!K:K:K!R:R:R:K!K!K:K
IsIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
IdIR:K:K:K;K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
NltIR:K:K:R:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
E -------------------------------------------------------WllIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
S I m I R : "K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K : K
e -------------------------------------------------------tloIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
t -------------------------------------------------------ilwIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
n -------------------------------------------------------glpIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K
fhIR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:R:R:K:K
IXIR:R!R:K!R:R:K:K!K:R:R!K!K
IbIR:K:K!K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:R!K
I+IR:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K:K!K:R
~:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-\
R
= Reset
Trace
I
b
I
Type Parameters
R : K : K : K : K : K': K : K : K : K : K : R : K
RIKIKIKIKIKIKIKIKIKIKIKIR
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:
R = Reset
K = Keep
M = Microword Trace
The result of a QATC or QAWC operation is displayed with
the QDTI function.
o
1/0 INSTRUCTIONS
The O-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action (W).
The I/O instruction trace address and op code is placed in a
4Kb block of auxiliary storage that can be displayed with the
QDTP function.
(
(
(-
(
(- (
--'
Note: If the same I/O operation is wanted on all or some of
the channels, the selection must be made in accumulate
mode the appropriate amount of times.
P PSWSWAPS
The P-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action (W).
The PSW trace type is placed in a 4Kb block of auxiliary
storage that can be displayed with the QDTf' function.
The selection format for this function is:
Type
Condition
b
I
M
P
S
E
L
V
All interrupts
I/O PSW swaps
Machine check
Program check
Supervisor call
External interrupt
Load PSW
VM-assisted load PSW, SVC. or program
checks
where:
b = Blank
W CSWs
The W-type function is used with the Trace-Wrap action
{WI. The CSW trace is placed in a 4Kb block of auxiliary
storage that can be displayed with the QDTP function.
The selection format for this function is:
Address
Condition
bbb
All channels, all devices
Specific channel, all devices
Specific device
c..
cuu
where:
b
Blank
Don't care character
Channel and unit address
cuu
The selection format for this function is:
IxIR:K:K:K:K:K:it:K:K:R!R:K:K
-------------------------------------------------------~
When used in conjunction with the S (Stop) function, this
parameter compares the instruction counter with the address
entered in the address field. When used with either trace
function IT or WI, the address cannot be specified.
IhIR:R!R:K:R:R!K:K:K:R:R:K!K
K = Keep
M = Microword
(
This parameter causes the transfer of data to and from I/O
devices to be compared to the address and data specified by
the remaining parameter fields.
Microword or branch tracing (CE only).
One C.. or CUU selection for each I/O Instruction Trace
or CSW Trace channel.
•
This parameter causes the address, or both address and
data, specified by the remaining parameter fields (OP. Data)
to be compared to the storage address or address and data
whenever a machine store (write) function occurs.
(
A ANY REFERENCE
When this function is selected, TYPE: ANYREF appears on
line 22.
This parameter causes the address, or both address and
data, specified by the remaining parameter fields to be
compared to the storage address or address and data
whenever storage is accessed by the machine.
Address
Condition
bbb bbb
c .. bbb·
c .. iii
cuu bbb
cuu iii
All channels, all devices. all operations
Specific channel. all devices, all operations
Specific channel, all device, specific operation
Specific device, all operations
Specific device, specific operation
where:
b
Blank
Don't care character
cuu
Channel and unit address
iii
Valid I/O operation mnemonic
CIO
Clear I/O
HDV = Halt Device
SIO
Start I/O
TIO
Test I/O
HIO
Halt I/O
TCH
Test channel
Note: Only CSWs stored as a result of an I/O interrupt are
traced with this option. CSWs stored from an I/O
instruction are only traced if the I/O instruction trace is
active.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
PN-2676356
30f4
44 225f
(-
("
C:
")
M MICROWORD
X CHANNEL-DATA
OP Field
DATA Field
The microword-type function can be selected only when the
CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: MICWRD
appears on line 22.
The channel data function can be selected only when the CE
MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: CH-DAT appears
on line 22.
This field is used for address type or data compare
operations.
This field specifies up to two bytes of data to' be compared at
the address specified in the ADDR field. Any hexadecimal
digit or digits comprising the two-byte data compare field can
be ignored by entering a period (.) as a "don't care"
character.
The control storage address backup (CSARBU) contains the
address of the microword currently being executed. The
. address specified in the AODR field is loaded into the control
storage address match register. When the CSARBU register
" and the CS address match register compare, a signal
indicates a control storage match.
If a hard-stop action is selected and a match occurs,
MATCH STOP appears on line 21. The match address
appears in line 21 opposite the CSAR label. The S (Stop)
selection is also allowed.
This function provides a hard stop or a sync pulse on a
specific byte of channel data by specifying the channel
number and byte of data. The type must follow the format:
cdd
where:
c
Channel number
dd = One byte of hex data
The destination address specified in the ADDR field is
loaded into the local storage address match register. When
this register compares with the local storage address register,
and data is written in that local storage element. a signal
. indicates a local store-destination address match.
If a stop action is selected and a match occurs, MATCH
STOP appears on line 21. The match address appears on line
22.
ADDR Field
The address field is displayed on line 22 provided a data
compare operation is not in process. This field is used to
enter the search address for all compare/trace functions.
The characteristics for the address specified are:
•
The search address can be up to a six-digit hexadecimal
number.
•
The maximum address value must be less than the
machine capability. Five maximum values are checked:
physical real main storage, customer accessible real main
storage, virtual main storage, control storage, and local
storage.
The address specified in the command is always
converted to the next lowest doubleword (S byte)
boundary because the machine accesses eight bytes of
storage simultaneouly. A compare occurs, if the address
specified in a storage operation is anywhere within this
doubleword.
The local store-source function can be selected only when
the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE: LS-SRC
appears on line 22.
The source address specified in the ADDR field is loaded
into the local storage address match register. When this
register compares with the local storage address register and
data is read in that local storage element, a signal indicates a
local storage source address match.
Note: The following restrictions apply to data compare
operations.
.
In 370 and VSE (CE only) mode, if data is not to be
specified in the DATA field, enter a V or R in the OP field to
indicate whether the previous address specified in the ADDR
field is a virtual or real storage address. If V or R is not
specified, a default is assumed based on the mode selected.
O-FFFFFF
•
S LOCAL STORE-SRC
For bit compare operations (& or % in OP field), only the
bits that are on to comprise each hexadecimal digit are tested
for an equal (on) or not-equal (off) condition. For example, if
the data compare field contained the. digit "3" (bits = 0011),
all digits containing the last two bits equal to "1" (such as 7,
bits = 0111) compare equal. All other digits compare on a
not-equal operation.
In VSE (NORM only) mode, if data is not to be specified in
the DATA field, the OP field is not used.
L LOCAL STORE-DST
The local store-destination function can be selected only
when the CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE:
LS-DES appears on line 22.
In VSE or 370 mode, this field is used when compare data
is to be specified in addition to an address. The options are
to compare the data specified in the DATA field for an equal
or not-equal condition on any Type A, 0, and.1 operations.
On Type C operations, data can be compared only when
using the STOP function. Data compare is not allowed on a
Type C operation for trace-stop (T) and trace-wrap (WI
functions.
Data compare operations beginning on the last byte of a
2K page are not allowed.
The field equal (=) option compares up to four hexadecimal
digits (two bytes) of data specified in the DATA field for an
equal condition.
•
On Type A, D, and I operations, miSSing a data compare
is possible if sequential instructions change the same
two bytes of storage.
•
If a Clear Reset (see General Selection Screen) is
performed while a trace or a stop-on-main-storage data
compare (nonzero) function is in effect, a false match
stop occurs.
•
Data Contents Compare is performed by microcode and
allows compares down to the halfword or bit. However,
because the basic match hardware stops if a reference is
made to a doubleword, the data in the target address
may not actually have been referenced.
The field not-equal (I) option compares up to four
hexadecimal digits (two bytes) of data specified in the DATA
field for a not-equal condition .
The bit equal (&) option compares all of the bits of the data
specified in the DATA field for an equal (on) condition.
The bit not-equal (%) option compares any of the bits of
the data specified in the DATA field for a not-equal (off)
condition.
V /R Field (370 Mode only)
This field is used only in 370 or CE mode when the DATA
field is specified to indicate whether the address contained in
the ADDR field is a virtual (V) or real (R) address.
Example:
Main storage must be 2080 not 208 for 2080- 7.
Local storage must be 3FO not 3F for 3FO-7.
If a stop action is selected and a match occurs, MATCH
STOP appears on line 21. The match address appears on line
Addr Entered
22.
ASA4
ASA403
ASA2545E
ASAF8FF=FFFF
ASM4224
ASM000913
ASL224
H CHANNEL-SEQ CNT
The channel sequence count function can be selected only
when the.CE MODE switch is on. When selected, TYPE:
CH-SEQ appears on line 22.
This function provides a hard stop or a sync pulse when the.
channel reaches a given point ()f operation by specifying a
channel number and a two-digit sequence count code. The
type must follow the format:
*
Line 22
Display
Contents
of Match
Regs
00000o
00000o
000400
000400
025458
FFFFEQ
004224
000910
000220
025458
OOFSFS**
004224
000910
000220
Max
Addr
FFFFFF*
FFFFFF*
FFFFFF*
FFFFFF*
OOFFFF*
OOFFFF*
007F8
For real addresses, this address most be what is
phySically installed.
** In addition to the hardware match register, microcode
compares the two bytes starting at address F8FF.
cnn
where:
c = Channel number
nn= Sequence count
Model Group 2
:EC 379826 06Junln
PN 2676366
44230f
40f4
0 () 0 0 0
{~
'J
0 0
,~
J
a
()
0 0
--0 0 0 0
~
~.
v
f"I\
0
0
V
0 0 0
n
(~
\.
;J
~)
0
\
)
(
(
(-
(
(
CHECK CONTROL (OK)
The Check Control screen enables selecting the action to be
taken by the PU when an interrupt occurs because of a
machine check. MACHINE CHECK is indicated on line 21.
Functions N, S, R, and D are mutually exclusive; functions C
and H are independent. In CE mode, an additional selection
list allows the service representative to halt SP functions that
may interfere with testing and debugging. If one of the
functions has been fast-selected, the current screen remains
displayed with the last command entered redisplayed on the
SELECTION line in a fast-select format.
If any of the high-level checkers are turned on by a
malfunction, an error latch is set, and the processor clock is
stopped. The support processor continually monitors the
status of the processor. Whenever the clock is stopped, the
support processor posts a machine check and examines the
check latches and other facilities to determine if the
instruction is retriable. If the instruction is retriable, the
support processor retries and then logs the machine check to
the disk. If the retry is successful, the log counters are
updated and processing continues. If the retry is
unsuccessful or the instruction is unretriable, the support
processor posts check stop on the screen. After the analysis
is completed. the support processor invokes the proper
routines to generate a reference code, and the system
remains in the check-stop state. At this time, the reference
code is posted both on the disk and on the screen.
(
«
(
(
c
(
Check Control -- Fast-Selection
"CHECK CONTROL"
*SP CONTROLS"
P ALL POLLING
I I CNTR POLLI NG
YES
YES
NO
NO
L SP LOGS
F REF CODES
U PU LOGS
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
N NORMAL
1. Key in letters in sequential order for the function desired
following the SELECTION label.
S HARDSTOP
Function
R NO RETRY
D DISABLE
E STOP WORD CKS
M ELA-UNRECV MC
o ELA-LOG DISPL
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
V EMC ABC LOGS YES
W EMC D LOGS
YES
NO
NO
C STOP AFTER LOG-SWITCH
H CHANNEL CHECKS-SWITCH
N
S
R
D
C
H
(Normal)
(Hardstop)
(No Retry)
(Disable)
(Stop After Log Switch)
. (Channel Checks Switch)
Entry Sequence
OKN
OKS
OKR
OKD
OKC
OKH
SP Controls
QGENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION:
To fast-select a check-control function:
==>
I NSTR STOP
4341
P
I
L
F
U
E
M
0
V
W
Function
Entry Sequence
(All Polling)
(lCNTR Polling)
(SP Logs)
(Ref Codes)
(PU Logs)
(Stop Word Cks)
(ELA Unrecv MC)
(ELA-Log Displ)
(EMC ABC Logs)
(EMC D Log)
OKP
OKI
OKL
OKF
OKU
OKE
OKM
OKO
OKV
OKW
2. Press ENTER.
The Check Control screen remains displayed if you enter a
command on the SELECTION line and it has a successful
completion. If you are on a screen other than Check Control.
and you enter a Check Control command on the SELECTION
line and it has a successful completion, a new screen is not
displayed. The Check Control screen is displayed if the
command is unsuccessful.
Warning: An error may occur if a Check Control function is
selected and an I/O program with long CCW strings or large
data counts is in progress. If this I/O error condition
(overuns, interface control checks) occurs, status data in the
CSW and so forth are unpredictable.
To avoid this situation, before using the Check Control
function, press the STOP key. When the WAIT indicator is
displayed, wait approximately 30 seconds, and then select
the desired compare/trace function.
To select the Check Control screen from the General
Selection screen:
1. Key K next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. Check Control screen is displayed.
To select a Check Control function:
1. Key in the desired function next to SELECTION .
.. 2. Press ENTER. Check Control screen is displayed.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379827 020ct81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676459
1 of 2
44 235f
SP Controls
E STOP WORD CKS
Note: These switches (states) must be set back to the YES
state after using (debugging).
This CE-only function enables or disables the SP from going
into a check-stop state when a PU stop word is executed.
YES allows the check stop; NO does not allow a check stop.
H CHANNEL CHECKS-SWITCH
Check Controls
With this switch on, an error detected in the channel
hardware causes a machine check. Based on the retry
setting, a machine check is posted.
N NORMAL
The N (normal) function clears the check control area on line
22 of the display; or displays CHK: NORM-H if
channel-checks hardware error stop is selected.
The Channel Checks switch is alternately set and reset each
time that the H-option is entered on the SELECTION line and
the ENTER key is pressed. When the switch is on, a -H is
displayed following the Check Control indicator on a line 22.
When on, the Channel Checks switch is active in all modes.
This function does not alter the C (Stop after Log) or H
(Channel Checks) switch setting.
The following conditions cause a machine check if QKH is
active.
The system determines the handling of machine checks.
P ALL POLLING
M ELA-UNRECV MC
This CE-only function enables or disables all polling by the
SP control program. .This includes rings 20 and 23, CSAR
polling, I-counter polling, and all other line 21 activity. Other
SP programs that required polling for information on the state
of the PU may not run normally if the PU is halted.
This CE-only function enables or disables ELA execution
whenever you have an unrecoverable machine check.
o
ELA-LOG DISPL
This CE-only function enables or disables an attempt to
update the PU error logging if you had a disk error.
I ICNTR POLLING
This CE-only function enables or disables the I-counter
polling which uses the SIGP .(LCA interface) instruction.
V EMC ABC LOGS
This CE-only function enables or disables Electromagnetic
Charge (EMC) logging for the A, B, and C latches.
L. SP LOGS
This CE-only function enables or disables storing of SP logs
on the disk.
W EMC D LOGS
This CE-only function enables or disables Electromagnetic
Charge (EMC) logging for the D latch.
F REF CODES
This CE-only function enables or disables storing of reference
codes on the disk.
After a QKS stop, a reset (QKN) and a pressing of the
START key resume normal operations. The machine-check
condition is logged.
•
A protect check that is detected by the hardware while
the hardware is processing data after the CCW has been
determined to be correct.
•
A chaining check that is detected when the hardware
accepts more data than has been requested during data
chaining.
Sad parity during output that is detected in the eight-byte
channel data register after the move from storage.
Bad parity during output that is detected in the two-byte
channel-out register after the move from the channel data
buffer.
PU retry is inhibited when a machine check appears. CHKC:
N RTY appears on line 22. Logging occurs normally.
This CE-only function enables or disables storing of PU logs
on the disk.
A program check that is detected by the hardware while
the hardware is processing data after the CCW has been
determined to be correct.
S HARDSTOP
The system enters the check-stop state when a
machine-check condition appears. When this option (QKS) is
selected, the processor enters the stop state immediately
when an error latch is set. No retry is permitted, and no
reference code is generated. CHK: HDST is indicated on line
22 of the system console.
R NO RETRY
U PU LOGS
•
o
Bad parity during output that is put on the data-out lines
after the move from the channel-out register.
DISABLE
Q GENERAL SELECTION
This option prevents the system from entering the check-stop
state by inhibiting the error handling function. It also inhibits
clock stop. The PU ignores all conditions that normally cause
machine checks and attempts to continue processing without
a retry. CHK:OSBL appears on line 22 of the system console.
The clock/timer checks are not set because they affect the
TOO clock. An invalid TOO setting would have to be
corrected by the Extract function.
Note: For a stop caused by a unrecoverable error, the
system appears as though it had a QKS hardstop.
The General Selection screen reappears on the system
console.
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
Releases manual operation controls within the support
processor and returns the display console to the operating
system.
C STOP AFTER LOG-SWITCH
If programs written for the System/360 are used on the
4341, an error log can overlay either instructions or data. The
Stop After Log switch is used to avoid this by stopping the
system after logging takes place. In this mode, the retry
mechanism to correct errors is still available, but erroneous
program execution because of logging is avoided.
The Stop After Log switch is alternately set and reset each
time that the C-option is entered on the SELECTION line and
the ENTER key is pressed. When the switch is on, a -C is
displayed following the Check control indicator on line 22.
When on, the Stop After Log switch is active in all modes.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676459
44240f
2 of 2
,0
~f
0 0
I:) 0
~
~;
.~,
"'-.-7
0
0 0
~
"'-~
0
(~
~
Q
~
0
~
0
0 C)
,0
-IJ
0
.~
"'--J
0 0 0
0
',,-/
0
r'\
\.._)
(-'\
0
C~
j
(-
(
(-
(-
(-
(-
«
(
{
OPERATION RATE CONTROL (QO)
*OPERATION
RAT~
CONTROL.
(
(-
(
(/
To fast-select an operation rate function:
H NORMAL
1. Key in letters in sequential order for the function desired.
I INSTRUCTION STEP
2. Press ENTER.
Function
MMICROWORD STEP
N
I
M
C
P
R
C CLOCK CYCLE STEP
Warning: Main storage is unpredictable with the use of
Clock Cycle or Clock Pulse Step. However; a loss of
customer data can result with these selections.
P CLOCK PULSE STEP
To select the Operation Rate Control screen from the
General Selection screen:
R REPEAT MICROWORD-SWITCH
1. Key 0 next to SELECTION.
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SVS
2. Press ENTER.
1. Key in the desired function following the SELECTION
label.
(
(
Operation Rate -- Fast-Selection
The Operation Rate Control screen allows you to control the
rate the PU executes an instruction. The selected operation
rate is displayed on line 22. If one of the functions has been
fast-selected, the current screen remains and the last
command entered is redisplayed on the SELECTION line in a
fast-select format. Functions N, I, M, C, and P are mutually
exclusive.
To select an operation rate control function from the
O-screen:
(
SELECTION:
(Normal)
(Instruction Step)
(Microword Step)
(Clock Cycle Step)
(Clock Pulse Step)
(Repeat Microword-Switch)
Entry Sequence
OON
001
OOM
OOC
OOP
OOR
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
2. Press ENTER.
The function is now set, and an instruction is executed at
the rate selected each time the START key is pressed.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
@
IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676358
1 of 2
44245f
(
c
Operation Rate Controls
N NORMAL
P CLOCK PULSE STEP
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
After START has been pressed, the PU executes instructions
at the normal machine speed. This function also clears the I,
M, P, or C rate selection on line 22.
The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this function.
This function releases manual operation controls within the
processor and returns the display console to the operating
system.
The PU executes on clock pulse each time the START key
is pressed, and then enters the hard-stop state. If the
function is selected while the system is operating at normal
speed, the system clock-cycle stops and then goes into clock
pulse step. RATE: P-STEPappears on line 22.
This function does not alter the R (Repeat
Microword-Switch) selection. RATE: N-REPM appears on
line 22 if the R function has not been reset.
You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function.
I INSTRUCTION STEP
The PU executes one instruction each time the START key is
pressed. The system accepts all pending allowed interrupts,
and then returns to the stopped state. The STOP key and
the I-function soft stop the system (no I-step, but the PU
clock continues to run). If another function is selected, such
as display/alter, it is accepted, and instruction step remains in
effect.
Changes in data can be seen on the display console as each
instruction step is completed. Line 21 shows the address and
the data at this address. RATE: I-STEP appears on line 22.
Restriction:
The clock-pulse step function does not operate on a storage
word.
R REPEAT MICROWORD-SWITCH
The CE MODE. switch must be on to perform this function.
The PU must be placed in a hard-stop state before invoking
this function. Stop the PU clock with the OOM function, for
example.
The PU executes the selected microword repeatedly after
the START key is pressed. When the repeat microword
function is on, RATE: f-REPM appears on line 22 (where "f"
represents the rate function). When the function is off,
RATE: f-STEP appears on line 22, except when the rate is
normal.
M MICROWORD STEP
The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this function.
The PU executes one microword each time the START key
is pressed, and then enters the hard-stop state. If the
microword function is selected while the system is operating
at normal speed, the system executes the current microword
(PU clock stopped), and then goes into the hard-stop state.
RATE: M-STEP appears on line 22.
A desired microword loop can be selected two ways:
1. Hardstop on the word before the desired loop word by
keying OOR. Set the desired operation rate and continue,
or
2. Key in OVGxxxxx with the address of the desired loop
word, and then key OOR. Set the desired operation rate
and continue .
You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function.
. C CLOCK CYCLE STEP
You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function.
The CE MODE switch must be on to perform this function.
To reset this function:
The PU executes one clock cycle each time the START key
is pressed, then enters the hard-stop state. If the function is
selected while the system is operating at normal speed, the
system executes the current clock cycle, and then goes into
the hard-stop state. RATE: C-STEP appears on line 22.
1. Key in R.
2. Press ENTER.
GENERAL SELECTION
Q
You can monitor your activity via Insert/Extract function.
The General Selection screen reappears on the display
console.
Restriction:
The clock-cycle step function does not operate on a storage
word.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
'i
/~
1
'. ;/
0
V
0
"'-.Y
i
0
'0
0
0
0
(J
(~
~
,~
U
0
0
'J
/,-c~
~
~,
0
0 0
o
0 () 0
o o
o o
PN 2676358
2 of 2
o
44250f
o
(
(
(
(.
(
(
o (
(
(
(
(
f
DISPLAY/ALTER SCREENS
DISPLAY/ALTER (D-SCREEN)
The display/alter function lists a menu that can be invoked by
selecting the D-screen. Most display/alter functions use the
local channel adapter to transfer data to and from the
hardware. Because most display/alter functions use the LCA,
the machine must not be hard-stopped for most of the
display / alter code to run. The function list is redisplayed each
time a new function is selected. As a result, the output area
is cleared for the next function.
Selections S, A. U, L. X, W, and 0 are not selectable on the
customer screen.
The two ways to select a screen are: key a character next
to the character on the SELECTION line (a subscreen is called
up). or key a and the facility or facility with its subscreen. For
example, aDL bypasses the General Selection and bypasses
the Display/Alter screen and displays the Local Storage
subscreen.
The alter function and the display screens are much the
same. The full-screen data can be chang~ by using the
cursor and rekeying data, but the characters on the
SELECTION line must be unchanged. In full-screen altering,
blanks, hex zeroes, and periods are "don't care" characters.
For Fast Select Alter, the period is a "don't care" character.
The hex zeroes and blanks are compressed out (deleted) from
the SELECTION line when fast altering. On a full-screen
alter, the cursor moves to the first data position if an invalid
character is entered. On Fast Alter, the cursor moves to the
right of the op code if an invalid character is entered. Any
invalid character prevents an alter operation (full screen or
Fast SeIect).
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL' STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT ION:
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
DISPLAY/ALTER D-SCREEN (aD)
Most displays and alters can be performed by two means:
screen select and fast-screen select.
To select the Display/Alter screen from the General Selection
screen:
1. Key in 0 following the SELECTION label .
. 2. Press ENTER.
The display/alter image appears on the screen and the
program stops. The items listed on the screen show those
areas of the system that can be displayed and altered. You
can now select one of the set. After you have chosen a
display / alter function, the display/alter image remains on the
left portion of the screen, and the selected facility appears on
the right portion.
EC 376695 16Aug79
EC 379598 15Apr80
@ IBM Corp. 1979
PN 5666369
1 of 2
44255
TRANSLATION
The translate function is applicable to many of the
display / alter functions. If you select the translate option, all
full-screen input areas are eliminated (alter- is inhibited), and
the function is in translate mode. You may now page the
data and it stays in translate mode. A command from the
SELECTION line without the translate op code restores the
screen input areas and allows full-screen alters.
To use the Translate op code, which converts hexadecimal
to EBCDIC character format:
1. Key the D / A function and parameters (if any) plus T.
2. Press ENTER.
1
*0 ISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REG ISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: L100T
*10
*12
*14
*16
LOCAL STORAGE
246
0
2
4
6
F5F9 F2F0 F0Fl F5F4
*11 F0F3 F8Fl F5F5 F5F3
5 9 2 0 0 1 5 4
0 3 8 1 5 5 5 3
F0F0 F0F4 F1F7 F7F9 *13 F5F7 F1Fl F9Fl F0F6
o0 0 4 17 79
5 7 1 1 9 1 0 6
FAF0 F3F4 F4F0 F9F5
*15 F2F5 F7F0 F0F0 F0F0
034409525000000
F0F3 F4F4 F0F4 F1F7
*17 F3F0 F0F6 F0F0 F1F0
o3 44 04 17
30 0 6 0 0 10
o
*18 F1F0 F0F0 F0F0 F0F0
10 o0 o0 o0
*IA F0F0 F0F0 F0F0 F0F0
o0 o0 o0 o0
*IC 4040 4040 4040 4040
*19 F0F0 F0F0 F0F0 F0F0
o0 o0 o0 o0
*IB F0F0 F0F0 F0F0 F0F0
o0 o0 o0 o0
*10 4040 4040 4040 4040
*IE F3F3 F2F3 F4F3 F5F3
3 3 2 3 4 3 5 3
*IF F6F3 F7F3 F9F3 F3F3
6 3 7 3 9 3 3 3
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
DISPLAY/ALTER HEX CALCULATOR (00=)
The hex calculator function converts two hex addresses
arithmetically to one hex address. One address can be added
or subtracted with another. This function uses two operands
(0-6 digits) and can be defaulted to 000000. Both operands
remain a constant unless a new operand is rekeyed. The only
op codes are (+) and (-). Plus (+) adds the second operand
to the first operand. Minus (-) subtracts the second from the
first. An example is shown on the hex calculator function.
The result is displayed next to the message indicator.
Display Hex Calculator
To display the hex calculator function from any D-screen:
1. Key QD= next to SELECTION followed by:
(a) operand one (if any)
(b) op code (if any)
(c) operand two (if any)
2. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The operands and result are displayed next to the
message indicator.
•
The hex calculator function can be fast-selected from any
screen and that screen remains.
•
By keying 00=, the last calculation is restored on the
SELECTION line.
•
Each operand is retained until it is replaced; thus, either
can be used as a constant.
0,
,
I
"'-j/
Fast-Selection Hexadecimal Calculations
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: = 777342 + 2BCE
The hexadecimal calculator is a normal function of the
Display/ Alter (0) screen. However, hexadecimal calculations
may be made from any other manual mode screen by keying
QO= followed by the problem (no spaces between characters)
and pressing ENTER. The same screen remains displayed and
the calculation result is shown to the right of the SELECTION
entry. If an entry error is made, INVALID INPUT is displayed
and the cursor is positioned under the first invalid character
encountered. The same screen remains displayed .
==>
779F10
777342 + 002BCE
4341
EC 376695 16Aug79
EC 379598 15Apr80
o
o • •
--
-
•
o ()
o
f"'\I
!
\,.J!
o
PN 5666369
20f2
44260
o o
()"'-.
o
/
(
(
(
DISPLAY/ALTER GENERAL REGISTERS (QDG)
Fast Alter General Registers
(
(
DISPLAY/ALTER CONTROL REGISTER (QDC)
1. Key G plus the register number and register byte number
next to SELECTION. The register values are O-F (hex);
the byte values are 0-3 (hex). Both may be defaulted to
zero.
1. ODG selects the General Register screen.
2. Key the register number (r) plus byte number (b) in
hexadecimal.
Key next to SELECTION as follows:
To select the control register function from the D-screen:
1. ODC selects the Control Register screen.
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
&
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above.
/
Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location.
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
4. 'Key data,
3. Key in the op code:
where:
2. Press ENTER. Sixteen control registers of four bytes each
are displayed.
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTiON line
into the address location.
&
Alter Control Registers
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above.
/
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location,
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
4, Key data.
5. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An invalid character prevents the alter function.
•
The Translate option is applicable to the General Register
display.
•
The paging keys are not applicable to this screen.
o
hexadecimal.
next to SELECTION. The register values are O-F (hex);
the byte values are 0-3 (hex), Both may be defaulted to
zero.
5. Press ENTER.
Notes:
*0 I SPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: G00
2. Key the register number (r) plus byte number (b) in
1. Key C plus the register number and register byte number
where:
Alter General Registers
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
Display Control Registers
3. Key in the op code:
2. Press ENTER. Sixteen general registers of four bytes each
are displayed.
Save General Registers
All data in the general registers can be saved by the Block
function. The byte character is ignored for a save function.
An example of how you can save the general register data is
ODGrb?
GENERAL REGISTERS
0
0002 70B0
1
3BCE 5A40
2
0035 3A04
3
5A40 0020
4
2CEA 5A40
5
002E 2CEA
6
6200 0040
7
5A01 0800
8
0000 7006
9
2CEA A800
A
2EBE 3AB0
B
3AB5 0000
C
0002 3BD4
D
5A01 0100
E
0000 7006
F
2CEA A800
==>
rNSTR STOP
4341
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An invalid character prevents the alter function.
Save Control Registers
The Translate option is applicable to the Control Register
display.
•
The paging keys are not applicable to this screen.
*0 I SPLAY /ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: C00
o
All data in the control registers can be saved by the Block
function. The byte character is ignored for a save function.
An example of how you can save the control register data is
ODCrb?
CONTROL REGISTERS
0
0002 70B0
1
3BCE 5A40
2
0035 3A04
3
5A40 0020
4
2CEA 5A40
5
002E 2CEA
6
6200 0040
7
5A01 0800
8
0000 7006
9
2CEA A800
A
2EBE 3AB0
B
3AB5 0000
C
0002 3BD4
0
5A01 0100
E
0000 7006
F
2CEA A800
==>
I NSTR STOP
4341
EC 376695 16Aug79
EC 379598 15Apr80
@
IBM Corp. 1979
(/
ODe rb op data.
Key next to SELECTION as follows:
To select the general register function from the D-screen:
(
Fast Alter Control Registers.
DOG rb op data.
Display General Registers
(
(
PN 5666370
1 of 2
44265
DISPLAY/ALTER FLOATING-POINT REGISTERS
(QDF)
Display Floating-Point Registers
To select the floating-point register function from the
D-screen:
1. Key F plus the register number and register byte number
next to SELECTION. The register values are O. 2. 4. or 6;
the byte values are 0-7 (hex). Both may be defaulted to
zero.
2. Press ENTER. Four eight-byte registers are displayed.
Alter Floating-Point Registers
Fast Alter Floating-Point Registers
*0 ISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
o CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: F00
1. Perfonn steps 1 and 2 of display above.
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
QDF rb op data.
FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
0
0002
70B0
3BCE
Key next to SIiLECTION as follows:
5A40
1. ODF selects the Floating- Point Register screen.
2
0035
3A04
5A04
0020
4
2CEA
2. Key the register number (r) plus the byte number (b) in
hexadecimal. The register number is 0.2.4. or 6; the
byte number has a value of 0- 7 (hex). Both' may be
defaulted to zero.
5A40
002E
2CEA
3. Key in the op code:
6
6200
0040
5A01
0800
where:
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
& Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location.
==>
I NSTR STOP
/
4341
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
4. Key data.
5. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An irwa/id character prevents the alter function.
•
The Translate option is applicable to the Floating-Point
Register display.
•
The paging keys are not applicable to this screen.
Save Floating.-Point Registers
All data in the floating-point register can be saved by the
Block function. The byte character is ignored for a save
function. An example of how you can save the floating-point
register data is ODFrb7.
-EC 316695 16Aug79
EC 319598 . 15AprSO
~")
'"
"
o o
()
o
00
o
000
o
00
-PN;S666370 20f2
44270
C)
(
{
(
(
(
(
(-
(.
(-
(-
(
DISPLAY/ALTER CURRENT PSW(QOP)
*D I SPLAYIALTER.
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K PAGE DESCRIPTION
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
H REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXiLIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORV
L lOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGiSTERS
IJ SP STORAGE
o CONSOLE DISK FILE
• ~EX CALCULATOR
q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: PO
To select the PSW function from the D-screen:
, . Key P and • PSW byte number in hexadecimal next to
SELECTION. The byte number may be 0-7 (hex) or
defaulted to zero.
ENTER.
The eight-byte PSW is shown in binary
except for the hexadecimal address.
Alter Current PSW
1. Perform steps 1 end 2 of diapiay above.
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new dala. leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
Notos:
o
Dats is binary: sddress is nexsdecimal.
•
An illlflJlid
•
Fest-alter data is h8xlIdocimal up to!fl maximum of eight
byte: (HS characters).
•
The paging keys are not applicable to this scrfHIn.
•
Two screens ;'I'e displayed to illustral6 the differences
between Be and EC PSWs.
ch/jr~ctel'
prevr,mt$ fha slter function.
Fast-Alter Current PSW
ODP b op dsta.
Key neJ(t to SELECTION as follows:
1.
aop selects the
PSW screen.
2. Key the byte number (b) whose values are 0-7 (heJ(). The
byte number may be defaulted to zero.
3. Key in the op code:
where:
.. Means MOVE the data opposite !he SELECTION line
into the address location.
S! Meane AND Ihe data opposite the SELECTION line
with the detl.! in the addresa location.
I
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the addresil location.
(
(
PSW Screen Label (Ee Modo)
Display CUrrent PSW
2. Press
(
(
(
( f
(
MN
BYTE 0
CURRENT PSW .
Bit
'7C' 2300 0017 C12J
o
1
ae:
EC:
2
CHNLHSK.E
R
TIE
PSW.KEY CHWP $ CC PROG.HASK
0100 alII
1100
1000
0
10
0011
3
4
5
INSTRUCTION
BYTE'
6
7
ADDRESS: 17C123
Bit
UnaSSigned
Per (RI
UnaSSigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
OAT (370 mode only)
I/O mask
External mask
ADDRESS
I) Addr~s
OTHER DATA IN BINARY
i.... ,.
I'
4341
1~-tWt~x-t-en-.d-e-d--c-o-n-tf-O-i--M-O$d-e-)""'--------=---------------------~--------------~
•
Space Control lS)
t Unassigned
:2 Condition code
"' condition code
4 Program mask
S Program mask
6 Program mask
1 Program mask
PSW
Scre~:m labe~
(BC Model
BYTE 0
BYTE'
Bit
0 Charmei mask
1 Chaol'e! mask
2 Channel mask
Bit
0 Protection key
3 channei mask
CURRENT
7 External mask
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
5 Channel mask
6 Channel mask
PSW
D1Cl 0000 2317 t123
Be: CHNlMSK.E
EC:
R
TIE
1101 0111
Bit
PSW.KEY CMWP
1100
0001
ILC CC
00
10
PROG.MASK
QOil
o
1
2
3
INSTRUCTION
ADDIIIESS:
1.7C123
ADDRESS IN HEXADECIMAL
OTHER DATA IN BINARY
......
INSTR STOP
1 P'otection key
2 Protection key
:3 Protection key
Ii Be mode (-01
5 Me mask lMJ
6 Wait (WI
7 Problem state (PI
4 Channel mask
4. Key data to the maximum of eight bytes (16 charactersl.
-~
Bit
IN HEXADECIMAL
INSTR STOP
no
Storage protect key
Storage protect key
Storage protect key
Storage protect key
EC mode 1011-1)
5 Me mask (Ml
8 Wait (W)
7 Problem state (PI
BYTE 2
110
"DISPLAY/ALTER'"
G GENERAL ~EGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
K REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FilE
• HEX CALCULATOR
q GENERAL SELECTI~N
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: PI
o
1
2
3
4
4
Bit
Interruption
Interruption
Interruption
Interruption
Interruption
Interruption
Code
Code
Code
o
Code
3 Interruption
4 Interruption
S Interruption
8 Interrup!ion
7 Interruption
Code
5
Code
6 Interruption Code
1 Interruption Code
Interruption Code
1 Interruption Code
2 Interruption Code
Code
Code
Code
Code
Cod«
BYTE 4
Bit
o
Inst length
code
1 Inst lenglh code
2 Condition code
3 Condition code
4 Fixed-poinl overflow mask
5. Pre.s ENTER.
IS Decimal overflow mask
8 Exponent overflow mask
Save Current PSW
All datil in the PSW can be saved by the Block function. The
byte cltaracter is ignored for f! lave function. An eJ(ample of
how you can aave the currant PSW dat. ia COP?
e IBM Corp. 1981
7 Significance mask
(8aslc Control Mode)
Model Group 2
f.ec 379825 05Jun81
iEC 3798!] 020ctBi
PN 2676357
1 of:2
44 27Sf
-
J
DISPLAY/ALTER STORAGE KEY (ODK)
Fast-Alter Storage Kav
Note: In 370 mode, OOK is labeled Storage Key; in VSE
mode. it is /abl/led Page Description.
"'DISPLAY/ALTER·
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K PAGE DESCRIPTION
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
I'l REAL STORA(;E
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U yeW/DEYICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORACE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
• HEX CALCULATOR
q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: KOOOOOO
Display Storage Key
To select the storage key function from the D-screen:
1. Key
and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The
I/S£ address values are O-FFFFFf {hell}. The
address
IS 0 to one less than the address check boundary. Tl":e
address may be defaulted to zelo.
I(
:no
2. Press ENTER.
Alter Storage Key
1. Perform sleps 1 and 2 of display above.
FRC
STOR.KEY
0000
PROG.BITS
000
100
ADDRESS;OOOOOO
Key'data next to
CA
11
1. QOK selects the Storage Key screen.
3. Key in the op code:
(pet)
EXISTING-FRAME-CAPAcrrv-tDUNT' (HCC)
AVAILABlE-FRAI1E-CAPACITY-COUNT CAFCt)
FREE-FRAHE-CAPACITY-COUNT (FFet)
2000
where:
03E?
01E7
,.
Means MOVE Ihe dala opposite Ihe
into the address iocation.
0000
SELECTION
Iille
S. Means AND the data opposite Ihe SELECTION line
ADDRESS. FRAME INDEX. AND CAPACITY COUNTS
iN HEX, OTHER DATA 1M BINARY
with the data in the address location.
I
Means OR the data opposite Ihe SelECTION line willi
.,,>
the data. in the address location.
INSTR STOP
4. Key datil whose digit values are in bit mode.
Bits (370 and VSEI
14341
0-3· (Key field) O-F
4
5
Notes:
•
SELECTION III follows:
2. Key in the address whose values are O-FrFFFF (helli. The
address may be defaulled 10 ~8r(!.
FRAME iNDEX:OOOO
PAGE-CAPACITY-COUNT
VSE
2. Mova the cursor to the location!sl of bit data and key in
new data This data is bits 0 or 1. leave the selection
unchanged and press ENTER.
ODK address op data (bit)
PAGE DESCRIPTION
S
The key data is in bit format. The address and frame
lire in hell.
(VSE
Mode)
•
•
•
Fetch protection bit
Reference bit
Change bit
•
Other than bit data prevents the alter function,
Bits IVSE onlvl
7-9· Program bits
•
The nellt higher/lower 2K boundary can be displayed/
allered by using the paging keys.
Note: Connected and Addressable bits (CA) are
non-alterable.
•
Two screens are displayed to illustrate the differences
between 370 and VSE made.
5.
•
-DISPLAY/ALTER·
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
H REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK.SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
" HEX CALCULATOR
Q. GENE'RAL SELECT ION
Z RETURN T,O PROG SYS
SELECTION: KOOOOOO
Press
ENTER.
Save Storage Key
STORAGE KEY
HEX
ADDRESS:OOOOOO
The data of Key I" Storage can be savod by the Block
function. An example of how you can save Ihe key ill storage
data is QOKxxxxxlI 1.
BIN
FRC:OOO
BIN
KEY:! 101
.S>
INSTR STOP
431t ,
(370 Hode)
~
•.
~._
...
~"M...
", , .•.. ~._ '.' .M
.,_
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 319821 020ct81
PN 2676357
20f2
44 2801
.
,.
r~
~
"-j
.~
.,,-yI
.~
"-.y
0
~
(~
0
0
() r)
I~.
~
~)
0
r)
~-
.r"\
~)
r\
~-)
01
\,/
""'--"',
~J
()
:~
"--y!
.~.
I~
"'-.
_
•••••••
0 0
M •• ,
J
~
I).
'-.--./
(\,
~J
(
(
(
c r
f
(
DISPLAY/ALTER VIRTUAL STORAGE 370/VSE
(QDV)
Display Virtual Storage 370/VSE
To select the virtual storage function from the O-screen:
1. Key V and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The
address valueS are O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be
defautted to zero.
2. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the
selected address is displayed.
NOte: The lIirtuai storage address can be modified by
placing. (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address
ktl'!ed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on both
screens. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it
reinains until a new lIalue has been entered or you select
another screen that is not a Displll'l/Alter screen.
You can ktl'! in the Adjust Value alone or with an address.
No address entered defaults to zero. The data appeers in the
normlll area as though it were at the selected address, but
the data is actually that data located at the adjusted address,
evM though the address under label ADRS is that from the
address on the SELECTION line. You can key a new address
or USII the PAGE ktl'!, and you still get the data from the
adjusted address. The address plus the Adjusted Value
might cauSll the screen to heve a fwos-complement negatille
number.
Altai- Virtual Storage 370/VSE
1. Perform steps .1 and 2 of display above.
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the ~ion unchanged and press
ENTER;
Notes:
•
Data is shawn and entered in hexadecimal.
•
Animlalid charaCter prevents the. alter function.
•
The next higher/lower 12B-byte boundary can be
displll'led by using the paging keys.
The Translate option is applicable to the Virtual Storage
displll'(.
•
Error tntISS/I(/eDATA NOT ACCESSIBLE is displll'led
when the SIIlected lIirtual address does not exist in real
storage.
(
(
(
(
{
Fast Alter Virtual Storage 370/VSE
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
.
K PAGE DESCRIPTION
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: V000000+3A0
VIRTUAL STORAGE ADJUST=+0003A0
REAL=000000
ADRS +0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+A· +C
+E
FFFFE0 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340
FFFFF0 0000 0000 000C 0000 0000 0550 0DA0 0000
000000 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 00000000
000010 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 0A67 F000 0000
ODV address op data.
Key data next to SELECTION as follows:
1. OOV selects the Virtual Storage screen.
2. Key in address O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be
defaulted to zero.
3. Key in the op code:
000020 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
000030 0000 0000 000A 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000
VSE
0000400000 0000 0400 0000
~000
0000 0000 0000
000050 0000 A4E4 0360 0000
0~00
0000 0330 0000
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
where:
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
&
Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location.
/
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
4. Key data in hexadecimal.
5. Press ENTER.
Save Virtual Storage 370/VSE
Eight bytes of data in virtual storage, starting with the
address in the save area;can be saved by the Block function.
An example of how you can save the virtual storage data is
QDVxxxxxx7.
Note: You can use the 7 opcode to lIerify if data exists at
the address before altering that data. This feature is lIery
helpful while running a block, but it can be uSlld at any time.
After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data that
would be at that address. YOU can alter ·any number of digits
by also using an alter op code~ such as (=). If the data at
that address does not match, no alter occiJrs. If you halle no
match, and the data you are matching and the data which
you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does
an error occur.
An example of how this command is used is:
ODVxxxxxx7F1 F2F3....=F5F6F7 ....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
Alter Data
Compare data
Match address .
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379598 15AprSO
C IBM Corp. 1979
(
PN 5666372
1 of 2
44285
c
Fast Alter Rea. Storage 370
DISPLAY/ALTER REAL STORAGE 370 (QDM)
Display Real Storage 370
To select the real storage function from the D-screen:
1. Key M and the six-digit address next to SELECTION. The
address values are zero to one less than the address
check boundry. In CE mode, the address range is all of
real storage. The address may· be defaulted to zero.
2. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the
selected address is displayed.
Note: The retII storll(/flllddress can be modified by placing a
(+J tolldd or a (-J to subtract from the address keyed next
to SELECTION. An example is shawn on the ODI screens.
When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until a
new value has been entered or you select another screen that
is not a Oisp/By / Alter sa.".
You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an IIddress.
No IIddress fIntfIrfId dflfaults to zero. The data apptJllrs in the
normal . . . as though it were III the _ected IIddress, but
the dllla is actually that dllla located III the lidjusted IIddress,
even though the IIddress under IIIbeI ADRS is that from the
tlddress on the SELECTION line. You can key a new IIddress
or use the PAGE key, and you still get the dllla from the
IIdjusted IIddress. The IIddress plus the Adjusted Value
might cause the screen to have a twos-complement negative
number.
REAL STORAGE ADJUST=+0003A0
ACB=lC0000
ADRS +0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+A
+C
+E
000010 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: M000020-10
OOM address op data.
Key data next to SELECTION as follows:
000020 0000 0000 000C 0000 0000 0550 0DA0 0000
1. QDM selects the main storage screen.
000030 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
2. Key in address O-FFFFFF (hex). The address may be
defaulted to zero.
000040 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 0A67 F000 0000
3. Key in the op code:
000060 0000 0000 000A 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000
where:
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
000070 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
& Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
000050 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
000080 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000
~000
with the data in the address location.
0330 0000
/
==>
INSTR STOP
4. Key data in hexadecimal.
4341
5. Press ENTER.
Save Rea. Storage 370
Eight bytes of data in real storage, starting with the address
in the save area, can be saved by the Block function. An
example of how you can save the real storage data is
QDMxxxxxx?
Note: You can use the ., op code to verify if dllla exists at
the address before altering that data. This feature is very
helpful while running a block, but it can be used at any time.
After the 7, enter any number of digits for the dllla that
would be at that address. You can alter any number of digits
by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data at
that address does not match, no alter occurs. If you have no
match, and the dllla you are mlltching and the dllla which
you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does
an error occur.
Altar Rea. Storage 370
i
1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of display above.
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
II
I
I'
Notes:
•
Data is shawn and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An invalid character prevents the alter function.
•
The next higher/lower 728-byte boundary can be
disp/eyed by using the paging keys.
•
The maximum selected IIddress must be 7 less than the
ACB (Address Check Boundary).
•
The Translllle option is applicable to the Real Storage
disp/By.
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
An example of how this command is used is:
QDMxxxxxx?F1 F2F3.... =F5F6F7 ....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Compare data
Match address
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379598 15Apr80
'J
o o
o
Q
o
Alter data
PN 5666372
20f2
44290
( .""
J
o
--,
C
(,
(~
(-'
,.
(
('
(
(/ (
(:
----
(-~
(~
(-
(~\
L
(
(
C
(
t/
Display Trace Area (T)
To select the Trace function from the D-screen:
1. Key T next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. Trace screen menu is displayed.
(/
(
(
('
(
(/
(~
.
-,
(~
Display Instruction Counter Trace (TI)
DISPLAY /ALTER TRACE AREA (ODT)
The T -selection from the Display / Alter screen causes the
trace area menu to be displayed. The menu shows the
selections available for the Trace function.
(/
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: T
*TRACE AREA*
To select the Instruction Counter Trace from theT -screen:
*INSTRUCTION COUNTER TRACE*
TI DISPLAY
TIX CLEAR
*PSW AND I/O TRACE*
TC TRACE CONTROLS
TP DISPLAY
TPX CLEAR
TS SAVE IFCC
TSX CLEAR SAVED IFCC
TF DISPLAY SAVED IFCC
*1/0 DEVICE STATUS*
TM DISPLAY
TMX RESET SAMPLE COUNT
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
1. Key TI next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER Instruction Counter Trace screen is
displayed.
The Instruction Counter Trace area (Til contains up to 128
instruction addresses resulting from using the Trace-Stop
(OATI. Trace-Wrap (OAWI. or the Instruction Step (QOII
functions. The total 128-address trace area is divided into
two 64-address pages.
The addresses are arranged from left to right. top to
bottom. The newest address is displayed at the beginning of
page 0 with the oldest at the end of page 1. The trace area
always contains the most recent addresses up to a maximum
of 128 addresses. When the list becomes full. each new
address is inserted into the first position of page O. all
addresses are advanced. and the oldest is dropped from the
bottom of page 1.
The current page containing the first 64 addresses
(CURRENT) is always displayed first. Addresses over a count
of 64 are displayed on the second page (PREVIOUS) of this
screen. Selecting TIO at the SeLECTION line displays the
current page (page 0). Selecting TI1 at the SELECTION line
displays the previous page (page 11. The Page-Up and
Page-Down function keys can also be used to go from page
to page.
Addresses displayed followed by a V denote a virtual
address. An address followed by an R denotes a real
address. An address that cannot be determined to be either
virtual or real is denoted by an X. An address resulting from
a Branch instruction is followed by a B.
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F rLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT' PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
·5 BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: TI-1220
CURRENT
007854 VB
005982 V
005974 V
00143E V
066662 V
06665C V
0044AE V8
00449E V
I-COUNTER TRACE
007850 V
00784C
005980 V
00597C
005970 VB
001444
00142A V
001436
06665E V
06665C
06665A V
06665C
0044A8 RB 0044A6
00449A R
004496
00498C X
012344 R
AOJUST=+OOOOOO
V
00784A VB
V
005978 V
V
001440 V
X
066666 X
VB 06665A V
V
06665A VB
V
0044AO V
V
004490 V
Clear Instruction Counter Trace (TIX»
To clear the Instruction Counter Trace Screen:
1. Key TIX next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. Instruction Counter Trace screen is cleared.
B=RESULT OF BC OR BCR R=REAL V=VIRT X=UNKNOWN
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
Model Group 2
o IBM Corp. 1981
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379825 05Jun81
PN 2676409
10f4
44 295f
/
(-
(
Display PSW and I/O Trace Controls (TC)
Display PSW and I/O Trace (TP)
To select the PSW and I/O Trace Centrols function from the
T-screen:
*DISPLAV/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEV
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARV STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORV
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT I ON: TC
1. Key TC next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. PSWand I/O Trace Controls screen
IS
. displayed.
The PSW and I/O Controls ITC) screen provides the
.capability to set controls for the PSWand I/O trace. The
results of the traces are displayed on the PSW and I/O Trace
Oisplay ITP) screen. The PSWand I/O Trace Controls screen
provides the same capability as the I/O instructions (0), PSW
swaps IP). and the CSWs IW) trace options as on the
Compare/Trace lOA) screen.
To set a selection in the PSW trace control area. key a Y
for YES. or N for NO. over the existing setting. To set all the
selections to YES or NO. key the appropriate letter under the
selection ALL:.
* PSW TRACE CONTROLS *
LOAD I/O MCK PCK SVC EXT
V
N
N
V
V
N
ALL:
To select the PSW and I/O Trace screen from the T-screen:
VM
N
1. Key TP next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. PSW and I/O Trace screen is displayed.
* I/O TRACE CONTROLS *
CHANNEL
UNIT
CSW
OPS
0
IF
N
SID
V = VES/ALL
N = NO/NONE
OPS = Clo
HDV
SIO
TID
HID
TCH
91
N
SID
2
V
Y
V
3
80
N
HIO
4
N
N
N
5
N
N
N
The PSW and I/O Trace screen displays the traces made
with the selections on either the PSW and I/O Trace Controls
screen (TC) or the Compare/Trace lOA) screen. The PSW
and I/O operations selected are traced and recorded on this
screen.
This screen also displays the current Interface Control
Checks "FCC). The interface control checks trace is alwavs
active and is not affected by any selections made from the
Compare/Trace lOA) screen or the PSW and I/O Trace
Controls ITC) screen.
The Page-Up and Page-Down function keys can be used to
increase or decrease page numbers.
==>
INSTR STOP
To set a selection in the I/O trace control area. key in the
appropriate selections where:
UNIT column: a two-character unit address. Y for all or N
for none.
CSW column: Y activates CSW store trace because of
device activity rather than I/O instructions; N deactivates
CSW store trace.
OPS column: A specific I/O op code mnemonic. Y for all
I/O operations or N for none.
4341
Clear PSW & I/O Trace (TPX)
To clear the PSW and I/O Trace screen:
1. Key TPX next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. PSWand I/O Trace screen is cleared.
All selectable fields are highlighted. To make a change to a
field. key in the desired setting in place of the existing one.
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEV
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SElECTION: TP
To return Trace functions to their normal Ireset) state. an N
under the selection ALL resets PSW traces. An N in the Unit
column resets Channel I/O Trace. Or. the OAN function can
be used to reset the trace functions.
Note: Using the OAN function resets any previously
selected Trace function. whether it was selected from the
Compare/Trace fOA} or the Trace Controls fODTC} screen.
PSW & I/O TRACE
PSW LOAD
ADR=OOOO 0000
PSW I/O
DEV=IOC
PSW MCHK
INT=OOOO 0101
OPS SID
CC=O
DEV=2B4
oPS HID
CC=I
DEV=119
oLD=OOOO
NEW=OOOO
OLD=FEOO
NEW=OOOO
OLD=070C
NEW=0008
CCW=0202
CAW=0006
CSW=....
CNT=OOOO
0000
0000
OIOC
0000
0000
0000
334C
304C
0000
0000
0007
0000
0004
OOOE
0000
0000
0000
7622
3466
4444
3922
0050
0100 ....
0002
OPS CLR 10 CC=3 DEV=III
OPS TCH
CC=2 DEV=3AD
IFCC DEV=323
CSW=3000 0200 0002 0029
CSW
BUSIN=21 BUSoUT=11 CN=OC ENG=35 33 06 5F 47
TAGIN= REq oPL DIS ADR SEL STA SRV/DAT
T.AGOUT= ADR CMD DAT SRV SUP oPL SEL
INTERFACE CLEANUP TIMEOUT
==>
INSTR STOP
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379825 05Jun81
.1
!
r-~l
Q
'1
'-..y
;"
.
~-.--
..--
-~.
,,---,
-
0
i.. 0
~
I
"'--.,.,
f"I
IJ
0
0~ ~
..
I
in
l "'-...Y
,
0
I
i()
~.
0
.~\
'-
INSTR STOP
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379825 05Jun81
I
PN 2676409
30f4
442971
c
Definition of Terms
SIO
Start I/O
The fields are defined by:
SVC
Supervisor call
TAGIN
Interface adapter tags in. where:
REa Request in
OPL .. Operational in
DIS Disconnect in
ADR = Address .n
SEL .. Select in
STA = Status In
SRV = Service in
OAT = Data in
TAGOUT
Interface adapter tags out. where:
ADR = Address out
CMD'" Command out
OAT '" Data out
SRV .. Service out
SUp .. Suppress out
OPL ,. Operational out
SEL • Select out
TCH
Test channel
TIO
Test I/O instruction
VM
Virtual machine assist
ADR
Address of the Load PSW instruction
BUSIN
Data input bus
BUSOUT
Data output bus
CAW
Channel address word
=
=
CC
I/O instruction condition code
CCW
Channel command word
CE
Channel-end
CN
Catalog number
CIO
Clear I/O instruction trace contrlll
CLRIO
Clear I/O instruction
CNT
Number of times this entry has been repeated
without any intervening entry ICNT 0=1 .... CNT
1-2)
CSW
Channel status word. Entries with' ... : are
showing the changed part of the CSW.
DE
Device-end
DEV
I/O device address
Condition Codes:
ENG
For engineering use:
byte 0 - catalog number
byte 1 - CHCMDR
byte 2 - CHSYNCO
byte 3 - CHDATAO
byte 4 - CHSYNC1
byte 5 - CHDATA2
Condition Code Setting 0
Mask Bit Value
8
1
4
EXT
External PSW
HIO
Halt I/O instruction
Clear I/O
I/O
Inputloutput
IFCC
Interface control check
Start I/O
INT
Interruption code IEC mode only). In BCmode.
the interruption code is in the old PSW.
Channel 10
10 stored
CSW stored
MCK
Machine check PSW trace control
Test Channel
Available
MCHK
Machine check
Test I/O
Available
Interruption
pending
CSW stored
NEW
PSW after the PSW swap
Halt Device
Halt I/O
PSW before the PSW swap
PCK
Program check
PSW
Program status word
3
1
Input/Output Instructions:
No oper in
progress
Interruption
pending
Interruption
pending
Successful
OLD
2
2
CSW stored
CSW stored
CSW stored
CSW stored
Channel
busy
Channel
working
Burst op
stopped
Channel
busy
Channel
busy
Burst mode
Channel
busy
Not operating
Not operating
Not operating
Not operating
Not operating
Not operating
Not operating
Model Group 2
IIEC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379825 05Jun81
I ,
,
r
-----"',
I
'----f"
J r'"
V
I 0 () 0
0
--
PN2676409
40f4
,
l
I
i0
\......Y
0
~
I')
0
j
()
0 ()
0
~jJ
0
00 o 00
o
o
44301t
c
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
o --
(
(
To select the block save function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key S with a one-digit address next to SELECTION. This
is the number of a page of the save area. The address
may be. defaulted to zero.
3. Press ENTER. A 16-item section of Block Save is
displayed.
Notes:
•
The next higher/lower 16 entries can be displayed by
using the paging keys.
•
SAVE AREA EMPTY message indicates the save area was
not used during the last Block activity.
"DISPLAY/ALTER"
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: SO
AREA
ADDRESS
04
004672
004672
DATE: 00/000 00:00 PAGE 0
DATA
A5A5 A5A5
FFOO 0000 4000 2222
3AOO 2680 2B90 04FO
0007 0000
00/000 00:00:00
==>
I NSTR STOP
4341
Note: The block save area cannot be full-screen altered.
Note: The block save area cannot be fast-altered.
SAVE
TYPE
QDG
QDP
QDM
QDK
TOO
o
Alter Block Save Area
Fast-Alter Block Save Area
(-
(,
Save Area Type Field Description
DISPLAY fALTER BLOCK SAVE AREA (QDS)
Display Block Save Area
(-
Save Screen Label
Type
Description
Type
Address
Data
Type of information saved
Address of stored data
Hexadecimal data.
Type
Description
S
QDA
QDC
QDD
QDF
QDG
QDK
QDL
QDM
QDP
QDW
QDV
QVAB
QVAC
QVAD
QVAF
BLOCK VARIABLE SAVE
AUXILIARY STORAGE
CONTROL REGISTERS
CONSOLE DISK FILE
FLOATING-POINT REGISTERS
GENERAL REGISTERS
STORAGE KEY
LOCAL STORAGE
REAL STORAGE
CURRENT PSW
SP STORAGE
VIRTUAL STORAGE
CSAR BACKUP TRACE
CONTROL STORE
CHANNEL DATA BUFFER
L1 DIRECTORY
QVAG
QVAH
QVAL
QVAN
QVAP
QVAR
QVAS
QVAT
QVAU
QVAY
QVB
QVC
QVH
QVI
QVK
QVM
QVR
QVX
L1 CACHE DATA
CHANNEL DLAT
LOCAL STORAGE
CHANNEL CONTROL
LOCAL STORE RETRY
CACHE RETRY DATA
SWAP BUFFER
TRAP/BAL STACK
PU DLAT
KEYSTACK ARRAY
CONTROL STORAGE HARDWARE
CHANNEL INTERFACE
CHANNEL HARDWARE
PU HARDWARE
CHECK LATCHES
MAIN STORAGE HARDWARE
SCAN RINGS
EXTERNAL REGISTERS
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
@
IBM Corp. 1979. 1981
PN 2676355
1 of 2
44 305f
(
,
~,
Fast-Alter Auxiliary Storage
DISPlAV;'1 ALTER AUXILIARY STORAGE (QDA)
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q,GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TOPROG SYS
SELECTION: AOOOOOO
Display Auxiliary Storage
To select the auxiliary storage function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key A and a six-digit address next to SELECTION. The
address is a value of zero to one less than the main
storage size minus the address check boundry size. The
address may be defaulted to zero.
3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of data containing the
selected address is displayed.
Alter Auxiliary Storage
AUXILIARY STORAGE ADJUST=+OOO3AO ACB=ICOOOO
ADRS +0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+A
+C' +E
000010 8012 3465 0000 0000 0831 2040 0000 0340
aDA address op data.
000020 0000 0000 OOOC 0000 0000 0550 ODAO 0000
1. Place th!,! CE MODE switch ON.
000030 0450 0270 0380 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
2. QDA selects the Auxiliary Storage screen.
000040 0000 0000 0020 0000 0000 OA67 FOOO 0000
3. Key in the address. The address may be defaulted to
zero.
000050 0000 0000 0220 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
4. Key in the op code:
000060 0000 0000 OOOA 00B5 4346 0000 0000 0000
Key data next to selection as follows:
where:
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
000070 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
000080 0000 A4E4 0360 0000 0000 0000 0330 0000
==>
I NSTR STOP
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of display above.
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the selection unchanged and press
ENTER.
4341
&
Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location.
/
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
5. Key in data in hexadecimal.
6. Press ENTER.
Note: You can enter as much data as can fit the SELECTION
Une, provided you do not cross the 128-byte boundry.
Notes:
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An invalid character prevents the Alter function.
Save Auxiliary Storage
The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be
displayed by using the paging keys.
Eight bytes of data in auxiliary storage can be saved by the
block function. An example of how you can save the auxiliary
storage data is QDAxxxxxx?
The Translate option is applicable to the Auxiliary
Storage display.
The auxiliary storage address can be modified by placing
Note: You can use the 7 op code to verify if data exists at
the address before altering that data. This feature is very
helpful while running a block, but it can be used at any
time. After the 7, enter any number of digits for the data
that would be at that address. You can alter any number of
digits by also using an alter op code, such as (=). If the data
at that address does not match, no alter occurs. If you have
no match, and the data you are matching and the data which
you wish to alter match each other, no alter occurs, nor does
an eFTor occur.
a (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address keyed
next to SELECTION. An example is shown on the aDV
screen. When the Adjust Value has been entered, it
remains until a new value has been entered or you select
another screen that is not a Disptay / Alter screen. You
can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an address.
No address entered defaults to zero.
The data appears in the normal area as though it were
at the selected address, but the data is actually that data
located at the adjusted address, even though the address
under label ADRS is that from the address on the
SELECTION line. You can key a new address or use the
PAGE key, and you still get the data from the adjusted
address. The address plus the Adjusted Value might
cause the screen to have
number.
An example of how this command is used is:
QDAxxxxxx?Fl F2F3 .... =F5F6F7 ....
I
a twos-complement negative
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Alter data
I .
f Compare data
I
I Match address
Model Group 2
EC379825 05JUn81
PN 2676355
44310f
20f 2
/',\
J
()
("'I
"'-...Y-
C) 0
():
~
0 0 0
0
0
0 0 0 0
,0
""-...Y'
Q
o
'
C'', "r)
,~.,
0V
c
(~.
(
(
(
(
Oisp)ay/AlteT UCW/Device Dlrectory"T:BSks
{QDU}
Display UCW/Device Directory Tasks
The U-selection from the Display / Alter screen (no) displays
the UCW /Device Directory Tasks screen. This directory
provides you with selections available for the UCW
Assignment procedure.
To select the UCW /Device Directory Tasks scr"BeO from the
Display/Alter (00) screen:
1. Key U next to
SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. UCW /Device Directory Tasks screen is
displayed.
Note: This screen cannot be alter-ed.
(
(-
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
Display/Alter Change UCW Directory (QDUU)
*0 ISPLAY /ALTER*
G ~EN£RAL REG1ST:ERS
C CONTROL REG lSTERS
FFLOAT ING POINT R"EJi ISTEE
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V V IRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE ARE-A
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REG ISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= ~EX CALCULATOR
Q. liENERAL SELECT 1ON
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SllECTION: U
*utW/OEVICE DIRECTORY TASKS*
Display Change UCW Directory
U CHANGE UCW OIRECTORY .
The Change UCW Directory screen is used to modify the
UCW Directory by adding or deleting UCW addresses, or to
modify the type of UCWaddress in the directory.
C DISPLAY UCW DIRECTORY
E DISPLAY EXPANDED UCW DIRECTORY
To select the Change UCW Directory screen from the
UCW / Device Directory Tasks screen:
1. Key U next to
2. Press
ENTER.
SELECTION:
U.
Change UCW Directory screen is
displayed.
Notes:
•
To Change the UCW Directory, refer to Volume 13/16,
Section 14, "ucw Assignment."
•
The paging keys are not applicable for this function.
-==>
4341
Display/Alter UCW/Device Directory Tasks (QDU) Screen
*DISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REG ISTIRS
C CONTROL REG~STERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
:P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V V IRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRAtE AREA
S ~LOCK SAV£AREA
A AUXILIAR~ STORAGE
U HCW/DEVJ:tED I RECTDRf
L LOCAL STORAGE
)(£XTERNAL REG ImRS
'W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLED ISK FILE
.: HEX CALCULATOR
Q uENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT ION: UU 381)·-3"87 Sl.
*C'HANGE UCW DIRECTORY*
fORMAT: CXX -CYY CHAR. CODES
CXX = STARTING DEVICE ADDRESS
-CYY = ENDING DEVICE ADDRESS (OPTIONAL)
C.HANNEL :'O-BYTE
3-BLOCK
1-BLOCK
4-BLOCK
2-BLOCK
5-BLOCK
CtlAR .. CODES (OPT 10NAL, ANY ORDER)
S SHARED UCW
LSELECTOR MODE -BLOCK ONLY
D DATA STREAMING MODE -BLOCK ONLY
X REMOVE DEVICES
.ONE ENTRY:MUST COVER ALL ADDRS FOR ANY CTL UN IT
.PlJ-1ML'RE.QUIRED AFTER CHANGES -USE' LOAD SCREEN
==>
4341
Oisp1ay/ Alter Change UCWDirectory (QDUU) Screen
© IBM Corp. 1981
. Model Group 2
EC379827 020ct81
6C379829 28Jun82
.
Pri 2676430
1 of 2
44 315f
Display/Alter Display UCW Directory (QDUC)
Display UCWDirectory
This screen is usea.tn;v'erify any changes made while using
the Change UCW ·lJirec:toryscreen (ODUU). in the UCW
Assignment p,"?cedure.
.To select the lJCWDirectory from the UCW / Device
Directory Tasks.screen:
1. Key C and a three-digit device address {OOO-5FFJ next to
SELECTION:. U ..
Note: The default address is zero.
2. Press ENTER The UCW Directory screen is displayed.
Notes:
•
•
The message M(Jf{E;PRESSENTER appears if there is
more data than can be displayed on one page.
irDISPLAY/ALTERir
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOAT ING PO I NT REG I STERS
P CURRENT PSW
.
K STORAG.E KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAV£ AREA
A AUX I L I ARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEV'I CE D I RECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REG I STERS
W SP STGRAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECT! ON
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: UC
Display/Alter Display Expanded UCWDirectory
(ClDUE)
irD I SPLAY tlCW DJRECTORyir
CXX-CYY REF
CH'AAACTERI ST I CS
000
010
BYT,SffR
301-30' 011
BLK,SHR
306-lnF 012
SLK,.SHR
310-3 tF
S£L,DST
Display ExpandedUCW Directory
au-on:.
This screell' is used to verifY any changes made while using
the ChangeUCW Directory screen (QQUU) in the UCW
Assignment procedure.
To select the Expanded UCW Drrectary from the
UCW/Device Directory Tasks screen:
1. Pface CE MODE switch
QIl.
2. Key' E and a.three-digit device address. (OOO-5FF) next to
SEI:£CTION: U.
N'ot&: The default address is zero,:
.PU-IML REQUIRED AFTER CHANGES -USE WAD SCREEN
=>
3. Press ENTER. The Expanded UCWDirectory screen is
displayed ..
4341
This screen·.canoot·be.altered.
Notes.~
•
The message MORE, PRESS ENTER appears if there is
more data than. can be displayed on one page.
•
This screen cannot be altered.
Display/Alter UCW Directory (QDUC) Screen
Return to General Selection (Q)
To return to the General Selection (0) screen:
irDISPLAY/ALTERir
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT ION.:
unoo
irD I SPLAY UC.W o-tRECTORYir
CXX-CYY REF
CHARACTERISTICS
HEX
300
OOC
UNA
0310
301
all
BLK,SHR
0472
302
all
BLK.SHR
0472
303
all
BlK.SHR
0472
304
011
BlK.SHR
0472
305
OTI
BLK,SHR
0472
306
012
BlK,SHR
04B2
012
BlK, SHR
04B2
307
012
BLK.SHR
04B2
308
012
BLK,SHR
04B2
309
30A
012
BLK,.SHR
04B2
30B
012
BLK,SHR
0482
30C
012
BLKi-SHR
04B2
30D
012
BLlt,..SHR
04B2
30E
012
BlK.SHR
04B2
012
BlK,.SHR
04B2
30F
.PU-IMl REQUIRED AFTER CHANGES -USE lOAD SCREEN·
==> MtmE, PRESS ENTER
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press- ENTER. General Selection (QJ screen is displayed.
Return to ProgSys (Z)
To return to the Prog Sys(Z) screen:
1. Key Znextto SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. Prog Sys (Z) screen is displayed.
4341
Display/Alter Expanded UCW Directory (QDUE) Screen
ModeJ Group Z
EC379827 OZOct81
PN 2676430
EC 379829 . 28Jun8Z:
o 00 00 o 0 0 0 0 0
•
• •
····0,······,··0
.·." 0,:
",
"
,"
'
o o
0,': 0 0 0 0'· 0 O' 0
';:,
,
"
44 320f
20f 2
',
~
"
,:
"
,
",},i:
o
(-
(~
c
(
(~
(
(
(
f
(
f
DISPLAY/ALTER LOCAL STORAGE (QDL)
Display Local Storage
To select the local storage function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key L and a three-digit device address next to
SELECTION. The first digit is the number of a local
storage section with values of 0- 7 (hex). The second digit
is a row within local storage with a value of O-F (hex).
and digit three is a byte offset with a value of 0- 7 (hex).
The address may be defaulted to zero. If a single digit is
entered. it is a section number.
3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of local storage is
displayed which contains the selected address.
Alter Local Storage
2. Move the cursor to the location(s) to be altered and key in
the new data. Leave the selection line unchanged and
press ENTER.
(
(
"DISPLAY/ALTER"
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DiRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT ION: L100
o
LOCAL STORAGE
4
6
4
6
0
2
0
2
"11 40C3 C8Cl 0505 C503
"10 C509 E240 40Cl 05C4
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
An invalid character prevents
•
The next higher/lower 728-byte boundary can be
displayed by using the paging keys.
•
Care should be taken as data is changing in local storage
while this function operates.
•
The Translate option is applicable to the Local Storage
display.
~he
alter function.
Key data next to selection as follows:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
"12 40FO 4004 C101 07C9
"13 05C7 l1Cl F9Fl 60F6
"14 7MO C3E4 E460 09C5
"15 C640 4040 4040 F07A
"16 40C3 E4E4 6004 C101
"17 0300 0036 1040 1100
"18 0140 4040 4040 4040
"19 4040 4040 4040 4040
"lA
4040 4040 4040 4040
"IB 4040 4040 4040 4040
Y
is a hex digit representing a row of local storage with a
value of O-F (hex).
"1C 4040 4040 4040 4040
"10 4040 4040 4040 4040
Z
represents a byte offset digit with a value of 0-7 (hex).
"1E 4003 C27F C44F C55F
''IF C66F C11F C94F 4A5F
The address may be defaulted to zero.
2. ODL selects the Local Storage screen.
3. Key in the address XYZ:
where:
X is a hex digit of local storage section with a value of
0-7 (hex).
4. Key in the op code:
=>
4341
where:
Means MOVE the data opposite the SELECTION line
into the address location.
& Means AND the data opposite the SELECTION line
with the data in the address location.
Means OR the data opposite the SELECTION line with
the data in the address location.
5. Key in data in hexadecimal.
6. Press ENTER.
Save Local Storage
Eight bytes of data in local storage can be saved by the Block
function. An example of how you can save the local storage
.
data is QDLxxx?
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22SepSO
@
IBM Corp. 1979. 1980
(
aOL XYZ op data.
/
Notes:
(
Fast Alter Local Storage
I NSTR STOP
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of display above.
f
PN 5666376
1 of 1
44325
~O()OO()
0 0 0 C) 0 0 0 0 OOC)OO
f
(
(
f
(
(
DISPLAY fALTER EXTERNAL REGISTERS (QDX
0-5) (GRP 2)
(
(
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(
13.
*0 ISPLAY/ALTER.
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
o CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: XO
Display External Registers
To select the external register function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key X and a one-digit address next to SELECTION.
Note: Use 0-5 for particular channel desired; the address
may be defaulted to zero.
3. Press ENTER. A 64-byte section of the external registers
is shown of which the data at the selected address is
included.
CHANNEL
0
1
CHDLR
40
CHSYNCO CHDATAO
50
OC
CHCOMONR CHSTAT
SO
00
CHACMDR CHIMODE
EO
40
CHSYNCI CHDATA2
15
AF
CHCMDR
CHDRSTA
00
00
CHSDBAR CHMISC
02
00
PU
*EXTERNAL REGISTERS*
1
4
567
2
0
SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY ---CHSAR--40
00
FO*
00
lFE040
WI
MNTR STAT 1
----L1BU--00
00
SO
lFDFOO·
W2
INT4 STAT2 CTRLO ----SAR2--OS* CO
02
00
000090*
PSWO PSWI PSW2
----SAR1--00
00
00
000200
INT3 STATO
----ICTR--00
02
000200
NIB
ICYC I NT2 INDIRI --DCRMNT-10
IE
FFFFFO
FO
94
OP
INTI RETRY --TODH 1-- NIB1BF
42
000010
FO
47
00
HREG INTO
--TODLO-------D2FB824
00
SS
CHANNEL o AND (.) FIELDS USED TO DISPLAY SCREEN
2
3
4
5
6
7
14.
2
3
4
5
6
7
4341
Notes:
The External Register screen cannot be altered.
label Identification
Fast-Alter External Registers
Note: The External Register screen cannot be fast-altered.
1. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data
length register. The channel external address is 0.0.
W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2
register is specified as a length parameter. It may also
serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2,0.
16.
INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mope. The PU external address is 2,1.
9. W1: This byte contains the shift length value when WI
register is specified as a length parameter. The PU
external address is 1. O.
10.
2. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the
Save External Registers
Note: The External Registers screen cannot be saved.
number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU
external address is 0,0.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Channel 0 interrupt request
Channel 1 interrupt request
Channel 2 interrupt request
Channel 3 interrupt request
Channel 4 interrupt request
Channel 5 interrupt request
Unused
Reset ADDRMATCH
3
4
5
6
7
6. CHSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the channel
is used. The external address is 0, 5-7.
@ IBM
Corp. 1981
12.
4
17.
WI (4) = 0
W2 (0-4) = 0
Invalid decimal format
(cumulative)
True/complement decimal
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
ACB check enable
CPUTIA
CCOMPIA
ITIMIA
Pending machine check interrupt
Retry interrupt force
Execute transaction in process
Restart request
Full I-counter trace active
STAT2: This byte contains status conditions relative to
arithmetic, branch, shift, etc. of ALU. The external
address is 2,2.
Bit 0
1
2
3
STA T1: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to
ALU. The external address is 1,2.
2
5. CHKEY : Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented
bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 0,4.
8. CHDATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel
data register. It is assigned to obtain device address,
device statu.s, interface status and other information from
the interface adapter. The channel external address is
1,1.
5
6
7
Bit 0
1
4. INDIRO: This byte contains the address that is the Rl
field of the current instruction. The external address is
0,2.
7. CHSYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync 0
register. The Channel external address is I,D.
Bit 0
1
3
4
5
6
7
11 .
2
3
2
3. INT5: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The external address is 0,1.
Bit 0
1
MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status
information. The external address is 1,1.
Start I/O count
SVC interrupt
I/O interrupt
Page fault interrupt
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Spare = 0
Incorrect length latch
Prog or Prot check latch
Spare = 0
Channel data check latch
Channel control check latch
Spare = 0
Chaining check latch
15.
Data is displayed in hexadecimal.
The next higher/lower 64-byte section can be displayed
by using the paging keys.
370 mode
Can source other externals
LCA meter in
Microword channel control check
Storage busy
Valid transfer-in-channel (TIC)
Valid command chain CCW
Valid chain data CCW
CHSTAT: This byte contains hardware set channel
status indicators. The channel external address is 6,0.
Bit 0
1
==>
(
CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control
bits in the common register. The channel external
address is 2,0.
Bit 0
1
INSTR STOP
Alter External Registers
o
(-
(
4
5
6
7
Working stat 0
Working stat 1
Working stat 2
Working stat 3
Channel working stat·O
Channel working stat 1
Instruction length counter
Instruction length counter
18.
CTRLO: System control register 0
19.
SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of
an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7.
L1 BU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address.
The external address is 1, 5- 7.
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 OSJun81
PN 2676431
1 of 2
44 329f
20.
CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel
asynchronous command register to the channel. The
external address is 3,0.
21.
CHIMODE: This byte contains gating controls for ACB
checking and hardware set latches for P~I and CDA
controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1.
Bit 0
·1
2
3
4
5
6
7
22.
Block-multiplexer mode latch
Byte-multiplexer mode latch
Enable ACB check latch
Data stream mode latch
Internal interrupt request latch
Implement spare latch
PCI latch
CD prefetch latch
ICTR: Three bytes contain the starting address of the
next instructic..n. The external address is 4, 5-7'.
31.
CHCMDR: Command register content for this channel.
The external address is 5,0. The types of commands are:
Data transfer
Sequence count
I/O instruction load
UCW load
Misc
CCW fetched
Interface adapter
Interface controller
32.
PSW1: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display / Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit significance. The PU external address is 3,1.
24.
PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display / Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit significance. The external address is 3,2.
2.5.
SAR1: Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of
an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7.
26.
CHSYNC1: This byte contains conditions as. trap
addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel
external address is 4,0.
27.
CHDATA2: This byte contains the sequence count from
the channel. The channel external address is 4,1.
28.
INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 4,1.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ITIMIB
Interrupt key
External signal
External Signal
External signal
External signal
External Signal
External Signal
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
6
7
33.
Bit
a
ALU overflow
1
Negative result
2
Recomplement
3
Destination =
4
ALU carry
51-bit carry
6 Z /*= 0
.1 ALU size exception
35.
a
37.
NIB: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The
external address is 5,7.
38.
CHSDBAR: Used to address the channel data buffer
whe!1 transferring and receiving data from storage. The
channel external address is 6, O.
39.
CHMISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify data
in parity, output, ISB and first character transferred. The
external address is 6,1.
Bit 0
1
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Last character mark, valid
register
Number of bytes ready to
channel
Number of bytes ready to
channel
Number of bytes ready to
channel
2
3
4
5
6
7
data in data
transfer across
transfer across
41.
INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 6,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
370 mode
Unconditional I-cycle store error
Conditional I-cycle store error
Successful branch
Execute
PU retry mask
IB empty
Operate latch
42.
Signal DIAGM
ITIMWRPA
ADRMATCH
ISTRSTEP
Pending machine check interrupt
Decrementer adjustment
CCOMPIB
CPUTIB
INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2
or X2 field of the current instruction. The external
address is 5,2.
0
1
2
3
4
5
45.
HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status
conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0.
3
4
5
6
7
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
a
INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The external address is 0,3.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
47.
Spare
Odd branch address - trap level
L1 miss - trap level 0
ACB check - trap level 0
DLAT miss - trap level 1
Storage protect check - trap level 1
Block channel traps
Channel trap - trap level 2
Interrupt pending
PER
Pending channel interrupt
Pending external interrupt
MSVP request
Execute interrupt
Decrementer = 0
ITIMWRP
TODLO: This byte contains the low seven digits of the
time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock
instruction.
external interrupt
RETRY: This byte contains eight bits that indicate the
status conditions relative to a retry operation. The
external address is 6,2.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
43.
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Unused
Channel
NIBIBF: This byte is the second byte of the NIB buffer.
The external address is 6,7.
46.
OP: Contains. the first byte (byte 0) of the current
instruction, It implies 256 op code possibilities. It is
driven by the NIB. The PU external address is 6,0.
transfer across
44.
Bit 0
1
2
01 parity check
Output
ISB
First character transferred
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
40,
INT2: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 5,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
STATO: This byte contains status conditions of various
conditions in ALU. The external address is 4,2.
DCRMNT: This byte contains the decrementer count.
Counts down at a rate of one per microsecond. Used to
implement system clocks.
ICYC: Byte (I-cycle control register) contains status
information of I-cycles. It contains I-cycle function and
flags. The PU external address is 5,0.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
34.
36.
CHDRSTA: Channel data register status.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
PSWO: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display/A1ter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit significance. The PU exter.nal address is 3,0.
23.
29.
30.
Hardstop
Sequential processing
Instruction processing
SS operation
Refresh in progress
Retry in progress
Unretriable section of code
System operation
TODHI: This byte contains the high six digits of the
time-of-day clock and is set by the Store Clock
instruction.
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
"-'\
,
y!
0
(~\
\..y
0
~--,j
0
l;/
;-~J
~y
i~
",-y
(\
~j
1''''
~y!
,0
~j
(J 0
"--..cP
i""'~
(y
0
~
lyJ
rl
0
0 C)
0
~j
r~
(~
~j
PN 2676431
20f 2
("I
~
44 330f
(:
(
(-
(--
(-
(--
c
(
(
{
DISPLAY/ALTER SP STORAGE (QOW)
Display SP Storage
To select the SP Storage function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key Wand a four-digit address next to SELECTION. The
four digits represent an SP address and range from 0 to
FFFF. The address is defaulted to zero if no address is
entered.
3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte block of SP storage containing
the selected address is displayed.
Alter SP Storage
Notes:
•
There is no full-screen alter for SP Storage.
•
Data is shown and entered in hexadecimal.
•
The next higher/lower 128-byte boundary can be
displayed by using the paging keys.
•
The Translate option is applicable to the SP Storage
display.
The SP storage address can be modified by placing a (+j
to add or (-j to subtract from the address keyed next to
SELECTION. An example is shown on the aDV screen.
When the Adjust Value has been entered, it remains until
a new value is entered or you select another screen thai is
not a Display/Alter screen.
You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an
addre,ss. No address entered defaults to zero. The data
appears in the normal area as though it were at the
selected address, but the data is actually that data located
at the adjusted address, even though the address under
label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION
line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key,
and'you still get the data from the adjusted address. The
address plus the Adjusted Value might cause the screen
to have a, twos-complement negative number.
(-
(--
c
(
Fast Alter SP Storage
*OISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/OEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
o CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: W0000
SP STORAGE
AORS
+0
0000
1234
+2
5678
AOJUST=+0000
+4+6
+8
9000 0010 0001
+A
0380
+C
0191
+E
0000
Note: There is no fast alter for SP storage.
0010
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Save SP Storage
0020
4004
1C00
0001
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0030
FE82
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0040
0000
0000
A800
0000
0000
0000
0000
0E0F
0050
1011
1213
F6F7
F800
0000
0000
0000
0000
0060
800F
8000
0000
0000
9999
9999
9999
0000
0070
A0C4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
==>
I NSTR STOP
4341
Eight bytes of SP storage can be saved by the Block function.
An example of how you can save SP storage data is
QOWxxxxxxxx?
Note: You can use the 1 op code to verify if data exists at
the address before altering that data. This feature is very
helpful while running a block. After the 1, enter any number
of digits for the data that should be at that address. You
can alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code,
such as (=j. If the dats at that address does not match, no
alter occurs. If you have no match, and the data you are
matching and the data which you wish to alter match each
other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur.
An example of how this command is used is:
QDWxxxxxxxxF1 F2F3 .... =F5F6F7 ....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Alter data
I
I Compare data
I
I Match address
• , The ,SP Storage function can be altered only by the Block
function.
@ IBM Corp. 1979
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379598 15Apr80
PN 5666377
1 of 2
44335
DISPLAY/ALTER CONSOLE DISK FILE (aDD)
Fast Alter Console Disk File
*OISPLAY/ALTER*
G GENERAL REGISTERS
C CONTROL REGISTERS
F FLOATING POINT REGISTERS
P CURRENT PSW
K STORAGE KEY
V VIRTUAL STORAGE
M REAL STORAGE
T TRACE AREA
S BLOCK SAVE AREA
A AUXILIARY STORAGE
U UCW/DEVICE DIRECTORY
L LOCAL STORAGE
X EXTERNAL REGISTERS
W SP STORAGE
D CONSOLE DISK FILE
= HEX CALCULATOR
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: 0900000047
Display Console Disk File
To select the Console Disk File function from the D-screen:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key 0 and a four-digit module 10 and four-digit byte
offset next to SELECTION. The console module 10 has
values of 0001-FFFE(hex). The byte offset is defaulted
to zero.
3. Press ENTER. A 128-byte section of data is shown
based on the selected module 10.
Alter Console Disk File
10=9000 AOJUST=+0000
+2
BYTES +0
+4
0000
8012 3465 0000
Note: There is no fast alter for Console Disk File.
0010
0000
0000
000C
0000
0000
0550
0DA0
0000
Save Console Disk File
0020
0450
0270
0380
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0030
0000
0000
0020
0000
0000
0A67
F000
0000
Eight bytes of data of the Console Disk File can be saved by
the Block function, beginning with the starting address. An
example of h~w you can save the console disk file data is
QDDxxxxxxxx?
0040
0000
0000
0220
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0050
0000
0000
000A
00B5
4346
0000
0000
0000
0060
0000
0000
0400
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0070
0000
A4E4
0360
0000
0000 .0000
0330
0000
==>
I NSTR STOP
Notes:
Note: You can use the 7 op code to verify if data exists at
the address before altering that data. This feature is helpful
while running a block. After the 7, enter any number of
digits for the data that should be at that address. You can
alter any number of digits by also using an alter op code,
such as (=). If the data at that address does not match, no
alter occurs. If you have no match, and the data you are
matching and the data which you wish to alter match each
other, no alter occurs, nor does an error occur.
4341
There is no full screen alter for the Console Disk File.
•
FLSIZE=07D2
LAOOR=2000
+E
+A
+C
+6
+8
0000 0831 2040 0000 0340
An example of how this command is used is:
Data is displayed in hexadecimal.
QDDxxxxxxxxF1 F2F3 .... =F5F6F7 ....
I
I
I
I
I
I Alter data
I
I
I
I Compare data
I
I Match address
The next higher/lower 728-byte boundary of a disk file
·can be displayed by using the paging keys.
The Translate option is applicable to the Console Disk
File display.
•
The Console Disk File address may be modified by
placing a (+) to add or a (-) to subtract from the address
keyed next to SELECTION. An example is shown on the
QDV screens. When the Adjust Value has been entered,
it remains until a new value is entered or you select
another screen that is not a Display/Alter screen. The
Adjust Value also is reset if new Module IDs are
selected.
You can key in the Adjust Value alone or with an
address. No address entered defaults to zero. The data
appears in the normal area as though it were at the
selected address, but the data is actually that data located
at the adjusted address, even though the address under
label ADRS is that from the address on the SELECTION
line. You can key a new address or use the PAGE key,
and you still get the data from the adjusted address. The
address plus the Adjusted Value might cause the screen
to have a twos-complement negative number.
Console Disk File Labels
Type
Description
10
ADJUST
Module 10 of the file
Address adjust value
Load address of the module
Linked file size of the module
LAD DR
FLSIZE
The Console Disk File function can be altered only by the
Block function.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379598 15Apr80
PN 5666377
44340
20f2
o o o
o o
o
o
o o
o o
o
o
000
(
c
(
The Insert/Extract Facilities screen (OV) lists facilities on the
left portion of the screen.
* INSERT/EXTRACT*
The insert/ extract function is a form of the display / alter
function, except that it uses scan rings. Therefore,
insert/ extract is slower than display / alter. The insert/extract
function is used in CE mode only.
Each screen can have up to six functions:
Display
Alter
Fast-Alter
Paging
Save from a Block
Alter from a Block
For many screens, entering the Fast-Alter command with
nothing after the op code (for example, OVI22=) causes the
data at the specified address to be shown on the SELECTION
line after the op code. This is useful as a check when
performing fast-alter using screens without full-screen alter.
f
INSERT/EXTRACT (OV)
INSERTjEXTRACT SCREENS
INSERT/E~TRACT
(-
(
To select the OV screen:
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
H MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
WCOMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or oOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OV next to SELECTION.
5. Press ENTER.
Notes:
The PU clock can be stopped by the W-command.
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION:
The clock can be stopped after invoking the QV facilities
screen, but must be stopped prior to invoking any facility
screen other than QVS or QVW.
==>
CLOCK STOP
The insert/extract function must be executed when the PU
is in the hardstop state with the exception of the Status Scan
Ring (OVS) screen and the W-command (OVW). These can
be executed in any state. Use the Operation Rate screen
functions (OOM or OOC) to hardstop the PU, or if necessary
use the W-command (20 or 2E). The CLOCK STOP
message is displayed in the system status area to indicate
this state.
To return the processor back to its normal state:
If OOM or OOC was used, enter OON next to SELECTION
and press ENTER. This resets any previously selected state
and the processor remains in the hardstop state. Pressing
the START key resumes normal operation.
If W2D or W2E was used, enter W2F next to SELECTION
and press ENTER. This resets any previously selected state
and the processor remains in the hardstop state. Entering
W30 and pressing ENTER resumes normal operation. Be
careful when using the W-command. Although it can be
issued in any state. the PU may have to be set to a particular
state for this command to function properly.
The screen can be displayed regardless of parity errors.
The facilities are always parity corrected, when any of them is
altered (updated), except in hardware fault conditions. Bad
parity fields are intensified on the screen.
The Insert/Extract screens can also be displayed by
selecting a % (for example 0% Bxx instead of oVBxx). This
eliminates all clock status checking. Any insert/extract
selection can then be made regardless of the state of the
three clocks in the processing unit.
Note: This feature should be used only if the state of the
clocks is known. The scanning process alters a ring if the
clocks are running.
The START key is disabled during the insert/extract
function, except after the ENTER key has been pressed. If
the scan data has been altered and the START key is pressed
instead of ENTER, the alter is voided, and the screen data is
red is played along with an error message. However, the alter
occurs if the fast-alter function is performed.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379604 05Dec80
EC 379607 05Jun81
@IBM Corp. 1979, 1981
---------------~---~
-------'...;
PN 5666378
1 of 2
44345
Array Addressing
INSERT/EXTRACT ARRAYS (QVA)
Display Arrays Facilities
To select the Arrays facility from the QV screen:
1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key A next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
•
Fourteen arrays are displayed on the right portion of the
screen.
This screen does not appear if the Fast Alter function is
executed.
A
S
K
I
B
M
H
C
ARRAYS
STATUS SCAN RING
CHECKS IN SYSTEM
PU HARDWARE
CS HARDWARE
MS HARDWARE
CHANNEL HARDWARE
CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL
Z RTRN TO
SELECT
PROG SYS
SELECTION: A
An Array screen contains addresses and data. Each address
is associated with a group of data called an element. A
element is the logical unit of an array. The address of the
element appears on the screen directly to the left of it. This
address is in hexadecimal with a zero origin.
ARRAYS
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
AL
AP
AD
AN
PU LS
PU RETRY LS
CHNL DATA BUFFER
CHNL CONTROL
Arrays can also be addressed to the byte level by
concatenating a digit to the right of the element address.
This digit is the subscript or offset of the byte postion within
the element. Byte subscripts are in hexadecimal and with a
zero origin. These numbers appear on the top of the screen
as a row of values.
AS SWAP BUFFER
ACCONTROL STORAGE
AT TRAP/BAL STACK
AB CSAR BACKUP
AU PU DLAT
AH CHNL DLAT
AY KEY
AF L1 DIR
AG L1 CACHE DATA
AR CACHE RETRY DATA
Example:
ARRAY
ELEMENT
ADDRESS
==>
BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE BITE
o
1
2
.3
4
5
6
7
000
001
002
003
004
005
CLOCK STOP
113111
lOA
lOB
10C
100
10E
10F
xx
To obtain address of byte XX:
1. Element address
= 10F
2. Byte subscript Into element = 7
3. Address of byte XX
= 10F7
To display an Array screen that has more than one page, an
address is required on the SELECTION line. This address
consists of the minimum number of most significant (left side)
digits of an element address sufficient to define a page of the
array.
A specific element address can be specified. The address
is truncated to the minimum information needed to display a
page of the array. The displayed page contains the specific
element address specified.
Notes:
•
To perform a Screen Alter (for example, to place data in
the input fields), you must always leave the address on
the SELECTION line. If the address is erased or
changed, the alter is not successful.
•
To perform a Fast-Alter (i.e. address and data on the
SELECTION line), the full element address must be specified.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379604 05Dec80
EC 319601 05Jun81
o o o
() 0 0
o o
00
0':
.
"
o o
PN 5666318
0 ·, 00
~...
44350
20f2
o
···:·
0 ·.'
o o
(
(/
(
o
(
(
Fast Alter Local Store
INSERT/EXTRACT LOCAL STORE (OVAL)
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
Display Local Store
To display the Local Store array from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AL plus a block number (0 through 7 hex) next to
SELECTION; the block number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
Local store is displayed a block at a time.
o
The data is displayed in hex.
•
•
The full screen has a two-digit number to the left of the
data. This is the block number and a line number.
LOCAL STORE
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the array subscreens (OVA):
a
0000
2
0000
4
0000
6
0000
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
*03
0000
0000
0000
0000
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
0000
*05
0000
0000
0000
0000
3. Press ENTER.
0000
0000
*07
0000
0000
0000
0000
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
0000
0000
0000
*09
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
*OB
0000
0000
0000
0000
OC
0000
0000
0000
0000
·00
0000
0000
0000
0000
Q GENERAL SELECT
OE
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: ALO
0000
0000
0000
0000
*OF
0000
0000
0000
0000
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
a
(QVAL)
2
4
6
0000
0000
0000
0000
*01
02
0000
0000
0000
0000
04
0000
0000
0000
06
0000
0000
08
0000
OA
00
(1 )
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Example:
==>
CLOCK STOP
1. Display the selected block as in the preceding steps.
L identifies the array as local store.
0-7 represents a digit of a block number.
O-F represents a digit of a line number within the
block.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR).
Hex data
5. Press ENTER.
QVAL3~~~iFc!'t:/Hex data
L- (4)
Op code
(3) Line number
(2) Block number
(1) Local store
4341
This array can be paged.
Alter Local Store
(
(
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from
one of the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Local Store.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key in the new data.
Notes:
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Save Local Store
•
Up to 16 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with
changes, is written back into the array.
Eight bytes (16 digits), an element, of local store can be
saved by the Block function. The Local Store array has 128
elements. The format is: OVA Lxx 7.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error, and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
~
•
~
period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data.
When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
W-command also stops the PU clock.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@
IBM Corp. 1979, 1980
-
PN 5666379
1 of 2
44 355
c
INSERT/EXTRACT PU RETRY LOCAL STORE
5. Press ENTER.
(QVAP)
Example:
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
Display PU Retry Local Store
,
.
ARRAYS
STATUS SCAN RING
CHECKS IN SYSTEM
PU HARDWARE
CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR A~RESS
A
S
K
I
B
To display PU Retry Local Store array from the Array (OVA)
screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AP plus an array number (0 or 1) to select the first or
second array, followed by a 0 or 1 to select the first or
second half of the array. The array number and the first
or iiCicond half of the array can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
LS RETRY (QVAP) 1 FFBIT 1 OTHERFF 18F8 FA18 7DCO 147F REFBIT
0
2
4
LIN 0
4
6
LIN
6
2
0000 0000 0000 01B8
000
*001 0000 0000 0000 01B8
Data is entered and displayed in hex.
•
This array can be paged.
(4) Line number
(3) Line number
(2) Array
(1) PU Retry LS array
002
0000
0000
0000
01B8
*003
0000
0000
0000
01B8
004
0000
0000
0000
01B8
*005
0000
0000
0000
01B8
006
0000
0000
0000
01B8
·007
0000
0000
0000
01B8
008
0000
0000
0000
01B8
·009
0000
0000
0000
01B8
OOA
0000
0000
0000
01B8
*OOB
0000
0000
0000
01B8
Notes:
DOC
0000
0000
0000
01B8
·000
0000
0000
0000
01B8
•
OOE
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: APOO
0000
0000
0000
01B8
·OOF
0000
0000
0000
01B8
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed. When the operation is executed,
that digit is unaffected.
•
Up to 16 digits, an element, can be altered. The entire
screen, with changes, is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
A period (.) serves as a digit place holder in the data.
When the operation is executed, this position is
unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from
one of the arrays subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter PU Retry Local
Store."
==>
4341
PU Retry Local Store is made up of two arrays. Each
array has 32 lines (()()-7F), and each line is eight bytes
long (0-7).
"
Alter PU Retry Local Store
(1)
.
the preceding steps. '
4, Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
Fast Alter PU Retry Local Store
1. Display the selected array of PU, Retry Local Store as in
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the array (OVA) subscreens:
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key the new data.
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
P identifies the array as PU Retry Local Store.
0 for the first array, 1 for the second array.
0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number.
0- F represents a low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
clock.
Label Identification
LIN: Identifies. left to right, displayed array of Local Storage
Retry and a two-digit line number. Zero identifies the first
array; one identifies the second array. These eight bytes are
sometimes called elements.
3. Press ENTER.
Save PU Retry Local Store
QVAP~'~'F~tL~~'';ex
data
L(5) Opcode
Eight bytes (16 digits). an element, of PU Retry Local Store
can be saved by the Block function. PU Retry Local Store
has 64 elements. The format is OVAPxxx7.
FFBIT and OTHERFF: Addresses one of the two Local
Store Retry arrays used to save Retry data. The first digit in
the array defines the Local Store Retry array.
REFBIT: Addresses one element in the active Local Store
Retry array where a doubleword is saved from the Local Store
array. The second and third digits of the array element
address define the element.
Example:
FFBIT
OTHERFF
o
o
o
1
1
1
o
T
Bit position of an
'ON' Bit in REFBIT
xx
x'20'+xx
x'20'+xx
xx
Element Address Currently
Used to Save Retry Data
Oxx
lxx
lxx
Oxx
where 00 ~ xx ~ 'IF'
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
:) 0 /'J-"" n,
V
,r~
,
~
( '..
0 0
0
",--)
0,
\..J
0
'.
(')
\..J
'0
().
\
0
0
0
0
0
0
''L.JiI
PN 5666379
20f2
44360
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
,0
'\..JI
0 n"
..
~
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(--
f
(
(-
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DATA BUFFER
(aVAD)
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
5. Press ENTER.
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
Display Channel Data Buffer
To display the Channel Data Buffer from the Array (OVA)
screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AD plus a channel number (0-5) and a line number
(O-F) next to SELECTION. The channel and line number
can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Channel Data Buffer
CHANNEL a
CHANNEL DATA BUFFER (QVAD)
. ADRS a
4
2
6
Example:
A
0000
0000
0000
C
E
QVADO~'~B=~-rL~::~ex
data
L(5) Opcode
0000
0000
0000
0000
8
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
2
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
4
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel Data Buffer."
5
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Notes:
6
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
.
7
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
•
Up to 16 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with
changes, is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error, and altering does not occur.
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
a
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: ADOO
,
==>
4341
Note: Refer to the "Insert/Extract Control Store (QVAC)"
and review the Warning before proceeding with this
procedure.
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Line number
Line number
Channel number
Channel Data Buffer array
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
To alter the Channel Data Buffer from the Array (OVA)
screen:
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, this digit is unaffected.
1. Display the selected channel data buffer as in the
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
•
A doubleword on a doubleword boundary can be altered
with a fast-alter command.
preceding steps.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key in the new data.
3.' Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
To fast alter from aoy screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Notas:
•
Data is entered and displayed in hex.
•
Sixteen lines of eight bytes arti displayed by using an
address value of 0 or 8. The first 16 lines are
addressable by selecting the first line (00). The second
16 lines are addressable by selecting the 17th line
(address BO). For Display/Alter, only one digit of the
line number is required. For Save or Fast Select, both
digits of the line number are required.
•
Fast Alter Channel Data Buffer
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock:
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0 identifies the array as Channel Data Buffer.
0-5 identifies which channel is selected.
O-F represents a high-order digit of a line.
o or 8 represents a low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
Label Identification
CHANNEL: Identifies the channel is selected.
ADRS-vertical: Represents a high-order, addressable line
number.
ADRS-horizontal: Represents a low-order, addressable line
number.
This array can be paged.
Save Channel Data Buffer
Eight bytes (16 digits) of the Channel Data Buffer can be
saved by the Block function. The format is OVA Dcxx?
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM
Corp. 1979, 1980
PN 5666380
1 of 2
44365
Fast Alter Channel Control
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL CONTROL
(QVAN)
*INSERT/EXTRACT* CHANNEL CONTROL
Display Channel Control
To display the Channel Control from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock..
2. PreSs ENTER.
3. Key AN Ilext to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Channel Control
To alter the Channel Control from the Array (OVA) screen:
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
WCOMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
(QVAN)
a
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
1
CHANNEL
0:
0000
0000
0000
0000
CHANNEL
1:
0000
0000
0000
0000
CHANNEL
2:
0000
0000
0000
0000
CHANNEL
3:
0000
0000
0000
0000
(1)
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
CHANNEL
4:
0000
0000
0000
0000
(2)
(3)
CHANNEL
5:
0000
0000
0000
0000
(4)
(5)
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AN
N identifies the array as channel control.
0-5 identifies which channel is selected.
0-1 represents a digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR).
Four bytes of hex data (eight digits max).
5. Press ENTER.
Example:
==>
4341
1. Display channel control as in the preceding steps.
QVAN~O~'~iF[!~f
Hex data
L.(4) Op code
(3) Line number
(2) Channel number
(1) Channel Control array
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key the new data.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
Notes:
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from
one of the Array subscreens:
•
Data is entered and displayed in hex.
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel Control. It
•
Label CHANNEL identifies each of six channels and the
first two lines of four bytes each.
Notes:
•
This array cannot be paged.
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to eight digits can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error, and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, this digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Save Channel Control
Four bytes (eight digits) of channel control can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVANcx?
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
o
()
C)
00 ()
o o
C)
000
o
C~
00
PN 5666380
20f2
44370
o o o
0\
j)
(~
-~
(
(
(
(
(/
(
(
(
*1 NSERT /EXTRACT
To display the Swap Buffer from the array (OVA) screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AS and the line number (O-F) next to SELECTION. If
the line number is not specified it defaults to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Swap Buffer
To alter the Swap Buffer from the array (OVA) screen:
1. Display the Swap Buffer as in the preceding steps.
(
SWAP SUFFER
o
(QVAS)
a
6
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (aV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
0000
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
0000
0000
4
0000
*3
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
*5
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
*7
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
*9
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
*S
0000
0000
0000
0000
C
0000
0000
0000
0000
*0
0000
0000
0000
0000
Q GENERAL SELECT
E
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AS
0000
0000
0000
0000
*F
0000
0000
0000
0000
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
S CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
2
4
6
0000
0000
0000
0000
*1
2
0000
0000
0000
0000
4
0000
0000
0000
6
0000
0000
8
0000
A
o
2
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by,
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
3. Leave the selection line unchanged. and press ENTER.
Notes:
S identifies the array as Swap Buffer.
O-F represents a line number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
II'
Example: QVASF=F7 ..F2F.3
==>
4341
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and
key in the new data.
(
f
(
(
Fast Alter Swap Buffer
INSERT/EXTRACT SWAP BUFFER (QVAS)
Display Swap Buffer
(
I
"1
Hex date
(3) Op code
(2) Line number
(7) Swap Buffer array
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or from
one of the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Swap Buffer."
•
Data is entered and displayed in hex.
Notes:
•
Only the first 76 lines (O-F) are addressable.
•
•
Sixteen lines of the Swap Buffer are displayed.
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
This array cannot be paged.
•
Up to 16 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with
changes, is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error,. and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data.
When the operation is executed, this digit is unaffected.
•
A W -command also stops the PU clock.
Save Swap Buffer
Eight bytes (16 digits) of the swap buffer can be saved by the
Block function. The format is aVASx7.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
C IBM Corp. 1979, 1980
PN 5666381
1 of 3
44375
f
Fast Alter Control Store
INSERT/EXTRACT CONTROL STORE (QVAC)
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
Display Control Store
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AC and a one-to-five-digit hex address next to
SELECTION. The address can be defaulted to zero. See
Notes.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Control Store
To alter Control Store from the Array (aVA) screen:
a
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (aV) or one of the Array (aVA) subscreens:
(Q,VAC)
6
0000
A
C
E
0000
4
0000
8
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
0001
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
0002
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
3. Press ENTER.
0003
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0004
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0005
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0006
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Q, GENERAL SELECT
0007
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: ACOOOOO
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ARRAYS
STATUS SCAN RING
CHECKS IN SYSTEM
PU HARDWARE
CS HARDWARE
MS HARDWARE
CHANNEL HARDWARE
CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
A
S
K
I
B
M
H
C
To display Control Store from the Array (aVA) screen:
CONTROL STORE
ADRS
2
0000
Note: Before continuing, read Control Store (OVAC)
Warning.
4. Key aVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
==>
4341
1. Display the data at Control Store address as in the above
steps.
C identifies the array as control storage.
0- F represents a digit of the address.
0- F represents a digit of the address.
O-F represents a digit of the address.
0- F represents a digit of the address.
0,4,8, or C represents a digit of the address.
Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
Example:
. key in the new data.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
Notes:
•
Data is entered and displayed in hex.
•
Control Store is displayed on a.quadword (t6-byte)
boundary with the selected address in the first line.
•
Eight quadwords (76 bytes) are displayed per screen
selection.
•
The control store address must be no greater than the
size specified in the Configuration screen.
•
This array can be paged.
QVllr~~~:4E
(5)
(4)
(3)
' - - - - - (2)
' - - - - - (7)
d;gn
Address digit
Address digit
Address digit
Address digit
Control Store array
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Control Store."
Label Identification
Save Control Store
ADRS-vertical: Represents up to a four-digit addressable
A doubleword (8 bytes) of data in Control Store can be saved
by the Block function. The exception is a last word of a
page, in which case eight digits can be saved and zero filled
for the remaining eight digits. The format is aVACxxxxx7.
line number.
ADRS-horizontal: Represents a single-digit of an
addressable line number.
Note: The SINe address must be on a word boundary.
EC 379598 15AprSO
EC379807 22Sep80
r'"/
I
",,/
\,
-
".
o
..
.~
o
()
PN 5666381
20f3
00
44380
o o
00
('\
\
/
('
(
(
(
(-
(
(-
(
(
Control Store (QVAC) Warning
Warning: If you have a screen filled with FFs or most of
the Screen filled with FFs. use the following steps to
avoid entering invalid data into the control store array.
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
ciock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Press the START key several times.
4. Press ENTER. The screen should be redisplayed correctly.
Notes:
•
If you have doubts about the validity of your control
store data after you display. re-IML the processor.
•
When the PU is forcing a trapword. control storage
cannot be displayed because all positions may show up
as Fs. The write operation still works; so be careful not
to cause an alter that writes the Fs back into the array.
By microword-stepping one or more times and
redisplaying by pressing the ENTER key again. the
screen can be corrected. However. this condition does
not occur if the machine is first softstopped and then
hardstopped by going into microword-step operation rate
(OOM). Note that Control Store screen is not affected by
microword-stepping. but the other arrays and facilities
may be.
(
(
(
Label Identification
*1 NSERTjEXTRACT*
CONTROL STORE
(QVAC)
ADRS
09F8
0
FFFF
2
4
FFFF
8
FFFF
A
FFFF
C
FFFF
E
FFFF
ADRS-vertical: Represents up to a four-digit addressable
FFFF
6
FFFF
09F9
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
ADRS-horizontal: Represents a Single-digit of an
09FA
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
09FB
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
09FC
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
09FD
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
09FE
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
Q GENERAL SELECT
09FF
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AC09F80
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
line number.
addressable line number.
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
This array can be fast selected by keying OVAC and 0.4.
B. or C and = next to SELECT/ON and pressing ENTER.
Resd Warning above before attempting.
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to 16 digits can be altered. The addresses are
variable such that the first four digits may be used or
eliminated as needed. However. the fifth digit (0. 4. B.
or C) must always be used. The address is padded with
zeroes and right justified if the full five-digit address is
not used. Last word of a page address (for example. 7C
or FC) alters only eight digits. The entire screen. with
changes. is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and altering does not occur.
The op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with. or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
The address must be on a word boundary and not exceed
the size specified in the Configuration screen.
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, this digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
PN 5666381
30t 3
44385
80C)OOO():)c)c)OOc)
OOOOQOOO()OJ
OC)OOC}OO
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
, INSERT/EXTRACT TRAP/BAL STACK (QVATI
To display Trap/BAL Stack from the Array (aVA) screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AT next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Trap/BAL Stack
To alter Trap/BAL Stack from the Array (aVA) screen:
1. Display the Trap/BAL Stack screen as in the preceding
(1 )
(Q.VAT)
A ARRAYS
LN
AD DR
S STATUS SCAN RING 0 TRAPO 0028F8
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
TRAP 1 0028F8
8 CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
2 TRAP2 0028F8
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 3 8AL
0028F8
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND S8A-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
(2)
STATO
B4
STATZ
40
INDIRI
A9
84
40
A9
B4
40
A9
B4
40
A9
(3)
(4)
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AT
==>
5. Press ENTER.
Example: QVAT3=F1 ..F2F3
,-=(4) Hex data
(3) Op code
['
- - - (2) Line number
- - ( 1 ) Trap/SAL array
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast-Alter Trap/BAL Stack."
4341
2. Move the cursor below the locatlon(s) to be altered and
Not•• :
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to 12 digits can be altered. The entire screen. with
changes. is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with. or DRs with
the data in the selected location(s).
•
Data left to right: Trap Address (six digits), Status 0
(two digits). Status 2 (two digits) and I-reg 1 (two
digits).
key the new data.
3. leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
•
•
This array cannot be paged.
Three bytes of the address and three bytes of the status
information can be saved by the Block function. The format
is aVATx?
Fast-Alter Trap/BAL Stack
To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (av) or one of the Array (aVAI subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
!I,
(56K Control Store Example)
Control store trap and SAL return addresses are
displayed. as well as status O. status 2. and I-reg 1 bytes.
Save Trap/BAL Stack
2. Key aoe or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
TRAP /BAl STACK
(QVAT)
ADDR
STATO
A ARRAYS
IN
S STATUS SCAN RING 0 TRAPO 000000
B4
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
TRAPI 000000 B4
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
2 TRAP2 000000 B4
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 3 BAL
000000 B4
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
BALD 000000
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC 5 BALI
000000
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
BAL2 000000
,.
STATZ
SF
INOIRI
A9
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. Whttn the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
BF
A9
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
BF
A9
•
SALO-J can be altered only on machines with 641< Control
storage.
BF
A9
Label Identification
,
Q. GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AT
T identifies the array as Trap- BAL
A line number can have the value of 0-6. This range
depends upon the control storage size of the
machine.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (CR).
Hex data.
To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
steps.
Not•• :
(
4. Key aVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
*INSERT/EXTRACT* TRAP/BAL STACK
Display Trap/BAL Stack
(
IN: An addressable line number.
ADDR: Control store address used for returning from TRAP
or BAL
==>
CLOCK STOP
I
4341
STATO: Status register O. Contains ALU information.
STAT2: Status register 2. Contains microword type
information.
J
Jt
INDIR1: Indirect register 1. Contains information used for
II
addressing local store.
(64K Control Store Example)
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
C> IBM Corp. 1981
I
.[
PN 2676433
1 of 1
44395f
~ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
(-
(
(
(
(
(
c
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT CSAR BACKUP IQVAB)
Display CSAR Backup
To display CSAR Backup from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AB next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter CSAR Backup
To alter CSAR Backup from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Display the CSAR Backup screen as in the above steps.
(
(
(
Fast-Alter CSAR Backup
*INSERT/EXTRACT* CSAR BACKUP TRACE (QVAB)
CSARtlU REG: 000000 TRACE
A ARRAYS
00 OOICBC
*01 OOICBC *02
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 04 OOICBC *05 OOICBC *06
I PU HARD ....ARE
B CS HARDWARE
08 OOICBC *09 OOICBC *OA
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARD ....ARE DC OOICBC *00 OOICBC *OE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
10 OOICBC *11 OOICBC *12
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
.... COMMAND SBA-CAC 14 OOICBC '*15 OOICBC *16
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS 18 OOICBC *19 OOICBC *IA
Q GENERAL SELECT
IC OOICBC
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AB
*10 OOtCBC
To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subsci'eens:
ADDR: 01
OOICBC *03 OOtCBC
OOICBC
*07 OOICBC
OOICBC
*OB OOICBC
OOICBC
*OF OOICBC
OOtCBC
*13 OOICBC
OOICBC
*17 OOtCBC
OOICBC
*IB OOICBC
*IE OOICBC
*IF OOICBC
I. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
B identifies the array all CSAR BACKUP.
0-1 represents a high .. order digit of a line number.
O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number.
Op code" (MOVE), Sa (AND), / (OR).
Hex data
5. Press ENTER.
Example: OVABIF-F.. 1
III' '-:~ ~:.:::
==>
4341
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and
key the new data.
(3) Line number
(2) Line number
(1) CSAR Backup 3rray
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
Note.:
.-........... -..............:
(
o
Neither the CSARBU Reg nor Trace Addr can be altered.
To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the Array subscreens:
o
All of the trace arrBY is displayed on one screen.
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast-Alter CSAR Backup."
o
The addresses of the last 32 PU micro words executed
are displayed.
Not•• :
o
CSARBU label points to the most recent entry.
•
The trace arrBY contains the addresses of the last 32
microwords executed if OAM has been selected, or the
addresses of the last 32 targets of microwords that
caused a module switch if OAB has been selected.
,
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
commend is analyzed.
•
Only four digits can be altered. The entire screen, with
changes, is written back into the array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error, and altering does not occur.
Save CSAR Backup
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs with
the data in the selected location(s).
Three bytes (1 line) of the CSAR Backup array can be saved
by the Block.function. The format is:OVABxx?
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is eKecuted, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-commend also stops the PU clock.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
1 of 1
o IBM Corp. 1981
I
PN 2676354
;
r
44397f
,,
!
·r·······
- .
J
~~
I
/
,~ "
!,
"
'~I
\.y
'---/
"
(~
,
)
"
/
Q
"
0 0 0
,,'
,',
'." ;
..~: .-'~
",
:':.
;(
"
r"'\
'''--J
0,
" /
.~
~j
\._/
C)
0
\.j
(''\
CLOCK STOP
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and
key the new data.
4341
•
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
The maximum value for each position is indicated on
line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (QVAU).
Notes:
•
One eight-line portion of the DLAT is displayed per
screen.
•
An alter updates a double entry (both sets of addresses)
plus the LRU (least recently used).
•
This array can be paged.
Save PU DLAT
Fast Alter PU DLAT
To fast alter from any screen other than the insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function.
The format is: OVAUxx?
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
•
A period (.J is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Label Identification
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
U identifies the array as PU DLAT.
0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number.
O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
VA: An eight-bit virtual address.
RA: An l1-bit real address.
KEY: Key in storage.
FP: A fetch protect bit.
S: Valid/invalid status.
LRU: The least recently used DLAT quadrant.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22Sep80
@
IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676434
1 of 1
44403
/'.-~
(
!
'-./
"":",
I[~
(""\
'-~-;/
'~
I~
''--..f'
j
0
"'-J
(~
''----i)
a
0- . 0 0
0
''---_J/
r"'"
i
)
'----./
\
0
'--
\--./
(~
'--..j
-
--"--------,
(
(~
f~
(/
C
{~
C
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
(0
(
(
{-
(
C'
INSERT/EXTRACT PU DLAT (QVAU) (GRP 1)
To display PU DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AU and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter PU DLAT
To alter PU DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Display the PU DLAT screen as in the preceding steps.
(
{
(
(
(
('
(
5. Press ENTER.
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
Display PU DLAT
(-
--------
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Example: QVAU1F=F.. FF.3
L-(5)
L- (4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
~l§
PU DLAT (QVAU)
-FF-3FF8-F-I-7-I-FF-3FF8-F-I-7LN
VA
RA
KEY FP S LRU VA
RA KEY FP S
8 1 6 a 80 2018
7 1 4
00
00 2018
01
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
02
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
03
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
Hex data
Op code
Line number
Line number
PU DLAT array
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter PU DLAT."
04
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
Notes:
05
00
201S
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
•
06
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Q GENERAL SELECT
07
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AUOO
00
2018
8
6
0
80
2018
7
4
Up to 17 digits can be altered. The entire screen, with
changes, is written back into the array.
==>
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error, and altering does not occur.
4341
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and
key the new data.
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
The maximum value for each poSition is indicated on
line 1 of the Display / Alter screen (QVAU).
Notes:
•
One eight-line portion of the DLAT is displayed per
screen.
•
An alter updates a double entry (both sets of addresses)
plus the LRU (least recently used).
•
This array can be paged.
Fast Alter PU DLAT
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Save PU DLAT
One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function.
The format is: OVAUxx?
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
•
A period (.J is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
U identifies the array as PU DLAT.
0-1 represents a high-order digit of a line number.
O-F represents a low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE)' &. (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
label Identification
VA: An eight-bit virtual address.
RA: An 11-bit real address.
KEY: Key in storage.
FP: A fetch protect bit.
s: Valid/invalid status.
lRU: The least recently used DLAT quadrant.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1979, 1980
PN 5666383
1 of 1
44405
(
C
./!.
J
,,-~f
C) 0 0 ()
..,.-~
,
",-1
;r.",\
I"'~\
~I)
"i
,,---_/
(
(-
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
To display Channel DLAT from the Array (QVA) screen:
1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AH next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Channel DLAT
To alter Channel DLAT from the Array (QVA) screen:
1. Display the Channel DLA T screen as in the preceding
steps.
(
(
(
(
(
(
Fast Alter Channel DLAT
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) (GRP 2)
Display Channel DLAT
(
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNfL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AH
CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH)
EVEN(O)
VA
RA
-FFF-FFF8-1-
DATA
000(1)
RA
S VA
EVEN(2)
S VA
RA
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (QV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
CCW
000(3)
RA
S VA
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
S
a
2. Key QOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
CHANNEL 0:
000 0000
a
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000
CHANNEL
I:
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
3. Press ENTER.
CHANNEL 2 :
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
CHANNEL 3 :
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
CHANNEL 4:
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
CHANNEL 5 :
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
000 0000 0
clock.
(1)
H identifies the array as Channel DLAT.
000 0000 0
(2)
(3)
000 0000 0
(4)
(5)
0-5 identifies which channel is selected.
0-3 represents which DLAT is selected.
Op code" (MOVE), &. (AND). I (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
Example: OVAH03=F1 .. F21
CLOCK STOP
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
IIII '-~~ ~:x::::
4341
(3) Line number
(2) ChlJnnel
{1 J Channel DLAT array
key in the new data.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
Notes:
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens: .
•
Each channel has two data entries and two CCW entries.
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Channel DLAT.
The fine 1 label identifies a maslc for each entry.
Notas:
This array cannot be paged.
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Save Channel DLAT
•
One DLAT (8 digits) can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back. into the array.
One line (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block function.
The format is QVAHcx7.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with. or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
The maximum value for each position is indicated on
fine 1 of the Display/Alter screen (OVAH).
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed. that digit is unaffected.
•
A W -command also stops the PU clock.
Label Identification
VA: A 12-bit address.
RA: A II-btt address.
s:
A valid bit.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22SepOO
@
PN 2676435
1 of 1
IBM Corp. 1980
I
44 407
(
~----~~-~~~
-
-
:)C)OOOOOOC)o
-
-
o
0 '0 0 0'0'0 0 0 0
a-c)
0 0
C~)
0 0 0 '0
o c:
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH) (GRP 1)
Display Channel DLAT
To display Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AH next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Channel DLAT
To alter Channel DLAT from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Display the Channel DLAT screen as in the preceding
steps.
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SVS
SELECTION: AH
CHANNEL DLAT (QVAH)
EVEN{O)
VA RA
-FFF-3FF8-1-
Each channel has two data entries and two CCW entries.
•
The line 1 label identifies the maximum value for each
entry.
•
This array cannot be paged.
(
DATA
000(1)
S VA RA
CHANNEL 0:
000 0000
a
000 0000
CHANNEL 1:
000 0000 0
000 0000
CHANNEL 2:
000 0000 0
000 0000
CHANNEL 3:
000 0000
000 0000
CHANNEL 4:
000 0000
CHANNEL 5:
000 0000
a
a
a
000 0000
000 0000
CCW
EVEN(2)
000(3)
S VA RA S VA RA S
a
a
000 0000
000 0000 0
000 0.000
a
a
a
a
000 0000 0
000 0000
000 0000
000 0000
000 0000
a
a
a
a
000 0000 0
a
a
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key ooe or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
000 0000 0
000 0000
000 0000
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
a
a
H identifies the array as Channel DLAT.
0-5 identifies which channel is selected.
0-3 represents which DLAT is selected.
Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
Example: avAH03=F 1.. F21
IIII '-~~! ~;x:::
==>
4341
(3) Element number
(2) Channel
(1) Channel DLAT array
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
•
(
Fast Alter Channel DLAT
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key in the new data.
Notes:
(
(
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Channel DLAT."
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Save Channel DLAT
•
One DLAT (7 digits) can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back into the array.
One element (left adjusted) can be saved by the Block
function. The format is OVAHcx7.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and altering does not occur.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
The maximum value for each position is indicated on
line 1 of the Display / Alter screen (aV AH).
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Label Identification
VA: A 12-bit address.
RA: A 11-bit address.
s: A valid bit.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676436
1 of 1
44409
(
("!"I
',-,Y
(~
",-y
',,-,_ ,;IV
()
0 0 C:
(~
',,--)J
,./~
-",-J!
"\",_ _ Jv
i
\',j/
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
c
(
(
(
(
c
(
{
(
(
(
5. Press ENTER.
INSERT/EXTRACT KEY (QVAY) (GRP 2)
Example: QVAY1FFF=F.11
-INSERT/EXTRACT*
Display Key
LiN
A ARRAYS
GOOD
S STATU$ SCAM RING
To display Key from the Array (OVA) screen:
Kev
o.oe
or
nOM
K CHECKS
next to SfLECT:O!',j to stop the PU
SYSTEM 0004
B CS HAI{[}w/.\!l.E
Kr:::ry' .;~<,\f ~~~"~(\ F. ·dlr(M;~~·d~~ft ~ir.G rl;.~1{J~v·.~r {CO(j··'j
S!~::i.~F.".:·"·:-:C+~
d~
F'U HMUiWARE
docic
,~,
KEY
:·r=)
T:;f;: i;i",;:1 ':(\):'!1,]b(-;:~ (::,.'. :. l':;;'1 :.~(~.'f:.:;~d~l',:L~
(QVAY)
KY FRC
o 000
o 000
LIN
*0001
*0005
KY FRC
o
o
00013
Hex/bit data
111'll l
-F ··111-
LIN
000
000
o ono
o
o
o
GOOD
DOG
UN
·0003
I
II II.
KV FRC
K'f FRC
"'0002 o 000
(7) Op code
[' --(6)
(5) Line number
000
(4) Unenumber
1 - ,.
1:1--·(3) Line number
I 1.----<.-(2) L he numher
I
000
L ,"- ~,,~~-,,' ... (1 ) Key array
n~;I"~' \(;
,
~~ ~~-f
~~}.'-;r: .,>:-.:)X
T':'
: G,'j ~
r!~D~~~
:''.!,.~
;"''":'(
d(yJ/
f.!""J,~i
:u'
;","-'
'·i·?f·:,:~r:' hi;;.~4..'~'··>' ;>j:'\~ 1;"'St" ;.J~:; :~;4:~,;.:'c.:,',.:_
?'~:~"i -'!t' ""~I2e:?J' ~':'.'l/ffi;!' ~;'':;;:;:.}-~·.F:'~''i .. i~·
;:1
;':;;",,"1tifu:i
f) ./5
a
di.S~lt r.'t8t:::~~'
hf]id'"!J""
.:s
·upf}td~i(}rl ?~s eXf;ci/.sJ'1::'1~'d~ if:·,,,;;'? ;;,:i"~pt
!i.::·,:,~ch tli·t;fJ!a~.r"
cor:t:FJins :12 ': ;',!,i'/;:1S
l..?~~g;/("TI:/r:U 1"N'h'f'.; tf?f; ~·)tI!:}'
1..<~:.;l~5/'cf.·ed ,
'T-u {i~st ;J!i8, 'fro;";) any s('n:.ren other ·th~(i the !~'HH-Jrt/ E:xtract
f;~Gi!it~~~s scnien (t1V) or one {:}[ tl":-rJ arn~v !;.ubscre~Jns {Q\!;!\}:
"j.
PitlCe the CE MODE sw~tch C~N.
2. Key
aoe
or QOM next to SELECTION to SlOp the PU
Glock.
One Hne (left justified) caOi be saved by the Block function.
The format is QVAYxxx?
3. Press ENTER.
'(i'/(I".r:
t~:t::'h 1;.~·';'J!l.;:':· ,:','"'Ytt') ~":J":9!
:~\. ~(~)'GO
(1)
(2)
(31
(4)
15}
(5)
(7}
Y kkmt!TlB5 the array as key.
0-1 identifies the first digit of a iinf.1 purnoeL
O-·f identifies the second digit of iii iinil2 number.
0- F identifies the third digit of a line nL:mbeL
0·· F identifies the fourth digit of a line number.
Op Gode "" {MOVE;' & (AND), I {OR}.
Hex data (1 digit); bit data \.3 bits!.
it} {};r~ :li!Jr;~~
V~//1Jf:JF'fI 1)\9
.".p}a{:' "-~).~l~·~':,j
UN: An addressable line number.
KEY: Key in storage.
F: Fetch protect.
R: A reference bit.
c: A change bit.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and abOve
EC 379822 22Sep80
© IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676437
1 of 1
44413
/~
.y
I
C)
r-'Ir .
I,)
"-.---'"'
()
(~
,,-y
r~
"J
0000
t~
\
)
"'--
() (1'
o
o o
('1
",-y
0)
"---Y
o
0",
,
,
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
c
(
Example:
To display Key from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
'3. Key AY and a three-digit line number (000-07F) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to 000.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Key
To alter Key from the Array (OVA) screen:
*INSERT/EXTRACT* KEY (QVAY)
LIN
KY FRC
A ARRAYS
a 000
0000
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0004
a 000
I PU HARDWARE
8 CS HARDWARE
a 000
0008
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE OOOC
o 000
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
0010
o 000
V CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC 0014
o 000
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS 0018
o 000
Q GENERAL SELECT
OOlC
Z RTRN TO PROG SVS
SELECTION: AYOOO
o 000
LIN
*0001
*0005
**009
·0000
·0011
·0015
·0019
*0010
-F-ll1KY FRC
LIN KY FRC
a 000 *0002 a 000
LIN KY FRC
*0003 a 000
a 000
o 000
a 000
*0006
o 000
*0007 '0 000
·OOOA
a 000
o OOC)
·0008
a 000
o 000
o 000
o 000
*0012
o 000
o 000
o 000
o 000
*0013
1. Display the Key screen as in the preceding steps.
·OOOE
·0016
*OOIA
*OOlE
==>
·OOOF
·0017
*0018
·OOIF
o 000
a 000
a 000
o 000
o 000
o 000
(4)
(3)
(2)
'----(1)
Notes:
Each array has 2048 entries, each with a four-bit key
plus three status bits.
•
The line one label identifies the maximum value of each
entry.
•
Each display contains 32 entries beginning with the one
selected.
•
This array can be paged.
Fast Alter Key
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen iaV) or one of the array subscreens (OVA):
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Save Key
One line (left justified) can be saved by the Block function.
The format is aVAYxxx?
2. Key aoe or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
4, Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTiON followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
m
Y identifies the array as key,
0 identifies the first digit of a line number.
0-7 identifies the second digit of a line number.
O-F identifies the third digit of a line number.
O-F identifies the fourth digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data (1 digit); bit data (3 bits).
d ...
Une number
Une number
Line number
Key array
To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extrect screen or one of the
array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Key."
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
One hex digit and up to three binary bits can be altered.
The entire screen, with changes, is written back into the
array.
•
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and no altering occurs.
•
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
The maximum value of each digit/bit poSition is
indicated on line 1 of the Display/Alter screen (QVAY).
•
A period {.J is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
•
This array can be paged.
key in the new data.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged. and press ENTER.
avAYW~i~l ~:x~:
L(5) Line number
4341
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered. and
•
(
5. Press ENTER.
INSERT/EXTRACT KEY (QVAY) (GRP 1)
Display Key
(
Label Identification
LIN: An addressable line number.
3. Press ENTER.
KEY: Key in storage.
F: Fetch protect.
R: A reference bit.
C:
A change bit.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
"~
-'.'.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
PN 5666384
1 of 1
44415
------------
---
-
-
-
"y ,- -, iJ -'
. ' , ,- 8 0 0-0 0 0 -C) 0 0 0 0 0 0
00°0-',°0"00
~-"-
OJ 0 0 () 0 0 () 0 0 iJO C
--
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(-
{
(
(
(
(
(
.~ .~(".-
• •
(
(
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT L1 DIRECTORY (QVAF) (GRP 2)
To display .L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Pr.s ENTER.
3. Key AF and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter L1 Directory
To alter L1 Directory from the Array (OVA) screen:
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
L1 DIRECTORY (QVAF) B-FF.I-FF.M-FF.LRU-7F.RA-FFF8
LN 0 B I M LRU RAO RA1 RA2 RA3 1 RA4 RA5 RA6 RA7
00
00 00 00 40 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
01
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
02
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
03
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
04
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
05
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
06
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
Q GENERAL SELECT
07
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AFOO
00 00 00 60
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and
key in the new data.
The addresses are line number 00, DB, 10, or 18.
o
•
o
The line one label indicates the maximum value of each
entry.
Fast Alter L 1 Directory
Each line of four entries covers a 256-byte block of
cache.
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
This array can be paged.
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Save L 1 Directory
One line of nine bytes can be saved by the Block function.
The format is OVAFxxx?
Notes:
o
•
o
o
Spaces bBtween characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Up to eight groups, eacn group consisting of four hex
digits and three binary digits, plus two LRU digits can
be altered. The entire screen, with changes, is written
back into the array.
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and no alterinr, occurs.
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
The maximum value of each digit bit position is
indicated on line T of the Display / Alter screen (aV AF).
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
•
This array can be paged.
The bit position in the 8, I, and M .fields determines
with which real address fields that bit is associated.
Notes:
•
(
f
C
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter 11 Directory.
4341
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
Eight of the 32 entries are displayed on each screen.
(-
(-
==>
CLOCK STOP
1. Display the L1 Directory screen as in the preceding steps.
•
~
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
Display L1 Directory
..
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
F identifies the array as L1 Directory.
0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number.
O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number.
0-1 identifies a portion of the line.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data
5. Press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER.
Example:
Label Identification
LN: An addressable line number.
B: 64 bytes of the directory are flagged as bad.
I: An invalid status.
M: A modify status.
aVAF~I~F~0=~F(~1~'"'::: data
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Op code
portion of line
Line number
Line number
LT Directory array
LRU: The least recently used quadrant of the directory.
RAO: A real address in the directory quadrant number zero.
RA1: Same as RAO, except quadrant one.
RA2: Same as RAO, except quadrant two.
RA3: Same as RAO, except quadrant three.
RA4: Same as RAO, except quadrant four.
RA5: Same as RAO, except quadrant five.
RA6: Same as RAO, except quadrant six.
RA7: Same as RAO, except quadrant seven.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676438
1 of 1
44417
(
--
--
~~----
~ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
c
('
c
(~
c
{'
('
INSERT/EXTRACT L1 DIRECTORY (OVAF)
To display L1 Directory from the Array (OVAl screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AF and a two-digit line number (00-1 FI next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter L1 Directory
To alter L1 DiFectory from the Array (OVAl screen:
Example:
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
.
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Lt ·DIRECTORY (QVAF) B-FO,I-FO,M-FO,LRU-3F,RA-3FF8
LN a B I H LRU RAO RAt RA2 RA3
00
00 00 00 00 0000 0000 0000 0000
(4)
(3)
(2)
(I)
0000 0000 0000 0000
02
00 00 00 00
0000_0000 0000 0000
03
00 00 00 00
0000 0000 0000 0000
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
04
00 00 00 00
0000 0000 0000 0000
1. Invoke stepJ 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Ll Directory."
05
00 00 00 00
0000 0000 0000 0000
Note.:
06
00 00 00 00
0000 0000 0000 0000
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Q GENERAL SELECT 07
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
00 00 00 00
0000 0000 0000 0000
•
Up to four groups. each group consisting of three hex
digits and three binary digits. plus two I.RU digits can
be altered. The entire screen. with changes. is written
back into the array.
•
The misplacement Of absence of an op code produces an
error and no altering occurs.
•
The op code MOVES the data to. ANDs with, or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
The maximum value of each digit bit poSition is
indicated on line I of the Display/Alter screen (aV AF).
•
A period (.J is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed. that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
•
This array can be paged.
•
The bit position in the B. I. and M fields determines
with which real address fields that bit is associated.
•
The second digit of the B. I, and M fields is always zero.
SELECTION: AFOO
==>
4341
key in the new data.
3. Leave.the SELECTION line unchang8d. and press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The addresses are line number 00.08. 10. or 18.
o
The line one label indicates the maximum value of each
entry.
•
Each line. of four entries covers a 256-byte block of
cache.
•
ThIS array can be paged.
Fast Alter L1 Directory
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insertl Extract
facilities screen (aV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Save L1 Directory
One line of .nine bytes can be saved by the Block function.
The format is aVAFxxx1.
0
Line number
Une number
L1 Directory array
00 00 00 00
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered and
Eight of the 32 entries are displayed on each screen.
aVAF~'F~o-~t!;6~F~eX
data
L(5) Opcode
01
1. Display the L1 Directory screen as in the preceding steps.
•
(
f
5. Press ENTER.
(GRP 1)
Display L1 Directory
(
(
2. Key aoc or aOMnext to SELECTIOI'I to stop the PU
clock.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
F identifies the array as L1 Directory.
(2) 0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number.
(31 O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number.
(41 0 required to make address (three digitsl.
(SlOp code" (MOVE). & (ANDI. / (OR).
(6) Hex data
(1)
Label Identification
3. Press ENTER.
LN: An addressable line number.
RAG: A real address in the directory quadrant number zero.
B: 64 bytes of the directory are flagged as bad.
I: An invalid status.
M: A modify status.
RA1: Same as RAO. except quadrant one.
RA2: Same as RAO. except quadrant two.
RA3: Same as RAO. except quadrant three.
LRU:The least recently used quadrant of the directory.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379807 22Sep80
C IBM Corp. 1980
I
.~
PN 2676439
1 of 1
44419
c
o ()
0 0
OQ~O(C
~ •
•
_
,..
1~
C)O () (] 0 0 0 0 0
aoo ()
0 0
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
. .'
(
(
(
'
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT L1 CACHE DATA (QVAG)
(GRP 2)
To display L1 Cache Data from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AG and a two-digit line number (OO-7F) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter L1 Cache Data
To alter L1 Cache Data from the Array (OVA) screen:
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECT JON: AGOO
Ll CACHE DATA (QVAG)
LN
0
2
4
000 0000 0000 0000
6
0000
LN
"'001
0
0000
2
0000
4
0000
6
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
0000
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
002
0000
0000
0000
0000
"'003
0000
0000
0000
0000
004
0000
0000
0000
0000
"'005
0000
0000
0000
'0000
006
0000
0000
0000
0000
"'007
0000
0000
0000
0000
008
0000
0000
0000
0000
*009
0000
0000
0000
0000
OOA
0000
0000
0000
0000
*OOB
0000
0000
0000
0000
OOC
0000
0000 ·0000
0000
*000
0000
0000
0000
0000
OOE
0000
0000
0000
"'OOF
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1 )
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
G identifies the array as L1 Cache Data.
0- 7 identifies the high-order digit of a line number.
O-F identifies t'1f: middle digit of a line number.
O-F identifies t~le low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
==>
Example:
4341
1. Display L1 Cache Data screen as in the preceding steps.
ll1§'6!
avAG7FF=F.. 1F2.F3
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
•
2048 eight-byte entries are contained in the array. All
can be displayed.
•
Sixteen entries can be displayed beginning with the one
addressed.
•
This array can be paged.
Hex
da"
Op code
Line number
Line number
Line number
(t) L1 Cache Data array
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key in the new data.
Notes:
(
{
Fast Alter L1 Cache Data
"'INSERT/EXTRACT'"
Display L1 Cache Data
(
(
(
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter L 1 Cache Data."
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to 16 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back into the array.
Save L1 Cache Data
The" misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and no altering occurs.
One line of data (8 bytes) can be saved by the Block function.
The format is OVAGxxx?
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Label Identification
LN: An addressable line number.
0,2
etc.: A byte number.
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
@ IBM
Corp. 1981
PN 2676410
1 of 1
44 425f
(
(
C)
00 o
(--II:-:
'--
/
f
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
(
(1)
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
To display Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
cloqt.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AR and a two-digit line number (00-1 F) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Cache Retry Data
To alter Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Display Cache Retry Data screen as in the preceding
A
S
K
I
ARRAYS
STATUS SCAN RING
CHECKS IN SYSTEM
PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AROO
CACHE RETRY DATA (QVAR)
LINE
a
2
4
600
0000 0000 0000 0000
a
FL
8E
(2)
RTYACT
00 RTYCNT
CNT
ADDRESS
FA 0000
00
(3)
(4)
(5)
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FA 4000
00
02
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FA 8000
00
03
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FA COOO
00
04
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FB 0000
00
05
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FB 4000
00
06
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FB 8000
00
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
07
0000 0000 0000 0000
82
FB COOO
00
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of Fast Alter Cache Retry Data.
==>
CLOCK STOP
5. Press ENTER.
Example:
AR~'Elr~t;;·3Hex
data
C ( 4 ) Opcode
QV
(3) Line number
(2) Line number
(7) Cache Retry Data array
Notes:
4341
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to 24 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back into the array.
key in the new data.
The CNT field cannot be altered.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
o
Notes:
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and no altering.
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
o
Eight lines of the 32 entries can be displayed on a
screen.
o
Addressing one-fourth of the array is address 00, 08, 10,
or 18.
•
This array can be paged.
•
o
R identifies the array as Cache Retry Data.
0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number.
O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE), &. (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
01
steps.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
(
(
4. Key aVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
INSERT/EXTRACT CACHERETRV DATA
(QVAR) (GRP 2)
Display Cache Retry Data
(
(
(
(
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Save Cache Retry Data
Label Identification
One line of 13 bytes can be saved by the Block function.
The format is OVARxx?
LINE: An addressable line in the array.
Fast Alter Cache Retry Data
FL: If bit x is on, byte x of the doubleword was modified by
the PU during the execution of the current instruction, where
x is greater or equal to zero and less than or equal to seven.
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVA):
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
ADDRESS: Real address of corresponding doubleword.
CNT: Value of RTYCNT when doubleword was saved.
RTYACT: 0 - No retry data was saved for the current
instruction, and screen data is not valid.
1 - At least one doubleword was saved for the current
instruction, and screen data is valid.
RTYCNT: Indicates which line in the Cache Retry Data array
was the last valid line.
.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22Sep80
PN 2676440
1 of 1
@ IBM Corp. 1980
44427
o o
o o a
() 0
o
o ()
()
o
00 (} 0
o
(
(
(
(-
(
(
(
(
(
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
To display Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVA) screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key AR and a two-digit line number (00-1 f) next to
SELECTION. The line number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Cache Retry Data
(
(
(
(
5. Press ENTER.
INSERT/EXTRACT CACHE RETRY DATA
(QVAR) (GRP 1)
Display Cache Retry Data
(
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR AD~RESS
CACHE
LINE
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: AROO
RETRY DATA (QVAR)
a
III
Example: QVAR1 F-F.. 1F2F.3
1E RTYCNT
1 RTYACT
FL ADDRESS
00
2
4
6
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
01
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
02
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
03
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
L- (5) Hex data
I
(4) Op code
(3) Line number
(2) Line number
(1) Cache Retry Data array
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of "Fast Alter Cache Retry Data."
04
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
05
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
06
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
07
0000 0000 0000 0000
00
00 0000
Notes:
To alter Cache Retry Data from the Array (OVAl screen:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
Up to 24 hex digits can be altered. The entire screen,
with changes, is written back into the array.
==>
CLOCK STOP
1. Display Cache Retry Data screen as in the preceding
The misplacement or absence of an op code produces an
error and no altering.
4341
The op code MOVES the data to, ANDs with, or DRs
with the data in the selected location(s).
steps.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s) to be altered, and
key in the new data.
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged, and press ENTER.
•
A period U is a digit place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Notes:
•
•
Label Identification
Eight lines of the 32 entries can be displayed on a
screen.
Fast Alter Cache Retr;, Data
Addressing one-fourth of the array is address 00, 08, ?O,
or 18.
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen IOV) or one of the Array subscreens (OVAl:
This array can be paged.
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
4. Key OVA (Arrays screen) next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Save Cache Retry Data
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
One line of 12 bytes can be saved by the Block function.
The format is OVARxx7.
3. Press ENTER.
R identifies the array as Cache Retry Data.
0-1 identifies the high-order digit of a line number.
O-F identifies the low-order digit of a line number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
LINE: An addressable line in the array.
Fl: If bit x is •on', byte x of the doubieword was modified by
the PU during the execution of the current instruction, where
x is greater or equal to zero and less than or equal to seven.
ADDRESS: Real address of corresponding doubleword.
RTYACT: 0 - No retry data was saved for the current
instruction and screen data is not valid.
1 - At least one doubleword was saved for the current
instruction, and screen data is valid.
RTYCNT: Indicates which line in the Cache Retry Data array
was the last valid line.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676441
1 of 1
44429
(
~"'"
~
1"11
.
',J'
',.J
.
,...... )1
'~j
'.
);
0 0 0
r''''''
):
.~.
'~~))
/",.-'1t>.
",.'
.0
'<)i
C)
'->':'" -~
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
f
1. Key S next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
All status scan ring information can be displayed and
formatted.
•
The display consists of system status information.
•
This screen is scan ring 23.
Alter Status Scan Ring
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
0
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING o
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: S
~OPBIT
0
~CHSEQM
~IPURUN
~MWSTOP
~CHNLRN
~MODE
o ~CSARM
o ~STGRFM
o ~LSREFM
~DAT
0
~IOBIT3
0
~INSMDE
~WAIT
0
MT lOB IT2
0
~MWDSMD
0
~IOBITI
0
~IOBITO
o ~CLKCMD
o ~PULMDE
~S370
~REFRUN
(
o MTANYDIS
o ~ANYCSE
o MTANYLIE
o MTANYCHE
o ~ANYIPE
1. MTOPBIT: Is the status of the I cycle op rate bit. 0 is
a softstop.
2. MTCHSEQM: If on, channel sequence count match has
occurred.
3. MTIPURUN: If on, PU clock is in run mode.
4. MTANVDIS: If on, one or more of the 18 error disable
latches are set for the particular chip used at this time.
5. MTMWSTOP: The status of the CREG byte 3, bit 2.
6. MTCSARM: A CSAR address match.
7. MTCHNLRN: If on, channel clock is in run mode.
8. MTANVCSE: If on, an enabled error on one or more of
the control storage cards.
=2:>
CLOCK STOP
9. MTS370: The status of I-cycle register bit O.
Note: This screen cannot be altered.
4341
10.
MTSTGRFM: If on, storage reference (any reference,
I /0 reference, data store, instruction counter fetch)
address match has occurred.
11.
MTREFRUN: If on, refresh clock is in run mode.
Save Status Scan Ring
Note: The data from this screen cannot be saved, except
through the regular scan (OVR) screen.
(
(
Screen label identification a represents the off condition; 1
represents the on condition.
*INSERT/EXTRACT* STATUS SCAN RING (QVS)
To display the Status Scan Ring screen from the QV screen:
(
Label Identification
INSERT/EXTRACT STATUS SCAN RING (QVS)
Display Status Scan Ring
f
12. MTANVLlE: If on, an enabled error on one or more of
the five storage cards.
13.
MTMODE: Status of PSW byte 1, bit 4.
14.
MTLSREFM: If on, local store reference (source or
destination) address match has occurred.
16.
MTANVCHE: If on, an enabled error is on one or more
of the four channel cards.
17.
MTDAT: Status of PSW byte 0, bit 5.
18.
MTIOBIT3: Status of the I/O register, bit 3.
19.
MTINSMDE: If on, instruction step interrupt bit is set.
20.
MTANVIPE: If on, an enabled error is on one or more
of the eight PU or three clock cards.
21. MTWAIT: Status of PSW byte 1, bit 6.
22. MTIOBIT2: Status of the I/O register, bit 2.
23.
MTMWDSMD: If on, clock is in single-microword
cycle mode.
26.
MTIOBIT1: Status of the I/O register, bit 1.
27.
MTCLKCMD: If on, PU is in clock-cycle mode.
30.
MTIOBITO: Status of the I/O register, bit O.
31.
MTPULMDE: If on, PU is in pulse mode.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1979,1980
PN 5666386
1 of 1
44435
0000080000000000000000000000000
00
---------_.
(~
(
f
(-
(
(
(
f
(
(
-"
(
{
(
(
(-
(
f
f
INSERT/EXTRACT CHECKS IN SYSTEM-(QVK)
To display the Checks in System screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Pnps ENTER.
3. Key K next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Checks in System
• Note: This screen cannot be fuJI-screen altered.
Save Checks in System
The data from the Checks in System screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVKxxl where xx is a line
number on the screen. It is left-adjusted in the Save area.
Only one line can be saved per selection.
Note: The facilities (field number) are numbered (1-17) top
to bottom of the screen.
Check Reset
To reset all the detail latches:
(-
f
(
(
r-
('
(
(~
f
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
(GRP 2)
Display Checks in System
(
·INSERT/EXTRACT· CHECK AND DISABLE (QVK)
FIELDS 1-17
SVSCKS
0 F CARD/AREA
DETAIL LATCHES
A ARRAYS
0
0
CS CONTROL
0000 00000
5 STATUS SCAN RING 0000
0
CS ARRAY
0000 0000 0000
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 00
a 0 CHN DATA BUFFER 0000 00
! PU HARDWARE
a
a 00 CHN CONTROL
0000 00
B CS HARDWARE
0
0
CHN INTERFACE 00
H MS HARDWARE
00000000 0
STG CACHE/DATA 0000 0000 0000
H CHANNEL HARDWARE 00
0
STG 8SM
0000 0000
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 00
00
STG SAR/KEV
0000 00
X EXTERNAL REGS
00
00
STG DLAT/DIR
0000 0000 0000
R SCAN RING
00
0 00 PU DATA FLOW 0000 0000 0000
Y CLOCK SCAN RING 0
0 0 PU SAR
0000 0000 00
W COMMAND SBA-CAC 0
0 00 PU OF CO~7ROL 0000 0000
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT 0
a 0 PU SHIFTER
0000
G SET eSAR ADDRESS 0
a 0 PU I-CYCLES
0000 a
o
0 0 PU
INTERRUPTS 000
Q GENERAL SELECT
a
0 00 PU TIMER
000
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS 0
0
eLK CLOCK
000
SELECTION: K
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
II
Example: QVK15=1 ..F1F
~(4)
(3)
0000 00
00
Hex data
Op code
(2) Digit of a field number
(7) Digit of a field number
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter Checks in
System.
0000 0000
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
•
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s)
•
The check fields are numbered (1-17) top to bottom on
the screen.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
•
The last eight digits of Field 2 are unalterable and
remain at zero.
. Label Identification
2. Press ENTER.
SYSCKS: A summary of the DETAIL LATCHES on the same
line. Error conditions that occur on the DETAil LATCHES are
carried over to the appropriate SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates
an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition.
Fast Alter Checks in System
D: Disables the SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates SYSCKS is
disabled. A 0 represents a normal condition.
1. Key QVKR next to SELECTION.
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3.- -Press- ENTER.
4. Key OVK next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
F: Prevents a hardware portion from becoming inactive when
an error condition is present.
A 1 keeps the hardware portion active if an error condition
is present. A 0 causes the hardware portion to become
inactive if an error condition occurs.
CARD/AREA: Identifies the name of the hardware portion
for which the error indicators are in effect.
DETAIL LATCHES: Represent a low-level error. A 1
indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal
condition.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the the selected address.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676442
1 of 1
44443
(-
f
(~
(.c~
'0
(' )...
,,-.
(J
~.
(~
~)
r~
.
J
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(-
(
INSERT/EXTRACT CHECKS IN SYSTEM (QVK)
(GRP 1)
Display Checks in System
To display the Checks in System screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key K next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Alter Checks in System
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
(
(
(
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: K
CHECK AND DISABLE (QVK)
FIELDS 1-17
SYSCKS 0 F CARD/AREA
DETAIL LATCHES
a
a
CS CONTROL
0000 0000 a
0000
a
CS ARRAY
0000 0000 0000 0000 00
00
a C CHN DATA BUFFER 0000 00
a
a 00 CHN CONTROL
0000 00
a
a
CHN INTERFACE
00
0000
a
STG CACHE/DATA 0000 0000 000
00
a
STG CONTROL
0000
00
00
STG SAR/KEY
000
00
00
STG DLAT/DIR
0000 00
00
a FF PU DATA FLOW
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
a
a a PU SAR
000
a
a 00 PU OF CONTROL 0000 0000
a
a a PU SHIFTER
0000
a
a 8 PU I CYCLES
0000 a
a
a C PU INTERRUPTS 000
a
a 00 PU TIMER
000
a
a
ClK CLOCK
000
(
(-
(
(
III
Example: QVK15=1 .. F1F
L(4)
Hex d."
L(3) Op code
(2) Digit of a field number
(1) Digit of a field number
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter Checks in
System.
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
==>
CLOCK STOP
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s)
4341
Note: The facilities (field number) are numbered (1-17) top
to bottom of the screen.
(
(
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
Save Checks in System
The data from the Checks in System screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVKxx? where xx is a line
number on the screen. It is left-adjusted in the Save area.
Only one line can be saved per selection.
(
The check fields are numbered (1-17) top to bottom on
the screen.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
The last eight digits of Field 2 are unalterable and
remain at zero.
Label Identification
Check Reset
2. Press ENTER.
SYSCKS: A summary of the DETAIL LATCHES on the same
line. Error conditions that occur on the DETAIL LATCHES are
carried over to the appropriate SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates
an error condition. A 0 represents a normal condition.
Fast Alter Checks in System
0: Disables the SYSCKS latch. A 1 indicates SYSCKS is
disabled. A 0 represents a normal condition.
To reset all the detail latches:
1. Key OVKR next to SELECTION.
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
F: Prevents a hardware portion from becoming inactive when
an error condition is present.
A 1 keeps the hardware portion active if an error condition
is present. A 0 causes the hardware portion to become
inactive if an error condition occurs.
CAROl AREA: Identifies the name of the hardware portion
for which the error indicators are in effect.
4. Key OVK next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
DETAIL LATCHES: Represent a low-level error. A 1
indicates an error condition. A 0 represents a normal
condition.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the the selected address.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@
IBM Corp. 1979. 1980
PN 5666387
1 of 1
44445
(-'
:) 0 0 0
.,
(:0,
(-
-
« f
('
i
f'
(
(
(
"
f
(
{
C'
(
«
('
(,
(
"
(
f
..
(
f'
"
(
(
(
(
('
(
(
(
,i
\
INSERT/EXTRACT PU
HARD~ARE
(QVI) (GRP 2)
Fast Alter PU Hardware
.INSERT/EXTRACT.
Display PU Hardware
To display the PU Hardware screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key I ne~t to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The PU Hardware control facilities (some are individual
latches) are displayed on the screen.
The display can be fast selected by keying QVI instead
of I if selection from any other QV screen.
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECT ION: I
PU HARDWARE (QVI)
FF FF FF FF FF
00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00
FF FF FF FF FF
00 00 00 00 00
0000 DESTFLAG
8000 TRPOP
E
80
00
00
D
80
00
00
C
80
00
00
FF
00
00
FF
00
00
00
••• PU REGS •••
FIELDS
FF FF A(AREG) 0000 0000 0000 0000
00 00 DFCAREG 0000 0000 0000 0000
00 00 DFBREG 0000 0000 0000 0000
FF FF DFDREG
0000 0000
o
00 00 MQREG
00 INDIRO
00
00 00 GREG
00 INDIRI
00 00 XLATSAR 00 RDWRFLG 00 0000
•••
PU CONTROLS •••
B J
80 80 LSADR
00 00 EXTADR
00 00 RTYADR
••• SYSTEM CHECKS •••
0000 0000 SYSCKS
==>
1-19
CREG
SFIBB
SFIB
NIB
SFPDC
PADFLG
AUXSTBDY
FIELDS 20-26
ICYCTRL
0000 TRPCTRL
F 0000 0000 TPULSES
o CCLKCTRL
To fast alter from any screen other than the Insert/ Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVI next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
o 0000
FIELD 27
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the selected address.
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
CLOCK STOP
Example: QVI01=F.. 2 .. F3
4341
Alter PU Hardware
\1 t=141
(3)
Hex data
Op code
(2) Digit of a field number
(1) Digit of a field number
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
Save PU Hardware
The data from the PU Hardware screen can be saved by the
Block function. The format is OVlxx? where xx is a field
number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per
selection.
To fast alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Alter PU Hardware.
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INV AUD INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s)
The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal,
left to right and top to bottom, on the screen.
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data.
When the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
@ IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676443
1 of 2
44449f
'f
Label Identification
18.
1. A(AREG): Eight-byte PU register.
2. CREG: Contains two four-byte control words.
Even word (byte 0-3) if CSAR bit 21
RDWRFLG: A bit for each byte to be gated through the
shifter control where a 1 is for an -active condition and a
o for an inactive condition.
19. AUXSTBDY: The first real address not accessible to
user programs. Bits 13-23 are unused.
= O..
= 1.
20.
ICYCTRL: Engineering data.
21.
LSADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each
byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7
for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no local storage
destination and thus no address.
5. DFBREG: B-register.
22.
TRPCTRL: Engineering data.
6. SFIB: Instruction buffer.
23.
EXTADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each
byte consist of bits 0-4 for a control line and bits 5- 7
for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no external
destination, and thus no address.
Odd word (byte 4-7) if CSAR bit 21
3. DFCAREG: Same as the A-reg, except dedicated to
channel operation only.
4. SFIBB: IB buffer. Bytes 2-7 are used.
7. DFDREG: Data register in the PU.
8. NIB: Instruction buffer.
9. MQREG: Multiply and divide register.
10.
Bits 0-3
1000
0000/0001
LS Section
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Ch-l
Bit 0
Bit 0
11.
24. TPULSES: The first bit represents the 'last pulse'. A bit
for each clock pulse (TO-T7) beginning with the second
bit.
INDIRO: Indirect register 0 (10).
PU
PU
Ch-2
Ch-3
Ch-4
Ch-5
Ch-O
25.
RTY ADR: Five bytes should always be equal and each
byte consist of bits 0-2 for a control line and bits 3-7
for an address. If bit 0 is a 1, there is no retry and thus
no address.
26.
CCLKCTRL: Engineering data.
27.
SYSCKS: Number of checks logged on the QVK screen.
= 0 for indirect addressing.
= 1 for direct addressing.
SFPDC: One digit (four bits) called the digit catcher.
12. DESTFLAG: Two bytes containing a bit for each byte
in the DREG. Byte 0 should be the same as byte 1.
Byte 1 must duplicate byte O. This flag controls the
D-reg destination.
13. GREG: Register used for storage addressing (updating
and displacement), parallel address update, I-cycle B
and D and B+D+X, cache ACB, and calculating
channel-end address.
14. INDIR1: Indirect register 1 (11).
Bits 1-3
000
LS Section
PU
PU
001
010
011
100
.101.
Ch-l
Ch-2
Ch-3
Ch-4
Ch-5
Ch-O
no
111
15. PADFLG: Controls the shifter control.
16. TRPOP: Two-byte address forced into CSAR at the
next Trap routine.
17. XLATSAR: Segment table entry address or page table
entry address.
Moder Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
'\
,)
(~
v
("~
"'-,)
10
~
0 0
0
~y
r~
J
C)
I~
0
C)
~
'~yJ
~.
",-y
r~"
J
0
() 0
\.....
(J
"- . .J'
0
PN 2676443
444501
2of2
~
I
',,-y'
0
)
0
(
(
(
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT CONTROL STORAGE
HARDWARE (QV8)
Display Control Storage Hardware
To display the Control Storage Hardware screen from the OV
screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key B next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The Control Storage Hardware facilities (not shown on
another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or
binary whichever is applicable for that particular facility.
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
f
(:
Fast-Alter Control Storage Hardware
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
0980 lB40 0940
0000 0000 0000
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
00 0000
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
FF FFFF
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
FF READ 000
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
3 TBADR
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: B
FIELDS 01-12
CS HARDWARE (QVB)
lB40
0000
0000
FFFF
o
CREG
DATAIN
ODD
EVEN
CSAR21
0000 BLKERR
1800 CNTL
00
00
00
00
2000
0040
2000
9830
CSAR
0 CSARE
CSARD
0 BLKCSAR
CSARBU
00 BLKCREG
SAVEREG
00 BLKOE
FIELDS 13-23
00 0000 TRACEREG
14 TRADR
00 0000 MATCHREG
14 CNTR
00 0000 CLKGATE
00 USE21
To fast-alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVAl subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOB next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVB next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND). / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the selected address.
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
IW-
The display can be fast-selected by keying OVB instead
of B if selection is from any other OV screen.
Example: OVB01=F.. 1F2.F3
141 Hex data
(3) Op code
(2) Digit of a field number
(1) Digit of a field number
Alter Control Storage Hardware
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
To fast-alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one of
the array subscreens:
Save Control Storage Hardware
1. Invoke steps 4,5,6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter Control Storage
Hardware."
The data from the Storage Hardware screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVBxx?, where xx is a field
number on the screen. Only one field can be saved per
selection.
Notes:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs with
the data in the selected location(s).
The facilities (field number) are numbered in decimal,
left to right and top to bottom, on the screen.
•
A period (.) is a digit plfJce holder in the hex data. When
the operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 5666205
1 of 2
44453f
Label Identification
1. CREG: Two four- byte control words. Even word (byte
0-3) used if the even latch is on. Odd word ibyte 4- 7)
used if the odd latch is on.
2. CSAR: Along with CSARD and CSARE, make up the
microword address.
13.
CSAR21: Set when the CSAR address bit 21 is en and
used with USE21 to set the odd latch.
14.
TRACEREG:
register.
15.
TRADR: Indicates the trace address.
Contains the CSAR address in the trace
16.
READ:
3. CSARE: Along with CSAR and CSARD, make up the
microword address.
17.
BlKERR: Scan-only latches that may be used to block
the setting of the error latches.
4. DATAIN: Eight-byte scan-in register used to load the
microcode into the control array.
18.
MATCHREG: Address to be matched for a stop
condition.
5. CSARD: Along with CSAR and CSARE, make up the
microword address.
19.
CNTR: Trace array counter.
20.
TBADR: Two-bit address of the Trap/BAL array with
values for the trap levels of 0, " 2, or 3.
21.
CNTl:
6. BLKCSAR:
blocked.
Determines whether or not the CSAR is
7. ODD: All bits are set to 1 when the odd latch is on.
Bit 0
1
2
3
9. BlKCREG: Consists of eight bits and determines
whether or not the C-register is blocked.
EVEN: All bits are set to 1 when the even latch is on.
11.
SAVEREG: Data-in register for the Trace and Trap/BAL
arrays. SAVEREG normally contains the address of the
microword previously executed.
12.
BLKOE: Indicates whether the odd or even latch is to
be blocked.
Bit sensitive bytes: (56K control store)
BYTE 0
8. CSARBU: Contains the address of the microword
currently being executed.
10.
Byte set to ones in read mode.
GATEOES
GATEOEM
GATEOEL
TARGET
Bit 4
5
BALFLAG
BLKSAVE
IB
BLKCSARL
Bit 4
5
6
6
7
MODSW
STGWD
FINETRC
TRAPFLAG
BYTE 1
Bit 0
1
2
3
CNTl:
7
BLKCSARH
0
0
0
Bit sensitive bytes: (64/80K control store)
BYTE 0
Bit 0
1
2
3
0
0
0
TARGET
Bit 4
5
6
BALFLAG
BLKSAVE
IB
BLKCSAR(l)
Bit 4
5
6
7
MODSW
STGWD
FINETRC
TRAPFLAG
BYTE 1
Bit 0
1
2
3
7
BLKCSAR(2)
BLKCSAR(3)
0
0
22.
ClKGATE: Control store clock gate.
23.
USE21: Eight-bit control line that sets the odd or even
latch.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
PN 5666205
2 of 2
00
o o
o
00
o
!
I
"-J
o o
o o·
o
00
o o o
o
00
44454f
o
o c
(
-.
(
(
(
(
(
(
c .(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT MAIN STORAGE
HARDWARE (QVM) (GRP 2)
(
MS HARDWARE (C1VM)
FIELDSOt-t4
FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A
FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF DFDREG
A ARRAYS
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREGtO
0000 0000 0000 0000 CREG01
S STATUS SCAN RING
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG32
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG23
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG4S
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREGS ..
I PU HARDWARE
0000 0000 0000 0000DREG67
0000 0000 0000 0000 DREG76
B CS HARDWARE
00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECMDRE 00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECMDRO
M MS HARDWARE
00 0000 0000 0000 0000 ECRE
00 00000000 0000 0000 ECRO
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
FIELDS 15-34
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRAO]
0000 0000 0000 0000 DIRRA~
X EXTERNAL REGS
0000 0000 DIRRAHL 000 0000 0000 DLDtST
00 0000 BSMST
R SCAN RING
0000 DIRRADDR
0000 0000 DLTRAASM 00 0000 BSMADR
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
00 0000 SAR
00 0000 DLATVA
00 0000 BSMDXCYC
W COMMAND SBA·CAC
00 0000 VACMPR
0000 0000 KEYS
00 CMDREG
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
00 0000 RACMPR
00 0000 RTYCTL
00 STRTADR
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
00 0000 ACBCMPR
0000 0000 SYSCKS
00 STOPA DR
FIELDS 3S-37
C1 GENERAL SELECT
0000 0000 SLOTHIT
o CYCRING
o CHID
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: M
==>
CLOCK STOP
Display Main Storage Hardware
To display the Main Storage Hardware screen from the av
screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key M next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
Note.:
• The Main Storage Hardware flJCilities (not shown on
another screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or
binary whichever is applicable for thet particular facility.
4341
To Fast Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen laV) or one of the Array IOVA) s"bscreens:
1. Place the Ce MODE switch ON.
2. Key aoc or aOM next to SelECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. KeyOVM next to SELECTION followed by:
(1) A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
(2) A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
131 Op code - IMOVE), fa lAND). / lOR).
(4) Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the selected· address.
7. Altar data as desired arid presa ENTER.
II'
The display can be fast selected by keying aVM inst6Bd
of M if selection is from any other av screen.
Exsmple: aVMOI-F.• IF2.F3
'-(4) No. d...
Alter Main Storage Hardware
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
. . . ,........
"
(
Fast Alter Main Storage Hardware
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
•
(
(3) Op code
(2) Digit of a field number
(0 Digit of a field number
To Fast Alter from the Insert/Extract facilitie. screen or one
of the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4. 5, 6, and 7 of Fast Altar Main Storage
Hardware.
:0-",• . "1..:
Save Main Storage Hardware
The data from the Main Storage Hardware screen can be
QVed by the Block ·function. The format is aVMxx? where xx
is e field number on the screen. Only one field clin be saved
per selection.
Notes:
•
SPlICes between cheracters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
If more deta is keyed then the selBt:ted field permits, the
message INVAUD INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
•
The op code MOVEs the deta to, ANDs with, or DRs
with the data in the selBt:ted location(s).
• . The flJCilities (field number) are numbered in dflCifTIIIl,
left to right and top to bottom, on the screen.
A period (.) Is a digit place holde, in the hex d«a.
When the operation is flXlJCuted, that digit i8 unaffBt:ted.
•
f
Model Group 2
I
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379826 06Jun81
I•
.IBM Corp. 1981
I
I;\
A W-comfTlllnd also stops the PU clock.
I
•
I
PN 2676446
10f2
44457f
(
,
.,'
Label lc;tentification
,",
18. DLDIST: DLAT and directory status.
.,.!•...
1.A(AREOt:
Po A-reg.
Digit 1 - Bit 1 is. Chan DLAT v.,id statui bit.
2. DFDREO:
PU D-reg.
Digit 2 - Bits 4, 2. 1 CPU DLATO Stat) .valid. real. aru:l
ACB bad. respectively. .
3.
DREG01:
Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-byte field associativity cia.. O.
4. DRE010: Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-byte fjeld·associativity class 1.
5. DREG23: Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-byte field associatiVity class 2.
6. DREG3Z: .Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-byte field asSQCiativity cia.. 3.
7. DREG4I: Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-byte fielchssociativity cia.. 4.
8. DREGfi4: Cac:be data input/output data register.
Eight-byte field associativity cia.. 5.
9. DREG87: Cache data input/output data register.
Eight-.byte field associetivity class S.
10. DREG1I:. Cache data input/output data register.
Eight~byte field asiociativity class 1.
Digit 3 - Bits 4. 2. 1 (PU DLAT1 Stat) .valid. real. and
ACB bad. respectively.
.
12~
,.",
i
,~.'.'
.... ',"
. ·,·..
~'.r~
.
Digit i-Directory 3 status bad entry. invalid. and
modified. respectively.
19. BSMST:
Digit
2
.
ECMDRO:· Odd half mitn 'data register for the BSM. and
its input into the ECC logic. Extra byte i8 fOr check bits.
,,~
l3.ICRE: 'Even helf ECC register and
logic.
.
itS output of the ECC
14. ICRO:Odd helfECCregister and its output of the ECC.
logic.
.
1S. DIRRA03: First throuoh fourth 2-byte fields contain .....
8ddreuwith bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) for
Di,.,ctory 888O!:ietlvity clas888 0, " 2. and 3,
AtspectiveIy.
.
- PUKey
- KEVSTACK Key
.; DLATO Key
-DLAT1 Key
- KEYSTACK
Bit 0
Unused
Bit'
Reference'
Bit 2
Change.
Bit 3
Fetch Protect.
Digit 6
Bit 0
DlatOFetch Protect
DlatO Parity
Bit ,
Bit 2
Dlat1 Fetch Protact
Bit 3
Dlat1Parity.
Bit 0
PU Key Parity Check
Digit 7
Bit',
Keystack Proteci Check
Bit 2
Dlat Protect Check
Bit 3
Keystack Protect Check.
Digit 8 - Unused; always .zero.
Pigit" - Directory 2 status bad entry. invalid, and
modified. respectively.
1
Unused
Unused
SBE stop
Inhibit
.ECC
2
3
4
Bit 1
Btt 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Unused
Fetch gate
Out page
Busy
1'7. DlRRAHL: High-order two bytes cont..n ...., address
bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match
occurred in one of the auociativity clas888 0-3.
low-order two bytes contain real address bits 0-12 (bits
13-15 are zero) from Directory if a match occurred in
one of the .uocietivity clas888 4-7.
RACMPR: Addre.. for real storage address match.
Bits 0 and 21-23 are not used.
Digit 0 and 1 - Retry flags
Digit 2 and 3 - Aetry counter look-ahe~d
(right adjusted)
21. DLKYRASM:Bits 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15
are zero) reed from the DLAT if there was a match.
Digit 4
23. SAR: Storage address register.
Digit 5
Digit 0 - Unused
31.
Digit 2 - DLATO virtual address
Digit 4 - DLAT1 virtual add.....
Digit 5 - OLAT1 virtual addresl
Digit 2 and 3 - DXR 0-7B
Digit 4 and.5
~
DXR 0-7D
Digit 8 and 7 - Six-bit BSM ctrI ring (rt•. adj.)
2.. VACMPR: Addres. for virtual address match. Bit.
21-23 are not ·used.·
.' .
Bit 2
BiU
Cross doublaword boundary first cycle
Cross doubleword boundary second cycla
.
Hold count
Retry active.
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Unused
Unused
DLAT trap - first cycle
Retry overflow.
0
1
2
3
STRTADR: Starting storage .ddr.ss fot channel data.
Bits correspond to real address bits 18-23. lett justified.
32. ACBCMPR: Compare address used to determine if
user has axceeded real storage. Bits 13-23 are unused.
.33. SYSCKS: Chacks on QVK screen
34.
STOPADR: Stopping storage address for channel data.
Bitl correspond to real address bits 18-23, left justified.
3S.
SLDTHIT: Displays the Directory Associativity class as
captured on each of the cache cards. An' F' In a digit
position indicates that the cache II working with data
from that associativity class.
25.8SMDXCYC:
Digit 0 and 1 - DXR 0-7
Bit 0
Bit 1
22. BSMADR: Address register for m.in storege. Bits 0
end 18-23 are unused. It is the actual. rather than tne
translated. address which is determined by the IML
microcode.
Digit 3 - DLATO virtual address
CH'D: ChannellD register (right adjusted).
30. RTVCTL:
zerO).
Digit 1 - Bits used for Ch .. DLAT bits 8-11
2
3
Prime cycle
S1 cycle
S2 cycle
Follow cycle.
Real).
29.
24. DLATVA:
18. DIRRA47: Fifth through eighth 2-byte ·fields contain
realeddms with bits 0-12 (bits 13-15 are zerolfor
Direc:torvassocietivity clas", 4, 5, 6, and 7,
respectively.
'37.
0
1
28. CMDREO: Five-bit storage command register. It haa
the same order as the command bus 10. 1. 2. 3. and 4
20. DIRRADDR: 8its 0-12 of the real address (bits 13-15
are
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
. Digit 1
. Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 5 - Directo;y 1 status bad entry. invalid. and
modified. respectively.
Digit 1. Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
36. .CVCRING:
. 27. KEYS:
Digit 4- Bits 4. 2. 1 (DIR 0 Stat) bad entry. invalid. and
modified. respectively..
11. 'ECMDRE: Even half main data register for the BSM
and its input into the ECC lOgic. Extra byte. is for check
bits.
.
Digit 1
Digit 2.
Digit 3
.Digit 4
Digit 5
.. Digit 8
Digit 7·
Associativity
Associativity
Associativity
Associativity
Associativity
Associativity
Associativity
class 1
class 2
class 3
class 4
class 5
clasl 8
class 7
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22SapBO
EC 379825 .06Jun81
PN 2676448
44456f
2of2
:i
/"})
.,,--.. ;J
'.
0
III
~y
.....
(-~
~.
0 0
,0
",-y
('",
\ V
0
(~
(
(
(-
{
(
(-
(
(
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
To display the Channel Hardware screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key H and a channel number (0-5) next to SELECTION.
The channel number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
The Channel Hardware facilities (not shown on another
screen) are displayed on this screen in hex or binary
whichever is applicable for that particular facility.
The display can be fast-selected by keying QVH and a
channel number instead of H and a channel number if
selection is from any other QV screen.
(
Fast-Alter Channel Hardware
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL HARDWARE
(QVH)
Display Channel Hardware
(-
(
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: HO
CHANNEL HARDWARE (QVH) CHANNEL a = FIELDS 01-14
00 00 00 00 00 00 CH DATA
0000 CHANOUT
0000 CHANIN
a 0 a 0 a 0 CH-FULL
0000 0000 0000 0000 CHDBREG
a 0 a a CH-PTR
0000 0000 0000 0000 CH CCA
a a a 0 0 a CH-LCM
0000 0000 CHrCAR1
00 CHDLR
0000 0000 CHCCAR2
00 CH SYNCO 00 CH STAT
a CHIOHWl
FIELDS 15-34
00 CHrOMONR 00 CH-IMODE a CH TRPRQ 00 CHMDMIN
a CHSLRFTH
a CH-CURTP 00 CHMDMISC a CHSLRSTG
00 CHACMDR
00 CH SYNC1
a CHTPUTRQ 00 CHMDMOUT a CH ADR23
00 CH-CMDR
00 CHTRPADR 00 CHMDMCTL a CH-CMDRD
00 CH-SDBAR a CH MISC
a CH LASTP
CHANNEL
NPL LINES
o OPOUT
o SRVOUT
o OPIN
a SRVIN
a HOLDOUT
a DATOUT
a SELIN
a OAT I N
o SUPROUT
a ADROUT
o REQIN
a ADRIN
a CMDOUT
o DISCIN
a STATIN
00 NPLBOUT
00 NPLBIN
ANY CHANNEL CHECK 0
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
To Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVH next to SELECTION followed by:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Channel number
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE), & (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
the selected address.
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
Example: QVHOO1=F.. 1F.2F3
Hex data
Op code
Digit of a field number
C ( 2 ) Digit of a field number
(1) Channel number
~~~~
~
Alter Channel Hardware
Note: This screen is not to be full-screen altered.
To Fast-Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one
of the array subscreens:
Save Channel Hardware
The data from the Channel Hardware screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVHcxx? where c is the
channel and xx is the field number. Only one field can be
saved per selection.
1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter Channel
Hardware."
Notes:
•
o
o
o
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
Facilities below CHANNEL 1 NPL LINES cannot be
altered from the QVH screen.
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INVALID INPUT appears and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s).
The facilities (field number) are numbered in
decimal(1-34), left to right, and top to bottom, on the
screen.
o
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data.
o
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 5666206
1 of 2
44463f
Label Identification
19.
1. CH
DATA: Six bytes of data are used by channels 1
and2, while four bytes are used by channel 0 and
channels 3 through 5.
asynchronous command register. The external address
is 3,0.
Bit 0
1
3. CHANOUT: Two bytes of data from the channel-out
2
3
4
5
6
7
register.
4. CH_FULL: Byte indicates that a channel data register
position is full; a bit is on for each byte.
5. CHDBREG: Eight bytes of data in the channel data
buffer register.
PTR: This byte points with a bit on, left to right,
to those bytes that are to be transferred from the
channel data register next.
21.
\
. 8. CH
LCM: These bits point, left to right. to the last of
datato be transferred.
11. CHCCAR2: Eight digits are the input to the channel
SYNCO: Contains a value in the channel sync 0
register. It is used to pass information between the
microcode and the channel hardware. The external
address is 7,0.
26.
5
6
7
CH LASTP: This digit identifies whether or not this
channel had the last trap taken.
CHSLRSTG: This digit identifies whether or not a
channel (0-5) has a slot rotor time for storage access.
CHMDMOUT: MOM bus-out. It is one byte.
sequence count mode.
28.
Channel 370 mode latch
Allow external source
Meter on latch
Microdetected channel control check
Storage busy
Valid TIC
Valid CC CCW
Valid CO CCW
29.
CHTRPADR: This byte identifies the trap address
(00-1 F).
30.
CHMDMCTL: MOM control bus. It is 5 bits. The bits
are right adjusted.
31.
CH_CMDRD: External signifies that a channel
command is ready.
16. CH
IMODE: This byte contains (when corresponding
bit ison) gating controls for ACB checking and hardware
set latchl;!s for PCI and COA controlling. The external
address is 3,1.
17.
CH_TRPRQ: This digit indicates whether this channel
has a trap request.
18.
CHMDMIN: One-byte MOM bus-in.
CH_CMDR: Command register content for this
channel. The external address is 5,0. The types of
commands are:
Oata transfer
Sequence count
I/O instruction load
UCW load
Misc
CCW fetched
Interface adapter
Interface controller
15. CHCOMONR: These values are the control bits of the
common register. The external address is 2,0.
2
34.
channel (0-5) has a trap request line active to the PU.
14. CHIOHW1: PU I/O register value.
3
4
5
6
7
25. CHIPUTRQ: This digit identifies whether or not a
CH STAT: This byte contains status information set
by channel hardware. The external address is 2,1.
1
4
trap addresses, flags, and timeout values. It is used to
pass information between the microcode and the
channel hardware. The external address is 4,0.
12. CH
Bit 0
2
3
01 parity check
Output
ISB
First character transferred
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
27. CH_ADR23: When both digits are the same, it is in
control array.
13.
Bit 0
1
24. CH _ SYNC1: This byte contains conditions, such as
control array.
CHDLR: Contains the value of the channel data length
register. It has a maximum value of hex 40 (64).
CH _ CURTP: This digit identifies whether or not this
channel is in a trap.
CH MISC: This byte uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to
identify data in parity, output, IS8 and first character
transferred. The external address is 6,1.
wide. The bits are right adjusted.
23.
9. CHCCAR1: Eight digits are the output from the channel
10.
33.
Channel 10 latches
Channel 10 latches
Channel 10 latches
I/O spin latch
Inhibit select-out and unload trap latch
Command function bit latches
Command function bit latches
Command function bit latches
22. CHMDMISC: MOM miscellaneous bus-in. It is 6 bits
7. CH
CCA: Eight bytes of data is two words per
chaMel where bytes 0..,3 are used in data mode (bytes
4- 7 are used in sequence mode only).
CH SDBAR: Used to address the channel data bus
when transferring and receiving data from storage
buffer. The external address is 6',0.
20. CHACMDR: A command to the channel from the
2. CHANIN: Two bytes of data to the channel-in register.
6. CH
CHSLRFTH: This digit indicates that a channel (0-5) is
aligned with the channel control array fetch cycle.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 OSJun81
PN 5666206
444641
2 of 2
o
o
o
o o o
o
o
()
o
o
o
(-
C(
{-
(
(-
(-
(-
(-_.
(
(-
(
(-
(
(
Label Identification
INSERT/EXTRACT CHANNEL INTERFACE
(ave)
Display Channel Interface
To display the Channel interface screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key C next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
ave
Note: The display can be fast selected by keying
instead of if the selection is from any other
screen.
e
av
Alter Channel Interface
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT* CHANNEL INTERFACE
0 1 2 3 4 5
A ARRAYS
0 0 0 0 0 0
S STATUS SCAN RING 0 0 0 0 0 0
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM 0 0 0 0 0 0
I PU HARDWARE
0 0 0 0 0 0
B CS HARDWARE
0 0 0 0 0 0
HMS HARDWARE
HCHANNEL HARDWARE 0 0 0 0 0 0
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 0 0 0 0 0 0
X EXTERNAL REGS
0 0 0 0 0 0
R SCAN RING
0 0 0 0 0 0
Y CLOCK SCAN RING 0 0 0 0 0 0
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT 0 0 0 0 0 0
G SET CSAR ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 I
Q GENERAL SELECT
0 0 0 0 0 0
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS 0 0 0 0 0 0
SELECTION: C
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
(QVC)
CHANNEL
PAR ITYCK
OKLATE
SEQERROR
OVLAPERR
SHORTPLS
FIELDS 11-21
HALTBRST
INHIBDBO
RSTADROT
DIAGMODE
DATAMODE
FIELDS 22-32
HOLDUP
ODDLATCH
OIJTMODE
ALLOWHI
HIMODE
FIELDS 1-10
CHANNEL
1 OPOIJT
0 HOLDOIJT
0 ADROIJT
0 CMDOIJT
0 SRVOIJT
0 DATOIJT
0 SUPROIJT
20 NPLBOIJT
0 0 0
OPIN
0 0 0 SELIN
0 0 0 ADRIN
0 0 0 0
STAT I N
0 0 0 0 SRVIN
0 0 0 0
DATIN
0 0 0 0 0 0
REQIN
DISCIN
0 0 0 0 0 0
00 00 00 00 00 00 NPLBIN
0 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
00 CE
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
==>
CLOCK STOP
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
01
0
0
0
3 4
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
00 02
5
PARITYCK: 1 identifies a parity check on the channel data
bus.
OKLATE: Not used.
SEQERROR: Not used.
OVLAPERR: Not used.
SHORTPLS: Not used.
HALTBRST: 1 identifies a halt operation.
INHIBDBO: 1 inhibits the NPL BUS OUT lines.
RSTADROT: 1 resets NPL ADR OUT.
DIAGMODE: 1 assigns the diagnostics and microcode to
4341
monitor all the NPL BUS and TAG lines.
DATAMODE: 1 enables the interface to transfer data.
Save Channel Interface
HOLDUP: 1 causes NPLSRVOUT to be held up until the
channel is ready to transfer data.
The data from the Channel Interface screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVCxx?, where xx is a 2
digit field number.
ODDLATCH: 0 tells the interface that an even byte of data
is to be transferred. 1 tells the interface that an odd byte of
data is to be transferred.
Fast Alter Channel Interface
OUTMODE: 1 tells the interface that the data is to be
transferred out. 0 tells the interface that the data is to be
transferred in.
Note: This screen cannot be fast altered.
AllOWHI: Not used.
HIMODE: Not used.
--c
, ..
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
@ IBM Corp. 1979. 1980
PN 5666388
1 of 1
44495
)OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOC
(
{
(
(
(
(
(-
(
(
(
(
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
To display the External Registers screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key X and a channel number (0-5) next to SELECTION.
The channel number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Notes:
This provides a display of the external registers
whenever the PU microcode is unavailable.
The contents of the external registers can be displayed
with errors highlighted by brightened characters.
(-' (
f
(
Fast-Alter External Registers
INSERT/EXTRACT EXTERNAL REGISTERS
(QVX) (GRP 2)
.
Display External Registers
(
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: XO
EXTERNAL REG ISTER.S (QVX)
FIELDS 1-46
FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF A(AREG)
0000 0000 0000 0000
** CHANNEL 0 = **
00
0: CHDLR
SIR INT5 INDIRO CHKEY
(4)
00
00
00
00
00
( 10)
1 : CH SYNCO CH DATAO WI
MNTR STAT 1
00
00"
00"
00
00
(16)
2: CHCOMONR CH STAT W2
INT4 STAT2 CTLRO
00
00"
00
00
00
0
(23)
3: CHACMDR CH IMODE PSWO PSWI PSW2
00
00"
00
00
00
4: CH SYNCI CH DATA2
INT3 STATO
(29)
00"
00"
00
00
5: CH CMDR
(34)
ICYC INT2 INDIRI
00"
02
00
00
6: CH SDBAR CH MISC OP
(39)
INTI RETRY
00"
00
00
00
20
(45)
7:
HREG INTO
00
00
DFCAREG
INEXTREQ
CHAN SAR
00 00 00
l1BU
00 00 00
SAR2
00 00 00
SARI
00 00 00
ICTR
00 00 00
NIBI
00
NIB1BFR
00
to Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key OVX next to SELECTION followed by:
5. Press ENTER.
6. Verify that the data displayed after the OP code is from
==>
CLOCK STOP
Channel number.
A high-order decimal digit of a field number.
A low-order decimal digit of a field number.
Op code = (MOVE). & (AND), / (OR).
Hex data.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
the selected address.
4341
7. Alter data as desired and press ENTER.
Examp'" Qvx~rq~~ ~;x::;~
The TOD clock is not displayed because the scan rings
destroy its contents.
(3) Digit of a field number
(2) Digit of a field number
(1) Channel number
The display can be fast-selected by keying QVX and a
channel number instead of X and a channel number, if
selection is from any other QV screen.
Alter External Registers
To Fast-Alter from the Insert/Extract facilities screen or one
of the array subscreens:
Note: This screen cannot be full-screen altered.
1. Invoke steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 of "Fast-Alter External
Registers. "
Notes:
Save External Registers
The data from the External Registers screen can be saved by
the Block function. The format is OVXcxx? where c is a
channel number and xx is a field number. Only one field can
be saved per selection.
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
•
If more data is keyed than the selected field permits, the
message INV AL/D INPUT appears, and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
•
The op code MOVEs the data to, ANDs with, or ORs
with the data in the selected location(s}.
The facilities (field number) are numbered left to right,
top to bottom on the screen.
•
A period (.) is a digit place holder in the hex data.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock;
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
CIBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676449
1 of 3
4450H
Label Identification
14.
1. AlA-REG): PU A-register.
STAT1: This byte contains conditions (status) relative to
ALU. The extemal address is 1,2.
Bit 0
1
2. DFCAREG: Eight-byte register containing hex data
from the channel.
2
3. INEXTREQ: External signal request.
3
4
5
6
7
4. CHDLR: Contains the count value of the channel data
length register. The channel external address is 0,0.
Wl (4) = 0
W2 (0-4) = 0
Invalid decimal format
(cumulative)
True/complement decimal
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
ACB check enable
5. SIR: This byte contains data which determines the
number of bits or bytes that are to be shifted. The PU
external address is 0,0.
15.
6. INT5: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The external address is 0,1 .
L1BU: Three bytes contain the cache backup address.
The external address is 1, 5- 7.
16.
CHCOMONR: This byte contains the channel control
bits in the common register. The channel external
address is 2,0.
17.
CH_STAT: This byte contains hardware set channel
status indicators. The channel external address is 6,0.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Channel a interrupt request
Channel,. interrupt request
Channel 2 interrupt request
Channel 3 interrupt request
Channel 4 interrupt request
Channel 5 interrupt request
Unused
Reset ADDRMATCH
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7. INDIRD: This byte contains the address that is the Rl
field of the current instruction. The external address is
0,2.
8. CHKEV: Bits 0-3 are key bits; 4-7 are unimplemented
bits, sourced as zero. The external address is 0,4.
18.
9. CHANSAR: Three-byte address invoked when the
channel is used. The external address is 0, 5- 7.
a
10.
CH_SVNCD: Contains a value in the channel sync
register. The Channel external address is 1,0.
11.
CH DATAO: This byte is the first byte of the channel
dataregister. It is assigned to obtain device address,
device status, interface status and other information
from the interface adapter. The channel external
address is 1,1.
12.
W1:' This byte contains the shift length value when Wl
register is specified as a length parameter. The PU
external address is 1, O.
13.
MNTR: Monitor external senses certain system status
information. The external address is 1,1.
Bit
a
19.
W2: This byte contains the shift length value when W2
register is specified as a length parameter. It may also
serve as a loop counter. The PU external address is 2,0.
INT4: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 2,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20.
a
Start I/O count
1 SVC interrupt
2
I/O interrupt
3
Page fault interrupt
4
Unassigned
.5 . Unassigned
6
Unassigned
7
Unassigned
CPUTIA
CCOMPIA
ITIMIA
Pending machine check interrupt
Retry interrupt force
Spare
Restart request
Spare
SAR2: Three bytes contain the address of operand 2 of
an instruction. The external address is 3, 5- 7.
.
33.
ICTR: Three bytes contain the starting address of the
next instruction. The external address is 4, 5- 7.
23.
CHACMDR: One-byte command from the channel
asynchronous command register to the channel. The
external address is 3,0.
34.
CH_CMDR: Command register content for this
channel. The external address is 5,0. The types of
commands are:
24.
CH_IMODE: This byte contains gating controls for
ACB checking and hardware set latches for PCI and
CDA controlling. The Channel external address is 3,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
25.
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Working stat a
Working stat 1
Working stat 2
Working stat 3
Channel working stat 0
Channel working stat 1
Instruction length counter
Instruction length counter
CTLRO: Control register
into bit 10.
PSWO: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display I Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit significance. The PU eltternal address is 3,0.
27.
PSW2: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display I Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit Significance. The external address is 3,2.
28.
Data transfer
Seq'uence count
I/O instruction load
UCW load
Misc
CCW fetched
Interface adapter
Interface controller
35.
PSW1: Consult your reference summary card or consult
the Display I Alter function "Current PSW" for byte and
bit Significance. The PU external address is 3,1.
CH _ SYNC1: This byte contains conditions as trap
addresses, flags, timeout values, etc. The channel
external address is 4,0.
30.
CH_DATA2: This byte contains the sequence count
from the channel. The channel external address is 4,1.
31.
INT3: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 4,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ITIMIB
Interrupt key
External signal
External signal
External signal
External signal
External signal
External signal
2
3
4
5
6
7
ICYC: Byte (I-cycle control register) contains status
information of I-cycles. It contains I-cycle function and
flags. The PU external address is 5,0.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
36.
SAR1' Three bytes contain the address of operand 1 of
an instruction. The external address is 3, 5-7.
29.
32.
370 mode
Unconditional I-cycle store error
Conditional I-cycle store error
Successful branch
Execute
PU retry mask
IB empty
Operate latch
INT2: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode, The PU external address is 5,1.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signal DIAGM
ITIMWRPA
ADRMATCH
ISTRSTEP
Pending machine check interrupt
Decrementer adjustment
CCOMPIB
CPUTIB
37.
INDIR1: This byte contains the address which is the R2
or X2 field of the current instruction. The external
address is 5,2.
38.
NIB1: This byte is the second byte of the NIB. The
external address is 5,7.
39.
CH SDBAR: Used to address the channel data buffer
whe; transferring and receiving data from storage. The
channel external address is 6, O.
STATO: This byte contains status conditions of various
conditions in ALU. The external address is 4,2.
Bit 0
1
a bit 8-12 with bit 12 ORed
Block-multiplexer mode latch
Byte-multiplexer mode latch
Enable ACB check latch
Data stream mode latch
Internal interrupt request latch
Implement spare latch
PCI latch
CD prefetch latch
26.
STAT2: This byte contains status conditions relative to
arithmetic, branch, shift, etc. of ALU. The external
address is 2,2.
Bit
21.
Spare = 0
Incorrect length latch
Prog or Prot check latch
Spare = 0
Channel nata check latch
Channel control check latch
Spare = 0
Chaining check latch
22.
ALU overflow
Negative result
2
Recomplement
3
Destination = 0
4
ALU carry
51-bit carry
6
Z /*= 0
7
ALU size exception
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
)
()
o
(~.'
f
()
o
·~··
O
"
C)
o
0
,~
~y;
0 0 0
(1
~J
,0
,j
('~
",-y
("')
\'-..._J!
PN 2676449
20f3
,f"-",\
0
(~'\
"y
44502f
C)
'--
/<"
""-
(
(
(
40.
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(:
CH_MISC: Uses only the first 4 bits 0-3 to identify
data in parity, output, ISB and first character transferred.
The external address is 6,1.
Bit 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
01 parity check
Output
ISB
First character transferred
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
41. OP: Contains the first byte (byte 0) of the current
instructiOn. It implies 256 op code possibilities. It is
driven by the NIB. The PU external address is 6,0.
42.
INT1: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The PU external address is 6,1.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
43.
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Unused
Channel
a interrupt
1 interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
2
3
4
5
external interrupt
RETRY:. This byte contains eight bits that indicate the
status conditions relative to a retry operation. The
external address is 6,2.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hardstop
Sequential processing
Instruction processing
SS operation
Refresh in progress
Retry in progress
Unretriable section of code
System operation
44.
NIBIBFR: This byte is the second byte of the NIB
buffer. The external address is 6,7.
45.
HREG: This byte contains eight bits that act as status
conditions for taking traps. The external address is 7,0.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
46~
Spare
Odd branch address - trap level
L1 miss - trap level
ACB check - trap level 0
OLAT miss - trap level 1
Storage protect check - trap level 1
Block channel traps
Channel trap - trap level 2
a
a
INTO: This byte contains eight bits used in channel
mode. The external address is 0,3.
Bit
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Interrupt pending
PER
Pending channel interrupt
Pending external interrupt
MSVP request
Execute interrupt
Oecrementer = 0
ITIMWRP
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379825 05Jun81
PN 2676449
30f3
44503f
(
(
'\")'
(1;
',,-,)
01
\JI
0'., ('\
J
"
~.
~'
f~
J
0~J
(}.
10
~
0" G
i/~
\)
\!
''---- , . "
.,
"
{-
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT SCAN RINGS (QVR) (GRP 2)
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
Display Scan Rings
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
To display the Scan Rings Screen from the OV screen:
1. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key R and a two-digit scan ring number plus a byte
number next to SELECTION. The scan ring and byte
number can be defaulted to zero.
4. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
All 38 scan rings can be displayed in unformatted binary.
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: ROOO
The refresh clock must be stopped when
displaying/altering 21,2241,42,81, C1, and C7.
SCAN RING (QVR)
4E CHANNEL
CO~ROLS
00 0000 0000
*01 0000 0000
*02 0000 0000
*03 0000 0000
04 0000 0000
*05 0000 0000
*06 0000 0000
*07 0000 0000
08 0000 0000
*09 0000 0000
*OA 0000 0000
*OB 0000 0000
OC 0000 0000
*00 0000 0000
*OE 0000 0000
*OF 0000 0000
CO
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
(
(
(
(
SERDES (Control Storage)
Diagnostic (Control Storage)
CS Controls and SM 1
Scan first Array Byte 0 and 4
Scan second Array Byte 7 and 5
Scan third Array Byte 2 and 6
Scan fourth Array Byte 3 and 7
Main Storage Refresh
Loop Scan Rings
10 0000 0000
*11 0000 0000
*12 0000 0000
*13 0000 0000
14 0000 0000
*15 0000 0000
*16 0000 0000
*17 0000 0000
18 0000 0000
*19 0000 0000
*IA 0000 0000
*IB 0000 0000
lC 0000 0000
*ID 0000 0000
*IE 0000 0000
*IF 0000 0000
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
The time-of-day clock is invalidated when
displaying/altering SR 42.
The scan rings can be placed into a loop and an 8-bit data
pattern can be scanned into the looped scan ring.
The following commands can be used to invoke this
function:
OVRLxx
OVRLxxO
OVRLxx=yy
where xx represents the scan ring number and yy represents
the optional bit patern in hex.
If the bit pattern is not specified, it defaults to X'OO'.
Looping continues until the MODE key is pressed.
This screen can be paged.
Note: An initial test pattern of X 'A5' and parity precedes
the data pattern. The eight-bit data pattern is scanned into
the specified scan ring without parity.
Alter Scan Rings
1. Display the selected scan ring as in the preceding steps.
2. Move the cursor below the location(s} to be altered and
The- 38 scan rings are:
5. Press ENTER.
key the new bit data.
Bit data
Op code
Byte number
Byte number
Scan ring number
Scan ring number
3. Leave the SELECTION line unchanged and press ENTER.
Save Scan Rings
The data from the scan rings can be saved by the Block
function. The format is OVRxxbb? where xx is a ring number
and bb a byte number.
Fast-Alter Scan Rings
To Fast-Alter from the Insert/ Extract facilities screen or one
of the array subscreens:
1. Invoke steps 4 and 5 of
II
•
Fast-Alter Scan Rmgs.
II"
Notes:
To Fast-Alter from any screen other than the Insert/Extract
facilities screen (OV) or one of the Array (OVA) subscreens:
•
Spaces between characters are deleted before the
command is analyzed.
-
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
•
If more data is keyed than the select line permits, the
message INVALID INPUT appears, and the cursor moves
to the right of the op code.
•
If hex data is keyed instead of bit data, the message
INVALID INPUT appears, and the cursor moves to the
right of the op code.
2. Key OOC or OOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Key
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
OVR next to SELECTION followed by:
A high-order hex digit of a scan ring number.
A low-order hex digit of a scan ring number.
A high-order hex digit of a byte number.
A low-order hex digit of a byte number.
Op code = (MOVE).
Bit data.
The op code MOVEs the data to the selected location(s}.
•
A period (.) is place holder in the data. When the
operation is executed, that digit is unaffected.
•
A W-command also stops the PU clock.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
SERDES (Clock Chip)
Diagnostic Latches
Refresh Clock and SM1 Latch
Dynamic Status (M2 Chip)
Maintenance Clock
PU, CHNL, and L 1 Clock
L1 Clock
Serdes (PU Maintenance Chip)
Diagnostic (PU)
Timer and SM1 (TaD)
Interrupt
PU SAR
PU Shifter
PU Shifter Controls
Local Storage Addressing
I-Cycles
Data Flow Low
Data Flow High
I/O Interface
Channel Data Buffer
Channe/lnterface Card
Channel Controls
SERDES (Cache/Storage Chip)
Diagnostic Latches
SAR, Keys, and Cache Controls
Cache, Data Reg Bytes 0:3
Cache, Data Reg Bytes 4:7
DLAT and DIR
BSM Controls
ECC/Data Flow
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
@
IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676427
1 of 1
44515f
':) 00
. .,
~"
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
f
(
•
Label Identification
INSERT/EXTRACT CLOCK SCAN RINGS (QVV) (GRP 2)
CAUTION
Observe notes before attempting this procedure.
Display Clock Scan Rings
To display the Clock Scan Rings screen from the av screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key W2B next to SELECTION to stop the refresh clock. as
all clocks must be stopped.
~
4. Press ENTER.
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
CLOCK RING (QVY)
CGRPNNXX
CP DL PW CP DL PW CP DL PW
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
2
B C~ HARDWARE
11 I1S HARDWARE
3
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE 4
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
5
y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC 6
T ADDRESS TRANS
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL
1
o 02
00
8. Press ENTER.
15
CP DL PW
1 15 11
4
1 12 08
5
1 16 13
6
1 12 08
3
14 10
13 09
15 10
11 07
17 11
17 11
17 13
.6 11
16 16
13 09
•• 08
11 07
17 12
17 13
17 13
17 12
12 06
12 08
16 10
15 10
16 10
16 10
1 09 06
o 08
08
SELECT
SERIAL NO.
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: Y22
6. Key Y22 next to SELECTION.
2
o 00
*.II1L REQUIRED ••
CP DL PW CP DL PW
o 00
00
000000
o 08
o 00
08
000 CCSYSOSC
CP: Represents the chip select SRL The CP value is for
engineering use only.
DL: Represents ~ delay selector. The DL values are for
engineering use only.
00
PW: Represents a delay selector. The PW value is for
engineering use only.
00 CCOSCDIV
Ccsysasc: Represents the value of the oscillator
frequency. The oscillator frequency is for engineering use
only.
==>
XXX NS
CCaSCDIV: Represents a value for engineering use only.
CLOCK STOP
NotM:
CGRPNNXX: Represents 15 clock pulses within one pulse
of each group. Two groups are addressed at once .
designated as NN and XX.
4341
o
Sfltting off of the refresh clock (W28) destroys the main
trIMfIOry contents.
o
This pracedur. should fHlVer be used. except when the
4341 clock /Jistribution Adjustment is performed.
o
Normally, these values do not requirechenge. except
when a IIiIW diskette has been installed, cards H or K
replaced, somtI ECs installed which add new groups
(modules). or the board hes been replaced.
o
When instafling a new diskette; you must use the update
fum:tion of the 4341 Clock Distribution Adjustment.
o
TM values of the clocks are critical and have been
established and set by the producing plant. Each machine
has its uniqUtl values and should not be compared with
t_e of another system.
No attempt should be made. to modify the clock values.
These value' should be displayed periodically to assure
that tM values have not been accidentally modifilld.
Compare with your on-site plant copy.
o
If tM values must be changed. refer to 4341 Clock
Distribution Adjustment.
For clock adjustment procedure,
5118
supplements to the
MAPs.
o
Displayed serial numbef and the NS field is for
reference purposes only.
Use with microcode EC 856091 and above
EC 379822 22SepSO
PN2676451
1 of 1
o IBM Corp. 1980
I
44517
- - -
-
---------
(
(
(
(
(
(-
{
(
Warning: Observe notes before attempting this
procedure.
To display the Clock Scan Rings screen from the av screen:
1. Key aoc or aOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock..
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key W2B next to SELECTION to stop the refresh clock, as
all clocks must be stopped.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Key Y22 next to SELECTION.
6. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
(
(
(
(
r"
(
Label Identification
INSERT/EXTRACT CLOCK SCAN RINGS (QVY)
(GRP 1)
Display Clock Scan Rings
(
*1 NSERT/EXTRACT*
A
S
K
i
B
M
H
C
X
R
Y
W
T
G
CLOCK RING (QVY)
CP DL PW CP DL
ARRAYS
1
2
STATUS SCAN RING
0 02 00
0 00
CHECKS IN SYSTEM
PU HARDWARE
CS HARDWARE
2
14 10
113
MS HARDWARE
CHANNEL HARDWARE
16
CHANNEL INTRFACE 3
17 13
EXTERNAL REGS
SCAN RING
CLOCK SCAN RING 4
17 12
17
COMMAND SBA-CAC
ADDRESS TRANS
SET CSAR ADDRESS 5
15
16 10
Q GENERAL SELECT
SERIAL NO. 000000
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: Y22
CGRPNNXX
CP DL PW
3
15
1 15 11
PW
**IML REQUIRED**
CP DL PW CP DL PW CP DL PW
4
5
6
1 12 08
1 16 13
1 12 08
CGRPNNXX: Represents 15 clock pulses within one pulse
of each group. Two groups are addressed at once
designated as NN and XX.
CP: Represents the chip select SRL. The CP value is for
engineering use only.
09
15 10
11 07
17 11
1 17 11
11
16 16
13 09
11 08
11 07
DL: Represents a delay selector. The DL values are for
engineering use only.
13
17 13
17 12
12 06
12 08
PW: Represents a delay selector. The PW value is for
engineering use only.
10
16 10
16 10
100 CCSYSOSC
100 CCOSCDIV
==>
150NS
CCSYSOSC: Represents the value of the oscillator
frequency. The oscillator frequency is for engineering use
only.
CCOSCDIV: Represents a value for engineering use only.
CLOCK STOP
4341
Setting off of the refresh clock (W28) destroys the main
memory contents.
This procedure should never be used, except when the
4347 clock Distribution Adjustment is performed.
•
Normally, these values do not require change, except
when a new diskette has been installed, cards H or K
replaced, some ECs installed which add new groups
(modules), or the board has been replaced.
•
When installing a new diskette; you must use the update
function of the 4341 Clock Distribution Adjustment.
•
The values of the clocks are critical and have been
established and set by the producing plant. Each machine
has its unique values and should not be compared with
those of another system.
•
No attempt should be made to modify the clock values.
These values should be displayed periodically to assure
that the values have not been accidentally modified.
Compare with your on-site plant copy.
•
If the values must be changed, refer to 4347 Clock
Distribution Adjustment.
•
For clock adjustment procedure, see supplements to the
MAPs.
•
Displayed serial number and the NS field is for
reference purposes only.
Use with microcode EC 154322 and above
EC 379807 22Sep80
@
IBM Corp. 1980
PN 2676452
1 of 1
44519
()
0 0 0 0 0 C) 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G C) 00 0 0 0
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSERT/EXTRACT W COMMAND (QVW) (GRP
2)
Note: This function is to be used only under the guidance of
your support structure.
The W-command sends a command across the Service Bus
Adapter (SBA) as a preliminary step to other manual
functions. The command is analyzed for valid hex values, and
an error message is displayed if incorrect. The scan ring
numbers are considered invalid. This command does not
require stopping of the PU clo~k to be invoked.
Warning: The W-command is a specialized function
designed for debuging activity of the hardware. The PU
must be set to the required state for the command to
function properly; otherwise. unreliable results occur.
(
Observe that SBA CMD xx SENT is displayed next to the
message indicator, where xx is the two-digit command
number. This message remains until another command
is sent or until a null (ENTER key only) is performed.
•
When the first manual op command is invoked, the
entire command appears along the SELECT/ON line. If
followed by a second command, only the selection
character (two-digit number) appears.
The W-command can be placed into a loop by using the
command QVWLxxyyyy, where L is the loop command,
xx represents the command to be performed and yyyy
equals the number of times it is to be performed. When
this command is used, the message SBA CMD SENT
YYYY is displayed next to the message indicator.
(
(
(
(
(
(
Description
Cmd
Description
2A
Start Refresh Clock command
Stop Refresh Clock command
Set Clock-O Start
This is required for each single cycle.
Set Single-Cycle Mode/Hard-Stop Mode command
Set Clock Cycle Mode command
Set Run/Reset Stop Mode command
Start PU Clock command
Read Local Store Array
Read Local Store Retry Array
Read Channel Data Buffer Array
Read Channel Control Array
Read PU TRAP/BAL (TBALSAVE) Array
Write Local Store Array
Write Local Store Retry Array
Write Channel Data Buffer Array
Write Channel Control Array
Write PU TRAP / BAL (TBALSAVE) Array
Pulse Go command
Set Instruction Step Mode/Soft-Stop Mode
command
Set Single Pulse Mode command
Reset Pulse Mode command
8A
Read Directory 0- 7 Array command
Read Channel DLAT Array command
Read DLATO Array command
Read DLAT1 Array command
Read Cache Array command
Read Retry Address and Flags Array command
Read Retry Buffer Array command
Read Keystack Array Command
Write Key Stack Array command
Write Cache Array command
Write Swap Buffer Even Array command
Write Swap Buffer Odd Array command
Read Swap Buffer Even Array command
Read Swap Buffer Odd Array command
Write Channel DLAT Array command
Write DLATO Array command
Write DLATl Array command
Write Directory 0- 7 Array command
Write Retry Address and Flags Array command
Write Retry Data Buffer Array command
2B
2C
20
2E
2F
30
31
34
35
36
37
8B
8C
8E
90
91
92
93
94
95
97
(
(
Cmd
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
Notes:
(
Cache/Storage Maintenance Chip CMD List
W-Command Invoke Procedure
3. Press ENTER.
(
Clock Maintenance Chip Command List
32
2. Key QVW and a two-digit command number next to
SELECTION.
(
(
(
(
(
Control Storage Maintenance Chip Command
List
Cmd
Description
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
DO
01
Set/Reset CSAR command
Set/Reset CREG command
Read TRACE Array command
Set/Reset Trace Buffer Address (TBADR)
Set/Reset CS errors
Read/Write CS Array command
Write TRAPBAL Array command
Write TRACE Array
This command displays the Insert/Extract menu when
entered from any non-Insert/Extract screen. The last
display remains on the screen when the command is
entered from an Insert/Extract screen.
Model Group 2
EC 379822 22Sep80
EC 379808 06Mar81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676453
1 of 1
44521f
I"•.c--~
('\
(~\
"--.--~
)
"'-_.-J
\
"
(~'"\
!~
'--..;/
"---))
,o~·o
h
.'
•.•
,.
,'j
, , "
0
f""'"
'''--j)
(-'I
\...y
0
,--j
!-'~-~
"--.-J
C)
(""'1
0,
"'--)
'--Y
0
"---.-/
r~\
~)
r)
'------
(1\
"--~
(-
(
(-
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(--
INSERT/EXTRACT TRANSLATE ADDRESS
(QVT)
Translate Address Any V-Screen
To display any V-Screen:
1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key T next to SELECTION.
4. Press ENTER.
5. Observe message: ENTER 6 DIG AND V OR R.
6. Key the six digits plus V (virtual) or R (real) next to T.
7. Observe that a DLAT address and a Cache address is
decoded and displayed next to the message indicator.
Notes:
•
The Insert/Extract Screen selected remains when the
translate address is entered.
•
Message ENTER 6 DIG AND V OR R is displayed when T
is entered.
•
Message BAD ADDRESS is displayed if an incorrect
address format is used.
•
Message DLAT MISS AUxx is displayed if no match was
found in the DLAT array.
•
Message DIR MISS AFxx is displayed if there is no
match in the Directory array.
•
Message AUxx DIR MISS AFxx is displayed if a match is
found in the DLAT array, but not found in the Directory.
•
Message Code is:
*INSERT/EXTRACT*
A ARRAYS
S STATUS SCAN RING
K CHECKS IN SYSTEM
I PU HARDWARE
B CS HARDWARE
M MS HARDWARE
H CHANNEL HARDWARE
C CHANNEL INTRFACE
X EXTERNAL REGS
R SCAN RING
Y CLOCK SCAN RING
W COMMAND SBA-CAC
T ADDRESS TRANSLAT
G SET CSAR ADDRESS
Q GENERAL SELECT
Z RTRN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: TOOC511V
AL
AP
AD
AN
PU LS
PU RETRY LS
CHNL DATA BUFFER
CHNL CONTROL
AS
AC
AT
AB
AU
AH
AY
AF
AG
AR
SWAP BUFFER
CONTROL STORAGE
TRAP/BAL STACK
CSAR BACKUP
PU DLAT
CHNL DLAT
KEY
L1 DIR
Ll CACHE DATA
CACHE RETRY DATA
==>
CLOCK STOP
AU18
AF14
AGOA21
4341
a. AUxx - matched DLAT address
b. AFxx - matched DIRECTORY address
c. AGxxxx - cache address which holds data.
Alter Translate
Note: There is no alter for the Translate function.
Save Translate
Note: There is no save for the Translate function.
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676412
1 of 1
44 525f
(
2 () C} 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0
a ()
o~o
0 0 C) ()
C)
0 0
(-
(
(
(
c
(
f
(
c\
(-
INSERT/EXTRACT SET CSAR ADDRESS
(QVG)
Set CSAR Address
1. Key QOC or QOM next to SELECTION to stop the PU
clock.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Key QVG and a control storage address next to
SELECTION.
Note: The address may be 1 to 5 digits long and must
have a value within the range of the control storage that
the machine is configured for.
3. Press ENTER.
Notes:
•
The G-command causes the machine to branch to a
microword at a specified control storage address. This
microword is the next one to be executed.
This command sets up a double-branch microword in the
CREG, and cycles the machine to bring the doubleword
at the specified control storage address into the CREG.
o
THE CSAR HAS BEEN SET is displayed next to the
message indicator. This message remains until another
command is sent or a null (ENTER key only) is
performed.
•
This command causes the Insert/Extract menu to be
displayed.
Return to General Selection (Q)
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
EC 379598 15Apr80
EC 379807 22Sep80
© IBM Corp. 1979, 1980
PN 5666391
1 of 1
44535
r~
G
o~
o·
,,'.
l~
)
,<~~
0'
0.~,
(
(
c
(
(
(
(
(
(
,
•
111
(
(
(
(
(
(
ERROR LOGOUT SCREENS
'*:8fUUlIR,CUGCIITS·
CPULO.GDUTS
S SP LOGOrIT.S
L POWER LnGtlt1T.:S
B TEMPE.RAT.URELnGllUT:S
T RSF LINE :ERROR .sTAT I ST I CS
ERROR LOGOUTS (OE)
The Error .Logoutsare a manually invoked function to observe
errors· thattJavebeen collected from the processing. unit or
the .support processor. The error screens are a CEfunction
only. To invoke them, you must first place the CE MODE
switch ON.
RREFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS
I CAP IN IT IATOR
W SAVED SCRrENS
o OISKETTEANALYSJS
Note: Detailed information pertaining to the logs can be
found as follows:
•
For.SELECTION C, S, R, I, and 0, see Volume 17,
Processor Logs.
•
For SELECTION
Power.
i.. and B,
see Volume 16, Processor
Q. GENERAL .SELEtTION
Z RETURN TO PROG· SYS
SELECT ION:
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
Display. Error Logouts
To display the Error Logout screen from the General Selection
screen:
1. K1ty E next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
PU logouts{QEC)
.PROCESS I NG UN IT UIGDUT SELECT ION·
To display"thePU Error Logouts from the E-screen:
1. Key Cnextto SELECTION.
o DIRECTORY DISPLAY
2. Press ENTER.
PPURGE
S
S:ELECT1DN :C
~UMMARY;[lJSPLAY
==>
allCK$1:0P
4341
Modej·Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN2676413
1 of 2
44545f
(
(-
- - - - -
.._ - - - -
PU Directory Display (QECD)
To display the PU Directory Display from the PU Logouts
screen:
1. Key CD next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
PU Purge Function
You can purge the PU Error Log. but this does not bring upa
particular screen. The instructional messages appear on the
screen.
PROCESSING UNIT LOGOllT DIRECTORY
10
00F9
00F8
00F7
00F6
00F5
00F4
00F3
00F2
00F1'
REF CODE
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
00/001
602986AE
602986AE 0660452AE 0
660452AE.
6B2075A6
5E3336AC
5E3336AC
634137AC
633977AE
SELECT ION: co- .
MAN
TEST
no
SERIAL NUMBER:
000000
MACH INE STATUS AND. CHANNEL RESET
123450
CHECK STOP (RESET)
AT 000100 SUCCESSFUL C.e:::1 ON I/O
x----AT 000100 SUCCESSFUL CC=l ON I/O
X-----XXXXXX
CHECK STOP (F-I.RST)
CHECK STOP (RESEr)
CHECK STOP (RESET)
CHECK STOP' (R"ESET)
LOGOUT HAS. BEEN. PURGED
. LOGOUT HAS BiEIt PURGED
STORAGE. ERROR
TODC EQUtVALENT
05:20:28
05: 20: 11
01: 16:31
01 :11:39
00:2l:.40
00:06:50.
00:06:46
00:05:59
00:04:24
MODEL: 4341
=>
TrMU: ON· CLOCK STOP
tsAR:.
0000
4341
PU Logout Summary (QECS)
PU LOG SUMMARY ,MODEL:
To invoke the PU Logout Summary screen from the PU
Logout screen:
1. Key CS next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
4341
008C
OOOC
0000
0005
001C
0010
0000
ODIE
0005
0007
0000
008C
OOOC
0000
0005
ODIC
0010
0000
00 t E
0005
0007
0000
SUCCESSFUL RTY
SUCCESSFUL I/O
UNSU.CCESSFUL RTY
UNSUCCESSFUL I/O
UNRTY (NORMAL)
UNRTY (EHC)
UNRTY (NO RETRY)
CK ST (F IRST) ,
CK ST (EHC)
CK ST (NO LOG)
SK ST (MACH RST)
0002
0000
0000
001B
0002
0000
0000
0018
KEY
ENABLED SINGLE
DOUBLE (PU)
DOUBLE (CHANNEL)
SERIAL:
. 0011
0000
0006
OOOA
0019
0019
0019
0019
002A
0038
0037
OOOA
0002
001A
0008
0008
0002
0011
0000
0006
OOOA
0019
0019
0019
0019
002A
0038
0037
OOOA
0002
OOtA
0008
0008
0002
SELECTION: CS
000000
CURRENT TOOt EQU: 79/062
CHN CONTROL
CHN DATA BFR H
CHN DATA BFR L
CHN INTERFACE
CS ARRAY 0
CS ARRAY 1
CS ARRAY 2
CS ARRAY 3
CS CONTROL
PU DATA FLOW H
PU DATA FLOW L
PU I-CYCLES
PU INTERRUPTS
PU OF CONTROL
PU SAR
PU SHIFTER
PU TIMER
0008
0000.
0000
0000
0000
0001
0002
0004
0003
00 to
0020
0003
OOOT
0000
0004
0.008
0000
0000
0000
0000
0001
0002
0004
0003
00 10
0020
0003
0001
0000
0004
CLK
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
STG
14:27:15
CLOCK
CACHE a
CACHE t
CACHE 2
CACHE 3
CACHE 4
CACHE 5
CACHE 6
CACHE 7
CONTROL a
CONTROL 1
DLAT/DIR a
DLAT/DIR 1
SAR/KEY a
SAR/KEY t
==",
CLOCK STOP
4341
Model Group. 2
f.; EC 379898
I
()
ll.,.
06MarS.
_P_N_2_6_764_'_1_3--11:
_Lof2
_
()
o
«ssm
(~
~,
\)
c:
(
« c
(
(
(
c
(
(
00
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
SP Logouts (OES)
To invoke the SP Logout screen from the E-screen:
·SP LOGOUTS·
1. Key S next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
A SUMMARY SCREEN
P
PURGE ALL LOGS
o TO 15 DETAIL SCREEN
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROGSYS
SELECTION: S
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
SP Logout Summary (OESA)
To display the SP Logout Summary from the SP Logout
screen:
1. Key SA next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
SP Purge All Logs
This function purges ali log records in the SP error area on
the diskette. No new screen is involved when you use this
function.
CURRENT TOOC EQUIVALENT: 79/264 11:53:12
••• SP LOGOUT SUMMARY···
================================================================================
LN EVNT CT TODC EQUIVALENT
00 0017 01 79/263 16:43:24
01 0015 02 79/263 16:09:53
02 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
03 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
04 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
05 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
06 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
07 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
08 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
09 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
10 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
11 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
12 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
13 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
14 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
15 0000 00 00/001 00:00:00
SELECTION: SA
LVL
07
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
MM
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
MC
20
20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
--MSW--845C2F2E
845C2F2E
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
C-I C
845A
845A
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
I NST
A9CB
A9CB
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
ADPT
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
S I C2164
2164
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
LMR3900
3900
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
REF'. CODE
Fl100114
Fl100114
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
==>
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
e IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676414
10f2
44555f
SP Detail Screen
Notes:
Power Logouts (GEL)
To display the SP Detail screen from the SP Logout screen:
•
An SP Log request from an interrupt level 0; lines 17-19
are blank.
1. Key Sx next to E on the SELECTION line.
(where x = 00 through 15)
To display the Power Logouts screen from the Error Logouts
screen:
•
An SP Log request from a interrupt level 1, 6, or 7, lines
17-19 display the current and last SPIL instructions.
1. Key L next to SELECTION.
•
An SP Log request from a interrupt level 2, 3, 4, or 5,
line 17-19 display the Device Control Block.
2. Press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER.
EXPANDED POWER ERROR INFORMATION
SP LOG:-:OCl TODC EQUIV:81/029 00:05:57
10:0100034341
EC:OOOOOO
================================
EVENT:0002
==========:;==========================================="=====================
07 LEVU
7942. IC
00 IOAOPT
00000000M38FOf88238F0790000 CNFG
. 00 KKASK
34 PP
00 IOCHO
--------------HSW' S· ------------llF (MASK
35SP
2020 LMR
D5E4 E160 LVLO
8200 6362 LVLl
12 S·PCK
80 ZHCV
2000 LMRBASE
456E A524 LVL2
OFOO 2726 LVL3
00 IOIRR
7942 (-It
F5000120 REFCODE
B5M A928 LVL4
t242 AB2A LVL5
01 MIRR
EE05, I NST
00000000 RC EXTN
8200 AD2C LVL6
7946 B534 LVL7
---------1/0 STATU5----------------BUR5T MOOE-------------PLOA-------02
DISK
0002 DCA
5AFC LCA
68·Cl OF C2 80 C3
FE C SCL
000200 LCA
OF24 0000 DISK
2F AS AO 1M 03 ID
02
PWR
0000000000 T CCA
0000 0000 AECE AEEO DCA
00 OP 00 CK 30 PG
02 C SBA
00000000 ·PU
AF60 AFEO A86C BOEO DCA
44 Tt-t C8 PF 00 BF
00 CC 00 CA 00 CT
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
REGS:2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1tOO 0100 lEOO 2A93 0002 2AOO 7256 726C EODE E300 7235 7534 7920 7C7A 72F6 7214
--------SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION--------------SPIL CURRENT INSTRUCTION-----AOOR:2006
DATA:5201 0000 2494 20EE
ADOR:20EE
OATA:5000 249A 215A 04FO
SPIL BRN TABLE:200E 2180 2160 20F4 20DE 2180 2160 20F4 20DE 2180 2160 20F4 20DE
==>
SELECTION: SOO
INSTR STOP DATA: 47FO R-ADOR: 000420
t-tAN
TEST
LOG 1: ADDR= 81839:193 A1A3BIB3 85879597 A5A78587
LAST LOG
54001560 40801780 2401FFB5 E7FFFIFF
008007CO 03800380 01F02228 00C00600
40424446 50525456 32
03448F78 00008F98 00
AD DR
20F6
LOG 2: ADOR= 8183919:3 AIA3B183
54201560 40801780
008007CO 03800380
85879597 ASA7B5B7
240lFFB5 E7FFFIFF
01F02228 00C00600
40424446 50525456 32
03448F78 00008F18 00
AODR
20F6
LOG 3: AllOR= 81839193 AIA3B1B3
40000400 40000001
lF8077FB 03807783
85879597 A5A7B587
000109Bl 8322DIDF
FFFEF66E 7CC02E20
40424446 50525456 32
20658F77 8DF08F9S 00
AOOR
3085
LOG 4: ADOR= 81839193 A1A3B1B3
40200400 40000001
lF8077F8 03807783
85879597 A5A7B5B7
000109BI 0322010F
FBFEF66E IC802E20
40424446 50525456 32
20658F78 80F08F86 00
AOOR
30B5
REFERENCE CODES:
IOlFF202 10lFF202 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A 1010400A
MAN
TEST
I NSTR STOP
4341
4341
SP LOG:OO' TODC EQUIV:81/029 00:05:57
10:0100034341
EC:OOOOOO
EVENT:0002
===============================================================================
00000000AA38FOF88238F0790000 tNFG
07 LEVEL
7942 I C
00 IOADPT
00 MMASK
34 PP
00 10CMO
--------------MSW'S-------------05E4 E160 LVLO
8200 6362 LVLl
OF CMASK
35 SP
2020 LMR
456E A524 LVL2
OFOO 2726 LVL3
12 SPCK
80 ZHCV
2000 LMRBASE
B5M A928 LVL4
C242 AB2A LVL5
00 IOIRR
7942 C-IC
F5000t20 REFCOOE
8200 AD2C LVL6
7946 B534 LVL7
01 MIRR
EE05 INST
00000000 RC EXTN
-------PLOA----------------1:/0 STATUS----------------BURST MOOE------. 02
01 SK
0002 DCA
5AFC LCA
68 Cl OF C2 80 C3
OF24 0000 DISK
2F AS AO 1M 03 10
FE C SCL
000200 LCA
0000 0000 AECE AEEO DCA
00 OP 00 CK 30 PG
02
PWR
0000000000 T CCA
AF60 AFEO A86C BOEO DCA
44 Tt-t C8 PF 00 BF
02 C SBA
00000000 PU
00 CC 00 CA 00 CT
REGS:2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
1100 0100 IEOO 2A93 0002 2AOO 7256 726C EOOE E300 7235 7534 7920 7C7A 72F6 7214
----------''"------------------OEV I CE CONTROL BLOCK-----------------.------------0200 FF04 10000000 003C 8117 EOOO 0000 5400 5406 0801 0000 190C 0000 60C2 onc
ClE8 07-46 0'157 0769 0767 077F E500 B2BA 0000 0000 F028 C1F8 E520 BE06 B9FC FFFF
SELECT m·th SOl
. ==>
MAN
TEST
INSTR STOP DATA: 47FOR-AODR: 000420
4341
Model Group Z
44 560f
,0
\
/
IJ
'"'.
\,
';,;,
00
() ()
o
000
C)
(1\
..
\ . 3)
o
(~
I.J
o
{
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
00
(
{
( ---( ---(
(
(/
(
Temperature Logouts (OEB)
To display the Temperature Logouts screen from the Error
Logouts screen:
DEGREES
42
1. Key B next to SELECTION.
40
2. Press ENTER.
38
36
C.
TEMPERATURE TRACE
LAST ERASE DATE
=================
YY/MM/DD
00/00/00
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
.+.+
+.
.++
+ +++-++. + +++++
- ++ - - - . -
+ +++ +++++++
+ +++
+ +++
-++---++- --- +++++++-+.--+++++++-+--
.--
18
16
14
12
10
••••
+++++++++++++.
TO PURGE ENTER liP" AND DATE ......... .
MAN
TEST
INSTR STOP
4341
-1
-1
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
@ IBM Corp. 1981
PN 2676415
10f3
44565f
RSF Line Error Statistics (QET)
The Line Error Statistics screen enables you to read all
send/receive operations and any errors that occurred during a
Remote Support session. These statistics are accumulated
and the counters are reset at the beginning of each new
session.
*RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS·
NUMBER OF OPERATIONS
NUMBER OF ERRORS
SEND
RECEIVE
0000
0000
0000
0000
Display RSF Line Error Statistics Screen
To display the RSF Line Error Statistics screen from the
General Selection screen:
1. Key ET next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: T
==>
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN 2676415
20f3
",\"
,0
...
o
0\"--"','
r~
~jJ
DO
o
o
()
()
o
44 566f
(
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
(
c
(
(
(
(
(
Reference Code Logouts (QER)
To display the Reference Code Logouts from the Error
Logouts screen:
*REFERENCE CODE LOGOUTS*
1. Key R next to SELECTION.
o
2. Press ENTER.
DISPLAY REFERENCE CODES
P PURGE ALL LOGS
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: R
MAN
TEST
==>
I NSTR STOP
4341
Reference Code Logout File (QERO)
**REFERENCE CODE LOGOUT FILE"
To display the Reference Code Logout File from the
Reference Code Logouts screen:
1. Key RD next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: 79/264 11:48:43
================================================================================
RN CT ---TODC EQUIV-- REF CODE RC EXTN. RN CT ---TODC EQUIV-- REF CODE RC EXTN.
o
01 79/263 16:43:24
1 02 79/263 16:09:53
2 00 00/001 00:00:00
3 00 00/001 00:00:00
4 00 00/001 00:00:00
5 00 00/001 00:00:00
6 00 00/001 00:00:00
7 00 00/001 00:00:00
8 00 00/001 00:00:00
9 00 00/001 00:00:00
10 00 00/001 00:00:00
11 00 00/001 00:00:00
12 00 00/001 00:00:00
13 00 00/001 00:00:00
14 00 00/001 00:00:00
15 00 00/001 00:00:00
SELECT ION: RD
MAN
TEST
Fll00114
Fl100114
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
16 00 00/001
17 00 00/001
18 00 00/001
19 00 00/001
20 00 00/001
21 00 00/001
22 00 00/001
23 00 00/001
24 00 00/001
25 00 00/001
26 00 00/001
27 00 00/001
28 00 00/001
29 00 00/001
30 00 00/001
TIME OF LAST
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
00:00:00 00000000 00000000
PURGE: 81/003 13:34:43
==>
CLOCK STOP
4341
Purge All Logs
Use this function (PI to purge all logs.
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN·2676415
30f 3
44 570f
(
~""\
\
/
- ---.....~
f~
./
'''-. . ./J
()
r"',"\
\...,,)
('\
\..j
~
\
)
"-_/
~
(
\
\_~
.......... 0\.../
C) .. 0:0'
.
.....
('-~
'
"-
d-/
0
\ .. . /
('"~
r'\
"--
\,---/
I
f~
\'-...
r~
~j
r--"
'-.j
.~
'''--- ./
("1
\..../
r· . .
.~
"
(~,
/
0
\.
/'
(
--"
'--/'
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
f
o
(
(
(-
(
(
(-
{-
CAP Initiator (QEI)
To invoke the CAP Initiator function from the Error LogOtJts
screen:
CAP 'N IT I ATOR
1. Key I next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
ElrrER .REFE-RENCE CODE (:8
=MAN
TEST
1)~1I1TSl.
OR ADO EXTENS-/ ON (8 MORE)
INSTR STOP
4341
Mod-el Group 2
© IBM Corp. 1979, 1981
EC 379808 06Mar81 EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676458
lof 4
44 575f
(
SAVED SCREENS (QEW)
The Saved Screef.lS;.screen provides an area Iscreen} for a log
entry by the serviG:e-fepresentative or allows: thedispfay of a
screenls~ that~beeA saved by the COpy Key (IGJ)
function.
The CE ·Lo,g scmsacis. a·-preformatted screa,t with input
fields used for'\8g;.E5ltryof problems and/orrepair actions.
TheCE screeaf'iaa_capy of a saved screen: and the cu.rrent
TODclock. valu6fQIT·the diskette-when the ropy key' is
pressed.
The Saved. ~screen contains all the commamls.
necessary to m~teothe CE Log screen(st or. thaCE
screenls).
, Screen Layout
*SAVED SCREENS.
AO{lR RAt-HiE (OO/OE)
T LIST
D:ATE: YY /DDO HH:I'tM:
.***".......
TITLE ..........*...** LOG TITLE
M'lSS
CACHE PROB.LEMS
POWER DROP
CLOCK CARD FAILURE
M-Bl BOARD PROB
*...*'. LOG
o III SPLAY
ocr
LRE-TITLE
D IR
01
02
E CE LOG EDIT
R ERASE ONE
X PURGE CE LOG SCRt-tS
Y PURGE CE SCRt-tS
*****.
01
CE TITLE
QVAFOO
......-.******...""...***..*
SAVED DATE "
00/001
oa·~Oo.
The Saved Screen functiondisplavs the most recent saved
CE Log screen OJ CE screen at the- top' of its respective
grouping. A maximum combinatiorr of four screens (between
the two- groups) can be saved.
Nates:.
F SEt-tO TO COt-tS PRT
C SEt-tO TO CHNL PRT
~
ane' or twa logs saved taa CFl..ogscreen is considered
8S
Q GEt-tERAL SELECT
Z RTt-t TO PROG SYS
SELECTION~
The Saved Screens screen menu is displayed on the left side
;of the screen. The area on the right- (top) displays the
address and title of any CE Logtsl. Two. logs are contained
OIT each. CE Log. screen, The area an: the right (bottom)
dispi:ays the address. title; and saved date of any C E screen
copied to the disketta
~
Lagf serves. as the' title tel' the CF lDg screen.
... Paging may be required to
=
WTOO
ane· s;;wed screen,
Sf!e.
tbe: complete list of saved
s:eree!OS~
Display Savec:iSCreens
To display the Saved Screens from the General Selection
screen:
CE log; Screen layout
The- CE log screen is a preformatted screen with input fietds.
Each screen provides for two log entries:. This enables the
service representative to communicate intermittent problems
and repak activities.
1. Key EW next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Note:: PreSsing the EOF key when the cursor is positioned
after SYMPTOM: dears, up to CE NAME, the remajning
Utfes: to provide more space for describing a problem. .
CE Screen Layout
(ENTER KEYWORD. SYMPTON)
LOGl :
SYMPTON:
YY /MM/DD
The CE screen is a. copy of a screen. and the cu.rrent TOO
clock. value. SAVED-title is dispiayed an the screen next to
the messa~ indicator.
FRUS CHANGE.f)-:
FRUS CALLED:
DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS/COMMENTS:
INCIDENT:
CE NAME
PROBLEM:
(ENTER KEY\iIORO SYMPTOJ~::)
LOG2:
SYMPTON:
YY/MMIDD
FRUS CHANGED:
FRUS CALLED:
DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS/COMMENTS:
I NC I DENT:
SELECTION: WDOO
CE IiAME
PROBLEM:
Model Group. 2
IEC3798OIl06M28Jua82.:
EC' 379829
r.)'
()
~
0 0 00-0 0 0
o
00
It
•
•
•
o 00
000 00
PN2616458
20f4
o o
44 5nif
(
Commands
('
o
,
I
t·
(
CE Log Edit
Send to Console Printer
E addr
F addr
List
Displays the CE Log screen at the specified address. If no
address is specified, a new CE Log screen is :displayed.
Prints the specified saved screen on the console printer (Kn);
addr is the address of the screen to be printed.
T addr
Displays the addresses, titles, and saved dates (CE screen) of
the saved CE Log and CE screens; addr is an address from
00-03.
This command enables the inputting of log mrtry data or
editing to existing log entries. After any required entries or
editing has been made, pressing the ENTER key saves the
screen at address location 00.
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
If an existing CE Log screen is displayed and the ENTER
key (saved) is pressed, its new .address Jocation is 00.
Entering QEW defaults to WTOO.
Entering WT1 defaults to WT01.
Pressing the MODE SEL key or changing the cDmmand on
the SELECTION line prevents the displayeri CE Log
screen from being saved.
Display
o
aEWT is redisplayed and SAVE-title appears on line 23
after saving.
addr
Displays the specified saved screen; addr is an address from
00-03.
Displaying a saved screen lines (1-19) also displays lines
20-24 of the current screen. Lines 20-24 of thE saved
screen are displayed on lines 2-6 when paging forward (still
keeping lines 20-24 of current displayed screen). Row 1,
column 1 characters are not displayed, and the SAVED-title is
displayed on the screen next to the message indicator.
Note: All fields are protected when displaying a saved
screen.
The console printer must be disconnected (assigned
Kdsc) on the program load (aU screen before using this
command.
Entering FALL next to SELECTION and pressing ENTER
prints all saved screens.
(
(-
(-
(
Return to' General Selection (Q)
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Entering Faddr1-addr2 (addr1= beginning address, addr2=
ending address) prints the screens specified from the
beginning address through the ending address.
Send to Channel Printer
C addr cuu
R addr
Prints the specified saved screen on the channel printer; addr
is the address of the screen to be printed, and cuu is the
channel unit address of the channel printer.
Erases the specified screen from the diskette.
Notes:
Erase One
Purge CE Log Screens
X
Erases all CE Log screens from the diskette.
This ' selection is valid when the machine has been IMLed
but not {PLed.
The channel unit address (cuu) defaults to the KCcuu
assignment if not specified. See "Program Load (aL)."
Entering CALL cuu next to SELECTION and pressing
ENTER prints all saved screens.
Re-Title
L addr new title
Purge CE Screens
If the address of the saved screen is specified, this command
renames the title at that address to the specified title. If no
title is given, the title is not changed, but a copy of the title
of the address specified is put on the SELECTION line after L
addr.
V
Erases all CE screens from the diskette.
Entering Caddrl-addr2 cuu (addrl=beginning address,
addr2=ending address) prints the screens specified from
the beginning address through the ending address.
Warning: If the machine has been .IPLed, a aCLEAR is
required. However, a loss of customer data can result
wjth this selection.
Notes:
CE Log screens cannot be retitled.
Because all blanks are taken out of the SELECTION line
commands, a period must be used in place of a blank.
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676458
3 of 4
44 577f
DlSKETTER£AOABIUTY (QED)
Status Field
The Diskette Readabj'lity screen enables Y9t1 to read all
recordsorJ a.diskett-e-, starting at a given addr-ess. ThiS
function tests,tbeabitity to read tile record. Any unreadable
recams.arerepmtst and the function CQDtttruc9S to the end of
the .diskette,
TO STARr:
NOfmalop~ time for this functiofl'ts,about one minute.
unless the ~pr~is· interrupted by theopemtor ifhe
presseatlJe·1VfQDE$L key .or the LOGt-CRESET buttan.
The. disketted'msL7fi;cytmciers with 2fi recards on each side.
A four-digithescoomberis the address·at·wIflich this function
begins its·ana~ 1lle first two digits aractba cylinder
nttmbere'(range;,(B'm:4C); the second twadi@its are the
recorct number;Rarrge: 80 to 9A is for tne"Frol'lt of the
diskette, anch~OO~to. lA is fortheb~ The front is the
side with. th&~t label.
TO
n MAKE
2..} TYPE
S.UREO ISK£TIETG.·ffETE:STEO' tSIt+stALLE!l
CYL t.N·DER- ANI) RECURD-NUMBER I NI+EX .
INTa SELECTION.;,.flELD AHnFRESS ENTER-KE
o:R
.
2.} PRESS ENTER-KEY ONLY TIJ STARr-ANALYSIS'
WITH CYL INDER 0 AND REClJRO r ~
EXIT: 1) MAKE SURE aR I GI. NAL-D I SKE'fTE IS tNSTALLED.
2.l SELECT ANY SCREEN.
~
j
J
~
~
Diskette Readability Screen
The following fields cambine to create the ohe-byte device'
status.
.
.
.
-0 t SKETTE READAB tUTV TE$T...;
(All NUMBERS IN HEX)
SELECTION-FORMAT: aCCRa
CC=CYL t ,*OER, 00 TO: 4C
RR=RECORD.
00 TalA, BACK-HEAD
80 TIJ 9A. FRONT -I+EAIt
Field 1
80
40
CO
-
Field Z
as: -
18
20
28
3II
3Ii
-
-
Reflf'3-
To select the DiSkette, Readabifity screeA' from the General
Operatiana~ Status
Contro.! Operation Complete
Busy
Overrun .or Undemm
Timeout
Record Nat Foumi
mskett:e Nor Ready
Interrupt
S~
en: -
fmenuptR~
()!f:'
Enable frttemJpt:
Machin& Cback
oz. -
SELECTION: 0
Error Status
Command Error
CRC Error
Hardware Error
Return to General SelectiorT fQ)
Selectian screen::
1. Key ED next to SELECTION.
1. Key- Q next: to SELECTION ..
2. Press ENTER. The Diskette Analysis screen appears.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Change the diskette to the one to be analyzed.
Return to PrOQ.: Sys (Zl
4. Enter the starting address, and press ENTER.
Note: The'analysis begins with cylinder 0 and record 1
if no address is entered.
t. Key Z nextto SELECTION ..
2. Press ENTER..
5. Any error is displayed on the screen. If the screen
becames full. press ENTER to cantinue the analvsis. You
can interrupt the program by selecting another screen.
6~
If you get the message OPERATOR TROUBLE, check the
diskette drive. Usually, the doar is open. Clasethe door
and start the analysis fram the beginnin.g. If thEFdoor is
not open, there is a' physical problem with the ckive.
7. At the end .of the analysis .or if you wisJr to interrupt the
analysis, be sure. to replace the original disk.
Note: If a module ID of FFFF appears, one·of the following
-0 I SKEnE REAOAB I L ITY TESTLINE CYLINDER HEAD
NUMB NUMBER
FRONT
12
01
16
BACK
02
BACK
03
lA
25
FRONT
04
2C
FRONT
05
FRONT
39
06
3F
BACK
07
RECORD MODULE
10
NUMB.ER
O/i.
0580
1120
11
lA
1145
44B4
OE
01
9000
9E24
09
DnA
12:.
DEVfCE
STATUS:.
42
42
42
42.
42
42
PARAI'a'ERS ARE'
GI VEJi I N HEX-VALUES
C4
has occurred:
•
The module ID is beyond the end" of tbe writtel'F data
•
Cylinder 0 was read
•
A cylind~indffl( was read
•
The master index was read.
IF THERE IS MORE TO
~O,
PRESS ENTER-KEY IJREJOT.
TO INTERRUPT, I NSTALL OR IG ,.-01 SK AND PRESS MOllE KEY.
IF ANALYS I S IS COMPLETED YIlU MAY START AGMN.·
NO ~ REA&l ERIWR
SELECT ION: 01284
==>ANAlYS IS CUI'tJll't. ETE D.
Model Group: 2..
EC 379808 06Mar81
EC 379829: 28JunBL
o o
00
o
'8
o
000 00
PN 2676458
4 of 4
0 .•··.0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 o
o
44 580f
(~
'''.Y
o
--------
------"-
--
f'
./
(~
C
(,
f'
("
('
("
(""
(
(' (' (
(: (
C
(
('
(~"
("
----------
(
._-
f/
(
("
('
...
('.
('
(-',
(~~
"
POWER/TEMPERATURE SCREENS
POWER/TEMPERATURE (M-SCREEN)
*POWER/TEMPERATURE*
You use the Power/Temperature screen to invoke the power
or temperature programs. When these functions are invoked,
the diagnostic monitors assume control and other manual
functions are not available, except under the monitor's
control. Each function makes reference to the proper manual
for additional information.
W PARTIAL POWER UP/DOWN
U FULL POWER UP
A ANALOG SENSOR DISPLAY
D DIGITAL SENSOR DISPLAY
Display Power/Temperature Screen
T TEMPERATURE SENSOR DISPLAY
WITH POWER OFF ONLY:
V VOLTAGE TRACKING
To display the Power /Temperature screen from the General
Selection screen:
1. Key M next to SELECTION.
P POWER DIAGNOSTICS
2. Press ENTER.
Q GENERAL SELECION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
==.,
I NSTR STOP
4341
Partial Power Up and Down Screen (OMW)
PARTLY POWER UP AND DOWN
To display the Partial Power Up and Down screen from the
Power /Temperature screen:
========================
POWER UP---------------------- 00
POWER DOWN-------------------- 01
1. Key W next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
FUNCT I ON:
Full Power Up Function (QMV)
When you press QMU, the system automatically powers up
completely. This function alone does not bring up a special
screen.
COMPLETE
PART 1 /
PART 2
PART 3
PART 4 /
PART 5
PART 6'
PART 7 'v
SYSTEM
PROC UNIT
CTCA
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
1-0
\
07
STATUS
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
\
POWER UP/DOWN: ..
FUNCT ION: "
I NSTR STOP
4341
.'
EC 376695 16Aug79
EG 379598 15Apr80
©IBM Corp. 1979
PN 5666396
1 of 2
-------
44585
(~
(
Momentary Status Display
MOMENTARY STATUS DISPLAY
To display the Momentary Status screen from the Partial
Power Up and Down screen:
========================
1. Press the PF8 key once.
CONTROL LATCH ADDRESSES:
CONTROL LATCHES:
40424446
01450FA0
50525456
0CF00FA0
DIGITAL SENSE ADDRESSES:
DIGITAL SENSES:
81839193
00200000
A1A3B1B3
60000000
ANALOG SENSE ADDRESSES:
ANALOG SENSES:
85879597
FF0EFF6C
A5A7B5B7
7C010FC0
I NTERRUPT AND STATUS BYTE:
00
ADDR OF STOP AND SEQUENCE:
SEQUENCE:
ERROR BITS--BIT/ADDR:
2116
1034
30
00
02
000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000
0000 0000 00A3 20A3 9495
1034
4341
Error Status Display
ERROR STATUS DISPLAY
To display the Error Status Display from the Partial Power Up
and DoV' n screen:
1. Press the PF8 key twice.
2. Press PF8 again to return to the Partial Power Up and
Down screen.
CONTROL LATCH ADDRESSES:
CONTROL LATCHES:
40424446
00000000
50525456
00000000
DIGITAL SENSE ADDRESSES:
DIGITAL SENSES:
DIGITAL COMPARE MASK
AND RESULT
81839193
00000000
00000000
00000000
A1A3B1B3
00000000
00000000
00000000
ANALOG SENSE ADDRESSES:
ANALOG SENSES:
ANALOG COMPARE MASK
AND RESULT
85879597
00000000
00000000
00000000
A5A7B5B7
00000000
00000000
00000000
SEQUENCE: ADDR/DATA
DATA
ERROR BITS--BIT/ADDR:
2116
1034
32
00
000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000
0000 0000 0 00 0000 0000
REF CODE
1034
F70CE002
4341
EC 376695 16Aug79
EC 379598 15Apr80
PN 5666396
2 of 2
n
', . . . .~~jI
/'"'\1
;J
[e~
I
'
I
, i
"
Ji!
0
a
0 0
r)
'
\,--'
I
.;:
"
C)
() 0
'-'''--'
0 0
"
•
•
I,
() 0
()-'eo
o o
44590
() ()
(-
(
(
{
o
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Analog Sense Display lQMA)
To display the Analog Sense Display screen from the
Power /Temperature screen:
1. Key A next to SELECTION.
2. PreSs ENTER.
MAXIMUM
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA.
C E CALL
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
+ _+_ _+
_+to
++
++++ ++
THIS DISPLAY IS TO BE USED
FOR COARSE ADJUSTMENT ONLY
WHEN ADJUSTMENT IS COMPLETE,
PRESS FUNCTION KEY 9.
_+ _+_
ANALOG SENSE 00000000 on 11111 11122222 22222333
AOI TO A32
12345678 ;0123456 789012]4 56789012
MAXIMUM
C E CALL
++
++
++--+
ANALOG SENSE
A33 TO A64
+ --
33333334 44444444 45555555 5556'66'
34567890 1234~'78 9012345' 78901234
4341
Digital
Sen~r
Display (OM D)
DIGITAL SENSE DATA DISPLAY
- REPRESENTS INACTIVE STATE
A REPRESENTS ACTIVE STATE
To display the Digital Sensor Display screen from the
Power/Temperature screen:
1. Key D next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
SAMPLE
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
HODE IS ACTIVE
HODES: SAMPLE- READ DIGITAL INPUTS ONCE AND DISPLAY
CONTINUOUS- READ AND DISPLAY DIGITAL INPUTS CONTINUOUSLY
.
.
.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2]
- - -- -- -- - - - -- - - - - - - -24 25 2' 27 28 29 ]0 31 ]2 33 34 35 3' 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
- --- ------ - --- - - -- - - - 47 48 49 50 51 52 5] 54 55 56 57 58 59 '0 '1 62 63 64
---------- -
ENTER 0 ISPLAY CONTROL CHARACTER S, OR t::
MAN
TEST
==>
INSTR STOP
4]41
o 11M Corp. 1979. 1980
I
l
"",
I
.
"I
:,
......-
-,:
EC 379598 15AprBO
EC 379604 05Dec80
PN 5666397
10f2
44595
(-
(
---- ----- -------------------------111---- ------il!
Thennal Sense Data Display (OMT)
To display the Thermal Sense Data Display screen from the
Power/Temperature screen:
THERMAL
SAMPLE
1. Key T next to SELECTION.
SENSE DATA DISPLAY
MODE IS ACTIVE
MODES: SAMPLE- READ THERMAL INPUTS ONCE AND DISPLAY
CDNTINUOUS- READ AND DISPLAY THERMAL INPUTS CONTINUOUSLY
2. Press ENTER.
THERMAL 1 2 3 4 5 ,
DEGREES C 24 29 28 25
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MAXIMUM ----------------------------------------------------------------------CE CALL -------------------------------------~---------------------------------
ENTER DISPLAY CONTROL CHARACTER S. OR C:
MAN
TEST
Voltage Tracking Display (aMV)
•• >
INSTR STOP
VOLTAGE TRACKING DISPLAYS THE TURN ON OF SELECTED VOLTAGES IN THE PROCESSING
UNIT AND CTCA (IF INSTALLED). THERE MUST BE TWO INPUTS, TRACK NUMBER (01-14)
AND VOLTAGE(S) (VI-V7). THE TRACKS ARE IN THE ORDER OF THE POWER ON SEqUENCE
To display the Voltage Tracking screen from the
Power/Temperature screen:
1. Key V next to SELECTION.
TRACK
V4
NUMBER
VI
V2
01 -2.2 BIAS -4.25 BIAS -1.5 BIAS
02 +4.25 BIAS
03 +6 BIAS
04 +6 BULK
-2.2 BULK -1.5 BULK
05 +11.25 BULK -11.25 BULK +5 VOLTS
06 -6.45 INITIAL (-2.2)
07 +4.25 INITIAL
2. Press ENTER.
TRACK
V2
NUMBER VI
-1.5(A2)
08 -1.5(Al)
-4.25(A2)
09 -4.25(Al)
10 -6.45
11 +6
12 +4.25 FINAL
13 +1.25*
-3*
14 +6*
* • CTCA VOLTAGE
VII
-1.5(Bl)
-4.25(Bl)
EXAMPLES: TRACK NUMBER Oil V2 • -2.2 BULK
TRACK NUMBER 04 V5 • +6 , -1.5 BULK
TRACK NUMBER Oil V7 • +6.-2.2. , -1.5 BULK
ENTER: TRACK NUMBER •• VOLTAGE(S) V
1004 1004
4341
Nota: This screen reflects a typical voltagfl
tnJcking display. Refer to "Processor Power"
section for the machine's correct version.
EC 379598' 15AprBO
EC 379604 05Dec80
I
I
(~
'J
J
:<'0
.~
00
PN 5666397
20f2
44600
.' r
0.-'" '0-
r.-~.
\~.Y
o
o
C) 0 0 0
o
000
00 C)
o
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
(-
(
(
Power Diagnostics
Use this function to run diagnostics on the power controller
adapter section of the machine.
Return to General Selection from the M-Screen
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Return \0 Prog Sys
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
EC 379586 19Nov79
EC 379598 15Apr80
© IBM Corp. 1979
PN 5666398
1 of 1
44605
:)OOOO()OOC)
J 0 0 0
O~QO
0 0 0 0 00000000000
-~~~~---
----------
----
(-
(
00
(
('
(
(
(
Diskette IPL (QI)
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
*DISKETTE IPL*
The Diskette IPL screen provides the service representative
with a selection of diagnostic tools. These tools are diskette
dependent; the screen identifies which one is required.
1, Key Z next to SELECTION.
4300 FRIEND
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL
DIAG
DIAG
2. Press ENTER.
SYSTEM TEST ST/4300
TAPE OLTS (xxxx = DEVICE TYPE)
DIAG 5
DIAG 5
Return to General Selection (Q)
LOAD MODULE -FEnn-
DIAG
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
D
SP DUMP TO MAIN STORAGE
FUNC
2. Press ENTER.
Q
GENERAL SELECTION
RETURN TO PROG SYS
E
C
The Diskette IPL screen is a CE function and can only be
invoked in CE mode.
S
Txxxx
FEnn
Display Diskette IPL
To display the Diskette IPL screen from the General Selection
screen:
1. Key I next to SELECTION.
Z
2. Press ENTER.
NOTE:
'QRES' REQUIRED AFTER DISKETTE IPL
SELECTION:
==>
t'
i
J
.'
~
-~
E 4300 Friend
FEnn Load Module
For detailed information about 4300 Friend. see Volume 17.
section 40. "4300-FRIEND."
This selection allows loading a module from a disk into main
storage.
To use this function:
C Channel-To-Channel
For detailed information about Channel-to-Channel. see
volume 17. section 42. "Channel-to-Channel Adapter Test."
S System Test ST/ 4300
For detailed information about System Test ST /4300. see
volume 17. section 40. "ST/4300."
1. Key FEnn (nn=module I D number) next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
3. When the message MOUNT PROPER DISK ENTER
appears. Mount the required disk.
4. Press ENTER.
5. When the message REMOUNT FUNCTIONAL DISK
appears. Mount the functional disk.
6. Key QRES next to SELECTION.
7. Press ENTER.
Txxxx Tape OLTS
For detailed information about Tape OLTS. see volume 17.
section 40. "ONLINE TESTS (OLTS)."
D SP Dump To Main Storage
This selection is used with the SP STAND-ALONE DUMP
SUPPORT option.
Model Group 2
EC 379825 05Jun81
EC 379829 28Jun82
@ IBM Corp. 1981
-----------
-----~--
<-~--~
~----
PN 2676428
1 of 2
44 607f
(
(
SP STAND-ALONE, H'"DUMP SUPPORT
Note: Use this function only as directed by your Support
Structure.
This command provides a support processor storage dump to
main storage which then can be printed.
To invoke SP Stand-Alone Dump:
1. Place the CE MODE switch ON.
2. Press CE panel switches A, B, and C together. This
invokes SP trace.
format:
x(x> command. to move the line preceded by an
M, ahead of the line with the >.
>
Inserts a line.
Use the> command. in combination with the
M command. to move the line preceded by an
M. ahead of the line with the>.
DISPLAYING THE BLOCK LIST IT)
e IBM Corp. 1981
(
(
(
(
(
DISPLAYING THE BLOCK LIST
*BLOCKS*
TP PATCH LIST
F ED IT
R ERASE
A ACT IVATE
H HALT
K TRANSFER
X
M
I N IT INDEX
IML PATCHES
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
BLOCK LIST
10
NAME
9540 IFCCSAVE
9541 ADDRWAIT
9542 DETECTST
9543
9544
9545
9546
9547
10
NAME
9550
9551
9552
9553
9554
9555
9556
9557
MATCH-WAIT
9548
9549
954A
954B
954C
9540
954E
954F
9558
9559
955A
955B
955C
9550
955E
955F
==>
SELECTION:T
4341
Edit Function
S
Use the following commands to create. alter. and control the
execution ofa block:
Enter T (or QBT) on the SELECTION line to get a list of all
the blocks on the system diskette (displayed are module IDs.
block names. and the block status). Block status can be
either MATCH-WAIT (indicates that the block is positioned at
a match command waiting for an· address compare to occur)
or no status.
«
c
(
Use the following commands to edit a block (enter them to
the left of the line numbers on the screen):
Rules For Specifying Blockname
The name you choose for a block can be up to eight
characters long and must follow these conventions:
(
Executes a line and ends-edit immediately.
Use the = command to execute the line as if it
were entered from the SELECTION line. The
line must begin with a a command; else. it is
not executed. (You use the = .command to
diagnose errors that occur during the
attempted activation of a block.) Note that
after executing the = command. no 'block data
is saved and the processor exits from the
block facility.
EDITING A BLOCK
*EDIT MODE COMMANDS*
S SAVE, END EDIT
N END EDIT, NO SAVE
X DELETE LINE
A ADD BEFORE LINE
o DUPLICATE LINE
M MOVE BEFORE> LINE
-
= EXECUTE LINE, END EDIT
-
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
OB
-DC
00
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
DO.02.DETECTST
MSG.WAITING.FOR.OATA.STORE
QAS0040080
MATCH
S1=5QDP1
COMP.S1.00A30000.070909
MSG.PSW.LT.A300
GOTO.OE
MSG.PSW.GE.A300
*.SAVE.GENERAL.REGISTERS.E&F
QOGE?
QOGF?
XFER.SAVEMEM
S2=S2+00000001.LOOP. INDICATION
KEV.START.01.GET.GOING.AGAIN
NOP.LOOK.FOR.DATA.STDRE.TWICE
END.OOOO.I.LAST NAME."'M/DO/YY
==>
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN 2676424
1 of 4
44635f
(
('
ERASING BLOCKS (R blockname)
TRANSFERRING BLOCKS
AUTOMATlQ\llV RUNNING A BLOCK AT IML (M)
Enter R blockname (or OSR blockname) on the SELECTION
line to erase the block from the diskette and remove-its. name
from the block index (replace blockname with the nama of
the block you want to erase).
(K blockname1 <.blockname2>J
Use- the M (or DBM) command to automatically run a block
after a successfullML. Enter on the IML PATCH screen
(atter S/3.70 or VSE mode) the desired block name(s). (Note
that you can enter only one block name per CORELOAD. If
you need·' to run' more' than one· block. give control to
subsequent blocks' by including the XFER command within
the previOtdi.black.)
Enter K blockname1 < .blockname2 > (or aSK
blockname1 < .blockname2 » on the SELECTION line to·
transfer (copy) a block from one diskette. to another- (replace
blockname1 and blockname2. with the name(s) of the-block
involved in the transfer). If you do not specify bloekname2,
the processor assumes that blocknameZ'is the sarne;;as:
blockname1.
ACTIVATING BLOCKS (A blockname)
Enter A blockname (or DBA blockname) on the SElECTfON
line to start the block running (replace blockname with the
name of the block you want to activate). The block: runs until
an error occurs. the MATCH command is encountered•... the
MODE'SEL key'ispressed (abortathe run). or the block.
successfully' terminates.
'
The action that occurs after entering K blocknamel
< .blockname2 > is as follows:
•
The block indelt.is searched for blocknamel. After-'lhe
block is located; it i.a read into' storage ..
Block Status Area While thEr block is running (via the A
•
You are now prompted ta switch diskettes.
(activate) command). the current status of the block is
displayed in the message area. The status field is in. the
following format:
•
Slockname1 (or .blockname2 in the case where
.blockname2 is specified) is now compared with the' block
names on the new (to.t)e.,copied tol diskette., If:the··same
block name is found. the. old block datcris overwritten
with·the new block data. It it is not found. the-new block
name is entered into the- block index and the block is
written in the first available area' on the diskette;
ACT: fits saveLN line LP loop
•
ACT = indicates that the block is. being activated.
•
sts
= Status. field;
either:
RUN = running
ERR = error in LN line
END = successful completion of block
HLT aborted with the MODE SEL key
MAT = waiting for an address: match to occur
XFR = transfer in progress.
save = Set to SAVE if the aDS area is full (aDS savearea
overflow); otherwise blank.
Note: Do not press the Copy key while transferring a block;
the transfer is not completed; "you m;stakenly.press the
Copy Key. re-enter the transfer (K) command.
=
•
LN line
•
LP loop = Two-digit loop number in hex.
IMI:: PATCl'+ SCREEN
IHl PATCHES
*BtDCKS*
T L.I51"
F EIlIT
R ERASE
CDRELDAD
BLOCK NAME
A ACTrVATE
S/370:
K· TR'AKSFER
Use the X (or OSX) command to initialize the block index;
This command applies in. those instances where a block has
been written on the diskette via the Module Transfer function.
If any block names are miSSing from the block index. the. X
command automatically places them in the index.
HALTING BLOCKS (H)
VSE:
HHALT
INITIALIZING THE INDEX (Xl
= Two-digit line number in hex.
•
To:: run the-.'btoek,. answer YES to the-RUN PATCHES
after. a successful IML. After you press:
the ENTEff' ~ the processor is placed in a hard,..stopped
state· (operatiom rate" set: to microwoFd step}. If the block runs
successfullY. thestatuscfield on ttle Program Load. screen
displayS' IML eOMf1tET~. If unsuccessful. 1M L does not
compt.ete~ and.thei sereelldisplays PATCH ERROR.
questi.orr~ appeaES
X INIT INDEX
M IML PATCHES
Q. GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
Enter H (or DBH) on the SELECTION line to clear the block
message and status areas on line 23. and reset all information
pertaining to running blocks. If a block is in MATCH-WAIT
status. a message appears to warn· you that an
address-compare match is still waiting to occur and therefore
has not been removed by the H command. Note that H canonlybe used to stop a block in match-wait status (the
keyboard remains locked until MATCH-WAIT status is
attained).
SELECTIOH:M
==->
PH' 2616424
Zof4
C)
\
i,
(~
~,./
0 C) 'J
1",--:
r)
\..
0
(1"-'l1
\))
(~
0
(~
\
.. ./
(~
',,-Y
0
0 () 0
'",-
n 0
,--y
\
0 C) 0 0 0
0
~j/
0 C)
I•.
_
~"
',,-Y
0
0\...j
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
o o
(
Block Execution Commands
MSG <.text>
SAVING DATA
Block execution commands are those commands that are
within a block.
This command allows you to enter informational messages
within a block. When the MSG command is encountered
during execution of the block, the text of the message is
displayed on line 23 of the display console. To make the
message easy to read, place a period (.) between each word
(recall that the code removes all blanks within a line).
aD ... ?
FAST-SELECTING A SCREEN (a screenid)
This is the most common type of block command. It is what
you would enter on the SELECTION line to get from one
screen to another in order to perform a function on the called
screen. Use the Q screenid command to either:
•
Alter some state of the machine (For an example, see line
03 on the "Editing a Block" screen).
Return information to the block facility (places the returned
information into the block save area via the ODS
command). (For an example, see lines OB and OC on the
"Editing a Block" screen.)
Note: The machine must be soft-stopped before executing a
QD command that modifies PU data.
DO.xx.blockname
This command is the first command in the block and appears
only once. xx is the loop number in hex. Replace it with the
number of times you want the block to execute. The name
of the block blockname is automatically inserted in the DO
command; therefore, do not try to change its name.
NOPS<.comment>
This command is used only for spacing or commenting
purposes.
* comment
This command is used only for spacing or commenting
purposes.
TOD<.comment>
Use this command to set the time-of-day clock in the save
area.
END.xxxx<.name.date>
This command must be the last command in a block; it
terminates the block. xxxx is a four-digit hex number
(entered by you when you first key in the END command) that
is compared with the CRC value when the block is saved.
You can enter name.date either when you first key in the
END command or when it is requested by the S (save)
command. (CRC value is sometimes called CHECKSUM.)
HALT <.comment>
Use the HALT command to immediately terminate execution
of the block even if more loops remain to be executed.
Note: Do not confuse this HALT command with the block
screen H (or OBH) command which suspends the execution
of a block at MATCH-WAIT only.
GOTO.line <.comment>
Use the GOTO command to go to the line number specified
and then continue processing there.
SETTING (AND SAVING) VARIABLE DATA
Sn= a screenid
Sn=aaa <.comment>
Use this command to set and save variable data within a
four-byte save area. You can enter up to five of these
commands within a block (substitute the number 1 to 5 for
the n in the command).
You have the following two ways of specifying this
command:
Sn= 0 screenid
Use the following two examples as an aid in
understanding this method.
S2=ODM000078? - This example indicates that the bytes
stored at locations 78 through 7B of main storage are to
be set into a save area named S2 (the save area can hold
up to four bytes of information).
S3=20DMOOOO78? - In this example, the number 2
immediately after the equal (=) sign indicates that the first
two bytes in main storage address 78 (that is, bytes 78
and 79) are to be skipped. Therefore, the save area
named S3 contains the bytes stored at storage locations
7A through 70. This method allows you to get to the
data you want to save in those instances where the field
contains more than four bytes. For example when you
specify a main storage address (as in this example). eight
bytes are available to you, but you can save only four of
the available eight bytes. [The number immediately
following the equal (=) sign indicates the number of bytes
to be skipped, proceeding from left to right. If the saved
data is less than four bytes long, the save area is padded
with zeroes to the right of the data.]
Sn=aaa <.comment>
Use this method if you either want to set a constant (for
example, S2=00000002) or you want to calculate and save
a variable by using an arithmetic expression (for example,
S3=S 1+00000008). In the above command, substitute the
number 1 through 5 for n, substitute Sl through S5 or an
eight-digit constant for aaa, and substitute one of the
following op codes for opcode.
+
&
/
Add
Subtract
And
Or
(
(
(
(
(~\
(
TRANSFERRING CONTROL FROM ONE BLOCK TO
ANOTHER
av... ?
XFER.blockname
Use these commands to save data within the save area. For
a list of the 00 and OV commands that you can use to save
data, see "Display/Alter Block Save Area (ODS)" in Volume
18, Console functions. The question mark (?) after the
command instructs the processor to save the data pointed to
by the command. For example, the ODGE? command copies
the data in general register E, into a block save area. (You
can see what has been saved in the block save area by using
the Display / Alter ODS screen.)
Block Save Area The
that you point to via the
more information on the
Block Save Area (ODS)"
(
(
block save area is used to store data
00, OV, or Sn commands. For
block save area, see "Display / Alter
in Volume 18, Console Functions.
COMPARING DATA
COMP.aaa.bbb.line1 line2 line3 <.comment>
Use this command to compare aaa with bbb and as a result
of the comparison (see below). branch to line1, Iine2, or
line3. Substitute Sl through S5 or an eight-digit constant
for aaa and bbb. Line1, line2, and line3 are two-digit line
numbers (hex) that identify a line within the block.
If aaa < bbb then go to line1
If aaa = bbb then go to line2
If aaa > bbb then go to line3.
Example:·
COMP.S2.ooo00002.0A 11OB.CHECK.S2
In this example the data in area S2 is compared with constant
00000002. Execution continues at line OA if 52 is zero or
one, at line 11 if S2 is two, and at line OB if S2 is greater
than two. CHECK.S2 is an optional comment
. Use the XFER command to transfer control from the current
block to the block indicated by blockname. XFER terminates
the current block without error, regardless of how many loops
remain to be executed (has the same effect as the block
execution HALT command). The new block is activated and
starts running as t~ ough it were started from the SELECTION
line. The data saved by the save-variable, 00, or OV
commands (in the block save area) is not cleared when the
new block starts running; this data is saved from one block to
another.
WAITING FOR AN ADDRESS MATCH TO OCCUR
MATCH <.comment>
Use the MATCH command to Signal the block to stop running
and to begin waiting for the address compare set up by the
QAoo. command to occur. The MATCH command does not
need to follow the QAOo. command immediately. Also, once
you set up an address compare in a block, you do not need
to set up another match using the same conditions. The
following example illustrates a possible block:
QAHC8600
KEY.START.Ol
MATCH
OOM
KEY.START.02
OVAL108?
QAN
OON
KEY.START.02
Set compare for hard-stop on storage
address match
Start PU running
Wait for match to occur
Set op rate for microword step
Run two microwords
Record data in local storage
Set address compare to normal
Set op rate to normal
Start PU running again
NOTE: A QD or QV command cannot be executed between
the QA and MATCH commands.
SIMULATING THE START OR STOP KEY
KEY.START.xx<.comment>
KEY.STOP< .comment>
This command simulates pressing the START or STOP key on
the console. If you specify START, you must also provide a
two-digit hex number to indicate the number of times the key
is to be activated. You can also provide an optional
comment.
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN 2676424
30t 4
44 645t
Executing a Block
You initiate the execution of a block with the A (activate)
command. The block starts to execute after the block data
and initial status information are displayed and the message
area is cleared.
The order of execution of the block commands depends on
those commands that change the flow of control (for
example, by using the compare command you can skip to a
predetermined line).
Using the Address Compare (QA... ) and MATCH
Commands
The only way you can suspend execution of a block is with
the Fast-Select Address Compare (OA ... ) command combined
with the block MATCH command. After the address compare
is set by the OA... command, the block executes until it
encounters a MATCH command. The block facility then
releases control and unlocks the keyboard so that normal
processing can begin (the block is transparent to the user).
When a match occurs, execution of the block resumes at
the next command following the MATCH command. Because
the match can occur anytime, the machine can be in any state
upon return to the block facility. If block execution resumes
when a keyboard is in manual mode, that keyboard is locked
until the block releases control. (During this time, the screen
that was displayed remains unchanged.)
Aborting a Block
If a block is executing, you can stop its execution by pressing
the MODE SEL key (if inhibited, the keyboard must be reset
first). Any Fast-Select commands waiting to be executed,
finish execution before termination occurs.
If a block is waiting for a match to occur, the block screen
Halt (H) command must be used. This terminates block
execution but leaves the address compare active (you can
clear this compare with the address compare screen OAN
command).
IML Effect on a Running Block
If you IML the machine while a block is waiting for a match
to occur, the block is halted.
If you want to trap or record an error condition, the block
you use must be active (waiting for a match) ~\Ihenever the
processor is running. Make the block active ty using the
block screen M command. See" Automatically Running a
Block at IML (M)."
Model Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN 2676424
44 6501
40f4
~~
,,))
0
("'!I\
Y
rJl
\._~
r~
~y
I~
~jJ
(~
~
()
~"
("",!\
\,,--~
r"'"
',,-)
I~)
'-....
,!'
r)
~i
~~
~j!
C)
0 0
,r'-~
~y
0 G 0
)
0 0
0
0
0 0
0~y
n
~;
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
PATCH FACILITY
microcode and store the patch on the .systemdiskette .. You
can enter a patch that contains up to -19 commands (one
command per linel. Two types of patch commands are
available to you:
•
Commands that Display (TPI. Edit (Fl. Erase (RI. Activate
{AI •. Deactivate (01. and Transfer (Klpatches (see "Patch
Commands"l. Note that the Edit (FI command provides
you with additional commands to edit the patch (see
"Editing Patches "I.
Commands that are used in the execution of the patch
-are: the DO. END. NOPS. • comment. and QDD
commands lsee "Patch Execution Commands").
Command
S
:The first character must be a P.
• -The next three characters must be the last. three digits of
the microcode EC number.
The next charac:ter should be an M.
• ' The .Iast three character. are a three-digit numbering
~hem..
.
.Patch Commands
N
Use the following commands to enter. control. and transfer
patches:
/.'
'X
. '. DISPLAYiNG THE PATCH LIST (TP)
EnterTP lor OBTPJ on the SELECTION line to get a list of all
the patchel! on the system diskette (displayed are module
IDs. patch names. and patch statusl. The patch status can
. '
be:
!
i
~
Status '.
Description
Active
Indicates that~. patch is·'recorded on the
diSkette and ipPIiedtothe microcode.
InactiY!l
Indicates that the patch name is in the patch
indeX. but the patch is not functionallthe
effects .of.the·patCh have been removed
from the miCrocode).
i
j
I: '~~,
l
I
Erf'or
1;
•
l
,.'
'Indicates that in error 1)Ccurredwhile a
patch was being activated. .The patch is not
activated. but its name remains in the patch
index.
Use the F patchname command to instilll (for astep-,by-step
procedure. see "Patch Installation and Update Procedure" in
Console Functions Service Aids) a new patch or to make
,changes to an existing patch (replace patchname with the ,
;i
;,
o
,
~
K
o
Duplicates a line.
Use the'D command to duplicate the line that
contains the 0 command.
M
Moves a line.
Usethe M command. in combination with the
> command. to move the line preceded by an
M. ahead of the line with the >.
>
Inserts a line.
Use the> command. in ,combination with the
M command. to move the line preceded by an
M. ahead of the line with the >•
tBM Corp. '981
(
PATCH LIST
NAME
10
9580 P322MOOI
9581 P322M008
9582 P322MOIO
9583
958..
9585
9586
9587
(
(
10
NAME
9590
9591
9592
9593
959..
9,595
9596
9597
INACTIVE
ACTIVE
ERROR
9588
9589
958A
958B
958C
9580
958E
958F
9598
9599
959A
9598
959C
9590
,959E
959F
SELECTION:TP
==>
..3 .. 1
EDITING A PATCH
*EOIT MODE COMMANDS.
S SAVE. ACT I.VATE
N END EDIT. NO SAVE
Deietes a line.
Use the X command to delete the specified
line. The remaining lines move up one.
Adds a blank line:
.Use the A command. to put a blank line ahead
of the line with the A command.
TRANSFER
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
Ends edit immediately (no data is savedl.
A
•
EDITING PATCHES (F patchnamet
,
"
*PATCHES·
T BLOCK LIST
F EDIT
R ERASE
A ACTIVATE
0 DEACTIVATE
Edit Function
Saves data and activates the patch.
The S command writes the .patch on the
system diskette. enters the patch name in the
'patch index; applies the patch to the
microcode. and sets the patch status to active.
(If you enter incorrect patch data. the patch is
not applied to the microcode nor set to active
statusl. During the execution of the S
command. the status of the patch is displayed
in the message area (see "Patch Status
Area lt ).
(
(
DISPLAYING THE PAT-CHLIST
Use the following commands to edit a patch lenter them to
the left of the line numbers on the screenl:
The. patch name is eight characters long and follows these
•
conventions:
•
(
Pressing the ENTER key also performs a cyclical redundancy
check (CRCI on the body of the patch (CRC is sometimes called
CHECKSUM I. The CRC check includes the first line (DO
commandl and all remaining lines except lines with NOP, .,
and the END commands. The check value (calculated by the
processorl is compared with the four-digit hex number
specified in the END command.
Rules For Patchnames
•
('
name of the patch youwant10:8dit).&ter F patchname (or
aSF patchnameJ on the SElECTION.lioe: this 'PUts -the
..
desired patch in edit mode. You can now'enterpatch data by
Positioning the cursor and keying in the data. -'After keying in
all the data. press the ENTER key; the code' checks the
syntax of the lines. (If an error occurs. the cursor is
positioned under the error. I Any blanks within a .line of data
are deleted., Also checked is the size of the patch ,and
whether or not the DO and END commands are in the proper
places.
The patch facility allows you to patch (make changes tol
•
(
X DELETE LINE
A ADD BEFORE LINE
DUPLICATE LINE
M MOVE BEFORE> LINE
o
= EXECUTE LINE. END EDIT
-
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OA
OB
OC
OD
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
DO.OI.POOOMOOO
QDD900100081A3.. 10=78880
QDD9001003413555=3554
QD09001013A1A5-09F0345004F032AC
END.OOOO.I.LAST NAME.MM/OO/YY
==>
4341
Executes a line and ends edit immediately•
Use 'the· command to execute the line as if it
were entered from ·the SELECTION line. The
line must begin with aQ command; else. it is
not executed. (Vou use ,the- command to
diagnose erroi's that occur during the
attempted activation cif a patchl.Note ,that
after executing the • 'command. no patch data
is saved. and the processor exits from the
patch facility.
'
Mod.l Group 2
EC 379808 06Mar81
PN 2676426
44655f
10f2
t
1
,,
t
i
1
-',J
.j
~
.l
'~
.i
I
,
,
(
(
(
I
ERASING PATCHES (R patchname)
TRANSFERRING PATCHES (K patchname)
Enter R patchname lor aBR patchname) on the SELECTION
line to: remove the effects of the specified patch from the
microcode. erase the patch from the diskette. and remove the
patch name from the patch index Ireplace patchname with the
name of the patch you want to erase).
Enter K patchname (or asK patchname) on the SELECTION
line to transfer (copy) a Plltch from one diskette to another
(replace patchname with the na....e of the patch you want to
transfer). If a patch with the SlIme name exists on the new
(to be copied to) diskette, and it is in the active state, the
transfer is not made. After you successfully transfer the
patch. it is automatically activ,eted.
ACTIVATING PATCHES (A patchname)
The action that occurs after entering K patchname is as
follOws:
Enter A patchname (or aBA patchname) on the SELECTION
line to apply the specified patch to the microco~e (replace
parchname with the name of the patch you want to activate).
The patch runs until an error occurs or the patch successfully
terminates.
The patch index is searched for patchname to locate the
patch. Then the patch is read into storage.
•
• ' Patchname is now compared with the patch names ori' the
new (to be copied to) diskette. If a patch with the same
name exists on the new (to be copied to) disitette, and it
;s in the active state. the transfer is not made. If the
same patch name is found and it is not active. the old
patch data is overwritten with the new patch data. If it is
not found. the new patch name is entered into the patch
list. and the patch is written in the first available ares on
the diskette.
DEACTIVATING PATCHES (D patchname)
Enter D patchname ,(or OsD patchname! on the SELECTION
line to remove the effects of the patch from the microcode
(replace patchname ,with the name of the patch you want to
deactivate). The patch name remains in the patch list;
however. its status becomes inactive.
PATCH STATUS AREA While the patch is running [via
the S (save). A (activate). or 0 Ideactivate) commands). the
current status of the patch is displayed in the message area.
The status field is in the following format:
func: Ita
•
The patch is applied to the microcode.
Patch Execution
Patch execution commands are those commands that are
within a patch.
You initiate the execution of a patch with the S (savel orA
(activate)' commands. The patch starts to execute after the
patch data and initial status information are displayed and the
message area is cleared.
DO.01.patchname
This command is the first command in the patch and appears
only once. The name of the patch (patchname) is
automatically inserted in the DO command; therefore. do not
try to change its name.
aDD
This command alters the microcode on the diskette•
,NOPS<.comment>
This command is used only for spacing or commenting
purposes.
• comment
This command is uSl!d only for spacing or commenting
purposes.
LN line LP 01
END.xxxx<.name.date>
func· Function being performed; either.
This command must be the last command in a patch; it
terminates the patch. xxxx is a four-digit hex, number
(entered by you when you first key in the END command) that
is compared with the CRC value when the patch is saved.
You can enter name. date either when you fit&t key in the
END command or when it is requested by the S (save)
command. (CRC value is sometimes called CHECKSUM.)
CHK • checking patch to verify that it will activate or
deactivate.
ACT· patch is being activated.
DAC - patch is being deactivated.
•
You are now prompted to switch diskettes.
Patch Execution Commands
sts - Status field; either:
RUN - running.
ERR- error in LN line.
END· successful completion of patch.
•
LN line - Two-digit line number in hex.
• lP 01 - loop number (always 01).
*,
Model Group 2
PN 2676426 'I
20f2
_
/'~]
".J'
f(J
0
'J
0
(~
I,,--~
r
!1
j,0
)\-y
"
V)
J",- .
o
f
(-
(
(
f'
REMOTE SUPPORT FACILITY
The Remote Support Facility (RSF) enables linking the
display console, through a switched network, to a support
center or to a data bank system (if available) for diagnostic
assistance. The RSF is for service usage, and is not meant
to be used as a teleprocessing port.
If the maintenance package does not successfully resolve
a problem, the on-site service personnel can invoke a data
bank operation (if a data bank system is available) for
additional diagnostic information. The RSF also enables a
remote specialist to assist on-site service personnel in
problem resolution by observing and initiating functional
operations of the 4341. The RSF permits remote operation
of all system functions except those requiring manual
intervention (power on/off, IML, initial I/O control, etc.).
*GENERAL SELECTION*
Data Bank Invoke Procedures
Y
To establish a data bank connection:
J
1. Ensure that the 4341 has the required hardware (two
cards) installed. Information on the types of cards,
installation procedures, and card setup is in the
Installation Procedures.
Note: If you install the cards, run the diagnostics (MSS
option diagnostics, selection DO) before proceeding.
Also ensure that a COT 1DOOA coupler (or equivalent)
and dataphone are available.
2. Set the CE MODE switch ON, and stop the PU (QOM).
PROGR
CLEAR
CM
RES
SAVE
z
X
TIME OF DAY-ENABLE
INTERVAL TIMER-SWITCH
F CONFIGURATION
L PROGRAM LOAD
B BLOCK/PATCH
SYSTEM RESET-PROGRAM
SYSTEM RESET-CLEAR
MACHINE RESET
A COMPARE/TRACE
K CHECK CONTROL
o OPERATION RATE
RESTART
o DISPLAY/ALTER
V INSERT/EXTRACT
MACHINE SAVE
RETURN TO PROG SYS
SP STORAGE DISPLAY
E ERROR LOGOUTS
M POWER/TEMPERATURE
I 0 I SKETTE I PL
3. Select the General Selection screen:
a. Key in Q next to SELECTION.
REMOTE SUPPORT FACILITY KEYS
Two keys on the 4341 operator console keyboard are
dedicated to the RSF:
1. Communications Request (COM M REQ) Key -
This key
initiates voice or terminal communication between an
on-site service representative and a remote specialist.
InitiatiCig a communications request can be done by
either the on-site service representative or the remote
specialist.
2. Line Disconnect (LINE DISC) Key - This key can be
used to abort RSF initialization. It can also be used to
disconnect the data link.
==>
SELECTIO"l:
b. Press the ENTER key.
4341
4. Select the Configuration screen:
a. Key in F next to SELECTION.
b. Press the ENTER key.
5. Select the ROB Initialization screen:
a. Key in D.
b. Press the ENTER key.
(Once the procedure becomes familiar, you can do a
fast-selection by entering QFD.l
*CONFIGURATION*
DATA BANK MODE
If the maintenance package does not successfully resolve a
problem, the on-site service personnel may invoke a data
bank operation (if a data bank system is available) for
additional diagnostic information.
In Remote Data Bank (ROB) mode, the 4341 console
operates as a data bank system terminal. For details
concerning the use of ROB mode, invoke your support
structure.
S
A
P
M
R
C
D
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CONSOLE COLOR CONVERGENCE
CONSOLE TEST PATTERN
MODULE TRANSFER
REMOTE CONSOLE INITIALIZATION
REMOTE CONSOLE COMMUNICATIONS
DATA BANK INITIALIZATION
T
TAPE TO DISKETTE BUILD (IBM AFE ONLY)
Q
GENERAL SELECTION
RETURN TO PROG SYS
Z
SELECTION:
==>
4341
...
Model Group 2
EC 379825 OSJun81
PN 2676429
44675f
© IBM Corp. 1981
1 of 2
:) 0
Data Bank Operations
MACHINE TYPE - The data in this field is supplied
by the microcode.
EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED - You supply this
data. You must enter the proper response (N for
internal modem; Y for external modem) depending 01'
the hardware configuration. (The default answer is
N.)
6. Put the correct response into the input field of the
screen.
7. Press ENTER.
Follow the instructions in your support structure.
·DATA BANK INITIALIZATION.
MACHINE SERIAL NO. - The data in this field is
supplied by the microcode.
Data Bank Disconnect Procedures
MACHINE TYPE .•.•. : 4341
MACHINE SERIAL NO: yyyyyy
Follow the instructions in your support structure.
EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED ... (Y/N): N
Data Bank Mode Restrictions
Q GENERAL
1. The following 4341 display console system function keys
are NOT supported in RDB mode:
SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
START
STOP
INTR
COMM REQ
PAGE UP
Note: The LINE DISC key is now functional.
8. Invoke your support structure.
SELECT I ON: D
4341
CHG DPLY
SPM/O
MODE SEL
DIAG
PAGE DOWN
2. After Data Bank mode is terminated, the state of the
4341 is unpredictable. SP reset, re-IML, or re-IPL is
necessary, depending on the state of the 4341 at that
time.
REMOTE CONSOLE SUPPORT
For Remote Console Support, invoke your support structure .
• DATA BANK INITIALIZATION.
MACHINE TyPE ..... : 4341
MACHINE SERIAL NO: yyyyyy
EXTERNAL MODEM INSTALLED ... (Y/N): N
APPLICATION: (64 byte non-displayable input area)
4341
EC 379825 05Jun81
PN 2676429
44 680~
2 of 2
a
o
() ()
00
o o
00
o o o
(~o·_"
~
.
,0,:,
o o
(
(
(
(
(
«
(
(
*REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY*
The Remote Operator Console Facility screen is selectable
only when the ROCF Auto-Ans modem is configured on the
System Configuration (QFS) screen.
To select the Remote Operator Console Facility screen from
the Configuration screen:
M
P
C
ROCF MODE-SWITCH
PROTECTION-SWITCH
CHANGE PASSWORD
S
R
LINE SPEED-SWITCH
RESET SECURITY COUNT
N
T
SYSTEM NODE ID
CONSOLE DEVICE
1. Key B next to F on the SELECTION line.
D
SYSTEM POWER DOWN
2. Press ENTER. Remote Operator Console Facility screen is
Q
GENERAL SELECTION
RETURN TO PROG SYS
Z
displayed.
* STATUS AREA •
ROCF MODE ENABLED
PASSWORDS REQUIRED
SYS NODE ID IBM 4341
CONSOLE DEV T 1
(-
Notes:
•
If no device is assigned when selecting the T-option, you
are prompted with the choice of valid consoles to enter.
The console assignment is valid only when that device
has been installed to the system through the System
Configuration (QFS) screen.
•
SYS POWER ON
If the assigned device is not ready when the Remote
Operator Console link is activated, an alternate console is
selected.
o
System Power Down: Entering D on the SELECTION
line and pressing ENTER powers down the Remote system.
==>
SELECTION: B
M ROCF Mode-Switch: The Remote Operator Console
Facility is alternately enabled and disabled each time the
M-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER
key is pressed. The current status is highlighted in the status
area on the right side of the screen.
4341
Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT
REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The
message REENTER SELECTION appears. Reenter the
D-option and press ENTER again.
Return to General Selection (a)
Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT
REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The
message REENTER SELECTION appears. Reenter the
M-option and press ENTER again.
or Not Required each time the P-option is selected. Entering
P on the SELECTION line and pressing ENTER prompts you
to enter the correct password. Entering the correct password
and preSSing the ENTER key completes the selection. The
current status is highlighted in the status area on the right
side of the screen.
(
(
Remote Operator Console Facility is initialized is assigned
with the T -option. Entering Tn (where n = 0, 1, 2, or 3) next
to SELECTION assigns that device for the facility. The status
area on the right side of the screen indicates which console is
to be linked to the host system when the Remote Operator
Console Facility is activated.
LINE SPEED 1200BPS
SEC COUNT 14
To update the Remote Operator Console Facility record:
P Protection-Switch: Passwords are alternately Required
(
T Console Device: The Console Device to which the
REMOTE OPERATOR CONSOLE FACILITY (QFB)
The B-selection from the Configuration screen displays the
Remote Operator Console Facility screen. The Remote
Operator Console Facility screen provides selections which
assist system operation in a Distributed Data Processing
environment. When the system is operated in this mode,
personnel at a host site have the ability to control the 4341
via the Remote Support Facility (RSF) port.
(
(
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
C Change Password: To change the password for the
S Line Speed Switch: The Line Speed switch is
Remote Operator Console Facility:
alternately changed between 600 bps and 1200 bps each
time the S-option is entered on the SELECTION line and the
ENTER key is pressed. The current line speed is highlighted
in the status area on the right side of the screen.
1. Enter C next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER. ENTER NEW PASSWORD message is
displayed.
3. Enter new password.
4. Press ENTER. REPEAT NEW PASSWORD message is
displayed.
Notes:
When passwords are required, all selections require
entering the CUrl 3nt password before any changes take
effect.
5. Enter new password again.
6. Press ENTER. ENTER OLD PASSWORD message is
displayed.
The passwords are entered into a nondisplayable field.
Return to Prog Sys (Z)
1. Key Z next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
Note: If the protection switch is set to PASSWORDS NOT
REQUIRED, the entry is cleared after pressing ENTER. The
message REENTER SELECTION appears. Reenter the
S-option and press ENTER again.
R Reset Security Count: The security counter is reset
each time the R-option is entered on the SELECTION line
and the ENTER key is pressed. The current count is
displayed in the status area on the right side of the screen.
7. Enter old password.
8. Press ENTER. ENTER DATE MM!DD/YY message is
displayed.
9. Enter the date.
10.
Press ENTER. PASSWORD CHANGED message is
displayed.
Notes:
The passwords are entered into a nondisplayable field.
@ IBM Corp.
1981
•
A minimum of four and a maximum of eight characters
are required for the password.
•
If the entered date is not a valid date, the user is
allowed one attempt to correct the date.
N System Node 10: The node identification is changed
each time the N-option followed by the new node ID is
entered on the SELECTION line and the ENTER key is
pressed. The current node ID is highlighted in the status area
on the right side of the screen.
Notes:
•
Entering N on the SELECTION line and pressing ENTER
prompts you for a Node /D.
The Node ID can consist of eight characters maximum.
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
PN 2676463
1 of 1
44691f
3000000000000000000000000000000000
(-
(
(
(
("
f
(~
(
DtSKETTE BUILD (QFT)
(~
(
(~
C 0
0
"
"
..
.
.
(_.
(-
(.
(-
('
('
(Diskette Build Function)
DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION
The diskette build function enables the service
representative to build functional and/or diagnostic
diskettes from a tape.
STEP
ONE
The tape used to build the required diskette contains the
machine serial number and the diskette image data format
generated by manufacturing.
MOUNT TAPE CONTAINING THE DISKETTE IMAGE AND THEN
ENTER THE TAPE UNIT ADDRESS IN THE FORMAT 'CUU'
The diskette build procedure is divided into steps with
instruction sequenced screens.
This procedure requires:
•
A successful 1M L of the processor.
•
CE MODE switch set to ON.
•
Operation Rate set to NORMAL (OON)
Q GENERAL
SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECT I ON: T
==>
Diskette Build Procedure
434·1
To display the Diskette Build Function screen from the OF
screen:
1. Key T next to SELECTION.
2. Press ENTER.
This step requires mounting the tape containing the
diskette image and entering the correct three-digit address
for the tape drive being used.
Tape Load
(Tape Load)
The Tape Load screen (Step 2) is displayed after the tape
drive address has been entered.
DISKETTE BUILDER FUNCTION
This step requires entering the correct part number of the
diskette to be built.
STEP TWO
Diskette Part Numbers:
GRP 1
56k
GRP 1
64k
ENTER THE PART NUMBER OF THE DISKETTE
TO BE BUILT (7 DIGITS)
GRP 2
DISKETTE
PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL
1954214
1954230
1954255
D IAGNOSTI CS 1
1954215
1954231
1954256
Q GENERAL
DIAGNOSTICS 2
.1954216
1954232
1954257
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
DIAGNOSTICS 3
1954217
1954233
1954258
DIAGNOSTICS 4
1954218
1954234
1954259
D IAGHOSTI CS 5
1954166
1954166
1954166
PADI
1954189
1954224
1954254
SELECTION
SELECTION: T191
After the part number has been entered, the message
LOADING TAPE is displayed in the system message area.
© IBM Corp. 1981
==>
4341
Model Group 2
EC 379827 020ct81
EC 379829 28Jun82
PN 2676416
1 of 2
. - - - . -. . .
44 695f
__ . ._- ..
-
...
....
~---
--~
...
-
-
(Diskette Build)
Diskette Build
Return to General Selection (Q)
'The Diskette Build screen (Step 3) is displayed after the
diskette image has been read from the tape into PU
storage. The message TAPE. LOADED is displayed in the
system message area.
DISKETIE BUILDER FUNCTION
1. Key Q next to SELECTION.
STEP THREE
Mount a formatted 4341 diskette into the diskette drive,
and press the ENTER key. The message DISKETTE BEING
BUILT is displayed in the system message area.
2: Press
ENTER~
Return to Prog Sys (2)
1. Key ZnexttoSELECnON.
MOUNT A 4341 FORMATIED DISKETIE fN THE CONSOLE
DISKETIE DRIVER AltO THEN PRESS THE ENTER KEY
2. Press ENTER.
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
SELECTION: T1234567
==>
TAPE LOADED
434.1
(Diskette Label)
Diskette Label
The Diskette Label screen (Step 4) is displayed after the
diskette is built. Copy this information or mount a copy of
the screen displayed onto the diskette. After a copy of the
information is obtained, replace the diskette. The Q-screen
now appears.
DISKETIE BUILDER FUNCTION
LABEL FOR THE OISKETIE JUST BUILT:
• •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••*••
For installing this diskette, follow the same procedure as
for' any new diskette. See Volume 13/16, Section 14,
11 Diskette EC Update Procedure. 11
•
53FD •
SER NO. 0123456 •
• 4341-001
001FU1·
• FUNCT
• LINK DATE 00000000000 ISEQ. 01 •
• PN-
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
S.ELECTION: T1234567
•
•
•
•
•~
0001234567
EC- 000000000
REA
GIO- T1234567
•.
Ii
•
0001234567 •
DATE
••••••••••••••••••••
*.*.******.*••••
• XX9999
==>
REPLACE ORIGINAL DISK
4141
Model Group 2
I
"E. C379B27' oaOct81[t-_P;....;N~26764..;;.;.;...;;....;;.1..;...;6~
_EC 319829' 28Jun8Z [
Z. of 2
0', 0"·:·,
,
'
.
,~
\,-y
o
00
00'00000
o
-0 iO 0
__._ ......;. ;1.::.c........_
o o o 00 o o
0,
,','
o o
441QOf
I
a
(
(
('
(
(
f
(
•
• • •
(
(
(
(
('
(
INDEX
This index is a composite of both model groups and
storage sources of the 4341.
A page reference in parentheses indicates an earlier EC.
~
A any reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A patchname. activating patches .............
aborting a block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACB value changed by XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ac drive parts (diskette drive)
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
access and return of diskette
drive 2D assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
accumulate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
accumulation sw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
action parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
action strings. power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
activating patches (A patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
actuation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
actuation tool blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
adapter
cable (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card (interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
communications common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
device cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSS card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power controller
detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
probe tip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
support bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
support control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test. EIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
'additional protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addr cuu already assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addr field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
address
adder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
already used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compare circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compare (OA) and match command ..........
CUU already assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
out of range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
adjustment
clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS210 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS211 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS212 vo'itage .... ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS21 3 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© IBM Corp. 1981
44
44
44
44
225
660
650
155
15035
15 065
15
44
44
44
20
44
11
11
025
220
220
215
415
660
020
016
15
14
34
34
34
34
20
100
225
170
140
130
155
350
20 345
34 150
11 025
34 160
34 165
14515
40 105
20 055
44 155
44 230
34
44
44
34
44
44
44
44
44
045
155
350
070
650
155
155
215
155
13
12
12
12
12
005
066
066
066
069
adjustment (continued)
solenoid and bail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 055
voltage
IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20215
switching regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215
ADR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085
address. invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
address too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155
advanced capabilities. 4300-FRIEND ........... 40 055
AFS103 fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
air flow sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
air inlet sensor (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
air moving device monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
air moving devices (AMDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
air outlet sensor (AOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
AIS (air inlet sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
alarm
audible. volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 090
console. audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 071
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
3287 audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
ALARM command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 105
ALD example. power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405
aligner
card pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030
decoupling capacitor pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
single pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030
alignment. card pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 030
alignment. LED and PTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 070
alphameric and special character keys ......... 44 055
ALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
alter
auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
block save area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 429
channel
control; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370
data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365
DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
console disk file ......................... 44 340
control
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
CSAR backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 44 397 (or 44 400)
current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
external registers (display/alter) ............. 44 329
alter (continued)
external registers (insert/ extract) ............ 44 501
floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270
general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
PU (instruction processing unit)
DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L 1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L1 directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trap/BAL stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCW / device directory tasks
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
virtual storage 370!VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
will be ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALU/local storage/data flow registers .........
AMD monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMD103 fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analog
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sense display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sense poir:lt listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sensors (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
voltage display (MA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analysis. problem (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analYSis. invoking problem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AOS (air outlet sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
area
display mode. display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
patch status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ptr /kybd mode
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) ...............
array
addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
449
360
415
325
355
425
419
457
290
515
335
435
280
375
525
395
44 315
44 320
44 320
44 285
44 155
40 105
34035
20 365
20 060
20 380
44 595
20 225
20 365
20085
14805
14 805
20 245
44 095
44 660
44 090
44 085
34 035
44
34
34
34
34
350
095
030
035
030
assembly
access and return of diskette drive 20
cover. diskette drive
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal! replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
index detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal, collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal, latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement, collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement, latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
assignment
table, UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
asynchronous command register . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATT= .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
audible alarm feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
audible alarm volume control (3278) ...........
audible alarm volume control (3279) ...........
automatic patch installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
automatically running a block at IML (M) .......
B MICBR-trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
back tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
backspace key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BAL stack description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
base color switch
..................
basic
check
light (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15025
15035
15 070
15 035
15 045
15 040
15 045
15 040
14051
14035
44 195
34 095
40085
44071
44 045
44 051
14 605
44 640
44
44
44
34
44
220
060
060
030
051
14 325
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diagnostic tests, processing unit .............
MSS diagnostic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-off sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
battery 1.35V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '..........
battery 2.8V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBCCHH= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
belt removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
belt replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bit shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BL. OFFS.= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLCK. CNT= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block, aborting a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 060
36 050
36 030
20 045
20040
34 065
11 015
11 015
40 085
15 065
15 065
34 040
40 085
40 085
44 650
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 '22Nov82
PN 5666420
1 of 16
46005
block commands
activating blocks (A blockname) .............
comparing data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
displaying the blacklist (T) ..... , ...........
DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
editing blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erasing blocks (R blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
executing a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
halting blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
initializing the index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
setting variable data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
simulating the start or stop key .............
TOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
transferring blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XFER blockname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block diagram
channel hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instruction processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main storage and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance and support subsystem ..........
power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block facility
aborting a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML, QB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block is at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block list. displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
blockname. rules for specifying ..............
blockname. XFER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BMPX command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
board
03AA 1 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A 1 and B 1 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D2 voltage pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
layout, 01 A gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logic, pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MST removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
probe mask
figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
voltage sense points (logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
signal levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01CAl (iPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02AAl (IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02AA2 (I PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03AA2 (CTCA IPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
brightness control
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
640
645
635
645
635
44 645
44 640
44 650
44645
44 645
44 640
44 640
44 645
44 645
44 645
44 645
44 645
44 645
44 640
44 650
34075
34 025
34 055
34 110
20 035
44
44
44
44
44
44
40
655
635
155
635
635
650
105
20 213
20 205
20210
20 211
20 212
20 205
14 105
14 113
12 015
12 020
11 017
12 020
20 241
14 111
20191
20 185
20 190
20 195
44045
44051
40 105
buffer
channel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
high-speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instruction backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
build
diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diskette function (QFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diskette procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUILD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
burst mode control diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bus/tag receptacle pin numbering ............
bus/tag cable-end connector pin numbering . . . . .
button. logic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
byte shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
byte shifter test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card (continued)
layout, 01 A gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI logic removal/ replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSS adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38LS
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
modem description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cards. RSF wiring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
care. diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
catalog
categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
numbers and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCW (channel command word)
CCW= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
command modifiers 4300-FRIEND ...........
commands 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
flags, 4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE
log (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log must have a title (message) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
panel
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keys and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stop word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
chan-chan disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
chan-chan disabled indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
change display key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE command ........ " . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE KEYBOARD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changes require IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel
and instruction processor DLA Ts ............
cable wrap test (CWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
checks switch (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control array register 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control array register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control section data flow diagram ............
data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data buffer section data flow diagram. . . . . . . . .
data register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
failure isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware (general introduction). . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 090
34 060
34 040
34 040
34060
44 700
44 695
44 695
40 105
14 320
10070
10 070
44 035
34 040
36 065
@]
C (clock cycle step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C instruction counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C (stop after log-switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cable
adapter diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel wrap test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
clamp position tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
external interrupt connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
installation of FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
refolding FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
repairing FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' .
troubleshooting FDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cache/stg maintenance chip CMD list .........
cancel
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAP (code analysis processor)
error codes .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manually requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
capacitor. decoupling
insert / extract tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin aligner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card
container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diskette drive 2D control
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
functions, HWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 250
44 225
44 240
15 100
11 015
11 016
14 241
20180
20 180
11 016
20 180
20 180 .
20 180
44 521
44 065
44 065
36
44
36
36
36
020
575
020
075
020
12
11
12
12
030
015
030
030
11 015
20 385
15
15
20
14
035
090
300
225
14 105
12 025
20 350
11 030
11 016
20 365
14310
48
34
14
14
15
056
170
525
525
015
14210
14210
40
40
40
40
105
155
135
155
14635
44 155
14 635
20060
20 040
10 080
20 060
20 255
20 305
20 365
36030
12 007
44 035
42 045
44 070
40 110
40 110
44 155
34 070
36071
44 240
34 095
34 095
34 095
34 095
34 095
34 090
34 090
34 090
34 085
14 224
34 075
34 075
34010
channel (continued)
interface control check
logout (LCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 235
save block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220
trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223
local storage layout (QVALn) or (QOln) ........ 14230
logic description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 085
logout (lCl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14235
microcoded device exerciser (CMDE) .......... 36070
service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14215
storage address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34045
tests, special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 070
to channel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
wrap test cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
o unavailable (message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155
channel trace procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14615
channel-in and channel-out registers ........... 34 090
channel-to-channel adapter (see CrCA)
characteristic
console
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055
printer (3287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
chart. voltage track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105
check
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325
light ........... '... '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
control - fast-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235
control (QK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ...... 44 235
diskette speed service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 070
LED output service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 075
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 11 5
PTX amplifier service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 080
reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
reset (QVK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
reset (re-IMl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44170
solenoid and bail service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 050
checker. continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025
checks in system log. procesiifng unit .........
chg dply . . . . . . . . . . . . . -/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHSAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . ./. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
circuit breaker. monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
circuit protector. monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
circuit. timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
clear
instruction counter trace (TIX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSW and I/O trace (TPX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reset (CLEAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
saved IFCC (TSX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEAR command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
clock
adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
adjustment, equipment needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
adjustment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
44
34
20
20
20
040
070
045
365
365
055
44
44
44
44
40
295
296
170
297
i 10
13 015
13 020
13 050
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
)1
rl
•
•
•
o
PN 5666420
2 of 16
46010
f'
(
clock (continued)
basic diagnostics run procedure ........ , .. , . 13 050
distribution . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13010
maintenance chip command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 521
tvt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13015
CMD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085
CMDE (channel microcoded device exerciser) .... 36 070
code analysis processor (see CAP)
collet assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . ' ........ 15 045
collet assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 045
color. console convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187
color console display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
color switch. base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 44 051
comm req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 44 070
command
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
read (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 350
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 34 095
write (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20350
commands
address compare (OA) and match . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
activating blocks (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
block execution (see block commands)
control, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 42 020
displaying the blacklist (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 635
editing blocks (F blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44635
erasing blocks (R blockname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
halting blocks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
initializing the index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
modified no-op, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020
NOP (printer/keyboard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44090
no operation, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
patch
activating (A patch name) . . . . . . . . . . ....... 44 660
deactivating (D patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
displaying the patch list (TP) . . . . . . . . . ...... 44 655
editing (F patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655
erasing (R patch name) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 44 660
transferring (K patch name) . . . . . . . . . . ...... 44 660
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
QEW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 44 576
read backward, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
read, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 42 025
read inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
sense adapter state, CTCA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020
sense I/O
display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' 44 096
printer keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
sense (printer/keyboard mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
test I/O, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025
transferring blocks . . . . . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 640
write, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
write end-of-file, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
communications
common adapter . . . . . . . . . . , ...
34 170
common adapter status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170
request key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
0
• • • • • • • •
o
()
('
(
(
(
compare
address (OA) command . . . . . . . . . . .
fixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trace (OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPARE command . . . . . . . . . .
complete
IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COND CODE= . . . . . . . . .
confg data err:consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
confg data err:UCWs44 155
CON FIG command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
configuration
data err:consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data err:UCWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
record update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSF cards and wiring
EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . .
line plate (external modem) .....
protective coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38LS/Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38LS/(UoSA and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
screen (QF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
screen update QFS (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connect external interrupt cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connector
CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
top card crossover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console
address (Tn/Hn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
color convergence (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
characteristics
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disk
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
file labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I /0 error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
facility, remote operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
functions (see volume 18)
functions (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator area
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 .....
language code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode (Nn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operator . . . co. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
printer /keyboard mode, 3278-2A display ......
printer not configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test pattern (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console/keyboard, display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console/printer. end of
forms sensing . . . . . . . . . .
contactor monitoring ..
container, card . . . . . . . . . .
0
0
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
•••••
0
• • • • • • • • • • •
0
0
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • •
0
0
0
•••
•
•
•
•••••
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
0
••••
0
• • • • • • • • • •
0
0
0
•••
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•••
0
•••
0
• • • • • • • •
•
44 650
20 365
44 215
40110
44
44
40
44
156
157
095
155
40 110
44 155
44 155
44 185
14 555
14 545
14 565
14535
14525
44 180
14 015
40 110
14 241
10080
10065
10 075
44205
14 320
44 187
44045
44 051
44
44
44
44
44
155
340
155
045
691
14 605
44
44
14
44
44
44
44
44
44
045
051
015
205
025
085
155
188
025
44 115
20 365
11 015
•
«
t,
(
contents
clock adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console functions ...
diagnostic information..
. ...............
diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
features (CTCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance tools list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
processor functional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
processor logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removals/ replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
screen, abbreviated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
system tests . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
continuity checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contrast control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control
audible alarm volume
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
brightness
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card, diskette drive
head cable pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interconnections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
socket and connector pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card, power
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
locations. IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keys, input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line sense point listing ........
panel, operator (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
panel, operator (switches and indicators) .......
register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stg maintenance chip command list ... ,' ......
storage
address backup register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
store (QVAC) warning . . . . . . . . . , ..........
controls
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3278 model 2A operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0
0
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • • •
0
• • • • • • • • •
13
44
36
15
42
32
10
11
20
34
38
12
44
14
40
11
11
11
11
11
11
44
005
016
005
005
005
005
025
015
025
005
005
005
015
001
005
005
025
025
025
025
025
045
44045
44 051
(
(
COpy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
copy key (Kx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
copy key options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
copy mode (3287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
copy options (screens). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
counter
data length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instruction backup . . . . . . . . . . .
COUNTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coupler. protective configuration (RSF) .........
cover assembly (diskette drive)
locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
convergence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
convergence. console color (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . .
convergence procedure (QFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
conversion, PS215 voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0
0
090
095
090
090
090
090
20 385
20 215
44 045
44 065
20 230
44025
44 035
34 030
20 365
44 521
34
34
34
44
34
34
44
030
030
030
155
030
030
385
•
• • • • • • • • • • •
0
34
34
34
40
14
090
045
045
110
565
15
15
15
44
44
44
12
035
040
040
155
187
187
075
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
15
15
15
15
15
15
•
40 110
44205
14 628
44 075
14 625
CP open, PS104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060
CP1 open (conv outlet). PCC .......
20 060
CREATE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40110
CSAR address (QVG) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535
CSW=xxxx command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110
CTCA (channel-to-channel adapter) commands
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020
halt I/O or halt device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025
no operation .....
42 025
read or read backward
to a busy adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42 025
to an idle adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
when EOF was issued . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42 025
sense adapter state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42020
sense command byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020
system or selective reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 030
status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 030
test I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42025
write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
write end-of-file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 025
CTCA compatibility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 040
CTCA data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42010
CTCA functional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 055
address compare and data flow X . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 055
disable and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
mode selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
select priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
selection and reset X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
select-out bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
sequence and control X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 060
status, sense, & input B bus-in X . . . . . . . . . . . . 42060
CTCA input data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 010
CTCA introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 010
CTCA online/offline modes
I/O interface isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045
power-on/off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42045
select-out bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045
0
44 045
44051
('
(
(
0
0
••••
0
•••••
44 240
44 240
44 045
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
PN 5666420
3 of 16
46015
(
CTCA operational summary
addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not-ready ability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTCA output data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTCA programming notes
attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
command chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
halt device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
halt I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
initial program load (JPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
suppress data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wrong length record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTCA sense bit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTCA test
cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing/swapping CTCA cards . . . . . . . . . . . . .
restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
resuming normal CTCA operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cursor control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CWT (channel cable wrap test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data bank (continued)
42 015
42015
42 015
42 015
42 010
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
42
050
050
050
050
050
050
050
035
42 075
42 075
42085
42 085
42 085
42 075
44 060
36 071
CYl= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085
D data store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D (disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D patchname. deactivating patches . . . . . . . . . . .
data
comparing, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error, engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error, transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
failure, engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
flow, power controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
flow registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
length counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
link disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
saving, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
setting variable, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data bank
disconnect procedures
44 225
44 240
44 660
44
44
44
44
20
34
34
44
44
44
34
44
44
645
156
156
156
355
035
090
155
155
155
060
645
645
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
service aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14505
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 675
invoke procedure
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14505
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 675
DEVICE= command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAG4 diskette recovery procedure . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diagnostic
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode
FSC screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode
44 155
14 505
44 675
14 505
44 680
data buffer data register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090
DATA DUMP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40110
data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 230
data flow diagram
ALU /Iocal stor / data flow reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040
channel control section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095
channel data buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090
control storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
restrictions (operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
restrictions (summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
device cluster adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diskette drive adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
high-speed buffer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface controller section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local channel adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main storage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
shift circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage addr and controls sect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
support bus adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
support control logic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
support processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data-in register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data-out register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dc distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCA operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
deactivating patches (D patchname) . . . . . . . . . . .
decoder, local storage address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
decoupling capacitor (C-pac)
insert/extract tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin aligner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECREASE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DECREMENT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
definitions. LCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
delete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description, catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description. diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
detector. EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEV. ADDR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEV. TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEV=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEV=DEVICE ADDRESS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
device
busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cluster adapter
40 110
14 079
40 025
44 070
36 057
general selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055
power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 145
tests, 4341 processor
byte shifter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065
code analYSis processor (CAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020
EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14515
error log analysis (ELA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 010
error logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 010
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 010
maintenance and support subsystem . . . . . . . . . . 36 030
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 075
PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 040
processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045
reference codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 015
special purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065
special channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 070
storage single-bit failure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 065
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025
diagram
hardwired sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 290
power controller adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 345
power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 035
digital
display screen (MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20090
sense point listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 225
sensor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
sensors (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
Digitec** 2210 multi meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
directory
log (QECD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 030
log (QECD), messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 035
UCW 14035
disable block-multiplexer mode (NO BMPX) ..... 40 115
DISCONNECT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 110
disconnected message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
diskette
build
procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 700
ca re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 01 5
data recovery procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 081
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15010
drive adapter
data flow diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 130
disk status byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 135
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 135
drive 20
control card (locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035
control card (removals/replacements) . . . . . . . . . . 15090
parts and location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035
removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . . . . . 15 030
34 140
34 130
34 060
34 080
34 085
34 120
34 155
34 065
34 150
34 040
34 070
34 160
34 165
34 115
40085
34 080
44 155
34 080
20 160
34 140
44 660
34 035
12 030
11 015
12 030
12 030
40 110
40 110
14 235
44 065
14210
15 010
20 295
40085
40 085
40085
40 085
44 155
data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 140
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 145
diskette (continued)
EC update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075
insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 010
IPL (QI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 700
not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
part number
console functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695
service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14015
readability screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580
recovery procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 010
speed service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 070
update procedure (clock values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 010
display
analog voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085
area
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
ptr /kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085
system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 135
arrays facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 350
auxiliary storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 310
block save area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 44 429
channel
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370
data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365
DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
clock scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 519
console
color display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
disk file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' 44 340
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
control
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
CSAR backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400)
current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
digital sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
diskette IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
ELA log (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
error logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
error status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080
external registers
display / alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
insert/ extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
floating-point registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270
general registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
hex calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44260
I/O device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
cuu is busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 155
not functional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115
Model Groups 1 and 2
** Trademark of United System Corp.
:1
•
•
o o
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
"-__ .1/
PN 5666420
4 of 16
46020
(
(~ ,
(
display (continued)
image
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ll directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
momentary status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
patch list (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power /temperature screen .................
program load screen (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSW and I/O trace (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PU retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QDU menu screen (QDU) .................
real storage 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
screen print (DSP)
service aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
status scan ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storage single-bit errors ..................
swap buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trace area (QDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trap/BAL stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCW (unit control word)
change UCW directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
device directory tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
expanded directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
virtual storage 370/VSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPLAY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display/alter
auxiliary storage (QDA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block save area (QDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console disk file (QDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control register (QDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
current PSW (QDP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D screen (QD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
external registers (QDX 0-5) ...............
44415
44 055
44 325
44 355
44 425
44419
44 457
44 155
44
44
44
44
44
20
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
095
050
156
085
025
075
655
585
195
296
405
449
360
615
290
515
14 628
20060
44 335
44 435
44 280
36 065
44 375
44 295
44 395
44
44
44
44
44
40
315
315
320
320
285
110
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
310
305
340
265
275
255
329
('
(
(
(
•
display/alter (continued)
floating-point registers (QDF) ............... 44 270
general registers (QDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
hex calculator (QD=) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260
I/O device status (QDTM) ................. 44 297
instruction counter trace (QDTC) ............. 44 296
local storage (QDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
PSW and I/O trace (QDTP) ................ 44 296
PSW and I/O trace controls (QDTC) .......... 44 296
real storage 370 (QDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
saved IFCC (QDTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255
SP storage (QDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
storage key (QDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280
trace area (QDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
UCW / device directory (QDU). .............. 44 315
virtual storage 370!VSE (QDV) .............. 44 285
distribution
clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13010
dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20160
switching regulator, voltage ................ 20 200
voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 200
voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 155
Dl= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085
DO. block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
DO. patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
documentation organization ................. 30 025
drive
motor removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
motor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
pulley removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
pulley replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
2D. diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 005
dual case/mono case switch (A.a/A)
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
dump. SP stand-alone dump
support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 608 (or 44 675)
DUMP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40110
duplicate device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
[I]
E screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E (stop word chks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EAU (erase all unprotected)
(display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EB screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC update procedure. diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 125
20 125
44 240
44 095
20 135
20 135
14015
14 075
• • •
(
EC update procedure. flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
edit command error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
editing patches (F patchname) ...............
EHC flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA
adapter test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cards and wiring configuration ..............
signal level converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EL screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELA (error log analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELA log display (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ..........
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sensing (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
emergency power-off. unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END. block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
END. patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engineering data
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enter
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
printer /keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
enter (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
equipment needed (clock adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erase
all unprotected (display mode) ..............
EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
patches (R patchname) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
title (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
erase/write command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EREP (failing storage address) ...............
ERR:CSW=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ...............
error
action microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
analysis and logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
building diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
correction and bit-generation unit ............
during data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
edit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engineering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
handling component (EHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
information, expanded power ...............
intermittent or soft (processing unit) . . . . . . . . . .
(
14
44
44
38
075
156
655
035
14 515
14555
34 170
20 130
20 130
36 010
44 240
20 295
20
20
20
20
44
44
295
295
365
045
645
660
44 156
44 156
44 065
44 065
44065
44 065
13 015
44 095
44 065
44 065
44 660
44 156
44 095
14095
44156
20
20
44
34
44
44
44
38
20
14
275
275
156
065
156
156
156
035
130
115
(
(
('
(' (
error (continued)
IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log analysis (see ELA)
log, power error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logging, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logout screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logouts (E screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logouts screen (E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
messages
CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line 20 (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .
TCM . . . . . . . . . . '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 156
44157
20 055
36010
20 055
44 545
44 545
20 125
36075
44 155
36080
4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 095
or slow printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
statistics, line (QET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566
status display
detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590
voltage tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 110
when starting PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
when stopping PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
errors. intermittent or soft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 115
EX CLRIO (execute clear I/O) command ........ 40 115
EX HDV (execute halt device) command ........ 40 115
EX HIO (execute halt I/O) command .......... 40 115
EX STIDC (execute store channel 10) command .. 40 115
EX TCH (execute test channel) command ....... 40115
EX TIO (execute test I/O) command ........... 40 115
example
E screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . 20 125
EB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135
EL screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 130
error status display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 080
M screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 065
MA screen .. , ........... , ............. 20 085
M D screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 090
momentary status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 075
MT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 095
MV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : .... 20 100
of UCW entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 620
power ALD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405
executing a block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 650
execution. patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
execution time xx minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
expanded power error information (EL) ......... 20 130
extended and optional MSS diagnostic tests .... 36 035
external control and sensing (sensor) . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
external interrupt cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . 14 241
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
PN 5666420
5 of 16
46025
(
F patch name. editing patches ................
F (ref codes) ............................
facility. patch (QBTP) ......................
failing storage address. EREP ................
failure. engineering data ....................
failure. power-off .........................
fast-selecting a screen (Q screenid) ...........
fast-alter
auxiliary storage ........................
block save area ........................
cache retry data . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel
control. ............................
data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 655
44 240
44 655
14095
44 156
20 060
44 645
'
44 310
44 305
44 429
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
370
365
409
463
495
445
340
hardware ...........................
interface............................
checks in system .......................
console disk file ........................
control
registers ............................ 44 265
storage hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
store. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
CSAR backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400)
current PSW .......................... 44 275
external registers ....................... 44 329
external registers ....................... 44 501
floating-point registers ................... 44 270
general registers ........................ 44 265
key ................................. 44415
local storage .......................... 44 325
local store ............................ 44 355
L1 cache da~a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425
L1 directory ........................... 44 419
main storage hardware ................... 44 457
PU DLAT ............................. 44405
PU hardware .......................... 44 449
PU retry local store ...................... 44 360
real storage 370 ........................ 44 290
scan rings ............................ 44 515
SP storage ............................ 44 335
storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280
swap buffer ........................... 44 375
trap/SAL stack ........................ 44 395
virtual storage 370/VSE .................. 44 285
fast-select
IML/IPL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205
IML/IPL (alternate) ..................... 44 205
fast-selection ............................ 44 165
fast-selection hexadecimal calculations......... 44 260
fault isolation/identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
FDS cable removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025
FDS cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025
feature
audible alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
security keylock ........................
channel-to-channel. .....................
ferroresonant power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ferroresonant power supply monitoring ........
field support center (FSC) screen .............
fixed compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLAG command ..... , ....................
flexible distribution system (FDS)
removal/replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
flowchart. power-on sequence ...............
flowchart. power-off sequence ...............
frame 01
behind gate 01 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
grounding paths ........................
rear view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
right side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
frame 01. 02. and 03 (front view) .............
frame 02
grounding paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
front view behind gate 02A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear view (ferro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear view (sw reg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
frame 03
grounding paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FSC screen. diagnostic mode ................
full power-up function .....................
function
key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keys. program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCT diskette recovery procedure
(for two damaged FUNCT diskettes) .........
functions. HWS card ......................
44 071
44 071
42005
20 050
20 365
36 057
20 365
40 115
, general
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
selection (Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
selection (Q screen) .....................
GOTO. block command ....................
grounding paths
model group 2, frame 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
model group 2, frame 02 ..................
model groups 1 and 2, frame 03 . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRPs. adjusting clock .....................
12 025
20 180
20 390
20 400
035
200
165
645
14 705
14715
14 725
13035
IE]
H channel checks switch ...........•.......
H channel-seq cnt ........................
H hard stop. . . . . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HALT. block command .....................
handling. operation check error ..............
HARD COpy (Y/N)= ......................
hard stop (QKS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardwired sequence
diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware configuration ....................
hardware. sensor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
head load parts
locations . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removals/ replacements ...................
HELP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
high-speed buffer
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
section data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
hold print timeout (3287 only) ................
home key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
horizontal positioning (keys) .................
how to adjust the clock GRPs ...............
how to change a GRP value .................
how to run processing unit diagnostic tests .....
HWS (hardwired sequence)
card functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
second levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 040
14705
10 045
10 040
10035
14 715
10 055
10 055
10 060
14 725
10 061
40 035
36 057
44 585
44 156
44 065
14081
20 300
@]
G-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gate
01A gate card layout .....................
01A (pin side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01C (lPS301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
010 (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01 E (channel interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02A (front view) sw reg ...................
02A (rear view) sw reg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03E (CTCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
44
44
44
34 045
14 105
10050
10061
10070
10 070
10070
10055
10 055
10070
44
44
44
44
44
40
44
240
230
220
645
115
085
240
20 290
20 285
20 340
44 025
20 365
40085
15 035
15 050
40 115
34
34
34
44
44
44
13
13
36
070
060
060
115
060
060
035
030
055
20 300
20 290
20 305
20 285
20340
i (lCNTR polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
I (instruction step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250
I initialize 4300-FRIEND .................. : . 40 115
I I/O reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225
idler assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 15 065
idler assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
IFCC
clear saved (TSX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220
save (TS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
trace (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223
image. display
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44051
IML (initial microcode load)
automatically running a block (M) ............ 44 640
complete (message) ..................... 44 156
effect on a running block .................. 44 650
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . 44 156
in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205
invoke procedure (automatic) ............... 44 205
required (message) ...................... 44 156
incompatible selections .................... 44 156
incomplete command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
incomplete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
INCREASE command ...................... 40 115
index detection assemblies
location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 035
removal/replacement ...... , ............. 15070
indicator
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
area (ptr/kybd mode) .................... 44 090
basic check (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
chan-chan disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44035 '
off-screen
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052
on-screen
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052
power complete (OCP) ................... 44 035
power in process (OCP) ................... 44 035
power-on
proceed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052 ..
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
Model Groups 1 and 2
, EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
o\ ;)
r='\
I.
)
" . .JI
r)'
\
.
C) C) ()
10
,,---j;}
o
C) ()
'I
•
•
•
o o
00
o
PN 5666420
6 of 16
o o
46030
o
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
indicator (continued)
wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 (3279) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 (3279) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 (3279) . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3278 Model 2A . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 Model 2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicators
and switches, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
information, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inhibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
init index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
initial clock settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
initialize
index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4300~FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input area fptr/kybEf mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insert key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insert/extract
arrays (QVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cache retry data (QVAR) .......•..........
channel
control (QVAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data buffer (QVAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(
(
(
insert/extract (continued)
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
035
050
052
050
052
052
050
052
2Q 060
20 255
20 265
20 035
44 156
44 640
13 030
44
40
44
44
44
640
115
085
065
065
44 350
44 429
44 370
44 365
DLAT (QVAH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409
hardware (QVf.H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
interface (QVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
checks in system (QVK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
clock S{:an rings (QVY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 5.:J 9
control storage hardware (QVB) ............. 44 453
control store (QVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
CSAR backup (QVAB) ........... 44 397 (or 44 400)
external regfsters (QVX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
key (QVAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415
local store (QVALr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355
L1 cache data (QVAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425
L1 directory (QVAF) .•................... 44 419
main storage hardware (QVM) .............. 44 457
'PU (instruction processing unit)
DLAT (QVAU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44405
hardware (QVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
retry local store (QVAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 360
QVG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535
scan rings (QVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
screen (QV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345
set CSAR address (QVG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 535
status scan ring (QVS) ........ '............ 44 435
swap buffer (QVAS) ...........•..........
translate address (QVT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trap/BAL stack (QVA'F) •..................
V screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W command (QVW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iflsertion, diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
installation of FDS cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
installation
patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
probe mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4341 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
intensity override switch ......•............
instruction
buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
buffer backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
counter backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
counter trace (TI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
processor
block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
functional operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
general introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
integrated power system UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interconnection. control card
(diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface
adapter
card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data flow diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
section . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control check logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control check save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control check trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
controller section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
controller section data flow diagram ..........
standard power (SPI)
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
second level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interface control check save blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
intermittent or soft errors . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
internal confg data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interrupt
data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
intr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 3.75
44 525
44 395
44 345
44 521
15 010
44 157
20 180
14 605
12 020
48 005
44-051
34· 040
34 040
34 045
34 045
44 296
34
34
34
14
40
20
025
025
010
115
115
385
15 095
.
14
34
34
34
14
14
14
34
34
225
080
080
080
205
220
223
085
085
20 270
14425
14 220
14 115
44 157
34120
20 370
44 070
34 120
44070
f
(
c
intervention required
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
QJ
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
printer/keyboard mode ................... 44 090
invalid
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
CHAR.CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44157
input, CE only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
input (line 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
processor 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
with M or P .... '.' . :,' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
invoke the module transfer
.
..
screen ....... '.: ..... '. . . . . . . .. 44 191 (or 44 190)
invoking problem analysis (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805
I/O (input/output)
PSW trace {TC} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
interface switch, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 045
interrupt request register .................. 34 125
signal cable
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 035
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 035
status field in SP detail log ................ 38 020
trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14615
IPL (initial program load)
complete . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 15-7
device unavail-selir:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
diskette display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
diskette (QI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 15.7
invoke procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 205
I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157I/O error.US/CS=XXXX .................. 44 157
PSW format error ...•................... 44 157
IPS (integrated power system)
".
board
.
01CA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20191
02AA 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 20 185
02AA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20190
03AA2 (CTCA) . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 195
control card locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215
gate 02A (card side) . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 060
integrated power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
voltage
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215
distribution. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 200
measurement points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085
isolation/identification, fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
isolation, channel failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 224
~apan, ke\fboard,: '.':: ..... : .. :' ,: ........... 36 040Jumpers, sense catd ........... .': '.......... 20 370
K patch name, transferring patches. , .......... 44 660
k~y
alphameric and special character .............44.055
back tab .............. , .............. 44 060
backspace ... '.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
chg dply .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
comm req . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
compare circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 070
copy option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 628
cursor control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060..
diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 07Q
home ......... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A 060
input control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
intr, ......... '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
line disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
mode sel .... _ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
. new line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
page .............. , ................. 44 070
program function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
printer /keyboard mode, cancel .............. 44 065
remote. facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .... 44 070
remote support facility
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 055
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 525
44 060
shift and shift lock .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPM/O .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 070
stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ~4 070
. start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
stop . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . 44 070
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055
system function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
typematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 44 055
vertical positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
KEY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 115
KEY= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085
keyboard
characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055
deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 055
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 040
keylock (optional feature), security ... : ........ 44 071
keys and switches, CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 305
Kl= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40085
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nnv82
PN 5666420
7 of 16
46035
II]
l local store-dst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l (SP logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
label identification
QOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAP .......... : .............. , .....
QVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '" ........
QVAU ..... " . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 225
44 240
44 329
44385
44: 365
44419
44 425
44409
44 360
44429
44 395
44405
44415
44454
avc ................................ 44495
'QVH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44464
QVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44450
QVK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44445
QVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " ......... 44 458
QVS' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '" ............. 44435
QVX: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44502
QVY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44519
lamp, basic check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 325
lamp test
,
CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
last level register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
latch assembly, diskette drive
removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . .
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
layout, channel local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lead extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lED (light-emitting diode)
output service check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PTX alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. replacement...........................
light, basi.c check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limited channel logout bit definitions . . . . . . . . . .
line disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line error statistics (aET) ............... , ...
line plate configuration (RSF) ............ ; ...
list, maintenance tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 060
44 035
34 125
15
15
14
11
040
040
230
015
15 075
15 070
15 075
15 075
14 325
14 235
44 070
44 566
14545
11 015
listing, analog and digital sense point. . . . . . . . . . 20 225
listing, control line sense point............... 20 230
load screen (al) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
local channel adapter data flow diagram ........ 34 155
local channel adapter status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 155
local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 035
local storage address decoder ............... 34 035
locations, table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 025
locations, card layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105
locations, IPS control cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 215
log power error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
lOG. END=: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085
lOG. START= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085
logging, error analysis and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
logging, power error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
logic
board monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
board pin numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113
board voltage sense points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241
reset. . . . . '. '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . 14 305
reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
logout
interface control check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205
reference code . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565
logs
checks-in-system, processing unit ........... 38 040
directory, processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38030
general information on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
how to display processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
how to print processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
power
20 125
20 055
processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38030
reference code history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 050
scan rings, processing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045
SP detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015
SP summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015
summary, processing unit ................. 38 045
support processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
lOOP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120
loop procedure for TIO/SIO ................. 14215
loop scan rings, aVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
lSI board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12015
lSI logic card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025
screen. • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . .
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M (ELA-UNRECV MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M (microword step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M microword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M MICWD-trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M screen .. ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M screen example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M/a register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA screen example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
machine
check, support processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reset
44 240
44 250
44 225
44 220
20065
20 065
34 040
20 085
20 085
CM . • . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMrr (one ring) . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMLxxxx (with log) . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
44 170
44 170
44 170
44 170
34 065
34 070
34 070
34 055
34 065
save (SAVE) (VSE mode only) ..............
main storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
address register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
controls diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance
and support subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and support subsystem block diagram .........
and support subsystem logs
(see support processor logs)
and support subsystem tests
(see diagnostic tests)
and support subsystem (gen. intro) ...........
diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . " .......
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
prevEi'ntive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
procedure
20 045
34 105
34 110
34 010
15010
20 055
14 003
detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . 32 025,
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . .
32 030
34 105
screens, power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 065
tools list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
manual
functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
patch installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mark in test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK BYTE= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
match circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MD screen example ............. '.' ........
measur-ement
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
points, IPS voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
temperature. . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 165
14 606
36 070
40 090
40 085
34 045
20 090
20090
20 380
20215
20 380
message
ACB value changed by XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addr comp remains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addr cuu already aSSigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
address already used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '..
address out of range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
address too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alter ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
alter will be ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block is at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE log must have a title .... " . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changes require 1M L .....................
channel 0 unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compare/trace not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
confg data err:consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
confg data err:UCWs ... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
console
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44155
44 ,155
36075
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44 155
44
44
44
control storage failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
convergence check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
data bank mode active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
data link disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
data not accessible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
data not on tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .. 44
device busy . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
device cuu is busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
device Nx config error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
disconnected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
diskette check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
diskette not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
display console failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : .. 44
done-put in original disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
duplicate device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
edit command error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
engineering data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : .. 44
engineering data failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
erase ?title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.'" . . 44
err-put in original disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err-block at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err-disk error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err-no space in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err-not found in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err-patch EC name wrong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err- patch is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
err:C5W=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
error building diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
arror during data xfer ............ _,' ...... 44
disk failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disk I/O error . . . • . • . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . .
printer not configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . .
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
o
o o
o
()
C)
C) 0 ()
PN 5666420
8 of 16
o o o
46040
C)
(
('
(
(
(
message (continued)
error or slow printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error when starting pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error when stopping pu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
execution time xx minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
function key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I invalid with M or P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
incompatible selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
incomplete command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
incomplete input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inhibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
insert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
internal confg data error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
intv- reqd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
invalid
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
block name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAR.CODE .......... : ..............
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input, CE only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
processor 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPL (initial program load)
complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
device unavail-selin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O error.US/CS=XXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in prog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSW format error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KC invalid with M or P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
line S or size over max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
log area full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
long IPL proceeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
machine not hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
machine status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main console not ready during
power- up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main stg data cmp error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
main stg address error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
module not found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
more, press enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
name2 longer than name1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
native device addr used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
no block at match-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
no IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
no saved screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
no space in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not a color console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not found in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(
(..'~
~,.
o
message (continued)
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
157
157
157
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
44
44
44
44
44
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
157
035
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
38
44 157
44 155
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 157
44 158
44 158
44 158
44 158
44 158
not IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
operation rate not normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
paging key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
patch is active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
patch error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
power complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
power incomplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
power not up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
press enter to save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
printer halted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
proceed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ptr/kybd mode ................. .' ....... 44 158
PSW unpredictable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ptr-busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ptr-chk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ptr-intv reqd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ptr /kybd cons addr error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
PU already intialized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
PU hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
PU is not soft stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1'58
PU not initialized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
put in from disk, enter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
put in to disk, enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
'QCLEAR' reset required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
re-IML required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ready the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ref code logged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
rejected-block invoked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
remove part of shared UCW ............... 44 148
request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
ROCF
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
monitor active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
saved-title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
see error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
selection complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
serial nos. do not match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
serial numb ready to lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
soft stop required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
SP / PU communication err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
SP/PU communications failure .............. 44 159
SP / PU data miscompare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; 44 159
SP /PU transfer error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
STARTL not available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
support bus failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
syntax error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
system
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
is IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
is IPLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
reset req'd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
tape not operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 080
(
message (continued)
trace/ data comp not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
transfer halted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
update over 1024 UCWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
usage conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
wng: check error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
X of part of shared range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
4300-FRIEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 095
4300-FRIEND error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 100
4341 processor tests
code analysis processor (CAP) .............. 36 075
TCM (testcase monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 080
metering service procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120
microcode
error-action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
interrupt request register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125
partial power up/down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
scan-in register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34030
sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
mode
accumulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 220
assist screen (QLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
BC/EC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
CMD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
data bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 675 (or 44 680)
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
nonaccumulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225
printer /keyboard
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085
sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
MODEL: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
model differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 010
modes of operation. console
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
module not found . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
module. power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
module transfer (QFM)
console functions .............. 44 190 (or 44 191)
service aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025
momentary status display
detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 075
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590
monitor, EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 295
(
(
(
(
monitor, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
monitoring
AMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
circuit breakers and protectors ..............
contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ferroresonant power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardware (sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logic board .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
series regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mia register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSG. block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSMD (machine speed microdiagnostics) ......
MSMD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSMD run procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSS (maintenance and support subsystem)
adapter card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
diagnostic tests
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
extended and optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manually running PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stop words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MST board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MT screen example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
multiple decision maker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MW screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. . .. .
N normal
check control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compare trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
new line key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nn-ACTIVATE.* (activate CCW chain nn) .......
nn-STOP (stop execution of chain nn) ..........
no
assists (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control store load (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
retry (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nonaccumulate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NOP
block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.........
patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 275
20365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 365
20 370
34 040
44 645
36 051
36 045
36 055
20 350
36 030
36 035
36 040
36 030
14 305
12 020
20 095
20 095
34095
20 100
20 070
44 235
44 215
44 250
44 240
44 060
40 105
40 125
44 195
44 210
44 210
44 240
44 225
44 645
44 095
44 660
44 090
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
-
PN 5666420
9 of 16
46045
normal
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-off sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
test switch
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
not
available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
number. catalog ....... ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NUMBER OF TIMES:: : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
numbering. logic board pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44 240
20 045
20 040
44045
44 051
44 158
44 158
44 115
14 210
40 090
14 113
O. ELA log display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
I/O instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225
OCP indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
OCP to CTCA (interconnections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 317
OCP to HWS (interconnections) .............. 14315
OCP to 4341 cable route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14315
OCP switches
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 080
off-screen indicators
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052
OLTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 025
OLTS (online tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 025
on-screen indicators
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 ................................. 44 052
online tests (OLTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 025
OP. BYTE= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
OP field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 230
operating tips. processing unit tests ........... 36 055
operation
actuation tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 020
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 115
continuity checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025
invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 157
modes of (console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085
rate - fast-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 245
rate control (QO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 245
operator
console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
control panel
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 265
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44035
switches (description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
switches (pin numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 080
controls. 3278 model 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
o
option
1 :the start problem analysis routine. . . . . . . . . . .
2:start system again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 :run 4341 processing unit analysis . . . . . . . . . .
4:send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:display detailed PA-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 :customer data and security control. . . . . . . . . .
7:go to part number and FRU list ............
8:display 4341 processing unit analysis FRU-Iogs.
9 :display service transmission history . . . . . . . . .
optional MSS diagnostics tests ..............
oscilloscope. Tektronix* 475/DM44 ...........
override switch. intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
overvoltage protection. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 806
14806
14 806
14807
14808
14 810
14811
14811
14 812
36 035
11 017
44 051
20 385
P (all polling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
P (clock pulse step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 250
P PSW swaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 225
PA (problem analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805
page
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
paging key ignored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
panel
CE .......... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060
operator control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 025
parameter
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215
address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '..... 44225
partial power
up and down screen (summary) ............. 44 585
up/down microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20275
up/down screen (MW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20070
patch
at IML. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210
commands
activating patches (A patch name) ............ 44 660
deactivating patches (0 patchname) ........... 44 660
displaying the patch list (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655
editing patches (F patchname) .............. 44 655
erasing patches (R patchname) .............. 44 660
transferring patches (K patchname) ........... 44 660
execution commands
~O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44660
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
NOPs .............................. 44 660
000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
facility (QBTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655
installation and update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 605
status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
patches at IML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210
patchname. rules for specifying .............. 44 655
pattern. console test (QFP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 188
PCA block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 345
PCA diagnostic tests. manually running ........ 36 040
PCC CP1 open (conv outlet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
perform IML (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200
PF1-PF12
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
ptr/kybd mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
PHY. START= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
pin
aligner. decoupling capacitor ............... 11 015
connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10065
control card (diskette drive)
head cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090
socket and connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15090
numbering (bus/tag receptacle/cable-end) ..... 10070
numbering. logic board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 113
numbering (TCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 075
numbering (relays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 065
pins
board
03AA 1 voltage. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 213
A1 and 81 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205
A2 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 210
82 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 211
C2 voltage ...... ' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 212
02 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205
PLDA field in SP detail log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 025
PM (preventive maintenance) ..................... 14003
POINTER command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120
points. IPS voltage measurement ............. 20 215
points. logic board voltage sense ............. 20 241
positioning key. horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
position tool. cable clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
power
ALD example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405
cable removal tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
complete indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
controller adapter
detail. .............................. 20 345
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 150
block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 345
data flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 150
diagnostics (MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 145
controller data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 355
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 605
error log . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
error logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
fault, power-off because of a............... 20 045
groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 015
in process (OCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
indicators and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
interface, standard (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 270
lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
log outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560
power (continued)
logs
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 125
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 20 055
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . 20 055
maintenance screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 065
microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 20 275
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
off
error condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 1 15
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
switch (OCP) .........- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
on
microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
sequence flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 390
SP display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
on/IML switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
on / off switch
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44051
supply and transformer locations ............ 12 043
supply, ferroresonant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 050
supply switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 066
system block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 035
temperature (M screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585
power-off
because of a power fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045
microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
sequence
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045
flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 400
logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 405
normal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045
unit emergency .......................... 20 045
power-on
action strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 415
indicator
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 050
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 052
microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
sequence, basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040
sequence in CE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040
sequence logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 395
sequence (normal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040
predefined CCW chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 060
present level register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125
preventive maintenance .......................... 14003
principle. IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
print function. display screen (DSP) ........... 14628
PRINT SENSE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120
printer
characteristics (3278) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 075
3287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 070
* Trademark of Tektronix inc.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
'~I
",-y
0 () 0 ()
\..
.
",-,'
r",
\,"- j./
C) 0
(~
0 0
(~
\ jJ
0 ()
"
0
0
C~
j
0
0
\J
0",-p
0 0
PN 5666420
10 of 16
(11
j'
0 0
46050
(j
0 0
t'
(
f
(
printer/keyboard
console address error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
mode
commands .......................... 44 090
indicator area ........................ 44 090
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 085
probe adapter. cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 017
probe mask installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020
probe tip
signal and ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
problem analysis (PAl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805
procedure
clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 015
clock adjustment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050
clock basic diagnostics run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050
data bank disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
data bank invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
diskette
EC update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075
recovery for DIAG4. . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079
update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050
maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 030
metering service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120
MSMD run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13050
patch installation and update ............... 14605
recovery. for two damaged FUNCT diskettes .... 14081
remote data bank invoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14505
TIO single Gycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 225
proceed indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
process. pwr in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
processing unit diagnostic tests
basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 050
how to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055
how to run PUMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020
maintenance algorithm (PUMA) •............ 36 055
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 075'
MSMD(machine speed microdiagnostics) ...... 36 051'
MSMD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045
operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055
testcase monitor (TCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045
processing unit service aids ................. 14115
processing unit logs
checks in system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 040
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 030
scan rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045
summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045
processor logs
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
how to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
how to print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 010
summary .........•......- ............. 38010
TODC equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38010
processor overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 010
program
area
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 051
function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 065
load-parameter details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200
load screen (QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
reset (PROGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170
protection. additional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
(
(
protection. overvoltage ........... , . . . . . . . . 20 385
protective coupler configuration (RSF) ......... 14565
PSW (program status word)
and I/O trace (TL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
restart ................................ 40 120
screen label (BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
screen label (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
unpredictable ........................... 44 158
PS101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 055
PS102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12095
PS103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12098
PS104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 045
PS104 CP open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060
PS105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12097
PS105 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
PS201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 065
PS205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 080
PS206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 105
PS205 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
PS210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 057
PS211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12060
PS212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 063
PS213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 069
PS215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12072
PS 215 voltage conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12075
PS216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 078
PS301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 085
PTX amplifier service check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 080
PTX removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 085
PTX replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 085
PU (processing unit)
diagnostic tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045
directory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
hard stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
is not soft stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38030
purge function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
puller. card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
PUMA (processing unit maintenance algorithm)
how to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 020
when to run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 055
purge all logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
pwr complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
pwr in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
pwr/thml status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20060
Q (general selection)
from K screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
from 0 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBTP. patch facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QClEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QOA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QOC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
240
250
165
215
635
655
170
255
310
265
QOO. patch execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 660
QOO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 340
QOF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 270
QOG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 265
,'QOK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280
QOl screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
QOM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 290
ClOP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
QOS screen ........... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 305
QOT screen ............................... 44 295
QOTC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
QOTF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
QOTI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
QOTM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
QOTP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
QOU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
QOUC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
QOUE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 320
QOUU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 315
QOV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 285
QOW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
QOX screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
QE screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
QEB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565
QEC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
QECO directory log machine status messages ... 38 035
QECO (processing unit directory log) .......... 38 030
QECO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
QECS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
QECS summary log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 045
QED screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580
QEI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 575
QEl screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560
QER screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
QERO reference code history log ............. 38 050
QERO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
QES screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555
QESA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555
QESA (SP summary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015
QESxx (SP detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 015
QESO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560
QET screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566
QEW screen
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 577
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576
QF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 180
QFB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 691
QFO screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 680 (or 44 685)
QFM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 191 (or 44 190)
QFS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 185
QFT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695
QIO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 608 (or 44 675)
QI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
QJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170
QK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235
Ql screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
QU screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
QM screen ............. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585
QMA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
(
(
(
QMO screen ............. ; .............. 44 595
QMT screen ..., .......... ; .........•..... 44600
QMV screen ....... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600
QMW screen ..... '...........•............ 44 585
QO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 245
QPROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170
QRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44170
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44170
QUIT command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 120
QV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 345
QVA screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 350
QVAB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 397 (or 44 400)
QVAC screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
QVAO screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365
QVAF screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 419
QVAG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425
QVAH screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409
QVAl screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 355
QVAN screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 370
QVAP screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44360
QVAR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 429
QVAS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 375
QVAT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 395
QVAU screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44405
QVAY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415
QVB screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 453
QVC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 495
QVG screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44535
QVH screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 463
QVI screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 449
QVK screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 445
QVM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 457
QVR screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 515
QVS screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 435
QVT screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 529
QVW screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 521
QVX screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 501
QVY screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 519
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 175
QY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44170
ax
R (no retry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R patchname. eraSing patches ...............
R (repeat microword-switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCO NO.= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
read
buffer (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
command (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inquiry command ........................
modified (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
44
44
44
40
660
250
090
44
20
44
44
095
350
090
095
ModelGroups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
PN 5666420
11 of 16
46055
real address register 1 ..................... 34 070
. real address register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 34 070
, recovery procedure
for DIAG4 diskette . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079
for two damaged FUNC diskettes .......... , . 14081
reference code
history log (OERD) ...................... ,38 050
logout file ............................ 44 570
logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
reference codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 025
reference codes, 4341 processor.............. 36015
refolding FDS cables ...................... 20 180
register
asynchronous command .................. 34 095
channel
control array 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095
control array 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095
,data . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 085
channel-in and channel-out ................ 34 090
command ............................ 34 095
control storage address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030
control storage address backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030
control .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030
data ................................ 34060
. data buffer data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 090
data flow ............................. 34 035
'. data-in .............................. 34 080
data-out ............ , ................ 34 080
floating-point .......................... 44 270
I/O interrupt request ..................... 34125
last level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125
M/O ........ , ....................... 34040
main storage address .................... 34 070
micro code scan-in ...................... 34 030
microcode interrupt request ................ 34 125
present level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125
save . ; .............................. 34 030
SP check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 125
storage backup ........................ " 34045
storage data buffer address. . . . . . . . . . . • . . .. 34 090 .
support processor .................... : .. 34 125
sync . '....................... , ....... 34 095
regulator, switching ....................... 20 185
re-IML required .......................... 44 158
rejected-block invoked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
relay pin numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 065
remote
console support summary . . . . . . .. 44 680 (or 44 685)
data bank invoke procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
facility keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . 44 070
operator console facility (see ROCF)
support facility
.
diagnostics .......................... 14515
keys (detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
service aids .......................... 14505
removal
belt ................. ' ............... , 15065
board probe mask ..................... , . 12 020
collet assembly...................... '... 15045
.control card (diskette drive) ................ 15 090
cover (diskette drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040
decoupling capacitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 030
diskette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 01 0
diskette drive 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 030
drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
drive pulleY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 15 065
FDS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025
idler assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
I/O signal cable ........................ 12035
latch assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040
LED ................................ 15075
LSI logic card .......................•.. 12025
MST board ........................... 12020
power cable tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
power supplies and transformers.. . . . . . . . . . . . 12 043
PTX ................................ 15085
signal cable tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 016
solenoid and bail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 060
remove part of shared UCW ................ 44 158
removals/replacements contents ............. 12 005
REMOVE command .. , .................... 40 120
REP command ........................... 40 120
repairing FDS cables ...................... 20 180
REPL. CNT=............................. 40 090
replacement
battery (continuity checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 025
belt (diskette). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
board probe maSk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 020
collet assembly ....................... , . 15045
control card (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 090
cover (diskette drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040
drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
diskette drive 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 020
drive pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
FDS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 025
idler assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 065
lamp (continuity checker). . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 11 025
latch assembly (diskette drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 040
LED ................................ 15075
PTX ................................ 15085
solenoid and bail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 060
requ'est indicator ......................... 44 090
request key
display mode .......................... 44 065
printer /keyboard mode ................... 44 065
manual mode .......................... 44 065
reset
check
re-IML ............................ 44 170
QVK ........... '................... 44 445
SP display .......................... 20 060
clear . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 170
logic ................... .' ............ 14305
machine ............................. 44 170
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . 44 170
system ......................... : ... : 44 170
UEPO switch. ; ........................ 20340
restart (RES) ............................ 44 170
restarting the CTCA test ................... 42 085
restriction, data bank mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
restrictions and deviations
display mode .......................... 44 096
ptr / kybd mode ......................... 44 090
restrictions. 4300-FRIEND ................... 40045
retry array. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 305
retry stack .............................. 34060
return
to general selection
from the QL screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200
from the QM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 605
to programming systems
from the QL screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 200
from the QM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 605
RETURN command ....................... 40 120
rings, loop scan. OVR ..................... 44 515
ROCF (Remote Operator Console Facility)
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
description ............................ 34 170
monitor active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 158
OFS screen ........................... 44 691
routine, problem analysis (PA) ............... 14806
RSj:
cards and wiring diagram .................. 14525
EIA adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 14 555
line plate (external modem) ................ 14545
protective coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 565
38LS/Japan ......................... 14535
38LS/(U.S.A. and Canada) ................ 14 525
configurations diagram ................... 34 170
diagnostics. EIA card..................... 14515
line error statistics (OEn .................. 44 566
service aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 14 505
test options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 035
rules for specifying patchname ............... 44 655
rules for specifing blockname................ 44 635
rim 4341 processing unit analysis ............. 14806
R4/L1 shift circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040
R9 shifter .............................. 34 045
S hard stop switch ....................... 44 240
Siocal store-SRC ................ _......... 44 230
S stop ................................. 44215
safety practices (CE) ...................... 12 007
SAR1 .................................. 34045
SAR2.................................. 34045
save
area ................................ 14220
area type field description ................. 44 305
auxiliary storage ........................ 44 310
blocks, I FCC . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220
cache retry data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . 44 429
save (continued)
channel
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . 44 370
data buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 365
DLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 409
hardware ........................... 44 463
interface ............................ 44 495
check in system ........................ 44 445
console disk file ........................ 44 340
control
registers ............................ 44 265
storage hardware ...................... 44 453
store.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 380
CSAR backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400)
current PSW .......................... 44 275
external registers
display lalter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 329
insert/ extract ........................ 44 501
floating-point registers ................... 44 270
general registers ........................ 44 265
IFCC (TS) ............................ 44 297
key ................................. 44 415
local storage .......................... 44 325
local store ............................ 44 355
L1 cache data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 425
L1 directory ........................... 44 419
main storage hardware ................... 44 457
PU (instruction processing unit)
DLAT . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 405
hardware ........................... 44 449
retry local store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 360
real storage 370 ........................ 44 290
register .............................. 34030
scan rings ............................ 44 515
screen label .. , ...................... ' .. 44 305
SP storage ............................ 44 335
status scan ring ........................ 44 435
storage key ........................... 44 280
translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 525
trap/SAL stack .... .' ................... 44 395
virtual storage 370/VSE .................. 44 285
saved screens display ..................... 44 576
soan rings log. processing unit ............... 38 045
SCOPE command ........................ 40 120
screen
.
customer data and security control ........... 14810
diagnostic mode ........................ 36 057
digital sensor display ..................... 44 595
display
detailed pa-data ....................... 14808
saved screens ........................ 44 576
service transmission history ................ 14 811
4341 processing unit analysis ............... 14811
error status display ...................... 44 590
FSC ................................ 36057
general selection ........................ 36055
go to part number FRU list ................ 14811
layout, problem analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 805
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
J
,
",
,i,,'
,0,'
~
"
(,).
\
-'"
'
,~
,
\...y
o
',~
O
.
"
C)
o o
(.·lI.·
\:,-.j!
o o o
0·· 0.0
'.
o
PN 5666420
12 of 16
46060
o
(
(
(
screen (continued)
momentary status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 590
power maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 065
problem analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805
Q. generalselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 165
GA. compare/trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215
QD. display/alter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 255
QDA, display/alter auxiliary storage .......... 44 310
QDC. display/alter control registers .......... 44 265
QDD. display/alter console disk file .......... 44 340
QDG. display/alter general registers .......... 44 265
QDH. display/alter hex calculator ............ 44 260
QDK. display/alter storage key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 280
QDL. display/alter local storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 325
QDM. display/alter real storage 370 .......... 44 290
QDP. display/alter current PSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 275
QDS. display/alter block save area ........... 44 305
QDT, display/alter trace area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
QDTC. display/alter PSW and I/O trace
controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
QDTF. display/alter saved IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
QDTI. display/alter instruction counter trace .... 44 295
QDTM. display / alter I/O device status ........ 44 297
QDTP. display/alter PSW and I/O ........... 44 296
QDV. display/alter virtual storage 370!VSE ..... 44 285
QDW, display/alter SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 335
QDX, display/alter external registers .......... 44 329
QE. error logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
QEB. temperature logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565
QEC, PU logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 545
QECD. PU directory display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
QECS. PU logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 550
QED, diskette readability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580
QEI. cap initiator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 575
QEL. power logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560
QER. reference code logouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 570
QERD. reference code logout file ............ 44 570
QES. SPlogouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555
QESA, SP logout summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 555
QESO, SP detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 560
QET. RSF line error statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 566
QEW. saved screens
CE log (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 635
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 577
. layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 576
QF. configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 180
QFA, console color convergence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 187
QFB. Remote Operator Console Facility ........ 44 691
QFM. module transfer. . . . . . . . . .. 44 191 (or 44 190)
QFP. console test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 188
QFS. system configuration screen ............ 44 185
QFT. diskette build function ....•........... 44 695
QI ........ .
' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 607
QK. check control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 235
QL, program load screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . '..... 44 195
QU, mode/assist screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 195
QM, power !temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 585
QMA, analog sense display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
QMD, digital sensor display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
QMT. thermal sense display. . . . . ........... 44 600
(
screen (continued)
QMV. voltage tracking display .............. 44 600
QMW. partial power up and down screen ...... 44 585
QO. operation rate control ................. 44 245
QV, insert/extract screen .................. 44 345
QVA. insert/extract arrays ................. 44 350
QVAB. insert/ extract CSAR
backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 397 (or 44 400)
QVAC. insert/extract control store ........... 44380
QVAD, insert/extract channel data buffer ...... 44365
QVAF. insert/extract L1 directory ............ 44 419
QVAG. insert/extract L1 cache data .......... 44 425
QVAH, insert/extract channel DLAT .......... 44 409
QVAL. insert/extract local store ............. 44 355
QVAN, insert/extract channel control ......... 44 370
QVAP. insert/extract PU retry local store ....... 44360
QVAR. insert/extract cache retry data ......... 44 429
QVAS, insert/extract swap buffer ............ 44375
QVAT, insert/extract/trap/BAL stack ......... 44395
QVAU. insert/extract PU DLAT ............. 44 405
QVAY, insert/extract key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 415
QVB. insert/ extract cntl storage hardware ...... 44 453
QVC. insert/extract channel interface ......... 44 495
QVG. insert/extract set CSAR address ........ 44 535
QVH, insert/extract channel hardware ......... 44 463
QVI. insert/extract PU hardware ............. 44 449
QVK, insert/extract checks in system ......... 44 445
QVM, insert/extract main storage hardware ..... 44457
QVR. insert/extract scan rings .............. 44 515
QVS. insert/extract status scan ring .......... 44 435
QVT, insert/extract translate address ......... 44 525
QVX. insert/extract external registers ......... 44 501
QVW, insert/extract W command ........... 44 525
QVY, insert/extract clock scan rings .......... 44 519
ax, SP storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44175
translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 260
send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14807
service request and send service info . . . . . . . . . 14 807
service request IBM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14807
SD=. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40090
SEC. PRINTER ADDRESS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
second levels, HWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 305
SECOND SO: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ' ...... 40 090
security keylock (optional feature) ............ 44 071
select (display mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
selecting a manual function ................. 44 165
selection complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
send service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 14 807
sense
adapter state bits. CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 020
byte, CTCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 035
card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20365
card jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 370
command
display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
I/O (printer/keyboard mode) ............... 44 090
point listing (analog and digital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 225
point listing (control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 230
points,loqic board voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 241
(
sense I/O
display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 095
printer/keyboard mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
sensing. external control and (sensor) ......... 20 365
sensor entry to board 01 AB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 230
sensor external control and sensing. . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
sensors
air flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
air inlet/outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 245
analog (sense cardl .............•........ 20 365
digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 595
digital (sense card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
I PS voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 085
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 225
sequence
basic power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045
basic power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040
hardwire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 290
normal power-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 045
power-off, flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20400
power-off, logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 405
power-on, flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 390
power-on in CE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 040
power-on, logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 395
sequencing microcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 275
serial number card
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 170
jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 310
serial number (machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14015
serial numb ready to lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
series regulator monitoring ................. 20 365
serpentine connector (bus/tag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070
service aids
assignment, UCW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 035
analysis, problem (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14805
basic check light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14325
burst mode control diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 320
catalog number and desription .............. 14 210
CE log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 635
channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205
channel failure isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 224
channel local storage layout ................ 14 230
configuration record update ................ 14 015
connect external interrupt cable ............. 14 241
console functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 605
diskette EC update flowchart ............... 14075
diskette EC update procedure ............... 14075
diskette recovery procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 079
diskette data recovery procedure
(two damaged FUNCT diskettes) ........... 14081
EIA adapter configuration (RSF) '............. 14 555
EREP (failing storage address) .............. 14095
How to display stop words ................ 14 325
IFCC catalog numbers and descriptions ........ 14 223
I FCC save blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 220
IFCC trace example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14223
(
('
(-
(~
{
service aids (continued)
interface adapter card .. ' .................. 14 225
interface control check logout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 205
interface control check trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 223
ground paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 705
I/O and channel trace flowchart. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 615
I/O and channel trace procedure ............ 14615
limited channel logout bit definition ........... 14235
line plate configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 555
metering service procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120
module transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 025
MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14305
MSS logic reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 305
OCP to CTCA (interconnections) ............. 14317
OCP to HWS (interconnections) ............. 14 315
OCP to 4341 cable route .................. 14315
patch installation flowchart ................ 14605
patch installation and update procedure ........ 14 605
power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405
power ALD example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 405
problem analysis (PAl .................... 14 805
processing unit (intermittent or soft error) . . . . . . 14 115
remote data bank invoke procedure .......... 14 505
remote support facility .................... 14505
remote support facility diagnostics ........... 14515
remote support facility keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 505
RSF card and wiring configuration ........... 14 525
screen copy options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 625
serial number card ...................... 14 310
standard power interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 425
system configuration, (QFS) ................ 14 015
TIO single-cycle procedure ................ 14 225
UCW assignment ....................... 14 035
UCW assignment table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 051
service procedure, metering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 120
service request IBM data ................... 14 807
service request and send service information. . . . 14 807
set CSAR. address ........................ 44 535
setting. initial clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 030
shift
and shift lock .......................... 44 060
circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040
circuits data flow diagram ................. 34 040
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 040
signal and ground probe tip ................. 11 016
signal cable removal tool ................... 11 016
signal levels. board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... :-f4 111
signals, control .......................... 20 365
Sill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 155
single pin aligner ......................... 11 030
SIZE command .......................... 40 125
slot rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 095
Model Groups 1 and.2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
PN 5666420
13 of 16
46065
(
f'
soft stop required ........................ 44 159
solenoid and bail
adjustment ............................ 15 055
removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 060
replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 060
service check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 050
SP (support processorl
check register............ .- ............. 34 125
controls .............................. 44 ~40
detail log, I/O status field ................. 38020
detail log, PLOA field .................... 38 025
detail screen .......................... 44 560
display .......... ; ................... 20 060
logout summary ........................ 44 555
log outs .............................. 44 555
stand-alone dump support ....... , 44 608 (or 44 675)
storage (QX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 175
space bar .............................. 44 060
special conditions ........................ 44 210
special purpose tests
byte shifter ........................... 36 065
channel cable wrap test (CWT) .............. 36065
CMOE ............................... 36065
mark in test ........................... 36 065
special channel tests ......... " .......... 36 065
strg single-bit failure display ............... 36 065
SPI (standard power interface)
description ............................. 20 270
locations
gate 010 ........................... 10070
panel PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070
panel P1 through P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070
second level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 425
SPM/O ................................ 44 070
SP-purge all logs ......................... 44 555
standard power interface (SP!)
description ............................ 20 270
locations
gate 010 ........................... 10070
panel PO. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • • • • • • • • 10 070
panel P1 through P6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 070
second level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 425
start key ............................... 44 070
start problem analysis routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 806
STARTL not available ..................... 44 159
station, test ............................. 20385
statistics, line error (OET) .................. 44566
status
area codes
console functions. . . . . . . . . . . .. 44 191 (or 44 190)
service aids .......................... 14025
area, patch ............................ 44660
communications common adapter ............ 34 170
device cluster adapter .................... 34 145
diskette drive adapter .................... 34 135
field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 580
local channel adapter .................... 34 155
machine sensitive data ................... 14025
messages, machine ...................... 38 035
power / thermal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 060
word, channel ......................... 14215
stop words, MSS diagnostic tests ............
storage
addr and controls sect data flow diagram ......
address
backup register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
register 1 ...........................
register 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
addresses and controls section ..............
addressing and update registers .............
control storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data buffer address register ................
local ................................
single-bit failure display ..................
verification tests (Vn) .....................
store status (SAVE) (370 mode only) ..........
ST4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
summary log (OeCS), processing unit ..........
supply, ferroresonant power ................
supPort bus
adapter ..............................
adapter data flow diagram .................
support control logic adapter ................
support control logic adapter
data flow diagram .......................
support processor
bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
data flow diagram .......................
interrupts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
logs
SP detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP summary .........................
machine check .........................
registers .............................
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
suppress incorrect length indicator (Sill) .......
swap buffer .............................
switch
A.a/ A. dual case/mono case
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel checks (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
base color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
channel to channel ......................
intensity override .......................
lamp test (OCP) ........................
normal/test
3278 ........ '.' ....................
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power off (OCP) ........................
power on/IML (OCP) ....................
power on / off
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3279 ...............................
settings and adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unit emergency power off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36 030
switches
CE panel keys and ......................
OCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
pin numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power indicators and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
switching regulator voltage distribution . . . . . . . .
switching regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
symbolic I/O areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
symbols and punctuation marks ..............
sync registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
system
configuration (service aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
configuration screen (OFS) .................
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
function keys ............ , .............
is IMLed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
is IPLed ...............................
logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mode (Wn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
status display area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tests
online tests (OLTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ST4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4300-FRIEND for the 4341 ................
34 070
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
045
045
045
070
045
030
090
035
36 065
44 210
44 170
40 015
38045
20 050
34 160
34 160
34 165
34 165
34 115
34 115
34 120
38 015
38 015
20 045
34 125
34 115
40 155
34 060
test (continued)
20 305
44 035
44 035
10 080
20060
20 200
20 185
40 055
44 055
34 095
extended MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44115
MSMOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025
optional MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025
station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 385
verification (Vn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 210
TH SW TR104 01A-B2-BOARD ............... 20 060
thermal
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 365
PS105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250
PS205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
sense display .......... ;- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 600
TR102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250
TR104/TH10l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
TR201 /TR202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. 250
TR204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
TR206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
TR301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
thermals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 250
THIRD SO= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 090
TH101 therma1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20250
TIMEDELAV command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 125
timeout circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
timer, 30-second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
timers, hardwired sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 340
timing (ptr/kybd mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 090
timing verification test (TVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 015
TIO single-cycle procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14225
TI, instruction counter trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
title, erase? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 156
TOO, block command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 645
TODC /time-of-day-clock) equivalent ........... 38010
tool bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
tools (see 11 015 for list)
top card crossover connectors (TCC) . . . . . . . . . . 10 075
top card crossover connectors
01AB2 (peA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10075
top card crossover connectors
pin numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10075
TP, displaying the patch list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 655
TP, display PSW and I/O trace .............. 44 296
TPX, clear PSW and I/O trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
trace
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 295
array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 030
data camp not reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
I/O device status (OOTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
IFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14223
instruction counter (OOT!) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
PSW and I/O (OOTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 296
PSW and I/O controls (OOTC) .............. 44 296
saved.IFCC (OOTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 297
temperature
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
14 015
44 185
44 159
44 070
44 159
44 159
20055
44 195
44 170
44 135
40025
40 015
40035
T trace-stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 215
tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 060
table, UCW assignment .................... 14051
tag logic ..........•.................... 34080
tape load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 695
TC, display PSW and I/O trace controls ........ 44 296
TCM (testcase monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 045
TCM (testcase monitorl messages ............ 36 080
Tektronix*
P6106 probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
475/0M44 oscilloscope .................. 11 017
temperature
display screen (MT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20095
log outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 565
measurement ........................... 20 380
trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 055
trace (EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 135
test
basic .......... , ..................... 36 025
case monitor (TCM) ..................... 36 045
console, pattern (OFP) .................... 44 188
clock adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 050
diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 025
EIA adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14515
44045
44 051
44 240
44 051
44 035
44 051
44 035
44045
44051
44 035
44 035
44 045
44 051
12 066
10 080
* Trademark of Tek.tronix inc.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 319831 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
r)
~
......
(.~\
\. )
o o
()
(.'"
\..)
t
I
I
I
, ()
()
0
()
"
0
,r)
",-'
PN 56664~Q
14 (tf 16
0 0 0 0
(
46070
(
~
./
()
' •
.>-
0
.JI
(
(-
(
TRACE command ... , .....................
tracking error, vortage .....................
transfer halted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
transferring control from one
block to another ........................
transferring patches (K patchname) ...........
translate address any V screen ...............
translation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
trap/branch and link stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
troubleshooting FDS cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR101 removal/replacement.................
TR102 removal/replacement.................
TR104 removal/replacement.................
TR104/TH101 thermal .....................
TR201 removal/replacement.................
TR201/TR202 thermal ......... ' ............
TR202 removal/replacement.................
TR204 removal/replacement .................
TR206 removal/replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR216 removal/replacement (sw reg) ..........
TR301 removal/replacement.................
TR102 thermal ...........................
TR204 thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TR206 thermal ...........................
TR301 thermal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TS, save IFCC ...........................
TSX, clear saved IFCC .....................
TVT, timing verification test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
typematic keys' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
type parameters .........................
40 125
20 110
44 159
44 650
44 660
44 525
44 260
34 030
20 180
12 055
12 100
12050
20250
12 067
20250
12 075
12 100
12 110
12 081
12 090
20250
20 250
20 250
20 250
44 297
44 297
13 015
44 055
44 225
U (PU logs) ................. ~ ........... 44 240
UCW (unit control word)
assignment (service aid) ................... 14035
assignment table ....................... 14051
UEPO switch reset ....................... 20340
unit
control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 035
. emergency power-off switch ............... 10080
emergency power-off .................... 20 045
update circuits +2/4 and +8/16 .............. 34045
update over 1024 UCWs.................... 44 159
update procedure
diskette EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 075
UCW assignment ....................... 14035
usage conflict . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 159
00
(
('
C'
f
[1]
lYl
V EMC ABC logs ........................ 44240
verification tests (Vn) ..................... 44 210
vertical positioning keys ................... 44 060
voltage
adjustments
IPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20215
PS210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12066
PS211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12066
PS212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12066
PS213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 065
switching regulators .................... 20 215
distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 155
measurement points, IPS .................. 20215
monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 370
pins
board 03AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 213
board A1 and B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205
board A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 210
board B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 211
board C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 212
board 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 205
sense points, logic board .................. 20 241
sensors, IPS........................... 20085
track chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105
tracking display ........................ 44 600
tracking error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 105
tracking screen (MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 100
volume control, audible alarm
3278 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44045
3279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44051
V /R field (S/370 mode only) ................. 44 230
(
W command invoke procedure ............... 44 521
W CSWs ...... '......................... 44 225
W EMC 0 logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 240
W trace-wrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 220
wait indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 035
waiting for an address match to occur ......... 44 650
WAIT command ......................... 40 125
WCC=: ........................ '......... 40090
wiring configuration, RSF card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 335
wiring diagrams (RSF)
EIA adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14555
line plate (external modem) ................ 14 545
protective coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 565
38LS/Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14535
38LS/(U.SA and Canada) ................ 14525
wng :check error ......................... 44 159
word, channel status ...................... 14215
wrap, channel wrap test (CWT) .............. 36071
wrap test cable, channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 015
write
ACR (ptr/kybd mode) .................... 44 090
command (MSS) ........................ 20 350
ptr/kybd mode ......................... 44 090
X channel-data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44230
X of part of shared range ................... 44 159
XFER blockname ......................... 44 650
V sync pulse ............................ 44 220
rn
Z (return to prog sys)
from K screen ......................... 44 240
from 0 screen ......................... 44 250
01 A gate-card layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 105
03AA1 voltage pins ....................... 20213
2210 multimeter, Digitec** .................. 11 015
30-second timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3278 Model 2A indicators ...................
3278 Model 2A operator controls .............
3278-2A Display Console
display mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
manual mode ........................
ptr/kybd mode .......................
3279 Color Display Console .................
3279 indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3287 audible alarm ........................
3287 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38LS
modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wiring and configuration (RSF) ..............
20 055
44 050
44 045
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
095
095
085
051
052
075
075
34 170
14 525
** Trademark of United System Corp.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
PN 5666420
15 of 16
46075
(
4300-FRIEND
advanced capabilities .. , .................. 40 055
CCW commands ..............•........ 40 135
CCW flags ............. -............... 40 155
command modifiers ..................... 40 155
commands ............................ 40105
how to use ........................... 40 040
information requested by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 085
loading from diskette .................... 40 040
messages ............................ 40 095
single CCW chain ....................... 40 045
special storage areas ..................... 40 075
unit control block (UCS) .................. 40 075
4341
.
configurations .........................
diagnostic test summarY ..................
hardware EC level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
model differences .......................
power logic level .......................
processor data flow .....................
processor data flow diagram ...............
processor logs summary ..................
processor overview
32 020
36 025
14 015
32 015
14015
43 010
34 015
38 010
32 01 a
32 015
32 01 a
32 020
32 020
32 010
32 020
14 105
475/DM44, Tektronix· oscilloscope ........... 11 017
block diagram . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • • . . . . . . . .
highlights . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
modes of operation. . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
processor configuration . . . . . . . . • . . . . • . . . .
programming support . . • • . . . . • . . . . • . . . . .
standard features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01 A gate-card layout. • . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
53FD access and return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 025
* Trademark of Tektronix inc.
Model Groups 1 and 2
EC 379837 28Jun82
EC 379839 22Nov82
,c-",
~.~
",y!
'\...)
.r'~
\",
;)
~.
'\.jJ
.I""~
(-)
\.
\.
.
C)
f-"I
~jJ
(co")
\. .
.y
0 C)
(~
\. ,J
C)
()
.~
\. J
.~
\
n
()
(~
'
/'
n
\.. /
r"'1
() ~.JV
0,
\,yl
()
"'-..
PN 5666420
16 of 16
C~
(11
",j
0
46080
(~
(j
"'-.J
0"'
..
..
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:10:05 20:25:10-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:10:05 20:47:33-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:10:05 20:47:33-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:7738e4a7-59a2-864e-ab2d-540346c23404 Instance ID : uuid:893e2aae-a6a1-8d41-9ef5-0684a28e616b Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 204EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools